NISSAN 2022 Armada Car Owner's Manual

Owner's Manual for NISSAN models including: 2022, Armada, Car, 2022 Armada Car

OWNER'S MANUAL AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

nissan, armada, 2022, owner manual, owner guide, owner’s manual, pdf, vehicle manual, service, maintenance

nissan;, armada;, 2022;, owner, manual;, owner, guide;, owner’s, manual;, pdf;, vehicle, manual;, service;, maintenance

OWNER'S MANUAL AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

NISSAN Consumer Affairs. See the NISSAN. CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM page in this. Owner's Manual for contact information. IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT.

OWNER'S MANUAL AND MAINTENANCE ... - Dealer E Process

2022 ARMADA. OWNER'S MANUAL ... tions in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. ... or revise this manual to provide owners.

File Info : application/pdf, 604 Pages, 2.96MB

JavaScript is disabled. Open the PDF or Download.

2022-armada

2022 ARMADA
OWNER'S MANUAL and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

safety features to all occupants of the vehicle.
. ALWAYS review this Owner's Manual for important safety information.
ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVING
This vehicle will handle and maneuver differently from an ordinary passenger car because it has a higher center of gravity for off-road use. As with other vehicles with features of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident. Be sure to read "On-pavement and off-road driving precautions", "Avoiding collision and rollover" and "Driving safety precautions" in the "5. Starting and driving" section of this manual.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle should not be modified. Modification could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from modification will not be covered under the NISSAN warranties.
WARNING
Installing an aftermarket On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses the port during normal driving, for example remote insurance company monitoring, remote vehicle diagnostics, telematics or engine reprogramming, may cause interference or damage to vehicle systems. We do not recommend or endorse the use of any aftermarket OBD plug-in devices, unless specifically approved by NISSAN. The vehicle warranty may not cover damage caused by any aftermarket plug-in device.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL
This manual includes information for all features and equipment available on this model. Features and equipment in your vehicle may vary depending on model, trim level, options selected, order, date of production, region or availability. Therefore, you may find information about features or equipment that are not included or installed on your vehicle.
All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications, performance, design or component suppliers without notice and without obligation. From time to time, NISSAN may update or revise this manual to provide owners with the most accurate information currently available. Please carefully read and retain with this manual all revision updates sent to you by NISSAN to ensure you have access to accurate and up-todate information regarding your vehicle. Current versions of vehicle Owner's Manuals and any updates can also be found in the Owner section of the NISSAN website at https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/navigation/manualsGuide. If you have questions concerning any information in your Owner's Manual, contact

NISSAN Consumer Affairs. See the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM page in this Owner's Manual for contact information.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL
You will see various symbols in this manual. They are used in the following ways:
WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed precisely.
CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moderate personal injury or damage to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed carefully.

SIC0697
If you see the symbol above, it means "Do not do this" or "Do not let this happen".
If you see a symbol similar to those above in an illustration, it means the arrow points to the front of the vehicle.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to those above indicate movement or action.

those above call attention to an item in the illustration.
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVISORY
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries, may contain perchlorate material. The following advisory is provided: "Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca. gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate."
© 2021 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD.
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner's Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

NISSAN CARES ...

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to provide NISSAN directly with comments or questions, please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using our toll-free number:
For U.S. customers 1-800-NISSAN-1 (1-800-647-7261)
For Canadian customers 1-800-387-0122
The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the following information:
. Your name, address, and telephone number
. Vehicle identification number (attached to the top of the instrument panel on the driver's side)

You can write to NISSAN with the information at:
For U.S. customers Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 685003 Franklin, TN 37068-5003 or via e-mail at: nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa. com
For Canadian customers Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5 or via e-mail at: information.centre@nissancanada.com

If you prefer, visit us at:
www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or
www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)
We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

. Date of purchase . Current odometer reading . Your NISSAN dealer's name . Your comments or questions OR

Table of Contents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Do-it-yourself

Maintenance and schedules

Technical and consumer information

Index

0 Illustrated table of contents

Seats, seat belts and Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ..................................................................................... 0-2 Exterior front .................................................................................... 0-3 Exterior rear ...................................................................................... 0-4 Passenger compartment ....................................................... 0-5 Cockpit .................................................................................................. 0-6

Instrument panel ......................................................................... 0-7 Meters and gauges .................................................................... 0-8 Engine compartment ............................................................... 0-9
VK56VD engine ..................................................................... 0-9 Warning and indicator lights ........................................... 0-10

SEATS, SEAT BELTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

9. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system (P.1-35)
10. Armrest (2nd row seat) (P.1-11)
11. 2nd row seats (P.1-5) -- Child restraints (P.1-32)
12. Seat belt pretensioner (P.1-72)
13. Front armrest (P.1-11)
14. Front seats (P.1-4)
-- Occupant classification sensors (weight sensors) (P.1-61)
15. Front passenger air bag status light (P.1-63)
16. Driver and front passenger supplemental knee air bags (P.1-54)

1. Seat belt for 3rd row center seat (P.1-26) 2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bags (P.1-54) 3. Head Restraints (P.1-15)
-- Front-seat Active Head Restraints (P.1-19) 4. Seat belts (P.1-20)
0-2 Illustrated table of contents

WAA0284X
5. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags (P.1-54)
6. Supplemental front-impact air bags (P.1-54)
7. Child restraint anchor points (for top tether strap child restraint) (P.1-46, P.1-50)
8. 3rd row seats (P.1-7) -- Child restraints (P.1-32)

EXTERIOR FRONT

1. Hood (P.3-21) 2. Windshield wiper and washer
-- Switch operation (P.2-42) -- Window washer fluid (P.8-10) -- Windshield wiper deicer (if so equipped) (P.2-46) 3. Moonroof (if so equipped) (P.2-78)

WAA0285X
4. Power windows (P.2-75) 5. Roof rack (if so equipped) (P.2-74) 6. Sonar sensors
-- Camera aiding sonar function (models with Intelligent Around View® Monitor) (P.4-26) -- Sonar system (if so equipped) (P.5-136)

7. Towing hook (P.6-19) 8. Front view camera (if so equipped) (P.4-12) 9. Fog light (if so equipped) (P.2-54) 10. Headlights and turn signal lights (P.2-46) 11. Tires
-- Wheel and tires (P.8-28, P.10-9) -- Flat tire (P.6-3) -- Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (P.2-16, P.5-5) 12. Outside mirrors (P.3-38) -- Side view camera (P.4-12) -- Welcome light (if so equipped) (P.2-80) 13. Side turn signal lights (if so equipped) (P.8-24) 14. Doors -- Keys (P.3-2) -- Door locks (P.3-4) -- Intelligent Key system (P.3-7) -- Remote keyless entry system (P.3-15) -- Remote engine start (if so equipped) (P.3-19) 15. Child safety rear door locks (P.3-6)
Illustrated table of contents 0-3

EXTERIOR REAR

-- Window washer fluid (P.8-10) 11. Spare tire (under the vehicle) (P.6-3) 12. Sonar sensors
-- Camera aiding sonar function (models with Intelligent Around View® Monitor) (P.4-26)
-- Intelligent Back-up Intervention (I-BI) (if so equipped) (P.5-63)
-- Sonar system (if so equipped) (P.5-136) 13. Towing hook (P.6-19) 14. Trailer hitch (P.10-24)

1. Fuel-filler door (P.3-26) -- Fuel information (P.10-4)
2. Antenna (P.4-43) 3. Rear combination light (P.8-24) 4. Rear window defroster (P.2-45) 5. Satellite antenna (P.4-44) 6. Rear view camera (P.4-4, P.4-12)
0-4 Illustrated table of contents

WAA0286X
7. Intelligent Rear View Mirror camera (if so equipped) (P.3-31)
8. High-mounted stop light (P.8-24) 9. Liftgate (P.3-22)
-- Intelligent Key system (P.3-7) 10. Rear window wiper and washer
-- Switch operation (P.2-45)

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
1. Cargo light (P.2-83) 2. Cup holders (3rd row seat) (P.2-70) 3. Rear ventilators (P.4-36) 4. Coat hooks (P.2-73) 5. Rear personal lights (P.2-81) 6. Door armrest
-- Power window controls (P.2-75)

WAA0287X
-- Power door lock switch (P.3-5) -- Outside mirror remote control switch (driver's side) (P.3-38) 7. Memory seat switch (if so equipped) (P.3-40) 8. Sun visors (P.3-29) 9. Map lights (P.2-81)

10. Moonroof switch (if so equipped) (P.2-78) 11. Emergency Call (SOS) button (if so
equipped) (P.2-67) 12. Sunglasses holder (P.2-71) 13. Inside mirror (P.3-30)
-- Intelligent Rear View Mirror (if so equipped) (P.3-31) -- HomeLink® universal transceiver (if so equipped) (P.2-83, P.2-87) 14. Cargo area -- Power outlet (P.2-62) -- Cargo floor box (P.2-74) -- Luggage hooks (P.2-73) -- Jacking tools (P.6-5) 15. Rear console box (if so equipped) (P.2-72) -- Cup holders (2nd row seat) (P.2-69) -- Pocket (P.2-72) 16. Cup holders (2nd row seat) (if so equipped) (P.2-69) 17. Rear Seat Infotainment (RSI) system (if so equipped) (P.4-45) 18. Console box (P.2-72) -- Power outlet (P.2-62) -- USB charging connector (P.2-64) -- Rear Media Interface -- Rear automatic air conditioning system (if so equipped) (P.4-40) 19. Front cup holders (P.2-69)
Illustrated table of contents 0-5

COCKPIT

1. Power liftgate switch (if so equipped) (P.3-22)
2. Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) (P.2-54)
3. Instrument brightness control switch (P.2-53)
4. TRIP/RESET switch for twin trip odometer (P.2-7)
0-6 Illustrated table of contents

WAA0288X
5. Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch -- Headlight (P.2-47) -- Turn signal (P.2-53) -- Fog light (if so equipped) (P.2-54)
6. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side) -- Audio control steering switch (See

NissanConnect® Owner's Manual)
-- Vehicle information display control (P.2-21)
-- Trip computer switch (P.2-37)
7. Wiper and washer switch (P.2-42)
8. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right side)
-- Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system (P.5-74)
-- Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) system (P.5-31)
-- Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (IBSI) system (P.5-46)
-- Hands-Free Phone System switch (See NissanConnect® Owner's Manual)/Voice Recognition system switch (See NissanConnect® Owner's Manual)
9. Shift lever (P.5-17)
10. Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) shift switch (if so equipped) (P.5-124)/SNOW mode switch (P.2-59)/TOW MODE switch (P.2-59)/Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch (P.5-144)
11. Display Commander (See NissanConnect® Owner's Manual)
12. Power liftgate main switch (if so equipped) (P.3-22)
13. Warning systems switch (if so equipped) (P.2-58)
-- Lane Departure Warning (LDW) (P.5-26)
-- Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (P.5-38)
14. Electric tilting/telescopic steering wheel switch (P.3-29)

INSTRUMENT PANEL

1. Side ventilator (P.4-36)
2. Meters and gauges (P.2-6)
3. Center ventilator (P.4-36)
4. Audio system (See NissanConnect® Owner's Manual)
5. Touch screen display (See NissanConnect® Owner's Manual)

WAA0289X
-- Intelligent Around View® Monitor (if so equipped) (P.4-12) -- RearView Monitor (if so equipped) (P.4-4) -- Navigation system (if so equipped) (See NissanConnect® Owner's Manual) 6. Front passenger air bag status light (P.1-63)

7. Hazard warning flasher switch (P.6-2) 8. Defroster switch (P.2-45)/Deicer switch (if
so equipped) (P.2-46) 9. Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P.1-54) 10. Fuse box (P.8-20) 11. Parking brake (P.5-22) 12. Hood release handle (P.3-21) 13. Steering wheel
-- Horn (P.2-55) -- Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-54) -- Power steering (P.5-141) 14. Driver supplemental knee air bag (P.1-54) 15. Push-button ignition switch (P.5-13) 16. Climate controlled seat switch (if so equipped) (P.2-57)/Heated seat switch (if so equipped) (P.2-55) 17. Wireless charger (if so equipped) (P.2-65) 18. Trailer Brake Controller Unit (TBCU) (if so equipped) (P.2-60) 19. USB connection ports (See NissanConnect® Owner's Manual) 20. Power outlet (P.2-62) 21. Cup holder (P.2-69) 22. Heater and air conditioner (P.4-37) 23. Glove box (P.2-71) 24. Front passenger supplemental knee air bag (P.1-54)
Illustrated table of contents 0-7

METERS AND GAUGES

1. Tachometer (P.2-8) 2. Warning and indicator lights (P.2-11) 3. Vehicle information display (P.2-20)/Od-
ometer/twin trip odometer (P.2-7) 4. Speedometer (P.2-7) 5. Engine coolant temperature gauge (P.2-8) 6. Fuel gauge (P.2-9)
0-8 Illustrated table of contents

WAA0290X

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

VK56VD ENGINE
1. Window washer fluid reservoir (P.8-10) 2. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-18) 3. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-6) 4. Power steering fluid reservoir (P.8-8) 5. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-6) 6. Brake fluid reservoir (P.8-9)

JVC0965X
7. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-18) 8. Battery (P.8-11) 9. Radiator filler cap (P.8-4) 10. Engine coolant reservoir (P.8-4) 11. Drive belts (P.8-13) 12. Air cleaner (P.8-15)

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

Red light

Name

Automatic Transmission (AT) oil temperature warning light

Automatic Transmission (AT) park warning light

Page 2-12 2-12

Brake warning light

2-12

Charge warning light

2-13

Engine oil pressure warning light

2-13

Master warning light

2-14

Seat belt warning light

2-14

Security indicator light
Supplemental air bag warning light

2-14 2-14

Yellow light

Name

Page

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light

2-15

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system warning light
Automatic Transmission (AT) check warning light
Check suspension indicator light
Front passenger air bag status light
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) warning light (4WD models)
Low tire pressure warning light
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

2-15
2-15 2-15 2-15 2-16 2-16 2-18

Master warning light

2-18

Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system warning light
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator light
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning light

2-18 2-19 2-19

Other light

Name
Exterior light indicator
Front fog light indicator light (if so equipped) High beam assist indicator light High beam indicator light

Page 2-19 2-19 2-19 2-19

TOW mode indicator light
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

2-19 2-19

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

1 Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Seats ....................................................................................................... 1-3 Front seats .................................................................................. 1-4 2nd row seats .......................................................................... 1-5 3rd row seats ........................................................................... 1-7 Armrest ....................................................................................... 1-11 Flexible seating ..................................................................... 1-12
Head restraints/headrests ................................................. 1-15 Adjustable head restraint/headrest components ............................. 1-16 Non-adjustable head restraint/headrest components ............................. 1-16 Remove ....................................................................................... 1-17 Install ............................................................................................. 1-17 Adjust ............................................................................................ 1-18 Front-seat Active Head Restraint .......................... 1-19
Seat belts ......................................................................................... 1-20 Precautions on seat belt usage .............................. 1-20 Pregnant women ................................................................ 1-22 Injured persons ..................................................................... 1-22 Three-point type seat belt .......................................... 1-22 Seat belt extenders ........................................................... 1-29 Seat belt maintenance ................................................... 1-29
Child safety ..................................................................................... 1-30 Infants .......................................................................................... 1-31 Small children ........................................................................ 1-31

Larger children ................................................................... 1-31
Child restraints ........................................................................... 1-32
Precautions on child restraints ............................. 1-33
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) system ................................................................ 1-35
Top tether strap child restraint ............................ 1-37
Rear-facing child restraint installation using LATCH ......................................................................... 1-38
Rear-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts ....................................................................... 1-40
Forward-facing child restraint installation using LATCH ......................................................................... 1-43
Forward-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts ........................................................ 1-46
Booster seats ....................................................................... 1-51
Supplemental restraint system ..................................... 1-54
Precautions on supplemental restraint system ................................................................ 1-54
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System (front seats) ........................................................................... 1-61
Driver and front passenger supplemental knee air bag .......................................................................... 1-69
Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag and roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag systems .............................. 1-71

Seat belts with pretensioners (front and second row outboard seats) ..................................... 1-72
Supplemental air bag warning labels ................ 1-73

Supplemental air bag warning light ................. 1-74 Repair and replacement procedure .................. 1-75

SEATS
WARNING
. Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.
. For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit

SSS0133
well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly. See "Precautions on seat belt usage" (P.1-20).
. After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked.
. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.

. To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.
. The seatback should not be reclined any more than needed for comfort. Seat belts are most effective when the passenger sits well back and straight up in the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and being injured is increased.

Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

FRONT SEATS
Front power seat adjustment
Operating tips:
. The power seat motor has an autoreset overload protection circuit. If the motor stops during operation, wait 30 seconds, then reactivate the switch.
. Do not operate the power seat switch for a long period of time when the engine is off. This will discharge the battery.
See "Memory seat" (P.3-40) for the seat position memory function.

CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be sure not to contact any moving parts to avoid possible injuries and/ or damages.

Forward and backward:
Moving the switch forward or backward will slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position.
Reclining:
Move the recline switch backward until the desired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback forward again, move the switch
forward.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. (See "Precautions on seat belt usage" (P.1-20).) Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow

1-4 Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS1051
occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the P (Park) position.

2ND ROW SEATS

SSS1052
Seat lifter: 1. Pull up or push down the adjusting
switch to adjust the seat height until the desired position is achieved.
2. Tilt up or down the adjusting switch to adjust the front angle of the seat until the desired position is achieved (for driver's seat).

SSS1053
Lumbar support: The lumbar support feature provides lower back support to the occupants. Push the front or back end of the switch to adjust the seatback lumbar area.

WARNING
. Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seat when it is in the fold-down position. Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury in an accident or sudden stop.
. When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.
. Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

Captain's seat

SSS1081

Reclining
Pull the reclining lever and position the seatback at the desired angle. Release the reclining lever after positioning the seat at the desired angle.
To return the seatback, pull the lever.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes to help obtain proper seat belt fit. (See "Precautions on seat belt usage" (P.120).) The seatback may also be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is parked.
WARNING

Bench seat

SSS1065

. For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor and

1-6 Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

adjust the seat belt properly. See "Precautions on seat belt usage" (P.1-20). . After adjustment, check to be sure the seat is securely locked.
Entry to 3rd row seat
CAUTION
. Do not drive with the 2nd row seat tipped up.
. Be careful not to allow the 2nd row seat to pinch, hit any part of your body or other people when operating the 2nd row seat. Make sure the seat path is clear of all objects before moving the seat.
The 2nd row seat can be tipped forward for easy entry to or exit from the 3rd row seat.

and fold the seatback forward onto the seat base. Then lift up on the seat base and tip it forward.

SSS1066
To enter the 3rd row seat, pull the lever or located on the 2nd row seat and fold the seatback forward at an angle over the seat base. Then lift up the seat base and tip the 2nd row seat forward . This will release the back of the seat so it may be tipped forward.
To exit the 3rd row seat, pull the lever or

SSS1068
3RD ROW SEATS
Manual seat adjustment (if so equipped)
Reclining: Pull the strap and position the seatback at the desired angle. Release the strap after positioning the seat at the desired angle.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes to help obtain proper seat belt fit. (See "Precautions on child restraints" (P.133).) The seatback may also be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is parked.
Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

WARNING

. Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.
. For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly. See "Precautions on seat belt usage" (P.1-20).
. After adjustment, check to be sure the seat is securely locked.

SSS1069
Folding: Pull the strap and fold the seatback. Return the seatback until it securely locks in position.
WARNING
. Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the third row seat when it is in the fold-down position. Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury in an accident or sudden stop.

1-8 Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

. Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
. When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

. Disconnect and secure the center seat belt and tongues into the retractor base. See "3rd row center seat belt" (P.1-26).
-- Always reconnect the center seat belt when the seat is returned to the upright position
. Make sure that there are no objects on the seatback cushion.

SSS1116
Power seat adjustment (if so equipped)
The 3rd row power folding seat controls are located behind the 2nd row seat (both the driver's and front passenger's side) on the 3rd row cup holder console . There are also controls located on the rear quarter trim panel behind the 3rd row seats (passenger's side) .
Before operating the 3rd row seats:
. Make sure the 2nd row seatback is not reclined.
. Lower the 3rd row head restraint to the full down position.

SSS1095
Reclining: Push and hold the rear side of the switch
beside the 3rd row cup holders until the desired seatback angle (up to 20 degrees) is obtained. To move the seatback forward again, push and hold the front side of the switch until the desired angle is obtained.
WARNING
. After adjustment, check to be sure the seat is securely locked.
. Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined.
Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries. . For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly. See "Precautions on seat belt usage" (P.1-20).
SSS1118
Folding: Push the front side of the switch located on the passenger side of the cargo room. The corresponding seatback (R: right side, L: left side) will be folded down automatically. Push the rear side of the switch . The
1-10 Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

seatback will be returned automatically.
A beep sounds once and the seatback will be folded down/returned automatically. A beep sounds twice when the seatback is fully folded down/returned to the seating position.
If the control unit detects any obstacles or malfunctions while in the power operation, a beep sounds for 4 seconds and seatback will return to the folded/seating position automatically. Check if there are any obstacles caught that prevent seats from folding/returning. Have the system checked if the beep sounds even though any obstacles are not caught, or the seatback is not moved even though the switch is pushed. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
NOTE: . Operating the power folding seats
can discharge the vehicle battery if the engine is not running.
. If the third row seat does not completely fold or return, move the seatback fully backward once. Push the rear side of the switch , then the seatback will be returned to the seating position. Push the rear side of the switch again, then the seatback will be moved to fully backward position.

CAUTION
. When operating the rear power seatback return, make sure that the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the P (Park) position.
. The auto reverse function may not operate depending on the shape or position of obstacles.
WARNING
. Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seat when it is in the fold-down position. Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury in an accident or sudden stop.
. When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

. Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
. Do not fold down the rear seats when occupants are in the rear seat area or any cargo is on the rear seats.
WAB0179X
ARMREST
Front seats
The console box lid can be used as an armrest.

Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

FLEXIBLE SEATING

WARNING

. Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seats when they are in the fold-down position. In a collision, people riding in these areas without proper restraints are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

SSS1070
2nd row seat (if so equipped)
Pull and draw the armrest forward until it is horizontal.

. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
. Do not fold down the rear seats when occupants are in the rear seat area or any cargo is on the rear seats.

. Head restraints should be adjusted properly as they may provide significant protection against injury in an accident. Always replace and adjust them properly if they have been removed for any reason.

. If the head restraints are removed for any reason, they should be securely stored to pre-

1-12 Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

vent them from causing injury to passengers or damage to the vehicle in case of sudden braking or an accident.
. When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.
. Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
. When folding the bench seat seatback down for maximum storage, make sure the seat base is in the latched position by rocking the seat base. If the seat base is not properly secured, cargo stored on top of a folded seatback may become a projectile causing personal injury or vehicle damage.

CAUTION

. When folding the 2nd row seat for maximum cargo hauling, be sure that cargo does not contact the center console of the captain's seat (if so equipped) to avoid possible damage to the console.
. When folding or returning the seat(s) to the upright position, to avoid injury to yourself and others:
-- Make sure that the seat path is clear before moving the seat.
-- Be careful not to allow hands or feet to get caught or pinched in the seat.
Stowing 2nd and 3rd row seats
To stow 2nd and 3rd row seats for maximum cargo capacity:

SSS1119
1. Push and hold the corresponding switch located on the instrument panel below the audio system. The seatback will fold down and tip forward. See "Entry to 3rd row seat" (P.16).

SSS1120
2. Push the folded seat down until it locks in position.

Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

5. Return the 2nd row seat to a seating position by raising the 2nd row seatbacks to an upright position. Make sure the seatback is locked in position.

CAUTION

SSS1121
3. Power operation (if so equipped): Fold the 3rd row seat flat using the switches located in the cargo area. See "Power seat adjustment" (P.1-9).
Manual operation (if so equipped): Fold the 3rd row seat flat using the strap located on the 3rd row seatbacks. See "Manual seat adjustment" (P.1-7).
4. Return 3rd row seats to seating positions by raising the 3rd row seatbacks to an upright position using the switches or straps. Make sure the seatback is locked in position. See "Power seat adjustment" (P.1-9) or "Manual seat adjustment" (P.1-7).

When folding the 2nd row seat for maximum cargo hauling, be sure that cargo does not contact the center console of the captain's seat (if so equipped) to avoid possible damage to the console.

1-14 Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS

WARNING
Head restraint/headrest supplement the other vehicle safety systems. They may provide additional protection against injury in certain rear end collisions. Adjustable head restraints/headrests must be adjusted properly, as specified in this section. Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat. Do not attach anything to the head restraint/headrest stalks or remove the head restraint/headrest. Do not use the seat if the head restraint/headrest has been removed. If the head restraint/ headrest was removed, reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint/ headrest before an occupant uses the seating position. Failure to follow these instructions can reduce the effectiveness of the head restraint/ headrest. This may increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision.

JVR0403X

The illustration shows the seating positions equipped with head restraint/headrest.
Indicates the seating position is equipped with a head restraint.
Indicates the seating position is equipped with a headrest.
. Your vehicle is equipped with a head restraint/headrest that may be integrated, adjustable or non-adjustable.
. Adjustable head restraints/headrests have multiple notches along the stalk to lock them in a desired adjustment position.

. The non-adjustable head restraints/ headrests have a single locking notch to secure them to the seat frame.
. Proper Adjustment:
-- For the adjustable type, align the head restraint/headrest so the center of your ear is approximately level with the center of the head restraint/headrest.
-- If your ear position is still higher than the recommended alignment, place the head restraint/headrest at the highest position.
. If the head restraint/headrest has been removed, ensure that it is reinstalled and locked in place before

Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

riding in that designated seating position.

SSS0992
ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/ HEADREST COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint/headrest 2. Multiple notches 3. Lock knob 4. Stalks

JVR0203X
NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/HEADREST COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint/headrest 2. Single notch 3. Lock knob 4. Stalks

1-16 Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2. Push and hold the lock knob.
3. Remove the head restraint/headrest from the seat.
4. Store the head restraint/headrest properly in a secure place so it is not loose in the vehicle.
5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before an occupant uses the seating position.

REMOVE

SSS1037

CAUTION
The front head restraints with a rear display are not designed to be pulled out. The rear display may be damaged if the head restraint is forcibly pulled out.
Use the following procedure to remove the head restraint/headrest. 1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to
the highest position.

SSS0996
INSTALL
1. Align the head restraint/headrest stalks with the holes in the seat. Make sure that the head restraint/headrest is facing the correct direction. The stalk with the adjustment notch must be installed in the hole with the lock knob .
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint/headrest down.
3. Properly adjust the head restraint/ headrest before an occupant uses the seating position.
Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

SSS0997
ADJUST
For adjustable head restraint/headrest
Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the center is level with the center of your ears. If your ear position is still higher than the recommended alignment, place the head restraint/headrest at the highest position.

JVR0259X
For non-adjustable head restraint/ headrest
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated seating position.

SSS1035
Raise
To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it up. Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated seating position.

1-18 Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

certain rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head restraints return to their original position.
Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly as described earlier in this section.

SSS1036
Lower
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint/headrest down.
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated seating position.

SSS0508
FRONT-SEAT ACTIVE HEAD RESTRAINT
The Active Head Restraint moves forward utilizing the force that the seatback receives from the occupant in a rear-end collision. The movement of the head restraint helps support the occupant's head by reducing its backward movement and helping absorb some of the forces that may lead to whiplash-type injuries.
Active Head Restraints are effective for collisions at low to medium speeds in which it is said that whiplash injury occurs most.
Active Head Restraints operate only in
Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

SEAT BELTS
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly adjusted, and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position includes a supplemental air bag. Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories specify that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven.
1-20 Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0136A SSS0134A

WARNING
. Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Children should be properly restrained in the rear seat and, if appropriate, in a child restraint.
. The seat belt should be properly adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly.
. Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never put the belt behind your back, under your arm or across your neck. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
. Position the lap belt as low and snug as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident.

. Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle.
. Do not wear the seat belt inside out or twisted. Doing so may reduce its effectiveness.
. Do not allow more than one person to use the same seat belt.
. Never carry more people in the vehicle than there are seat belts.
. If the seat belt warning light glows continuously while the ignition is turned ON with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened, it may indicate a malfunction in the system. Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
. No changes should be made to the seat belt system. For example, do not modify the seat belt, add material or install devices that may change the seat belt routing or tension. Doing so may affect the operation of the seat belt system. Modifying or tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.

. Once a seat belt pretensioner has activated, it cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the retractor. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
. All seat belt assemblies, including retractors and attaching hardware, should be inspected after any collision. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
. All child restraints and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. Always follow the restraint manufacturer's inspection instructions and replacement recommendations. The child restraints should be replaced if they are damaged.

Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

SSS0016

PREGNANT WOMEN
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug, and always position the lap belt as low as possible around the hips, not the waist, and place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific recommendations.
INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts, depending on the injury. Check with your doctor for specific recommendations.
THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WARNING

SSS0014

. Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times.
. Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under

1-22 Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.
. For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly.

tor tongue may also be released. Release the connector tongue by inserting a suitable tool (such as a key) into the connector buckle . If the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release the child by cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool (such as a knife or scissors) to release the seat belt.

JVR0183X
WARNING
Do not allow children to play with the seat belts. Most seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes wrapped around a child's neck with the ALR mode activated, the child can be seriously injured or killed if the seat belt retracts and becomes tight. This can occur even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release the child. For the center of the 3rd row bench seat, the connec-

SSS0292
Fastening the seat belts
1. Adjust the seat. (See "Seats" (P.1-3).)
2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. . The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling motion permits the belt to move, and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat. . If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its fully retracted position, firmly pull the belt and release it. Then smoothly pull the belt out of
Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

the retractor.

SSS0290

1-24

3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug on the hips as shown.
4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and across your chest.
The three-point type seat belts have two modes of operation:
. Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) . Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow the driver and passengers some freedom of movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during
Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

impacts.
The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child restraint installation.
When the ALR mode is activated the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt fully retracts. For additional information, see "Child restraints" (P.1-32).
The ALR mode should be used only for child restraint installation. During normal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode should not be activated. If it is activated, it may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension.
WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be certain that seatbacks are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

. Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this check, get the system checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service, or to learn more about seat belt operation.

SSS0326
Unfastening the seat belts
To unfasten the seat belt, push the button on the buckle. The seat belt automatically retracts.
Checking seat belt operation
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt movement by two separate methods:
. When the belt is pulled quickly from the retractor.
. When the vehicle slows down rapidly. To increase your confidence in the seat belts, check the operation as follows:

SSS1109
Center of 2nd row seat (if so equipped)
Selecting correct set of seat belts: The center seat belt buckle is identified by the CENTER mark . The center seat belt tongue can be fastened only into the center seat belt buckle.
Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

SSS0391

SSS0241

3rd row center seat belt
The 3rd row center seat belt has a connector tongue and a seat belt tongue . Both the connector tongue and the seat belt tongue must be securely latched for proper seat belt operation.

WARNING
. Always fasten the connector tongue and the seat belt in the order shown.
. Always make sure both the connector tongue and the seat belt tongue are secured when using the seat belt or installing a child restraint. Do not use the seat belt or child restraint with only the seat belt tongue attached. This could result in serious personal injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop.

1-26 Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS1077

Stowing 3rd row center seat belt: When folding down the 3rd row seat, the 3rd center seat belt can be retracted into a stowed position.
1. Hold the connector tongue so that the seat belt does not retract suddenly when the tongue is released from the connector buckle. Release the connector tongue by inserting a suitable tool such as key into the connector buckle.
2. Store the seat belt tongue into the tongue holder first .
3. Store the connector tongue into the retractor base .
WARNING
Do not unfasten the 3rd center seat belt connector except when folding down the 3rd seat.

Attaching 3rd row center seat belt:
Always be sure the 3rd center seat belt connector tongue and connector buckle are attached. Disconnect only when folding down the 3rd row seat.
To connect the buckle:
1. Pull out the connector tongue from the retractor base .
2. Pull out the seat belt tongue from the tongue holder .
3. Pull the seat belt and fasten the connector buckle until it clicks .
The center seat belt connector tongue and buckle are identified by the and
mark.
The center seat belt connector tongue can be attached only into the 3rd center seat belt connector buckle.
To fasten the seat belt, see "Fastening the seat belts" (P.1-23).

WARNING

SSS1078

. When attaching the 3rd center seat belt connector, be certain that the seatbacks are completely secured in the latched position and the 3rd center seat belt connector is completely secured.

Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

. If the 3rd center seat belt connector and the seatbacks are not secured in the correct position, serious personal injury may result in an accident or sudden stop.

SSS1097
Storing 3rd row seat belt buckles
Before folding down the seat, put the buckles in the storage of the seat cushion to avoid dropping it under the seat cushion.

SSS0896
Shoulder belt height adjustment (for front seats and 2nd row seats)
The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. (See "Precautions on seat belt usage" (P.120).)
To adjust, push the button , and then move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired position, so that the belt passes over the center of the shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off of your shoulder. Release the adjustment button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position.

1-28 Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING
. After adjustment, release the adjustment button and try to move the shoulder belt anchor up and down to make sure it is securely fixed in position.
. The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident.
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
If, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fit the lapshoulder belt and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with the installed seat belts is available that can be purchased. The extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for assistance with purchasing an extender if an extender is required.

WARNING
. It is recommended that only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made by the same company which made the original equipment seat belts, be used with the NISSAN seat belts.
. Adults and children who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender. Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident.
. Never use seat belt extenders to install child restraints. If the child restraint is not secured properly, the child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision or a sudden stop.
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
. To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a mild soap solution or any solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpets. Then, wipe with a cloth and allow the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry.

. If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.
. Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components such as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors work properly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other damage on the webbing is found, the entire seat belt assembly should be replaced.

Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

CHILD SAFETY

Children need adults to help protect them.

They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in this manual, child safety information is available from many other sources, including doctors, teachers, government traffic safety offices, and community organizations. Every child is different, so be sure to learn the best way to transport your child.
There are three basic types of child restraint systems:
. Rear-facing child restraint
. Forward-facing child restraint
. Booster seat
The proper restraint depends on the child's size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing child restraints. Forward-facing child restraints are avail-

1-30 Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

able for children who outgrow rear-facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old. Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer use a forward-facing child restraint.
WARNING
Infants and children need special protection. The vehicle's seat belts may not fit them properly. The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck. The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones. In an accident, an improperly fitting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury. Always use appropriate child restraints.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children. See "Child restraints" (P.1-32).
A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by using either the LATCH (Lower Anchor and Tethers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle seat belt. See "Child restraints" (P.1-32) for more information.
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens and children be restrained in the rear

seat. Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
This is especially important because your vehicle has a supplemental restraint system (Air bag system) for the front passenger. See "Supplemental restraint system" (P.1-54).
INFANTS
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recommends that infants be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer's instructions for installation and use.
SMALL CHILDREN
Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg) should remain in a rear-facing child restraint as long as possible up to the height or weight limit of the child restraint. Children who outgrow the height or weight limit of the rear-facing child restraint and are at least 1 year old should be secured in a forwardfacing child restraint with a harness. Refer to the manufacturer's instructions for minimum and maximum weight and

height recommendations. NISSAN recommends that small children be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer's instructions for installation and use.
LARGER CHILDREN
Children should remain in a forwardfacing child restraint with a harness until they reach the maximum height or weight limit allowed by the child restraint manufacturer.
Once a child outgrows the height or weight limit of the harness-equipped forward-facing child restraint, NISSAN recommends that the child be placed in a commercially available booster seat to obtain proper seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, the booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the chest and the top, middle portion of the shoulder. The shoulder belt should not cross the neck or face and should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt should lie snugly across the lower hips or upper thighs, not the abdomen.

type seat belt. The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
A booster seat should be used until the child can pass the seat belt fit test below:
. Are the child's back and hips against the vehicle seatback?
. Is the child able to sit without slouching?
. Do the child's knees bend easily over the front edge of the seat with feet flat on the floor?
. Can the child safely wear the seat belt (lap belt low and snug across the hips and shoulder belt across mid-chest and shoulder)?
. Is the child able to use the properly adjusted head restraint/headrest?
. Will the child be able to stay in position for the entire ride?

A booster seat can only be used in seating positions that have a three-point

Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

CHILD RESTRAINTS
seriously injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision.

JVR0473X
If you answered no to any of these questions, the child should remain in a booster seat using a three-point type seat belt. NOTE: Laws in some communities may follow different guidelines. Check local and state regulations to confirm your child is using the correct restraint system before traveling.
WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo area. The child could be 1-32 Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0099 SSS0100

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RESTRAINTS
WARNING
. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision:
-- The child restraint must be used and installed properly. Always follow all of the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation and use.
-- Infants and children should never be held on anyone's lap. Even the strongest adult cannot resist the forces of a collision.
-- Do not put a seat belt around both a child and another passenger.
-- NISSAN recommends that all child restraints be installed in the rear seat. Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear

seat than in the front seat. If you must install a forwardfacing child restraint in the front seat, see "Forward-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts" (P.1-46).
-- Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating air bag could seriously injure or kill a child. A rear-facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat.
-- Be sure to purchase a child restraint that will fit the child and vehicle. Some child restraints may not fit properly in your vehicle.
-- Child restraint anchor points are designed to withstand loads from child restraints that are properly fitted.
-- Never use the anchor points for adult seat belts or harnesses.
-- A child restraint with a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger

seat.
-- Keep seatbacks as upright as possible after fitting the child restraint.
-- Infants and children should always be placed in an appropriate child restraint while in the vehicle.
. When the child restraint is not in use, keep it secured with the LATCH system or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or collision, loose objects can injure occupants or damage the vehicle.
CAUTION
A child restraint in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing a child in the child restraint.
This vehicle is equipped with a universal child restraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system. Some child restraints include rigid or webbingmounted attachments that can be connected to these anchors.

Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

For details, see "Lower Anchors and

LATCH lower anchors or the seat belt

Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) system " (P.1-35).

to install the child restraint (not both at the same time).

If you do not have a LATCH compatible child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.
Several manufacturers offer child restraints for infants and small children of various sizes. When selecting any child restraint, keep the following points in mind:
. Choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
. Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle's seat and seat belt system.

. If the combined weight of the child and child restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint.
. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated. Canadian law requires the top tether strap on forward-facing child restraints be secured to the designated anchor point on the vehicle.

. If the child restraint is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the child restraint and check the various

adjustments to be sure the child

restraint is compatible with your child.

Choose a child restraint that is de-

signed for your child's height and

weight. Always follow all recom-

mended procedures.

. If the combined weight of the child and child restraint is less than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg), you may use either the

1-34 Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS1113
LATCH system lower anchor locations - captain's seats

SSS1114
LATCH system lower anchor locations - bench seat
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system compatible child restraints. This system may also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint unless the combined weight of the child and child restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and child restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors)

to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation.
The LATCH lower anchor points are provided to install child restraints in the following positions only:
. 2nd row captain's seats (if so equipped)
. 2nd row bench seat outboard positions only (if so equipped)
LATCH lower anchor
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision:
. Attach LATCH system compatible child restraints only at the locations shown in the illustration.
. Do not secure a child restraint in the center rear seating position using the LATCH lower anchors. The child restraint will not be secured properly.

. Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your fingers into the lower anchor area. Feel to make sure there are no obstructions over the anchors such as seat belt webbing or seat cushion material. The child restraint will not be secured properly if the lower anchors are obstructed.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.
LATCH lower anchor location
The LATCH lower anchor points are provided to install child restraints in the rear outboard seating positions only. Do not attempt to install a child restraint in the center seating position using the LATCH lower anchors.

Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

CAUTION
Store the loose LATCH covers (for example, in the console box) where they will not get damaged to avoid losing them. (See "Console box" (P.272).)

JVR0631X LATCH lower anchor cover removal
The LATCH lower anchor points are located under the covers labelled ISOFIX at the bottom of the rear outboard seat cushions. To access a LATCH lower anchor point, insert your finger into the cover and pull the cover off.
1-36 Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0643
LATCH webbing-mounted attachment
Installing child restraint LATCH lower anchor attachments
LATCH compatible child restraints include two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint. Check your child restraint for a label stating that it is compatible with LATCH. This information may also be in the instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer.

SSS0644
LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
When installing a child restraint, carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual and those supplied with the child restraint.

2nd row captain's seat

JVR0619X

JVR0621X
3rd row bench seat
TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT
If the manufacturer of your child restraint requires the use of a top tether strap, it must be secured to an anchor point.

WARNING

2nd row bench seat

JVR0620X

. In the 3rd row bench seat, a child restraint with a top tether strap can only be used in the outboard seating position (right side). Do not place it in the outboard seating position (left side) and center position and attempt to angle the

Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

tether strap to the outboard seat- Top tether anchor point locations

ing position (right side).

Anchor points are located in the following

. Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted

locations:
. 2nd row bench seat (if so equipped) on the seatback of the outboard

child restraints. Under no circum-

seating positions as shown.

stances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.
. Properly secure cargo and do not allow it to contact the top tether strap when it is attached to the

. 2nd row captain's seats (if so equipped) on the seatback of the outboard seating positions as shown.
. 3rd row bench seat on the seatback of the outboard seating position (right side) as shown.
If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap child restraint on the rear seat, it is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH

top tether anchor. Cargo that is not properly secured or cargo that contacts the top tether strap may damage the top tether strap during a collision. Your child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the child restraint top tether strap is damaged.

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the "Child safety" and "Child restraints" sections before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the

lower anchors) to install the child re-

straint. Be sure to follow the child re-

straint manufacturer's instructions for

installation.

1-38 Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint in the 2nd row seats using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.

JVR0635X
Rear-facing web-mounted -- step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors.

JVR0636X Rear-facing rigid-mounted -- step 2

SSS0639
Rear-facing -- step 3
3. For child restraints that are equipped with webbing-mounted attachments, remove any additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments.

Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

in all types of vehicles.
5. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1 through 4.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS
WARNING

SSS0650
Rear-facing -- step 4
4. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint or try installing by using the vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not all child restraints fit
1-40 Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

. The three-point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision. Also, it can change the operation of the front passenger air bag. See "Front passenger air bag and status light" (P.1-63).
. When installing a child restraint system in the 3rd center seat position, both the center seat belt connector tongue and buckle tongue must be secured. See "3rd row center seat belt" (P.1-26).

1. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the restraint manufacturer's instructions.

SSS0100
Rear-facing -- step 1
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the "Child safety" (P.1-30) and "Child restraints" (P.1-32) before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear seats:

SSS0654 Rear-facing -- step 2
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for belt routing.
Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

SSS0655
Rear-facing -- step 3
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.

SSS0656
Rear-facing -- step 4
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

SSS0657
Rear-facing -- step 5
5. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt.

1-42 Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0658
Rear-facing -- step 6
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to

each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 1 through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the "Child safety" and "Child restraints" sections before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a forwardfacing child restraint using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.

Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

seating position or a different child restraint.

JVR0637X

JVR0638X

Forward-facing web-mounted -- step 2

Forward-facing rigid-mounted -- step 2

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors.
If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point. See "Installing top tether strap" (P.1-46). Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor.

3. The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head restraint is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint when the child restraint is removed. See "Head restraints/headrests" (P.1-15) for head restraint adjustment information.
If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint or a headrest and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another

1-44 Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

7. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1 through 6.

SSS0647
Forward-facing -- step 4
4. For child restraints that are equipped with webbing-mounted attachments, remove any additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments.
5. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions to remove any slack.

SSS0638
Forward-facing -- step 6
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

2nd row captain's seat

JVR0619X

Installing top tether strap
First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchors (2nd row captain's or bench outboard seating positions only).
1. If necessary, raise or remove the head restraint or headrest to position the top tether strap over the top of the seatback. If the head restraint or headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint or headrest when the child restraint is removed. See "Head restraints/headrests" (P.1-15) for head restraint or headrest adjustment, removal and installation information.
2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point on the back of each seatback behind the child restraint.
3. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions to remove any slack. Make sure the head restraint or headrest does not contact the top tether strap.
If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap on the rear seat, it is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS
WARNING
. The three-point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision. Also, it can change the operation of the front passenger air bag. See "Front passenger air bag and status light" (P.1-63)
. When installing a child restraint system in the 3rd center position, both the center seat belt connector tongue and buckle tongue must be secured. See "3rd row center seat belt" (P.1-26).

1-46

2nd row bench seat

JVR0620X

Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0640
Forward-facing (front passenger seat) -- step 1
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the "Child safety" and "Child restraints" sections before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a forwardfacing child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear seats or in the front

passenger seat:
1. If you must install a child restraint in the front seat, it should be placed in a forward-facing direction only. Move the seat to the rearmost position. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and, therefore, must not be used in the front seat.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint or headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head restraint or headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint or headrest when the child restraint is removed. See "Head restraints/ headrests" (P.1-15) for head restraint or headrest adjustment, removal and installation information.
If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint or a headrest and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child

restraint.

Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

SSS0360B
Forward-facing -- step 3
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for belt routing.
If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point (rear seat installation only). See "Installing top tether strap" (P.1-50). Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor.

SSS0651
Forward-facing -- step 4
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.

SSS0652
Forward-facing -- step 5
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

1-48 Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2 through 8.

SSS0653
Forward-facing -- step 6
6. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt.
7. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions to remove any slack.

SSS0641
Forward-facing -- step 8
8. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
9. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If
Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

SSS0803
Forward-facing -- step 10
10. If the child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat, place the ignition switch in the ON position. The front passenger air bag status light should illuminate. If this light is not illuminated, see "Front passenger air bag and status light" (P.1-63). Move the child restraint to another seating position. Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.

2nd row captain's seat

2nd row bench seat
1-50 Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

JVR0619X

3rd row bench seat
Installing top tether strap

JVR0621X

WARNING

JVR0620X

In the 3rd row bench seat, a child restraint with a top tether strap can only be used in the outboard seating position (right side). Do not place it in the outboard seating position (left side) and center position and attempt to angle the tether strap to the outboard seating position (right side).
First, secure the child restraint with the

seat belt.
1. If necessary, raise or remove the head restraint or headrest to position the top tether strap over the top of the seatback. If the head restraint or headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint or headrest when the child restraint is removed. See "Head restraints/headrests" (P.1-15) for head restraint or headrest adjustment, removal and installation information.
2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point on the back of each seatback (2nd row seat) or right side seatback (3rd row seat) behind the child restraint.
3. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions to remove any slack. Make sure the head restraint or headrest does not contact the top tether strap.
If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap on the rear seat, it is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

BOOSTER SEATS
Precautions on booster seats
WARNING
If a booster seat and seat belt are not used properly, the risk of a child being injured in a sudden stop or collision greatly increases:
. Make sure the shoulder portion of the belt is away from the child's face and neck and the lap portion of the belt does not cross the stomach.
. Make sure the shoulder belt is not behind the child or under the child's arm.
. A booster seat must only be installed in a seating position that has a lap/shoulder belt.

LRS0455
Booster seats of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers. When selecting any booster seat, keep the following points in mind:
. Choose only a booster seat with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
. Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle's seat and seat belt system.

Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

cedures.

LRS0453
. Make sure the child's head will be properly supported by the booster seat or vehicle seat. The seatback must be at or above the center of the child's ears. For example, if a low back booster seat is chosen, the vehicle seatback must be at or above the center of the child's ears. If the seatback is lower than the center of the child's ears, a high back booster seat should be used.
. If the booster seat is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is compatible with your child. Always follow all recommended pro-
1-52 Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS0464
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated. The instructions in this section apply to booster seat installation in the rear seats or the front passenger seat.
Booster seat installation
CAUTION
Do not use the lap/shoulder belt Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when using a booster seat

with the seat belts.
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the "Child safety", "Child restraints" and "Booster seats" sections earlier in this section before installing a child restraint. Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the rear seat or in the front passenger seat:

SSS0640

LRS0454

1. If you must install a booster seat in the front seat, move the seat to the rearmost position.
2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only place it in a forward-facing direction. Always follow the booster seat manufacturer's instructions.

Front passenger position
3. The booster seat should be positioned on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint or headrest to obtain the correct booster seat fit. If the head restraint or headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint or headrest when the booster seat is removed. See "Head restraints/ headrests" (P.1-15) for head restraint or headrest adjustment, removal and installation information.

If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint or a headrest and it is interfering with the

Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

proper booster seat fit, try another seating position or a different booster seat.
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the child's hips. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer's instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the top, middle portion of the child's shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer's instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing.
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instructions for properly fastening a seat belt shown in "Seat belts" (P.1-20).

SSS0803
7. If the booster seat is installed in the front passenger seat, place the ignition switch in the ON position. The front passenger air bag status light may or may not illuminate depending on the size of the child and the type of booster seat used. See "Front passenger air bag and status light" (P.1-63).

1-54 Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) section contains important information concerning the following systems.
. Driver and passenger supplemental front-impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System)
. Driver and front passenger supplemental knee air bag
. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag
. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag
. Seat belt with pretensioner
Supplemental front-impact air bag system: The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help cushion the impact force to the head and chest of the driver and front passenger in certain frontal collisions.
Driver and front passenger supplemental knee air bag system: This system can help cushion the impact force to the driver's and front passenger's knees in certain collisions.
Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag system: This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest and pelvis area of the driver and front passenger in certain side impact collisions. The supplemental side air bag

is designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag system: This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in front and rear (2nd and 3rd) outboard seating positions in certain side impact or rollover collisions. In a side impact, the curtain air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, the curtain air bags on both sides are designed to inflate. Under both sideimpact and rollover situations, the curtain air bags will remain inflated for a short period of time.
These supplemental restraint systems are designed to supplement the crash protection provided by the driver and passenger seat belts and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occupant seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel, instrument panel and door finishers. (See "Seat belts" (P.1-20) for instructions and precautions on seat belt usage.)
The supplemental air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag

warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the systems are operational.
Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

1-56 Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0131 SSS0132

WARNING
. The front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a side impact, rear impact, rollover, or lower severity frontal collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.
. The front passenger air bag and front passenger knee air bag will not inflate if the front passenger air bag status light is lit or if the front passenger seat is unoccupied. See "Front passenger air bag and status light" (P.1-63).
. The seat belts and the front air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The front air bags inflate with great force. Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, if you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates.

Always sit back against the seatback and as far-away as practical from the steering wheel or instrument panel. Always use the seat belts.
. The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. The Advanced Air Bag System monitors the severity of a collision and seat belt usage then inflates the air bags. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.
. The front passenger seat is equipped with occupant classification sensors (weight sensors) that turn the front passenger air bag and front passenger knee air bag OFF under some conditions. These sensors are only used in this seat. Failure to be properly seated and wearing the seat belt can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. See "Front passenger air bag and status light" (P.1-63).
. Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel. Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could

increase the risk of injury if the front air bag inflates.

SSS0007

SSS0006
Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

SSS0008
SSS0009
1-58 Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0099

WARNING
. Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations.
. Children may be severely injured or killed when the front air bags, side air bags or curtain air bags inflate if they are not properly restrained. Pre-teens and children should be properly restrained in the rear seat, if possible.
. Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. See "Child restraints" (P.1-32) for details.

SSS0100

SSS0832 SSS0833

SSS0140

SSS0159

SSS0162

WARNING
Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags and roofmounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags:
. The side air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a front impact, rear impact, rollover, or lower severity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.

Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59

. The curtain air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a front impact, rear impact, or lower severity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.
. The seat belts, the side air bags and curtain air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the side air bags on the side of the seatback of the front seat or near the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear outboard seats to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations.
. When sitting in the rear seat, do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat. If the side air bag inflates, you may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who should always be

properly restrained. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations.
. Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks. They may interfere with side air bags inflation.

1-60 Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

11. Occupant classification sensors (weight sensors)
12. Occupant classification system control unit
13. Lap outer pretensioners (front seats)
14. Seat belt pretensioners (second row outboard seats)
NISSAN ADVANCED AIR BAG SYSTEM (front seats)

WARNING

1. Crash zone sensor
2. Driver and front passenger supplemental knee air bags
3. Supplemental front-impact air bag modules (NISSAN Advanced Air Bags)
4. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag inflators
5. Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

WAB0168X
mental air bag modules 6. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bags 7. Door satellite sensors 8. Seat belt pretensioners (front seats) 9. Satellite sensors 10. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

To ensure proper operation of the passenger's advanced air bag system, please observe the following items.
. Do not allow a passenger in the rear seat to push or pull on the seatback pocket.
. Do not place heavy loads heavier than 9.1 lbs (4 kg) on the seatback, head restraint or in the seatback pocket.
. Do not store cargo behind the seat that can press into the seatback.
. Do not position the front passenger seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the front seat does contact the rear seat, the air bag

Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61

system may determine a sensor malfunction has occurred and the front passenger air bag status light may illuminate and the supplemental air bag warning light may flash.

. Until you have confirmed with your dealer that your passenger seat advanced air bag is working properly, position the occupants in the rear seating positions.

. If a forward facing child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat, do not position the front passenger seat so the child restraint contacts the instrument panel. If the child restraint does contact the instrument panel, the system may determine the seat is occupied and the passenger air bag and front passenger knee air bag may deploy in a collision. Also the front passenger air bag status light may not illuminate. See "Child restraints" (P.1-32) for information about installing and using child restraints.
. Confirm the operating condition with the front passenger air bag status light.
. If you notice that the front passenger air bag status light is not operating as described in this section, it is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer to check the passenger seat Advanced Air Bag System.

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and front passenger seats. This system is designed to meet certification requirements under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in Canada. All of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual apply and must be followed.
The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove box. The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper front air bag operation.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System monitors information from the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat belt buckle sensors and the occupant classification sen-

1-62 Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

sors (weight sensors). Inflator operation is based on the severity of a collision and seat belt usage for the driver. For the front passenger, the occupant classification sensors are also monitored. Based on information from the sensors, only one front air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on the crash severity and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger air bag and front passenger knee air bag may be automatically turned OFF under some conditions, depending on the information provided by the occupant classification sensors. If the front passenger air bag and front passenger knee air bag are OFF, the front passenger air bag status light will be illuminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light will not be illuminated, but the air bag will be off). (See "Front passenger air bag and status light" (P.1-63) for further details.) One front air bag inflating does not indicate improper performance of the system.
If you have any questions about your air bag system, it is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer to obtain information about the system. If you are considering modification of your vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the front of this Owner's Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the head and chest of the front occupants. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags, other than the driver's and front passenger's knee air bags, do not provide restraint to the lower body.
Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the front occupants. Because of this, the force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, the air bag module during inflation.
The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.
The front air bags operate only when

the ignition switch is in the ON position. After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.
SSS0803 Front passenger air bag status light
Front passenger air bag and status light
WARNING
The front passenger air bag and front passenger knee air bag are designed to automatically turn OFF under some conditions. Read this section carefully to learn how it operates. Proper use of the seat, seat belt and child restraints is necessary for most effective protection. Failure to follow all instructions in this manual concern-
Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63

ing the use of seats, seat belts and child restraints can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

Status light:

The front passenger seat is equipped with

the occupant classification sensors

(weight sensors) that turn the front

passenger air bag and front passenger

knee air bag on or off depending on the

weight applied to the front passenger

seat. The status of the front passenger air

bag and front passenger knee air bag (ON

or OFF) is indicated by the front passen-

ger air bag status light

which is

located on the instrument panel. After

the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the front passenger air bag

status light on the instrument panel

illuminates for about 7 seconds and then

turns off or illuminates depending on the

front passenger seat occupied status.

The light operates as follows:

. Unoccupied passenger seat: The light is OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash.

. Passenger seat occupied by a small

adult, child or child restraint as out-

lined in this section: The

light

illuminates to indicate that the front

passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash.

. Occupied passenger seat and the

passenger meets the conditions out-

lined in this section: The

light is

OFF to indicate that the front passen-

ger air bag and front passenger knee

air bag are operational.

In addition to the above, certain objects placed on the front passenger seat may also cause the light to operate as described above depending on their weight.

For additional information related to the normal operation and troubleshooting of this occupant classification sensor system, please refer to "Normal operation" (P.1-65) and "Troubleshooting" (P.1-66) in this section.

Front passenger air bag:
The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated under some conditions as described below as permitted by U.S. regulations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your vehicle are not part of this system.
The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag to certain front passenger seat occupants, such as children, by

1-64 Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

requiring the air bag to be automatically turned OFF.
The occupant classification sensors (weight sensors) are on the seat cushion frame under the front passenger seat and are designed to detect an occupant and objects on the seat. For example, if a child is in the front passenger seat, the Advanced Air Bag System is designed to turn the passenger air bag OFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child restraint of the type specified in the regulations is on the seat, the occupant classification sensors can detect it and cause the air bag to turn OFF.
Front passenger seat adult occupants who are properly seated and using the seat belt as outlined in this manual should not cause the passenger air bag and front passenger knee air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF, however, if the occupant does not sit in the seat properly (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out of position), this could cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF. Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly for the most effective protection by the seat belt and supplemental air bag.
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and

children be properly restrained in a rear seat. NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child restraints and booster seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant classification sensors are designed to operate as described above to turn the front passenger air bag and front passenger knee air bag OFF for specified child restraints. Failing to properly secure child restrains and to use the ALR mode may allow the restraint to tip or move in an accident or sudden stop. This can also result in the passenger air bag and front passenger knee air bag inflating in a crash instead of being OFF. (See "Child restraints" (P.1-32) for proper use and installation.)
If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the passenger air bag and front passenger knee air bag are designed not to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects placed on the seat could result in air bag inflation, because of the object being detected by the occupant classification sensors. Other conditions could also result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is standing on the seat, or if two children are on the seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual. Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly.

Using the front passenger air bag status light, you can monitor when the front passenger air bag and front passenger knee air bag are automatically turned OFF with the seat occupied. The light will not illuminate when the front passenger seat is unoccupied.
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the front passenger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating that the front passenger air bag and front passenger knee air bag are OFF), it could be that the person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat properly.
If a child restraint must be used in the front seat, the front passenger air bag status light may or may not be illuminated, depending on the size of the child and the type of child restraint being used. If the front passenger air bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be that the child restraint or seat belt is not being used properly. Make sure that the child restraint is installed properly, the seat belt is used properly and the occupant is positioned properly. If the front passenger air bag status light is still not illuminated, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
If the front passenger air bag status light will not illuminate even though you be-

lieve that the child restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are properly positioned, the system may be sensing an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that the system is OFF by using a special tool. However, until you have confirmed with your dealer that your air bag is working properly, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and front passenger air bag status light will take a few seconds to register a change in the front passenger seat status. However, if the seat becomes unoccupied, the front passenger air bag status light will remain off.
If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air bag system, the supplemental air bag warning light , located in the meter and gauges area will blink. Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Normal operation:
In order for the occupant classification sensor system to classify the front passenger based on weight, please follow the precautions and steps outlined below:

Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-65

Precautions:
. Make sure that there are no objects weighing over 9.1 lbs (4 kg) hanging on the seat or placed in the seatback pocket.
. Make sure that a child restraint or other object is not pressing against the rear of the seatback.
. Make sure that a rear passenger is not pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat.
. Make sure that the front passenger seat or seatback is not forced back against an object on the seat or floor behind it.
. Make sure that there is no object placed under the front passenger seat.
Steps:
1. Adjust the seat as outlined. (See "Seats" (P.1-3).) Sit upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with your feet comfortably extended to the floor.
2. Make sure there are no objects on your lap.
3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined. (See "Seat belts" (P.1-20).)
4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds allowing the system to classify the

front passenger before the vehicle is put into motion.
5. Ensure proper classification by checking the front passenger air bag status light.
NOTE:
This vehicle's occupant classification sensor system locks the classification during driving so it is important that you confirm that the front passenger is properly classified prior to driving. Also, the occupant classification sensor system may recalculate the weight of the occupant when the vehicle comes to a stop (i.e. stop light, stop sign, etc.), so the front passenger seat occupant should continue to remain seated as outlined above.
Troubleshooting:
If you think the front passenger air bag status light is incorrect:
1. If the light is ON with no front passenger and no objects on the front passenger seat:
This may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the weight sensors:
. An object weighing over 9.1 lbs (4 kg) hanging on the seat or placed in the seatback pocket.

1-66 Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

. A child restraint or other object pressing against the rear of the seatback.
. A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat.
. Forcing the front seat or seatback against an object on the seat or floor behind it.
. An object placed under the front passenger seat.
. An object placed between the seat cushion and center console or between the seat cushion and the door.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.
NOTE:
A system check will be performed during which the front passenger air bag status light will remain lit for about 7 seconds initially.
If the light is still ON after this, it is recommended that the vehicle be checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.
2. If the light is ON with an adult occupying the front passenger seat:
. Occupant is a small adult -- the front passenger air bag status light is functioning as intended. The front passen-

ger air bag and front passenger knee air bag are suppressed.
However, if the occupant is not a small adult, then this may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the weight sensors:
. Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably extended to the floor.
. A child restraint or other object pressing against the rear of the seatback.
. A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat.
. Forcing the front seat or seatback against an object on the seat or floor behind it.
. An object placed under the front passenger seat.
. An object placed between the seat cushion and center console or between the seat cushion and the door.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

NOTE:
A system check will be performed during which the front passenger air bag status light will remain lit for about 7 seconds initially.
If the light is still ON after this, the person should be advised not to ride in the front passenger seat and it is recommended that the vehicle be checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.
3. If the light is OFF with a small adult, child or child restraint occupying the front passenger seat.
This may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the weight sensors:
. Small adult or child is not sitting upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably extended to the floor.
. The child restraint is not properly installed, as outlined. (See "Child restraints" (P.1-32).)
. An object weighing over 9.1 lbs (4 kg) hanging on the seat or placed in the seatback pocket.
. A child restraint or other object pressing against the rear of the seatback.
. A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat.

. Forcing the front seat or seatback against an object on the seat or floor behind it.
. An object placed under the front passenger seat.
. An object placed between the seat cushion and center console.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.
NOTE:
A system check will be performed during which the front passenger air bag status light will remain lit for about 7 seconds initially.
If the light is still OFF after this, the small adult, child or child restraint should be repositioned in the rear seat and it is recommended that the vehicle be checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.
Other supplemental front-impact air bag precautions
WARNING
. Do not place any objects on the steering wheel pad or on the instrument panel. Also, do not

Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-67

place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the front air bags inflate.
. Do not place objects with sharp edges on the seat. Also, do not place heavy objects on the seat that will leave permanent impressions in the seat. Such objects can damage the seat or occupant classification sensors (weight sensors). This can affect the operation of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.
. Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot steam cleaners) on the seat. This can damage the seat or occupant classification sensors. This can also affect the operation of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.
. Immediately after inflation, several front air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.
. No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental air

bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supplemental air bag or damage to the supplemental air bag system.
. Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle's electrical system, suspension system or front end structure. This could affect proper operation of the front air bag system.
. Tampering with the air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim material around the air bag system.
. Removing or modifying the front passenger seat may affect the function of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.
. Modifying or tampering with the front passenger seat may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by placing material on the seat cushion or by installing ad-

1-68 Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ditional trim material, such as seat covers, on the seat that is not specifically designed to assure proper air bag operation. Additionally, do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat or the seat cushion and seatback. Such objects may interfere with the proper operation of the occupant classification sensors.
. No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the seat belt system. This may affect the front air bag system. Tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.
. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for work on and around the front air bag. It is also recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the air bag system.

. A cracked windshield should be replaced immediately by a qualified repair facility. A cracked windshield could affect the function of the supplemental air bag system.
* The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the front air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner's Manual.

WAB0169X

WAB0181X

Driver's side
DRIVER AND FRONT PASSENGER SUPPLEMENTAL KNEE AIR BAG
The knee air bag is located in the knee bolster, on the driver's and front passenger's sides. All of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual apply and must be followed. The knee air bag is designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although it may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. It may not inflate in certain collisions.

Front passenger's side
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper knee air bag operation.
When the knee air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
The knee air bag helps to cushion the impact force on the knees of the driver and front passenger. It can help reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating knee air bag may cause abrasions or

Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-69

other injuries. The knee air bag provides restraint to the lower body.
The knee air bag inflates quickly in order to help protect the occupants. Because of this, the force of the knee air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, this air bag module during inflation. The knee air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over OR the knee air bag will remain inflated for a short time.
The knee air bag operates only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.
WARNING
. Do not place any objects between the knee bolster and the driver's or front passenger's seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if a knee air bag inflates.

. Right after inflation, the knee air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.
. No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the knee air bag system. This is to prevent damage to or accidental inflation of the knee air bag system.
. Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle's electrical system or suspension system. This could affect proper operation of the knee air bag system.
. Tampering with the knee air bag system may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the driver or front passenger knee bolster or install additional trim material around the knee air bag.
. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for work on and around the knee air bag. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equip-

1-70 Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ment and probing devices should not be used on the knee air bag system.
*The SRS wiring harness or connectors are yellow or orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the knee air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this manual.

WAB0182X
FRONT SEAT-MOUNTED SIDE-IMPACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG AND ROOF-MOUNTED CURTAIN SIDEIMPACT AND ROLLOVER SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
The side air bags are located in the outside of the seatback of the front seats. The curtain air bags are located in the side roof rails. All of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual apply and must be followed. The side air bags and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity side impact.

They are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side collisions on the side where the vehicle is impacted.
Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate in certain types of rollover collisions or near rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle movements (for example, during severe off roading) may cause the curtain air bags to inflate.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper side air bag and curtain air bag operation.
When side air bags and curtain air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the chest and pelvis of the front occupants. Curtain air bags help to cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in the front and rear (2nd and 3rd) outboard seating positions. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating side air bags and curtain air bags may cause abrasions or other injuries. Side air bags and curtain air

bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.
The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat passengers should be seated as far away as practical from the door finishers and side roof rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the occupants. Because of this, the force of the side air bags and curtain air bags inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, these air bag modules during inflation. In a rollover, the curtain air bags on both sides are designed to inflate. Under both side-impact situations, the curtain air bags will remain inflated for a short period of time.
The side air bags and curtain air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the systems are operational.

Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-71

WARNING
. Do not place any objects near the seatback of the front seats. Also, do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door finisher and the front seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if side air bag inflates.
. Right after inflation, several side air bags and curtain air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.
. No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of side air bag and curtain air bags. This is to prevent damage to or accidental inflation of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems.
. Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle's electrical system, suspension system or side panel. This could affect proper operation of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems.
. Tampering with the air bag system may result in serious perso-

nal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by placing material near the seatback or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, around the side air bags.
. Removing or modifying the front passenger seat may affect the function of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.
. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for work on and around the side air bag and curtain air bag. It is also recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the side-impact air bag system.
* The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the side air bag and curtain air bag systems and

1-72 Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner's Manual.
SEAT BELTS WITH PRETENSIONERS (front and second row outboard seats)
WARNING
. The pretensioners cannot be reused after activation. They must be replaced together with the retractor and buckle as a unit.
. If the vehicle becomes involved in a collision but a pretensioner is not activated, be sure to have the pretensioner system checked and, if necessary, replaced. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
. No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the pretensioner system. This is to prevent damage to or accidental activation of the pretensioners. Tampering with the pretensioner system may result in serious personal injury.
. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for work on and around the pretensioner system.

It is also recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pretensioner system.
. If you need to dispose of a pretensioner or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Correct pretensioner disposal procedures are set forth in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.
The pretensioner system may activate with the supplemental air bag system in certain types of collisions. Working with the seat belt retractor, it helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions, helping to restrain front and second row outboard seats occupants.
The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt retractor and buckle anchor. These seat belts are used the same way as conventional seat belts.
When a pretensioner activates, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. The smoke is not harmful, and it does not

indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
After pretensioner activation, load limiters allow the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to reduce forces against the chest.
The supplemental air bag warning light is used to indicate malfunctions in
the pretensioner system. (See "Supplemental air bag warning light" (P.1-74) for more details.) If the operation of the supplemental air bag warning light indicates there is a malfunction, have the system checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the pretensioner system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner's Manual.

SSS1016
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LABELS
Warning labels about the supplemental front-impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration.
SRS air bag
The warning labels are located on the surface of the sun visors.

WARNING
Do not use a rear-facing child restraint on a seat protected by an air bag in front of it. If the air bag
Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-73

deploys, it may cause serious injury or death.

. The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
. The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently.
. The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all.
Under these conditions, the air bag and/ or pretensioner systems may not operate properly. They must be checked and repaired. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

SPA1097

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,

displaying

in the instrument panel,

monitors the circuits for the air bag

systems, pretensioners and all related

wiring.

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the air bag and/or pretensioner systems need servicing:

WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the front air bag, knee air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

1-74 Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
The front air bags, knee air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags and pretensioners are designed to activate on a one-timeonly basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light will remain illuminated after inflation has occurred. These systems should be repaired and/or replaced as soon as possible. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When maintenance work is required on the vehicle, the front air bags, knee air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags, pretensioners and related parts should be pointed out to the person conducting the maintenance. The ignition switch should always be in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle.
WARNING
. Once a front air bag, knee air bag, side air bag or curtain air bag has inflated, the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced. Additionally, the activated pretensioner must also be replaced. The air bag module and

pretensioner should be replaced. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. However, the air bag module and pretensioner system cannot be repaired.

if no air bags deploy as a result of the impact. Failure to verify proper OCS function may result in an improper air bag deployment resulting in injury or death.

. The front air bag, knee air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and the pretensioner should be inspected if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

. If you need to dispose of a supplemental air bag or pretensioner or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer. Correct supplemental air bag and pretensioner system disposal procedures are set forth in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

. If there is an impact to your vehicle from any direction, your Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) should be checked to verify it is still functioning correctly. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. The OCS should be checked even

Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-75

MEMO 1-76 Safety -- seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2 Instruments and controls

Cockpit .................................................................................................. 2-4 Instrument panel .......................................................................... 2-5 Meters and gauges ..................................................................... 2-6
Speedometer and odometer ........................................ 2-7 Tachometer ................................................................................ 2-8 Engine coolant temperature gauge ....................... 2-8 Fuel gauge ................................................................................... 2-9 Engine oil pressure gauge .............................................. 2-9 Voltmeter ................................................................................... 2-10 Meter illumination and needle sweep ................ 2-10 Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders ..................................................................... 2-11 Checking lights ..................................................................... 2-12 Warning/indicator lights (red) ................................... 2-12 Warning/indicator lights (yellow) ........................... 2-15 Warning/indicator lights (other) ............................. 2-19 Audible reminders .............................................................. 2-20 Vehicle information display ............................................... 2-20 How to use the vehicle information display ........................................................... 2-21 Startup display ...................................................................... 2-22 Settings ....................................................................................... 2-22 Operational indicators .................................................... 2-30 Trip computer ........................................................................ 2-37 Clock and outside air temperature ...................... 2-39

Security systems ....................................................................... 2-39 Vehicle Security System .............................................. 2-39 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ................. 2-41
Wiper and washer switch ................................................... 2-42 Windshield wiper and washer operation ...... 2-43 Rain-sensing auto wiper system (if so equipped) ......................................................................... 2-44 Rear window wiper and washer operation ............................................................. 2-45
Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch ......................................................................... 2-45 Windshield deicer switch (if so equipped)............. 2-46 Headlight and turn signal switch ................................ 2-46
Headlight switch ............................................................... 2-47 Instrument brightness control .............................. 2-53 Turn signal switch ........................................................... 2-53 Fog light switch (if so equipped) ......................... 2-54 Heated steering wheel (if so equipped) .................. 2-54 Horn ..................................................................................................... 2-55 Heated seats (if so equipped) ......................................... 2-55 Front (if so equipped).................................................... 2-56 Rear (if so equipped) ...................................................... 2-57 Climate controlled seats (if so equipped) ............. 2-57 Warning systems switch (if so equipped) ............. 2-58 SNOW mode switch ................................................................ 2-59

TOW mode switch ..................................................................... 2-59 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch ......... 2-60 Trailer Brake Controller Unit (TBCU) (if so equipped) .................................................................................. 2-60 Rear door alert ............................................................................ 2-61 Power outlet .................................................................................. 2-62
USB (Universal Serial Bus) charging connector .......................................................... 2-64 Wireless charger (if so equipped) ........................... 2-65 Emergency Call (SOS) button (if so equipped) .................................................................................. 2-67 Emergency support .......................................................... 2-67 Storage .............................................................................................. 2-69 Cup holders ............................................................................. 2-69 Sunglasses holder .............................................................. 2-71 Glove box ................................................................................... 2-71 Console box ............................................................................. 2-72 Coat hooks ............................................................................... 2-73 Luggage hooks ..................................................................... 2-73 Cargo floor box .................................................................... 2-74 Roof rack (if so equipped) ............................................ 2-74 Windows ............................................................................................ 2-75 Power windows .................................................................... 2-75 Moonroof (if so equipped) .................................................. 2-78 Power moonroof ................................................................. 2-78 Welcome light (if so equipped) ....................................... 2-80 Battery saver system ..................................................... 2-80

Interior lights ................................................................................ 2-81 Interior light switch ........................................................ 2-81 Console light ........................................................................ 2-82 Map lights ............................................................................... 2-82 Rear personal lights ....................................................... 2-82
Vanity mirror lights ................................................................. 2-83 Cargo light ..................................................................................... 2-83 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver (Type A) (if so equipped) ................................................................................. 2-83
Programming HomeLink® ......................................... 2-84 Programming HomeLink® for Canadian customers and gate openers ................................. 2-85 Operating the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver .................................................... 2-86 Programming troubleshooting ............................. 2-86 Clearing the programmed information .......... 2-86 Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button ........................................................... 2-86 If your vehicle is stolen ................................................ 2-87 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver (Type B) (if so equipped) ................................................................................. 2-87 Programming HomeLink® ......................................... 2-88 Using the garage door two-way communication ........................................... 2-91 Programming HomeLink® for Canadian customers and gate openers ................................. 2-91 Operating the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver .................................................... 2-92

Programming troubleshooting ................................ 2-92 Clearing the programmed information ............ 2-92

Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button ........................................................................................ 2-92
If your vehicle is stolen ................................................ 2-93

COCKPIT

1. Power liftgate switch (if so equipped) 2. Heated steering wheel switch (if so
equipped) 3. Instrument brightness control switch 4. TRIP/RESET switch for twin trip odometer 5. Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch
-- Headlight
2-4 Instruments and controls

WAA0288X
-- Turn signal -- Fog light (if so equipped) 6. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side) -- Audio control steering switch (See NissanConnect® Owner's Manual) -- Vehicle information display control

-- Trip computer switch
7. Wiper and washer switch
8. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right side)
-- Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system
-- Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) system
-- Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (IBSI) system
-- Hands-Free Phone System switch (See NissanConnect® Owner's Manual)/Voice Recognition system switch (See NissanConnect® Owner's Manual)
9. Shift lever
10. Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) shift switch (if so equipped)/SNOW mode switch/TOW MODE switch/Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch
11. Display Commander (See NissanConnect® Owner's Manual)
12. Power liftgate main switch (if so equipped)
13. Warning systems switch (if so equipped)
-- Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
-- Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
14. Electric tilting/telescopic steering wheel switch

INSTRUMENT PANEL

1. Side ventilator
2. Meters and gauges
3. Center ventilator
4. Audio system (See NissanConnect® Owner's Manual)
5. Touch screen display (See NissanConnect® Owner's Manual)

WAA0289X
-- Intelligent Around View® Monitor (if so equipped) -- RearView Monitor (if so equipped) -- Navigation system (if so equipped) (See NissanConnect® Owner's Manual) 6. Front passenger air bag status light 7. Hazard warning flasher switch

8. Defroster switch/Deicer switch (if so equipped)
9. Front passenger supplemental air bag 10. Fuse box 11. Parking brake 12. Hood release handle 13. Steering wheel
-- Horn -- Driver supplemental air bag -- Power steering 14. Driver supplemental knee air bag 15. Push-button ignition switch 16. Climate controlled seat switch (if so equipped)/Heated seat switch (if so equipped) 17. Wireless charger (if so equipped) 18. Trailer Brake Controller Unit (TBCU) (if so equipped) 19. USB connection ports (See NissanConnect® Owner's Manual) 20. Power outlet 21. Cup holder 22. Heater and air conditioner 23. Glove box 24. Front passenger supplemental knee air bag
Instruments and controls 2-5

METERS AND GAUGES

CAUTION
. For cleaning, use a soft cloth, dampened with water. Never use a rough cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any kind of solvent or paper towel with a chemical cleaning agent. They will scratch or cause discoloration to the lens.
. Do not spray any liquid such as water on the meter lens. Spraying liquid may cause the system to malfunction.

1. Tachometer 2. Warning and indicator lights 3. Vehicle information display/Odometer/
twin trip odometer 4. Speedometer 5. Engine coolant temperature gauge 6. Fuel gauge
2-6 Instruments and controls

WAA0290X
NOTE:
The needle indicators may move slightly after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. This is not a malfunction.

Resetting the trip odometer:
Pushing the TRIP RESET switch for more than 1 second resets the trip odometer to zero.
Average fuel economy and distance to empty information is also available. (See "Vehicle information display" (P.2-20).)

WAC0608X
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed in miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour (km/h).

WAC0650X
Odometer/twin trip odometer
The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayed on the vehicle information display when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips.
Changing the display: Pushing the TRIP RESET switch at the bottom left of the combination meter panel changes the display as follows:
Odo ? TRIP A ? TRIP B ? Odo

Instruments and controls 2-7

WAC0610X
TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (RPM). Do not rev the engine into the red zone .
CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the red zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce engine speed. Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage.

JVI1296X
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE
The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature.
The engine coolant temperature is within the normal range when the gauge needle points within the zone shown in the illustration.
The engine coolant temperature varies with the outside air temperature and driving conditions.

CAUTION
If the gauge indicates engine coolant temperature near the hot (H) end of the normal range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease temperature. If gauge is over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine. See "If your vehicle overheats" (P.614) for immediate action required.

2-8 Instruments and controls

reaches "0". There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches "0".
The indicates that the fuel-filler door is located on the driver's side of the vehicle.

WAC0612X
FUEL GAUGE
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank.
The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.
The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers "0" (Empty).
The low fuel warning appears on the vehicle information display when the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the gauge

CAUTION
. If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the malfunction indicator light
(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as possible. After a few driving trips, the light should turn off. If the light remains on after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
. For additional information, see "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)" (P.2-18).

WAC0219X
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE
The gauge indicates the engine lubrication system oil pressure while the engine is running. When the engine speed is high, the engine oil pressure is also high. When it is low, the gauge indicates the low (L) oil pressure. The engine oil pressure is normal when the gauge points within the zone shown in the illustration.
CAUTION
. This gauge is not designed to indicate low engine oil level. Use
Instruments and controls 2-9

the dipstick to check the oil level. (See "Engine oil" (P.8-6).)
. If the gauge does not move with the proper amount of engine oil, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Continued vehicle operation in such a condition could cause serious damage to the engine.

METER ILLUMINATION AND NEEDLE SWEEP
The illumination of meters and gauges illuminates when the driver's door is closed after getting into the vehicle with the Intelligent Key carried in.
When the engine is started, the indicator needles will sweep in the speedometer and tachometer, and the illumination will be brightened gradually.
This function can be turned on or off. (See "Customize Display" (P.2-26).)
WAC0220X
VOLTMETER
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the volt meter indicates the battery voltage. When the engine is running, it indicates the generator voltage.
While cranking the engine, the volt drop below the normal range . If the gauge is not in the normal range (10.5 to 15.5 volt) while the engine is running, it may indicate that the charging system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

2-10 Instruments and controls

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Warning/indicator lights (red)

Warning/indicator lights (yellow)

Warning/indicator lights (other)

Automatic Transmission (AT) oil temperature warning light

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light

Exterior light indicator

Automatic Transmission (AT) park warning light
Brake warning light
Charge warning light Engine oil pressure warning light Master warning light Seat belt warning light Security indicator light Supplemental air bag warning light

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system warning light Automatic transmission check warning light
Check suspension indicator light
Front passenger air bag status light
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) warning light (4WD models)
Low tire pressure warning light
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Master warning light
Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system warning light Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator light Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning light

Front fog light indicator light (if so equipped) High beam assist indicator light
High beam indicator light TOW mode indicator light
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Instruments and controls 2-11

CHECKING LIGHTS
With all doors closed, apply the parking brake, fasten the seat belts and place the ignition switch in the ON position without starting the engine. The following lights (if so equipped) will come on:
or , , , , , The following lights (if so equipped) will come on briefly and then go off:
, or , , , , , , If any light does not come on or operates in a way other than described, it may indicate a burned-out bulb and/or a system malfunction. It is recommended you have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. Some indicators and warnings are also displayed on the vehicle information display between the speedometer and tachometer. (See "Vehicle information display" (P.2-20).)
2-12 Instruments and controls

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS (red)
Automatic Transmission (AT) oil temperature warning light
This light illuminates when the Automatic Transmission (AT) oil temperature is too high. If the light illuminates while driving, reduce the vehicle speed as soon as safely possible until the light turns off.
CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation when the AT oil temperature warning light is on may damage the AT.
Automatic Transmission (AT) park warning light (4WD models)
This light indicates that the Automatic Transmission (AT) parking function is not engaged. If the transfer control is not secured in any driving position while the AT shift lever is in the "P" (Park) position, the transmission will disengage and the wheels will not lock. If the AT park warning light illuminates with the shift lever in the P (Park) position, shift the Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) shift switch to the AUTO, 4H or

4L position again with the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position. (See "NISSAN allmode 4WD®" (P.5-124).)

Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator:
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the light comes on when the parking brake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light:
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following:
1. Check the brake fluid level. If brake fluid is low, add fluid and have the system checked. It is recommended you have this service performed by a NISSAN dealer. (See "Brake fluid" (P.89).)
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the warning system checked. It is recommended you have this service performed by a NISSAN dealer.

Low hydraulic pressure warning indicator:
If the brake warning light illuminates when the engine is running, or while driving with the parking brake is released, check the brake fluid level. If the brake fluid level is sufficient, it may indicate low hydraulic pressure in the brake booster. It is recommended that you have the brake system checked by a NISSAN dealer promptly.
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning indicator:
When the parking brake is released and the brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake warning light and the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light illuminate, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the brake system checked, and if necessary repaired. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. (See "Antilock Braking System (ABS) warning light" (P.2-15).)
WARNING
. Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on. Driving could be dangerous. If you judge it to be safe,

drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle towed because driving it could be dangerous.
. Pressing the brake pedal with the engine stopped and/or low brake fluid level may increase your stopping distance and braking will require greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel.
. If the brake fluid level is below the minimum or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive until the brake system has been checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Charge warning light
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the charge warning light illuminates and then turns off.
If the light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate the charging system is not functioning properly. Turn the engine off and check the alternator belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing or if the light remains on, have your vehicle serviced immediately. It is recommended

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
CAUTION
Do not continue driving if the alternator belt is loose, broken or missing.
Engine oil pressure warning light
This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the light flickers or comes on during normal driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair shop. The engine oil pressure warning light is not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to check the oil level. (See "Engine oil" (P.8-6).)
CAUTION
Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine almost immediately. Such damage is not covered by warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so.
Instruments and controls 2-13

Master warning light
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the master warning light illuminates when a warning message appears in the vehicle information display.
See "Vehicle information display" (P.2-20).
Seat belt warning light and chime
For driver and front passenger:
The light and chime remind you to fasten the driver and front passenger seat belts.
The light illuminates whenever the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, and will remain illuminated until the front seat belts are fastened.
When the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 10 MPH (15 km/h), the light will blink unless the front seat belts are securely fastened.
When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, the chime will sound for approximately 6 seconds unless the driver's seat belt is securely fastened.
When the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 10 MPH (15 km/h), the chime will sound unless the front seat belts are securely fastened. The chime will continue to sound for approximately 95
2-14 Instruments and controls

seconds until the front seat belts are fastened.
For rear passengers:
The seat belt warning light for the rear passengers will illuminate whenever the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, and will remain illuminated until the rear passenger's seat belts are fastened.
For approximately 65 seconds after the ignition switch is in the ON position, the system does not activate the warning light for the rear passengers.
If a rear passenger seat belt is fastened then unfastened at a vehicle speed less than approximately 10 MPH (15 km/h), the warning light will illuminate. When the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 10 MPH (15 km/h), the warning light will blink and the chime will sound.
The warning will turn off when a rear passenger seat belt is fastened or automatically turn off approximately 65 seconds after the seat belt is unfastened.
See "Seat belts" (P.1-20) and "44. Rear Seat Belt warning" (P.2-35).

Security indicator light
The light blinks when the ignition switch is in the ACC, OFF and LOCK position. This function indicates the security system equipped on the vehicle is operational.
If the security system is malfunctioning, this light will remain on while the ignition switch is in the ON position. For additional information, see "Security systems" (P.239).
Supplemental air bag warning light
After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light will illuminate. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the air bag and/or pretensioner systems are operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the air bag and/or pretensioner systems needs servicing.
. The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
. The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently.
. The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all.
It is recommended you visit a NISSAN

dealer for these services.
Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pretensioners may not function properly.
For additional information, see "Supplemental restraint system" (P.1-54).
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag systems and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS (yellow)

Anti-lock Braking Sys-

tem (ABS) warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is operational.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while the engine is running, or while driving, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the antilock function is turned off. The brake system then operates normally, but without anti-lock assistance. (See "Brake system" (P.5-142).)

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system warning light
This light comes on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. It turns off after the engine is started.
This light illuminates when the Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system is set to OFF in the vehicle information display.

If the light illuminates when the AEB system is ON, it may indicate that the system is unavailable. See "Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with pedestrian detection system" (P.5-96) for more details.
Automatic Transmission (AT) check warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the light comes on for 2 seconds. If the light comes on at any other time, it may indicate the transmission is not functioning properly. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer to check and repair the transmission.
Check suspension indicator light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the light comes on for 2 seconds.
Front passenger air bag status light
The front passenger air bag status light ( ) located on the instrument panel will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be OFF depending on how the front passenger seat is being used.
Instruments and controls 2-15

For front passenger air bag status light operation, see "NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System (front seats)" (P.1-61).
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) warning light (4WD models)
The warning light comes on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. It turns off soon after the engine is started. If the 4WD system malfunctions, or the diameter of the front and the rear wheels are different, the warning light will either remain illuminated or blink. (See "NISSAN all-mode 4WD®" (P.5-124).)
CAUTION
. If the warning light comes on while driving there may be a malfunction in the 4WD system. Reduce the vehicle speed and have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
. If the 4WD warning light turns on when driving on dry or hard surfaced roads:
2-16 Instruments and controls

-- in the 4H(I) position, shift the 4WD shift switch to AUTO
-- in the 4L(O) position, stop the vehicle and shift the transmission shift lever to the N (Neutral) position and shift the 4WD shift switch to AUTO
. If the warning light is still on after the above operations, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Low tire pressure warning light
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire pressure of all tires except the spare.
The low tire pressure warning light warns of low tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not functioning properly.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, this light illuminates for about 1 second and turns off.
Low tire pressure warning:
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the warning light will illuminate. The "Tire Pressure Low Add Air" warning

also appears in the vehicle information display. If you select the tire pressure information in the vehicle information display, the Low Pressure information will be displayed. The tire pressure for each tire will also be displayed.
When the low tire pressure warning light illuminates, you should stop and adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure.
The "Tire Pressure Low Add Air" warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated.
For additional information, see "Vehicle information display" (P.2-20), "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" (P.5-5) and "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) " (P.6-3).

TPMS malfunction:
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. The "Tire Pressure Low Add Air" warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.
For additional information, see "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" (P.5-5).
WARNING
. If the light does not illuminate with the ignition switch placed in the ON position, have the vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
. If the light illuminates or Low Pressure information is displayed on the monitor screen while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driv-

ing with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If the light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire is flat and all tires are properly inflated, it is recommended you consult a NISSAN dealer.
. Since the spare tire is not equipped with the TPMS, when a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or

TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for these services. . Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.
CAUTION
. The TPMS is not a substitute for the regular tire pressure check. Be sure to check the tire pressure regularly.
. If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the TPMS may not operate correctly.
. Be sure to install the specified size of tires to the four wheels correctly.
Instruments and controls 2-17

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

If the malfunction indicator light comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate a potential emission control malfunction.

The malfunction indicator light may also come on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 US gallons (14 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the

light

should turn off if no other potential

emission control system malfunction ex-

ists.

If this indicator light remains on for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine is not running, it indicates that the vehicle is not ready for an emission control system inspection/ maintenance test. (See "Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test" (P.1038).)

Operation:
The malfunction indicator light will come on in one of two ways:

2-18 Instruments and controls

. Malfunction indicator light on steady -- An emission control system mal-

function has been detected. Check

the fuel-filler cap if the Loose Fuel

Cap warning appears in the vehicle

information display. If the fuel-filler

cap is loose or missing, tighten or

install the cap and continue to drive

the vehicle. The

light should turn

off after a few driving trips. If the

light does not turn off after a few

driving trips, have the vehicle in-

spected. It is recommended you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service. You

do not need to have your vehicle

towed to the dealer.

. Malfunction indicator light blinking -- An engine misfire has been detected

which may damage the emission

control system.

To reduce or avoid emission control

system damage:

1) Do not drive at speeds above 45

MPH (72 km/h).

2) Avoid hard acceleration or decel-

eration.

3) Avoid steep uphill grades.

4) If possible, reduce the amount of

cargo being hauled or towed.

The malfunction indicator light may

stop blinking and remain on.

Have the vehicle inspected. It is re-

commended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer.
CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without having the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability, reduced fuel economy, and possible damage to the emission control system.
Master warning light
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the master warning light illuminates when a warning message appears in the vehicle information display. See "Vehicle information display" (P.2-20).
Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system warning light
This light comes on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. It turns off after the engine is started. This light illuminates when the RAB system is turned off in the vehicle information display.

If the light illuminates when the RAB system is on, it may indicate that the system is unavailable. (See "Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)" (P.5-116).)
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator light
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator light illuminates and then turns off.
The light comes on when the VDC off switch is pushed to OFF. This indicates that the VDC system is not operating.
When the 4L position is selected with the Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) shift switch, the VDC system is disabled and the VDC off indicator light illuminates. (4WD models)
For additional information, see "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system" (P.5-144).
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning light
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning light illuminates and then turns off.
The light will blink when the VDC system or the traction control system is operating, thus alerting the driver that the

vehicle is nearing its traction limits. The road surface may be slippery.
When the VDC warning light illuminates when the VDC system is turned on, this light alerts the driver to the fact that the VDC system's fail-safe mode is operating, for example the VDC or hill start assist system may not be functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. If a malfunction occurs in the system, the VDC system function will be canceled but the vehicle is still driveable. For additional information, see "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system" (P.5-144).
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS (other)
Exterior light indicator
This indicator illuminates when the headlight switch is turned to the AUTO, or
position and the front parking lights, instrument panel lights, rear combination lights, license plate lights or headlights are on. The indicator turns off when these lights are turned off.

Front fog light indicator light (if so equipped)
The front fog light indicator light illuminates when the front fog lights are on. (See "Fog light switch" (P.2-54).)
High beam assist indicator light
The high beam assist indicator light illuminates when the high beam assist system is turned on and it is operational. (See "High beam assist" (P.2-50).)
High beam indicator light
This light comes on when the headlight high beam is on and goes out when the low beam is selected.
TOW mode indicator light
This light will illuminate when the TOW MODE is selected while the engine is running. (See "TOW mode" (P.5-134).)
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
The light flashes when the turn signal switch lever or hazard switch is turned on.
Instruments and controls 2-19

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Door lock warning chime
When the chime sounds, be sure to check both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key. (See "Troubleshooting guide" (P.3-13).)
Light reminder chime
A chime will sound when the driver side door is opened with the headlight switch in the or position and the ignition switch in the ACC, OFF or LOCK position.
Turn the headlight switch to the OFF (if so equipped) or the AUTO position when you leave the vehicle.
Parking brake reminder chime
The chime will sound if the vehicle is driven at more than 4 MPH (7 km/h) with the parking brake applied. Stop the vehicle and release the parking brake.
Brake pad wear warning
The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it will make a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion. This scraping sound will first occur only when the brake pedal is depressed. After more wear of the brake pad, the sound will always be heard even if the brake pedal is not depressed. Have
2-20 Instruments and controls

the brakes checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

JVI1272X
The vehicle information display is located between the tachometer and the speedometer, and it displays the warnings and information. The following items are also displayed if the vehicle is equipped with them:
. Odometer/twin trip odometer -- "Odometer/twin trip odometer" (P.2-7)
. Automatic Transmission (AT) -- "Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders" (P.2-11). -- "Driving the vehicle" (P.5-17).
. Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)

-- "NISSAN all-mode 4WD®" (P.5-124).
. Intelligent Back-up Intervention (I-BI) -- "Intelligent Back-up Intervention (IBI)" (P.5-63).
. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) -- "Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)" (P.5-74).
. Intelligent Key system -- "Intelligent Key system" (P.3-7).
-- "Push-button ignition switch" (P.513).
. Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with pedestrian detection
-- "Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with pedestrian detection system" (P.5-96).
. Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)
-- "Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)" (P.5-106).
. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) -- "Lane Departure Warning (LDW)" (P.5-26).
. Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) -- "Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)" (P.5-31).
. Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (IBSI)
-- "Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI)" (P.5-46).

. Blind Spot Warning (BSW) -- "Blind Spot Warning (BSW)" (P.5-38).
. Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) -- "Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)" (P.5116).
. Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) -- "Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA)" (P.5-114).
. Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) -- "Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)" (P.523).
. Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) -- "Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)" (P.5-57).

WAC0613X

HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

The vehicle information display can be

changed using the buttons OK ,

, and

located on the

steering wheel.

OK - change or select an item in the vehicle information display

- navigate through the items in vehicle information display

- go back to the previous menu

- change from one display screen to the next (i.e. trip, Fuel economy)

The OK , and

buttons also

control audio and control panel functions

in some conditions. Most screens and

Instruments and controls 2-21

menus offer instruction prompts of the

steering switch buttons to indicate how

to control the vehicle information display.

The OK button changes the audio

source and the

buttons also

control voice recognition manual mode.

The OK button can be used to change

the audio source when the audio screen

is displayed. The

buttons can be

used when controlling voice recognition

prompts manually. (See NissanConnect®

Owner's Manual.)

STARTUP DISPLAY

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the vehicle information display may display the following screens if the vehicle is equipped with them:

. Home . Speed . Drive Computer . Fuel Economy . Navigation . Audio . CRUISE . Driving Aids . TPMS . Speed Limit Sign Warnings will only display if there are any present. (See "Operational indicators" (P.230).)

2-22 Instruments and controls

To control what items display in the vehicle information display, see "Settings" (P.2-22).

SETTINGS

The setting mode allows user to change the information displayed in the vehicle information display and some settings:

. Driver Assistance . TPMS Setting . Clock . Vehicle settings . Maintenance . Customize Display . Unit/Language . Factory Reset

Driver Assistance

To change the status, warnings or turn on

or off any of the systems/warnings dis-

played in the "Driver Assistance" menu,

use the

buttons to select and

change a menu item:

. Emergency Brake . Lane . Blind Spot . Speed Limit Sign . Cross Traffic Alert . Driver Attention Alert

. Timer Alert . Low Temp. Alert
Emergency Brake:
. Front Allows user to turn the Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with pedestrian detection system and Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW) system ON/OFF.
. Rear Allows user to turn the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system ON/OFF.
(See "Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with pedestrian detection system" (P.596), "Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)" (P.5-106) and "Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)" (P.5-116).)
Lane:
. Warning(LDW) Allows user to turn the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system ON/OFF.
. Prevention(LDP) Allows user to turn the Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) system ON/OFF.
(See "Lane Departure Warning (LDW)" (P.526) and "Intelligent Lane Intervention (ILI)" (P.5-31).)

Blind Spot:
. Warning(BSW) Allows user to turn the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system ON/OFF.
. Intervention(BSI) Allows user to turn the Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI) system ON/OFF.
(See "Blind Spot Warning (BSW)" (P.5-38) and "Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (IBSI)" (P.5-46).)
Speed Limit Sign (if so equipped):
Allows user to turn the Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) ON/OFF. (See "Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)" (P.5-23).)
Cross Traffic Alert (if so equipped):
Allows user to turn the Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system ON/OFF. (See "Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)" (P.5-57).)
Driver Attention Alert:
Allows user to turn the Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) on or off. (See "Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA)" (P.5-114).)
Timer Alert:
Allows user to adjust the Timer Alert or reset.
. (Current Time)/(Set Time)

. Reset
Low Temp. Alert: Allows user to turn the Low Temperature Alert function ON/OFF.
TPMS Setting
The following submenu appears.

Instruments and controls 2-23

Tire Pressure Unit:

The unit for tire pressure that is shown in the vehicle information display can be changed to:

. kPa

. psi

. bar

. kgf/cm2

Use the

buttons and the OK

button to select and change the unit.

If necessary, refer to the following table to convert between units.

2-24 Instruments and controls

Clock
Allows user to adjust the clock settings and time within the vehicle information display.
. Clock Mode (if so equipped) . Clock Format . Daylight Saving (if so equipped) . Time Zone (if so equipped) . Set Clock Manually The clock may also be set in the touch screen display. For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner's Manual.

JVI0938X

Vehicle settings

The vehicle settings allow user to change settings for the following menus.

. Lighting

. Locking

. Wipers (if so equipped)

. Driving Position (if so equipped)

. Rear Door Alert

. ACC Off Delay

The vehicle settings can be changed

using the

buttons and the OK

button.

Lighting: The "Lighting" menu has the following

options:

. Auto Room Lamp

The interior light can be set to be ON

or OFF. Use the OK button to turn

this feature ON or OFF.

. Auto Headlight

The sensitivity of the Intelligent Auto

Headlight (if so equipped) or autolight

(if so equipped) can be adjusted. From

the "Lighting" menu, select "Auto

Headlight". Use the

buttons

and the OK button to select the

required sensitivity. The following op-

tions are available:

-- Turn on earliest

-- Turn on earlier

-- Turn on standard

-- Turn on later

. Light Off Delay

The duration of the automatic head-

lights can be changed from 0 to 180

seconds. Use the OK button to

change the duration.

Locking:
The "Locking" menu has the following options:
. Ext. Door Switch (if so equipped) When this item is turned on, the request switch on the door is activated. Use the OK button to activate

or deactivate this function.
. Selective Unlock (if so equipped) When this item is turned on, and the door handle request switch is pushed, only the corresponding door is unlocked. All the doors can be unlocked if the door handle request switch is pushed again within 1 minute. When this item is turned to off, all the doors will be unlocked when the door handle request switch is pushed once. Use the OK button to activate or deactivate this function.
. Auto Door Unlock The "Auto Door Unlock" feature allows user to customize the auto door unlock options. Use the OK button to change the mode.
-- Shift to P
-- IGN OFF
-- OFF
Wipers (if so equipped):
The "Wipers" menu has the following options:
. Speed Dependent The "Speed Dependent" feature can be activated or deactivated. Use the OK button to turn this feature ON or OFF.

Driving Position (if so equipped):
. Exit Seat Slide This allows user to turn the entry/exit function ON or OFF. Use the OK button to turn this function ON or OFF. (See "Memory seat" (P.3-40).)
. Exit Steering Up (if so equipped) This allows user to turn the entry/exit function ON or OFF. Use the OK button to turn this function ON or OFF. (See "Memory seat" (P.3-40).)
Rear Door Alert:
The "Rear Door Alert" feature allows user to customize the Rear Door Alert options. Use the OK button to change the mode.
. Horn & Alert When selected, the alert is displayed and the horn sounds.
. Alert Only When selected, only the alert is displayed.
. OFF When selected, no alert or horn will be active.
(See "Rear door alert" (P.2-61).)
ACC Off Delay (if so equipped):
This allows user to turn the ACC delay timer function ON or OFF. (See "ACC (Accessories) delay timer function" (P.5-
Instruments and controls 2-25

15).)

Maintenance

The maintenance mode allows user to set alerts for the reminding of maintenance intervals. To change an item:

Select "Maintenance" using the

but-

tons and press the OK button.

. Oil and Filter . Tire . Other

Oil and Filter:

This indicator appears when user set distance comes for changing the engine oil and filter. You can set or reset the distance for checking or replacing these items. For scheduled maintenance items and intervals, refer to the "9. Maintenance and schedules" section.

Tire:
This indicator appears when the user set distance comes for replacing tires. You can set or reset the distance for replacing tires.

WARNING

"Changing wheels and tires" (P.836).) Many factors including tire inflation, alignment, driving habits and road conditions affect tire wear and when tires should be replaced. Setting the tire replacement indicator for a certain driving distance does not mean your tires will last that long. Use the tire replacement indicator as a guide only and always perform regular tire checks. Failure to perform regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks could result in tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to a collision, which could result in serious personal injury or death.
Other:
This indicator appears when the user set distance comes for checking or replacing maintenance items other than the engine oil, oil filter and tires. Other maintenance items can include such things as air filter or tire rotation. You can set or reset the distance for checking or replacing the items.

Customize Display
The display settings allows user to choose from the various meter selections.
The display settings can be changed using the buttons .
Main Menu Selection: Displays available screens that can be shown in the vehicle information display.
Route Guidance (if so equipped): To change the setting, use the buttons and press the OK button.
. Alerts The "Alerts" allows user to turn the Route Guidance alerts on or off.
Welcome Effect: The "Welcome Effect" displays the available welcome effect settings.
. gauges (if so equipped) . Animation

The tire replacement indicator is not a substitute for regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks. (See
2-26 Instruments and controls

Unit/Language

The units that are shown in the vehicle information display can be changed:

. Mileage/Fuel

. Temperature

. Language

Use the

buttons and the OK

button to select and change the units of

the vehicle information display.

Mileage/Fuel:

The unit for the mileage that is shown in the vehicle information display can be changed.

. km, l/100km

. km, km/l

. miles, MPG(US)

Use the

buttons and the OK

button to select and change the unit.

Temperature:

The temperature that is shown in the vehicle information display can be changed from:

. °C . °F Use the OK

button to toggle choices.

Language:
The language of the vehicle information display can be changed.

Use the

buttons and the OK

button to select and change the lan-

guage of the vehicle information display.

Factory Reset
The settings in the vehicle information display can be reset back to the factory default. To reset the vehicle information display:
1. Select "Factory Reset" using the buttons and press the OK button.
2. Select "Yes" to return all settings back to default by pushing the OK button.

Instruments and controls 2-27

2-28 Instruments and controls

WAC0221X

WAC0788X
Instruments and controls 2-29

OPERATIONAL INDICATORS
The displayed images may differ depending on the model.
1. No Key Detected
This warning appears when the Intelligent Key is left outside the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ON position. Make sure the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. See "Intelligent Key system" (P.3-7) for more details.
2. Key ID Incorrect
This warning appears when the ignition switch is pushed from the OFF position and the Intelligent Key is not recognized by the system. You cannot start the engine with an unregistered key. See "Intelligent Key system" (P.3-7).
3. Key Battery Low
This indicator appears when the Intelligent Key battery is running out of power. If this indicator appears, replace the battery with a new one. (See "Intelligent Key battery replacement" (P.8-21).)
2-30 Instruments and controls

4. Key System Error: See Owner's Manual
This warning appears if there is a malfunction in the Intelligent Key system. If this warning appears while the engine is stopped, it may be impossible to start the engine.
If this warning appears while the engine is running, you can drive the vehicle. However in these cases, have the system checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
5. Key Registration Complete
This indicator appears when a new Intelligent Key is registered to the vehicle.
6. Push brake and start switch to drive
This indicator appears when the shift lever is in the P (Park) position.
This indicator also appears when the vehicle has been started using the Remote Engine Start function (if so equipped).
This indicator means that the engine will start by pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal depressed. You can start the engine from any position of the ignition switch.

7. Push Ignition to OFF
After the Shift to Park warning illuminates, the warning will illuminate if the ignition switch is placed in the ACC position when the shift lever moves into the P (Park) position.
To turn off the warning, place the ignition switch in the ON position and then in the LOCK position.
8. Shift to Park
This warning appears when the ignition switch is pushed to stop the engine with the shift lever in any position except the P (Park) position.
If this warning appears, move the shift lever to the P (Park) position or push the ignition switch to the ON position.
An inside warning chime will also sound. (See "Intelligent Key system" (P.3-7).)
9. Engine start operation for Intelligent Key system indicator (if I-Key battery level is low)
This indicator appears when the Intelligent Key battery is running out of power and when the Intelligent Key system and vehicle are not communicating normally.
If this indicator appears, touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key while depressing the brake pedal. (See "Intelli-

gent Key battery discharge" (P.5-15).)
10. Release Parking Brake
This warning appears when the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7 km/h) and the parking brake is applied. Stop the vehicle and release the parking brake.
11. Low Fuel
This warning appears when the fuel level in the tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches the 0 (Empty) position.
There is a small reserve of fuel remaining in the tank when the fuel gauge reaches the 0 (Empty) position.
12. Low Washer Fluid
This warning appears when the washer tank fluid is at a low level. Add washer fluid as necessary. (See "Window washer fluid" (P.8-10).)
13. Loose Fuel Cap
This warning appears when the fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled. (See "Fuel-filler cap" (P.3-26).)

14. Tire Pressure Low Add Air
This warning appears when the low tire pressure warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire pressure is detected. The warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated. If this warning appears, stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. (See "Low tire pressure warning light" (P.2-16) and "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" (P.5-5).)
15. SNOW mode indicator
This indicator appears when SNOW mode is selected by the SNOW mode switch. (See "SNOW mode" (P.5-135).)
16. Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) shift indicator (4WD models)
This indicator shows the Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) driving mode (AUTO, 4HI or 4LO) that is selected by the 4WD shift switch. (See "NISSAN all-mode 4WD®" (P.5124).)

17. Door/liftgate open warning (ignition switch is in the ON position)
This warning appears if any of the doors and/or the liftgate are open or not closed securely. The vehicle icon indicates which door or the liftgate is open on the display.
18. Power will turn off to save the battery
This warning appears after a period of time if the ignition switch is in ACC or ON position.
19. Power turned off to save the battery
This warning appears after the ignition switch is automatically turned OFF to save the battery.
20. Light reminder warning
This warning appears when the driver side door is opened with the headlight switch is left ON and the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or LOCK position. Place the headlight switch in the OFF (if so equipped) or AUTO position. For additional information, see "Headlight and turn signal switch" (P.2-46).

Instruments and controls 2-31

21. Vehicle ahead detection indicator
This indicator shows the status of the following systems, if the vehicle is equipped with them.
. Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with pedestrian detection system
. Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)
For more details, see "Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with pedestrian detection system" (P.5-96) or "Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)" (P.5106).
The figure and color of these indicators will change depending on the conditions of the above systems.
22. LDW indicator
This indicator shows the status of the following systems, if the vehicle is equipped with them.
. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) . Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) For more details, see "Lane Departure Warning (LDW)" (P.5-26) or "Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)" (P.5-31).
The figure and color of these indicators will change depending on the conditions of the above systems.
2-32 Instruments and controls

23. BSW indicator
This indicator shows the status of the following systems, if the vehicle is equipped with them.
. Blind Spot Warning (BSW) . Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-
BSI) For more details, see "Blind Spot Warning (BSW)" (P.5-38) or "Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI)" (P.5-46).
The figure and color of these indicators will change depending on the conditions of the above systems.
24. Malfunction
This warning appears when one or more of the following systems (if so equipped) is not functioning properly:
. Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with pedestrian detection system
. Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)
. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) . Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) . Blind Spot Warning (BSW) . Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-
BSI) . Intelligent Back-up Intervention (I-BI) . Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) If one or more of these warning appears,

have the system checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
25. Wiper Mode Guidance
This indicator shows the wiper and washer switch position.
The selected position is illuminated in orange when the wiper switch position is changed.
26. Lights Mode Guidance
This indicator shows the headlight switch position.
The selected position is illuminated in orange when the headlight switch position is changed. (The display of the light position varies depending on the models.)
27. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) indicators
These indicators show the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system status. For additional information, refer to "Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)" (P.5-74).

28. Stop vehicle and Apply parking brake (if so equipped)
This warning may appear when the battery charge is low.
Park the vehicle as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
29. Cruise indicator
This indicator shows the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode status. The status is shown by the color.
See "Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode display and indicators" (P.5-93) for details.
30. Not Available: High Camera Temp (if so equipped)
This message appears when the Lane Departure Warning (LDW)/Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)/Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI) systems become unavailable because a camera detects an interior temperature of more than 104°F (40°C).
For additional information, refer to "Lane Departure Warning (LDW)" (P.5-26), "Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)" (P.5-31) or "Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI)" (P.5-46).

31. Unavailable High Cabin Temperature (if so equipped)
This warning appears if the interior temperature of the vehicle has reached such a high temperature that the sensor for the Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system can no longer function reliably.
Once the interior temperature has reached normal levels, the warning should disappear.
If the warning continues to display, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
For additional information, refer to "Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)" (P.5-23).
32. Unavailable Side Radar Obstruction (if so equipped)
This message appears when the Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI)/Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)/Intelligent Back-up Intervention (I-BI) systems become unavailable because a radar blockage is detected. For additional information, refer to "Blind Spot Warning (BSW)" (P.5-38), "Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI)" (P.5-46), "Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)" (P.5-57) or "Intelligent Back-up Intervention (I-BI)" (P.5-63).

33. Unavailable: High Accelerator Temperature
This message appears when the Intelligent Back-up Intervention (I-BI) system becomes unavailable because of an interior temperature greater than approximately 104°F (40°C). For additional information, refer to "Intelligent Back-up Intervention (I-BI)" (P.5-63).
34. Forward Driving Aids temporarily disabled Front Sensor blocked warning
This message appears when the sensor area of the front bumper is covered with dirt or is obstructed, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead.
The following systems will be automatically canceled.
. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system (if so equipped)
. Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with pedestrian detection system
. Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)
For more details, see "Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)" (P.5-74), "Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with pedestrian detection system" (P.5-96) or "Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)" (P.5106).
Instruments and controls 2-33

35. Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse (if so equipped)
This warning may appear if the extended storage fuse switch is not pushed in (switched on). When this warning appears, push in (switch on) the extended storage fuse switch to turn off the warning. For more information, see "Extended storage fuse switch" (P.8-21).
36. Headlight System Error
This warning appears if the LED headlights are malfunctioning. It is recommended you have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
37. Intelligent Lane Intervention (ILI)/Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI) ON indicator
This indicator appears when one or more of the following systems is activated. . Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) . Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-
BSI) For more details, see "Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)" (P.5-31) or "Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI)" (P.5-46).
2-34 Instruments and controls

38. Not Available: Poor Road Conditions (if so equipped)
This warning may appear when the Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI), the Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) or the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system is engaged.
Under the following conditions, the I-BSI, I-LI or the ICC system is automatically canceled:
. When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) or ABS operates
. When a wheel slips The above system cannot be used in some situations. (VDC operates and a wheel slips.)
39-40. Currently unavailable/Currently not available (if so equipped)
This message appears and the Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI) system, the Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) system and Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system will be turned off automatically under the following conditions:
. When the VDC system is turned off. . When the SNOW mode is selected. . When the 4WD shift switch is in the 4H
or 4L position. (4WD models).
"Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system"

(P.5-144), "SNOW mode" (P.5-135), "NISSAN all-mode 4WD®" (P.5-124), "Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI)" (P.5-46), "Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)" (P.5-31) and "Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)" (P.5-74).
41. Automatic Transmission (AT) position indicator
This indicator shows the transmission shift position.
See "Automatic transmission" (P.5-18) for further details.
42. Rear Door Alert is activated
When the system is enabled, this message appears when the Rear Door Alert system is active and can remind the driver to check the rear seat.
. Using the steering switch, the driver can select "Dismiss Message" to clear the display for a period of time.
. Using the steering switch, the driver can select "Disable Alert" to disable the horn alert for the remainder of the current trip.
For additional information, see "Rear door alert" (P.2-61).

WARNING
Selecting "Dismiss Message" during a stop within a trip temporarily dismisses the message for that stop without turning the system off.
Alerts can be provided for other stops during the trip. Selecting "Disable Alert" turns off the Rear Door Alert system for the remainder of a trip and no audible alert will be provided.
NOTE:
This system is disabled until the driver enables it using the settings menu. See "Vehicle settings" (P.2-24).
43. Check Rear Seat for all articles
When the rear door alert system is enabled, this message appears when the vehicle comes to a complete stop, the shift lever is moved from the D (Drive) or R (Reverse) position to P (Park) position, and the driver exits the vehicle. This message alerts the driver, after a period of time, to check for items in the rear seat after the audible alert has been provided.

NOTE:
This rear door alert system is disabled until a driver enables it using the rear door alert switch.
For more details, see "Rear door alert" (P.2-61).
44. Rear Seat Belt warning
This rear seat belt warning appears after the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position. If any of the rear passenger's seat belts is not fastened, the seat icon illuminates in red to show which seat belt is not fastened. The seat icon illuminates in red until the corresponding rear passenger's seat belt is fastened. The warning will automatically turn off after approximately 65 seconds. If so equipped, the seat icon will turn gray (or green, depending on the models) if the seat is occupied and the passenger is buckled. If a rear passenger seat belt is fastened then unfastened at a vehicle speed less than approximately 10 MPH (15 km/h), the seat icon will illuminate. When the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 10 MPH (15 km/h), the seat icon will blink and the chime will sound. The warning will turn off when a rear passenger seat belt is fastened or automatically turn off approximately 65 seconds after the seat belt is unfastened. For precautions on seat belt usage, see "Seat belts" (P.1-20).

The display of the rear seat belt warning varies depending on the number of seats.
45. Malfunction See Owner's Manual (if so equipped)
This warning appears when the Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system malfunctions. (See "Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)" (P.5-23).)
46. System fault See Owner's Manual
This warning appears when the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system malfunctions. (See "Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)" (P.5-116).)
47. Take a Break? indicator
This indicator appears when the Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) system detect that the driver attention is decreasing. (See "Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA)" (P.5-114).)
48. Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) malfunction
This warning appears when the Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) system malfunctions. (See "Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA)" (P.5-114).)
Instruments and controls 2-35

2-36 Instruments and controls

WAC0615X

WAC0616X
TRIP COMPUTER
The trip computer switch is located on the left side of the steering wheel. To operate the trip computer, push the switch.
Each time the left or right side of the button is pushed, the display will
change.
1. Home
The Home mode shows the following information.
. Vehicle speed . Navigation (if so equipped)

. Audio

2. Audio
The audio mode shows the status of audio information.
For more details, see NissanConnect® Owner's Manual.

3. Compass
This display indicates the heading direction of the vehicle.

4. Navigation
When the route guidance is set in the navigation system, this item shows the navigation route information.
For more details, see NissanConnect® Owner's Manual.

5. Vehicle speed (MPH or km/h)

The vehicle speed mode shows the current vehicle speed and the average vehicle speed since the last reset.

Resetting is done by pushing the left or

right side of the

button for longer

than 1 second.

Average vehicle speed:
The average vehicle speed display is updated every 30 seconds. The first 30 seconds after a reset, the display shows "------".

6. Elapsed time and trip odometer (mile or km)

Elapsed time:

The elapsed time mode shows the time

since the last reset. The displayed time

can be reset by pushing the left or right

side of the

button for longer than

1 second. (The trip odometer is also reset

at the same time.)

Trip odometer:
The trip odometer mode shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven since the last reset. Resetting is done by pushing the left or right side of the button for longer than 1 second. (The elapsed time is also reset at the same time.)

7. Current fuel consumption and average fuel consumption (MPG, l (liter)/100 km or km/l)

Current fuel consumption:
The current fuel consumption mode shows the current fuel consumption.

Average fuel consumption:
The average fuel consumption mode shows the average fuel consumption since the last reset. Resetting is done by pushing the left or right side of the

Instruments and controls 2-37

button for longer than 1 second.
The display is updated every 30 seconds. At about the first 1/3 mile (500 m) after a reset, the display shows "----".
8. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system
This mode shows the operating condition for the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system. (See "Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)" (P.5-74).)
NOTE:
If the ICC system is in a standby state, this screen is automatically displayed.
9. Driving aids (if so equipped)
The driving aids mode shows the operating condition for the following systems, if the vehicle is equipped with them.
. Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with pedestrian detection system
. Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)
. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) . Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) . Blind Spot Warning (BSW) . Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-
BSI) For more details, see "Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with pedestrian detection system" (P.5-96), "Intelligent
2-38 Instruments and controls

Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)" (P.5106), "Lane Departure Warning (LDW)" (P.526), "Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)" (P.5-31), "Blind Spot Warning (BSW)" (P.538) or "Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI)" (P.5-46).
10. Tire pressures
The tire pressure mode shows the pressure of all four tires while the vehicle is driven.
When the "Tire Pressure Low Add Air" warning appears, the display can be switched to the tire pressure mode by pushing the left or right side of the
button.
The tire pressure unit can be changed using the "TPMS Setting" menu displayed in the vehicle information display. (See "TPMS Setting" (P.2-23).)
NOTE:
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, it may take a period of time for the tire pressure to be displayed while the vehicle is driven. Depending on the radio wave circumstance, tire pressure may not correctly be displayed.

WAC0225X
11. Auxiliary gauges
The auxiliary gauges consist of the battery voltage gauge and the engine oil pressure gauge.
The engine oil pressure gauge indicates current engine oil pressure. (See "Engine oil pressure gauge" (P.2-9).) The battery voltage gauge indicates current battery voltage. (See "Voltmeter" (P.210).)

SECURITY SYSTEMS

Outside air temperature (°F or °C)
The outside air temperature is displayed in °F or °C in the range of -40 to 140°F (-40 to 60°C).
The outside temperature sensor is located in front of the radiator. The sensor may be affected by road or engine heat, wind directions and other driving conditions. The display may differ from the actual outside temperature or the temperature displayed on various signs or billboards.

WAC0226X
CLOCK AND OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE
The clock and outside air temperature are displayed on the upper side of the
vehicle information display.
Clock
For clock adjustment, see "Clock" (P.2-24) or the separate NissanConnect® Owner's Manual.

SIC2133
Your vehicle has two types of security systems, as follows:
. Vehicle security system . NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System The security condition will be shown by the security indicator light.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
The vehicle security system provides visual and audio alarm signals if someone opens the doors, hood, or liftgate when the system is armed. It is not, however, a motion detection type system that activates when a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.
The system helps deter vehicle theft but
Instruments and controls 2-39

cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or exterior vehicle components in all situations. Always secure your vehicle even if parking for a brief period. Never leave your Intelligent Key(s) in the vehicle, and always lock it when unattended. Be aware of your surroundings, and park in secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.
Many devices offering additional protection, such as component locks, identification markers, and tracking systems, are available at auto supply stores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealer may also offer such equipment. Check with your insurance company to see if you may be eligible for discounts for various theft protection features.

SIC2045
How to arm the vehicle security system
1. Close all windows.
The system can be armed even if the windows are open.
2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position.
3. Remove the Intelligent Key from the vehicle.
4. Close all doors, hood and liftgate. Lock all doors. The doors can be locked with the Intelligent Key, door handle request switch, power door lock switch or mechanical key.

5. Confirm that the security indicator light comes on. The security indicator light stays on for about 30 seconds. The vehicle security system is now pre-armed. After about 30 seconds the vehicle security system automatically shifts into the armed phase. The security light begins to flash once every approximately 3 seconds. If, during this 30-second pre-arm time period, the door is unlocked, or the ignition switch is pushed to ACC or ON, the system will not arm.
Even when the driver and/or passengers are in the vehicle, the system will activate with all doors, hood, and liftgate locked with the ignition switch in the LOCK position. When pushing the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position, the system will be released.
Vehicle security system activation
The vehicle security system will give the following alarm:
. The headlights blink and the horn sounds intermittently.
. The alarm automatically turns off after approximately 50 seconds. However, the alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with again.
The alarm is activated by:

2-40 Instruments and controls

. Unlocking the door or opening the liftgate without using the button on the Intelligent Key, the door handle request switch or the mechanical key. (Even if the door is opened by releasing the door inside lock knob, the alarm will activate.)
. Opening the hood.
How to stop an activated alarm
The alarm will stop when a door is unlocked by pushing the unlock button on the Intelligent Key, the door handle request switch or using the mechanical key, or when the ignition switch is pushed to the ACC or ON position.
If the system does not operate as described above, it is recommended you have it checked by a NISSAN dealer.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered Intelligent Key. Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference,

and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

SIC2045
Security indicator light
The security indicator light is located on the meter panel. It indicates the status of the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.
The light blinks after the ignition switch was in the ACC, OFF and LOCK position. This function indicates the security systems equipped on the vehicle are operational.
If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is malfunctioning, this light will remain on while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
If the light still remains on and/or the engine will not start, seek service for
Instruments and controls 2-41

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System as soon as possible. Please bring all registered keys that you have. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the window and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm the window with the defroster before you wash the window.

2-42 Instruments and controls

CAUTION
. Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 30 seconds.
. Do not operate the washer if the reservoir tank is empty.
. Do not fill the window washer reservoir tank with washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the window washer reservoir tank.
. Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer's recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the window washer reservoir tank. Do

not use the window washer reservoir tank to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water.
If the wiper operation is interrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may stop moving to protect its motor. If this occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF position and remove the snow or ice that is on and around the wiper arms. In approximately 1 minute, turn the switch on again to operate the wiper.

Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped)

JVI1010X JVI1011X

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER OPERATION
The windshield wiper and washer operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the following speed:
INT (Type A) (if so equipped) -- intermittent operation can be adjusted by turning the knob toward (Slower) or (Faster). When the speed sensing wiper interval function is turned on, the intermittent operation speed varies in accordance with the vehicle speed. (For example, when the vehicle speed is high, the intermittent operation speed will be faster.) (See "Vehicle settings" (P.2-24).)
AUTO (Type B) (if so equipped) -- For models with the rain-sensing auto wiper system, see "Rain-sensing auto wiper system" (P.2-44).
LO -- continuous low speed operation
HI -- continuous high speed operation
MIST -- one sweep operation of the wiper
Pull the lever toward you to operate the washer. Then the wiper will also operate several times.
To operate the washer, pull the lever toward the back of the vehicle until the desired amount of washer fluid is spread on the windshield. The wiper will automatically operate several times.

Wiper drip wipe system: The wiper will also operate once about 3 seconds after the washer and wiper are operated. This operation is to wipe washer fluid that has dripped on the windshield. NOTE: The Speed Dependent feature may be disabled (if so equipped). See "Vehicle settings" (P.2-24).
Instruments and controls 2-43

JVI1013X
RAIN-SENSING AUTO WIPER SYSTEM (if so equipped)
The rain-sensing auto wiper system can automatically turn on the wipers and adjust the wiper speed depending on the rainfall and the vehicle speed by using the rain sensor located on the upper part of the windshield.
To set the rain-sensing auto wiper system, push the lever down to the AUTO position . The wiper will sweep once while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
The rain sensor sensitivity level can be adjusted by turning the knob toward the front (High) or toward the rear (Low).
2-44 Instruments and controls

. High -- High sensitive operation . Low -- Low sensitive operation To turn the rain-sensing auto wiper system off, push up the lever to the OFF position, or pull down the lever to the LO or HI position.
CAUTION
Do not touch the rain sensor and around it when the wiper switch is in the AUTO position and the ignition switch is in the ON position. The wipers may operate unexpectedly and cause to an injury or may damage a wiper.
. The rain-sensing auto wipers are intended for use during rain. If the switch is left in the AUTO position, the wipers may operate unexpectedly when dirt, fingerprints, oil film or insects are stuck on or around the sensor. The wipers may also operate when exhaust gas or moisture affect the rain sensor.
. The rain-sensing auto wipers may not operate if rain does not hit the rain sensor even if it is raining.
. When the windshield glass is coated with water repellent, the speed of

the rain-sensing auto wipers may be higher even though the amount of the rainfall is small.
. Be sure to turn off the rain-sensing auto wiper system when you use a car wash.
. Using genuine wiper blades is recommended for proper operation of the rain-sensing auto wiper system. (See "Windshield wiper blades" (P.816) for wiper blade replacement.)

Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped)

JVI1014X JVI1015X

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH

REAR WINDOW WIPER AND WASHER OPERATION
If the rear window wiper operation is interrupted by snow etc., the wiper may stop moving to protect its motor. If this occurs, turn the wiper switch to OFF and remove the snow etc. on and around the wiper arms. After about 1 minute, turn the switch ON again to operate the wiper.
The rear window wiper and washer operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF position to operate the wiper.
Intermittent (INT) -- intermittent operation (not adjustable)
Low (ON) -- continuous low speed operation
Push the switch forward to operate the washer. Then the wiper will also operate several times.

WAC0617X
To defog/defrost the rear window glass and outside mirrors, start the engine and push the switch on. The indicator light
will come on. Push the switch again to turn the defroster off.
It will automatically turn off in approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window defroster.

Instruments and controls 2-45

WINDSHIELD DEICER SWITCH (if so equipped)

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

WAC0617X
The windshield deicer switch (defroster switch) operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
The deicer is used to remove ice from the windshield when a wiper is frozen to the windshield.
When the switch is pushed, the indicator light illuminates and the deicer operates for approximately 15 minutes. The rear window defroster will activate at the same time. After the preset time has passed, the deicer will turn off automatically. To turn off the deicer manually, push the deicer switch again, and the indicator light turns off.

CAUTION
. When operating the deicer continuously, be sure to start the engine. Otherwise, it may cause the battery to discharge.
. When cleaning the inner side of the window, be careful not to scratch or damage the electrical conductors on the surface of the window.

2-46 Instruments and controls

Type A (if so equipped)

SIC3668

Type B (if so equipped)

WAC0729X

HEADLIGHT SWITCH

Lighting

Turn the switch to the

position:

The front parking, side marker, tail, license plate and instrument lights will come on. The autolight system will be set (Type B).

Turn the switch to the

position:

Headlights will come on and all the other lights remain on.

SIC3669
Intelligent Auto Headlight system (Type A) (if so equipped)
The Intelligent Auto Headlight system allows the headlights to be set so they turn on and off automatically.
To set the Intelligent Auto Headlight system:
1. Make sure the headlight switch is in the AUTO position .
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
3. The Intelligent Auto Headlight system automatically turns the headlights on and off.
To turn the Intelligent Auto Headlight

system off, turn the headlight switch to the OFF, or position. The Intelligent Auto Headlight system can turn on the headlights automatically when it is dark and turn off the headlights when it is light. The headlights will also be turned on automatically at twilight or in rainy weather (when the windshield wiper is operated continuously). If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position and one of the doors is opened and this condition is continued, the headlights remain on for 5 minutes. Automatic headlights off delay: You can keep the headlights on for up to 180 seconds after you place the ignition switch in the OFF position and open any door then close all the doors. You can adjust the period of the automatic headlights off delay from 0 seconds (OFF) to 180 seconds. The factory default setting is 45 seconds. See "Vehicle settings" (P.2-24).
Instruments and controls 2-47

SIC3784A
Be sure not to put anything on top of the photo sensor located on the top of the instrument panel. The photo sensor controls the Intelligent Auto Headlight system; if it is covered, the photo sensor reacts as if it is dark and the headlights will illuminate.

WAC0731X
Autolight system (Type B) (if so equipped)
The autolight system allows the headlights to be set so they turn on and off automatically.
To set the autolight system:
1. Make sure the headlight switch is in the AUTO position or position .
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
3. The autolight system automatically turns the headlights on and off.
To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to the position.

The autolight system can turn on the headlights automatically when it is dark and turn off the headlights when it is light.
If the ignition switch is turned to the ON position when the parking brake is applied, the headlights remain off.
With the position selected, the headlights turn off when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position, the shift lever is in the P (Park) position, or the parking brake is applied. (The front parking, tail, license plate, and instrument lights are on.)
How to turn off all lights:
With the AUTO position selected, all lights turn off when the engine is restarted after the parking brake is applied.
NOTE:
When driving at night, the headlights remain on and cannot be turned off.
When the vehicle is stopped, the headlights can be turned off when the headlight switch is in the position.
With the AUTO position selected (headlights are on), the headlights will remain on for 5 minutes when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position and one of the doors is opened.

2-48 Instruments and controls

Automatic headlights off delay:
You can keep the headlights on for up to 180 seconds after you place the ignition switch in the OFF position and open any door then close all the doors.
You can adjust the period of the automatic headlights off delay from 0 seconds (OFF) to 180 seconds. The factory default setting is 45 seconds.
See "Vehicle settings" (P.2-24).

SIC3784A
Be sure not to put anything on top of the photo sensor located on the top of the instrument panel. The photo sensor controls the autolight system; if it is covered, the photo sensor reacts as if it is dark and the headlights will illuminate.

SIC3670
Example
Headlight beam select
To select the low beam, put the lever in the neutral position as shown.
To select the high beam, push the lever forward while the switch is in the position. Pull it back to select the low beam.
Pulling the lever toward you will flash the headlight high beam even when the headlight switch is in the OFF position (if so equipped).

Instruments and controls 2-49

High beam assist
The high beam assist system will operate when the vehicle is driven at approximately 25 MPH (40 km/h) and above. If an oncoming vehicle or leading vehicle appears in front of your vehicle when the headlight high beam is on, the headlight will be switched to the low beam automatically.
Precautions on high beam assist:
WARNING
. The high beam assist system is a convenience but it is not a substitute for safe driving operation. The driver should remain alert at all times, ensure safe driving practices and switch the high beam and low beam manually when necessary.
. The high beam or low beam may not switch automatically under the following conditions. Switch the high beam and low beam manually. -- During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, wind, etc.).
2-50 Instruments and controls

-- When a light source similar to a headlight or tail light is in the vicinity of the vehicle.
-- When the headlights of the oncoming vehicle or the leading vehicle are turned off, when the color of the light is affected due to foreign materials on the lights, or when the light beam is out of position.
-- When there is a sudden, continuous change in brightness.
-- When driving on a road that passes over rolling hills, or a road that has level differences.
-- When driving on a road with many curves.
-- When a sign or mirror-like surface is reflecting intense light towards the front of the vehicle.
-- When the container, etc. being towed by a leading vehicle is reflecting intense light.
-- When a headlight on your vehicle is damaged or dirty.
-- When the vehicle is leaning at an angle due to a punctured

tire, being towed, etc.
. The timing of switching the low beam and high beam may change under the following situations.
-- The brightness of the headlights of the oncoming vehicle or leading vehicle.
-- The movement and direction of the oncoming vehicle and the leading vehicle.
-- When only one light on the oncoming vehicle or the leading vehicle is illuminated.
-- When the oncoming vehicle or the leading vehicle is a twowheeled vehicle.
-- Road conditions (incline, curve, the road surface, etc.).
-- The number of passengers and the amount of luggage.

than approximately 16 MPH (25 km/h), the headlight remains the low beam.
To turn off the high beam assist system, turn the headlight switch to the position or select the low beam position by placing the lever in the neutral position.

WAC0149X
Example
High beam assist operations:
To activate the high beam assist system, turn the headlight switch to the AUTO position (or position, depending on the model) and push the lever forward (high beam position). The high beam assist indicator light in the meter will illuminate while the headlights are turned on.
If the high beam assist indicator light does not illuminate in the above condition, it may indicate that the system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
When the vehicle speed lowers to less

WAC0618X
Ambient image sensor maintenance:
The ambient image sensor for the high beam assist system is located as shown. To keep the proper operation of the high beam assist system and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following:
. Always keep the windshield clean. . Do not attach a sticker (including
transparent material) or install an accessory near the ambient image sensor. . Do not strike or damage the areas around the ambient image sensor. Do not touch the sensor lens that is located on the ambient image sensor.
Instruments and controls 2-51

If the ambient image sensor is damaged due to an accident, contact a NISSAN dealer.
Battery saver system
A chime will sound when the driver side door is opened with the headlight switch in the or position and the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK position.
When the headlight switch is in the or position while the ignition switch is in
the ON position, the lights will automatically turn off after a period of time when the ignition switch has been pushed to the OFF position.
When the headlight switch remains in the or position after the lights auto-
matically turn off, the lights will turn on when the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position.
CAUTION
. When you turn on the headlight switch again after the lights automatically turn off, the lights will not turn off automatically. Be sure to turn the headlight switch to the OFF (if so equipped) or the AUTO position when you leave the vehicle for extended periods
2-52 Instruments and controls

of time, otherwise the battery will be discharged.
. Never leave the headlight switch on when the engine is not running for extended periods of time even if the headlights turn off automatically.

Daytime Running Light (DRL) system

The LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL)

automatically illuminate when the engine

is started and the parking brake is

released. The LED DRL operate with the

headlight switch in the OFF (if so

equipped), , or AUTO (when the head-

lights are off) position. When you turn the

headlight switch to the

position for

full illumination, the LED lights switch

from LED DRL to the park function.

Type A (if so equipped): If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started, the LED DRL do not illuminate. The LED DRL illuminate when the parking brake is released. This feature will work in the , AUTO or OFF position. The LED DRL will remain on until the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

Type B (if so equipped): If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started, the LED DRL do not illuminate.

The LED DRL illuminate when the parking

brake is released. This feature will work in

the AUTO or

position. The LED DRL

will remain on until the ignition switch is

placed in the OFF position.

WARNING
When the LED DRL system is active with the headlight switch in the OFF position (if so equipped), tail lights on your vehicle are not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.

SIC4378
INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS CONTROL
The instrument brightness control switch (upper and lower ) can be operated when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

WAC0256X
When the instrument brightness control switch is operated, the vehicle information display switches to the brightness adjustment mode.
Push the upper switch to brighten the meter panel lights and instrument panel lights.
Push the lower switch to dim the lights.
If the bar reaches the maximum or minimum brightness, a chime will sound.
The vehicle information display returns to the normal display when the instrument brightness control switch is not operated for more than 5 seconds.

Example
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

SIC3671

Turn signal
Move the lever up or down to signal the turning direction. When the turn is completed, the turn signals cancel automatically.

Lane change signal
. Move the lever up or down until the turn signal begins to flash, but the lever does not latch, to signal a lane change. Hold the lever until the lane change is completed.
. Move the lever up or down until the turn signal begins to flash, but the

Instruments and controls 2-53

lever does not latch, and release the lever. The turn signal will automatically flash three times.
Choose the appropriate method to signal a lane change based on road and traffic conditions.

HEATED STEERING WHEEL (if so equipped)

2-54 Instruments and controls

SIC3672

Example

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)

To turn the fog lights on, turn the head-

light switch to the position, then turn

the switch to the

position. To turn

them off, turn the switch to the OFF

position.

The headlights must be on with the low beams selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog lights automatically turn off when the high beam headlights are selected.

SIC4401
The heated steering wheel system is designed to operate only when the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below 68°F (20°C).
Push the heated steering wheel switch to warm the steering wheel after the engine starts. The indicator light on the switch will illuminate.
If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below 68°F (20°C), the system will heat the steering wheel and cycle off and on to maintain a temperature above 68°F (20°C). The indicator light will remain on as long as the system is on.
Push the switch again to turn the heated steering wheel system off manually. The

HORN
indicator light will turn off. NOTE: If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is above 68°F (20°C) when the switch is turned on, the system will not heat the steering wheel. This is not a malfunction.

HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)
WARNING
Do not use or allow occupants to use the seat heater if you or the occupants cannot monitor elevated seat temperatures or have an inability to feel pain in body parts that contact the seat. Use of the seat heater by such people could result in serious injury.

SIC4444
To sound the horn, push the center pad area of the steering wheel.
WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system. Tampering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury.

CAUTION
. The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running.
. Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat.
. Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated.
. Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to the heater.
Instruments and controls 2-55

. Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth.
. When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, thinner, or any similar materials.
. If any malfunctions are found or the heated seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
2-56 Instruments and controls

3. To turn off the heater, push the heated seat switch until the indicator light turns off.
The heater is controlled by a control module, automatically adjusting the heat level to maintain comfort according to the selected heat range.
The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on.
When the vehicle's interior is warmed, or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn off the seat heater.
WAC0524X
FRONT (if so equipped)
The front seats can be warmed by built-in heaters. The switches located on the instrument panel can be operated independently of each other.
1. Start the engine.
2. Push the heated seat switch and select the desired heat range. . For high heat, push the switch once. . For medium heat, push the switch twice. . For low heat, push the switch three times. . The indicator light on the switch will illuminate depending on the heat level when the heater is on.

CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS (if so equipped)
3. To turn off the heater, return the switch to the level position. Make sure the indicator light turns off.
The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automatically turning the heater on and off. The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on.
When the vehicle's interior is warmed, or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn off the switch.

SIC2770
REAR (if so equipped)
The 2nd row outboard seats are warmed by built-in heaters. The switches located on the back side of the center console can be operated independently of each other.
1. Start the engine.
2. Select heat range.
For high heat, push the HI (High) side of the switch.
For low heat, push the LO (Low) side of the switch.
The indicator light in the switch will illuminate when the heater is on.

WAC0640X
The climate controlled seat cools down the front seats by blowing cool air from the surface of the seat. The switches located on the instrument panel can be operated independently of each other.
1. Start the engine.
2. Push the climate controlled seat switch to cool the seat. The indicator light on the corresponding switch will illuminate depending on the cool level.
3. Adjust the desired amount of air by pushing the switch again. The climate controlled seat blower remains on low speed for approximately 60 seconds after pushing the switch on.
Instruments and controls 2-57

4. When the vehicle's interior is warmed or cooled, or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn off the climate controlled seats. To turn off the climate controlled seats, push the switch until the indicator light turns off. To check the air filters for the climate controlled seat, it is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer.
WARNING
Do not use or allow occupants to use the climate controlled seats if you or the occupants cannot monitor seat temperatures or have an inability to feel pain in those body parts in contact with the seat. Use of the climate controlled seats by such people could result in serious injury.
CAUTION
. The battery could run down if the climate controlled seat is operated while the engine is not running.
2-58 Instruments and controls

. Do not use the climate controlled seat for extended periods or when no one is using the seat.
. Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated.
. Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to the climate controlled seat.
. Any liquid spilled on the seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth.
. The climate controlled seat has an air filter. Do not operate climate controlled seat without an air filter. This may result in damage to the system.
. When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, thinner, or any similar materials.
. If any malfunctions are found or the climate controlled seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING SYSTEMS SWITCH (if so equipped)
SSD0956
The warning systems switch is used to turn on and off the warning systems (Lane Departure Warning (LDW) and Blind Spot Warning (BSW) systems) that are activated using the "Driver Assistance" menu displayed in the vehicle information display. (See "Driver Assistance" (P.2-22).) When the warning systems switch is turned off, the indicator on the switch is off. The indicator will also be off if all of the warning systems are deactivated using the settings menu. The LDW system will vibrate the steering wheel and blink the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indicator light (orange) to alert the driver if the vehicle is traveling

SNOW MODE SWITCH
close to either the left or the right of a traveling lane with detectable lane markers. (See "Lane Departure Warning (LDW)" (P.5-26).)
The BSW system will turn on the side indicator lights, on the outside mirrors, if the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the detection zone. If the turn signal is activated in the direction of the detected vehicle, a chime sounds twice and the side indicator light will flash. (See "Blind Spot Warning (BSW)" (P.5-38).)

TOW MODE SWITCH

SIC4454
For driving or starting the vehicle on snowy roads or slippery areas, push on the SNOW mode switch. The SNOW mode indicator will illuminate. When the SNOW mode is activated, engine output is controlled to avoid wheel spin.
Push off the SNOW mode for normal driving.
NOTE:
When the SNOW mode is activated, the I-LI, I-BSI, and ICC systems will be turned off automatically.

SIC4474
TOW MODE should be used when pulling a heavy trailer or hauling a heavy load. Driving the vehicle in TOW MODE with no trailer/load or light trailer/light load will not cause any damage. However, fuel economy may be reduced, and the transmission/engine driving characteristics may feel unusual.
Push the TOW MODE switch to activate TOW MODE. The indicator light on the TOW MODE switch illuminates when TOW MODE is selected. Push the TOW MODE switch again to turn TOW MODE OFF.
TOW MODE is automatically canceled when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

Instruments and controls 2-59

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) OFF SWITCH

(P.5-144).)

SIC4455

The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC

OFF switch. The

indicator will illumi-

nate.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine to turn on the system. (See "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system"

2-60 Instruments and controls

TRAILER BRAKE CONTROLLER UNIT (TBCU) (if so equipped)
WAC0619X
The TBCU on the instrument panel allows the driver to adjust the braking force applied to the trailer brakes. See "Trailer Brake Controller Unit (TBCU)" (P.10-28).

REAR DOOR ALERT

The Rear Door Alert system functions under certain conditions to indicate there may be an object or passenger in the rear seat(s). Check the seat(s) before exiting the vehicle.
The Rear Door Alert system is initially enabled. The driver can disable the system using the vehicle information display. (See "Vehicle settings" (P.2-24).)
When the system is enabled:
. The system is activated when a rear door is opened and closed. When the vehicle is started and the system is activated, a visual message appears in the vehicle information display. (See "42. Rear Door Alert is activated" (P.234).)
. If a rear door is opened and closed but the vehicle is not driven, the system will not be activated. A rear door must be opened and closed and the car driven for the system to activate.
. The time interval to activate the system between when the rear door is opened and closed and the vehicle is started is about 10 minutes. A longer interval does not indicate a malfunction.

When the Rear Door Alert system is activated:
. When the driver puts the vehicle in the P (Park) position, a notification message appears in the vehicle information display with the options to "Dismiss Message" or "Disable Alert" if desired.
-- Select "Disable Alert" to temporarily disable for that stop.
-- No selection or `Dismiss Message" will keep the alert enabled for that stop.
. If the alert is enabled when a driver exits the vehicle, a message will appear in the vehicle information display that states "Check Rear Seat for All Articles."
If "Horn & Alert" setting is selected:
-- An audible horn sound will occur after a short time unless a rear door is opened and closed within a short time to deactivate the alert.
-- If the doors are locked before the alert is deactivated by opening a rear door, the horn will sound.
-- If the liftgate is opened before a rear door is opened, the horn will be delayed until after the liftgate is closed.

NOTE:
If "Alert Only" setting is selected, the message alert will still be shown in the vehicle information display but the horn will not sound.
WARNING
. If the driver selects "Disable Alert", no audible alert will be provided regardless of rear door open/close status.
. There may be times when there is an object or passenger in the rear seat(s) but the audible alert does not sound. For example, this may occur if rear seat passengers enter or exit the vehicle during a trip.
. The system does not directly detect objects or passengers in the rear seat(s). Instead, it can detect when a rear door is opened and closed, indicating that there may be something in the rear seat(s).
NOTE:
There may be times when the horn sounds but there are no objects or passengers in the rear seat(s).
Instruments and controls 2-61

POWER OUTLET

(See "42. Rear Door Alert is activated" (P.234).)

CAUTION
. Use power outlet with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.
. Avoid using power outlet when the air conditioner, headlights or rear window defroster is on.
. Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned OFF.
. When not in use, be sure to close the cap. Do not allow water or any liquid to contact the outlet.

2-62 Instruments and controls

WAC0620X
Instrument panel
The power outlet is located inside the lid. Push the lid release button up to open the lid.

Back side of front console Luggage room

Type A (if so equipped)
The power outlet is used for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones.

SIC4456 SIC4391

CAUTION
. The outlet and plug may be hot during or immediately after use.
. Do not use with accessories that exceed a combined power draw of 12 volts, 120W (10A) for all the power outlets. Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory.
. This power outlet is not designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit.
. Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may blow.

SIC2648
Main switch
Type B (if so equipped)
The power outlet (plug type) is located on the back side of the front console. It can operate when the ignition switch in the ON position and the main switch (located in the console box) is ON.
The specification of this power outlet is for use of a 120 volt, 150W (1.25A) power draw.
To turn on or off the power supply to the outlet, push the ON or OFF side of the main switch. When the switch is turned to the ON position, the indicator light will illuminate.

Instruments and controls 2-63

JVI1638X Power outlet
Pull up the cover and plug in. After using the power outlet, be sure to turn off the main switch.
CAUTION
. Do not use with accessories that exceed a 120 volt, 150W (1.25A) power draw.
. Use this power outlet with the engine running. (If the engine is stopped, this could result in a discharged battery.)
2-64 Instruments and controls

WAC0630X
USB (Universal Serial Bus) CHARGING CONNECTOR
The USB charging connector is located on the back of the center console box.
The USB charging connector can be used only for charging an external device.
Connect a USB device into the connector. Charging will start automatically (maximum output up to 5volt, 12W, 2.4A (TypeA) and 5volt, 15W, 3A (Type-C)).
The external device will be charged continuously while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Some mobile devices cannot be charged depending on their specifications.

CAUTION
. Do not force a USB device into the connector. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side-down into the connector may damage the connector. Make sure that the USB device is connected correctly into the connector.
. Do not use a reversible USB cable. Using the reversible USB cable may damage the connector.

WAC0621X
1. Lid release button 2. Charging pad 3. Indicator
WIRELESS CHARGER (if so equipped)
The wireless charger is located inside the lid. Push the lid release button up to open the lid. Place the smartphone on the pad

of the wireless charger with screen face up. Charging will start automatically. The smartphone will be charged continuously while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
WARNING
. Never put metallic materials between the wireless charger and a smartphone.
. Those who use a pacemaker or other medical equipment should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
. Never put cloth over the smartphone during charging process.
. Never charge a smartphone when it is wet.
. Never put metallic materials or small goods such as a cigarette lighter, Intelligent Key or memory drive.

CAUTION
. Do not put an RFID/NFC/credit card between the wireless charger and a smartphone. This could cause data corruption in the card.
. Do not use the wireless charger with dust accumulated or dirt on the pad.
. Do not hit the surface of the wireless charger.
. Do not spill liquid (water, drinks, etc.) on the charging pad.
. Do not use grease, oil or alcohol for cleaning charging pad.
Wireless charger Indicator
The indicator will illuminate in orange when the charging process is started. When the charging has completed, the indicator illuminates in green. If a malfunction occurs or the charging process has stopped, the indicator will blink in orange for 8 seconds then turn off.
Instruments and controls 2-65

Operation of the wireless charger
To use the wireless charger, it is necessary to properly position the smartphone on the charging pad with the screen facing up. To maximize charging performance, ensure the smartphone is fully seated on the center of the charging pad over the logo . Because the location of the power receiver may vary depending on the smartphone, you will need to try and find the area that suits your smartphone.
Because some smartphone cases or accessories may adversely affect charging, remove them before wireless charging.
Turn off the vibration function of the smartphone before wireless charging.
NOTE: . Only a Qi compatible smartphone
can be used. . The smartphone or the wireless
charger may be warmed during charging process and the charging may stop by the protection function of the smartphone or the wireless charger. This is not a malfunction. If this occurs, restart charging after the smartphone or the wireless charger cooled down. The indicator will blink in orange then turn off.
2-66 Instruments and controls

. The wireless charging process may be stopped by the status of the smartphone (battery temperature, etc.).
. If a radio noise interference occurs during charging process, put the smartphone onto the center ( logo) position of the wireless charger.
. The wireless charging process will stop during process of searching the Intelligent Key.
. The wireless charging process will not be started when a USB (Universal Serial Bus) cable is connected to the smartphone. The indicator may illuminate in orange or blink if the smartphone is put on the wireless charger with a USB cable connected. However, charging is not performed.
. Depending on the type of the smartphone, the indicator may remain illuminated in orange even when the charging process has been completed.
FCC ID: BEJWC500MNM
IC: 2703H-WC500MNM
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
RF Radiation Exposure Statement: This equipment complies with FCC RF Radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This device and its antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 15cm between the radiator and your body.
ISED Compliance Statement
This device complies with RSS-Gen of IC Rules
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference

EMERGENCY CALL (SOS) BUTTON (if so equipped)

that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications made to this device, not expressly approved by LG Vehicle Components Company, will void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
ISED RF Radiation Exposure Statement: This equipment complies with ISED RF Radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This device and its antenna must not be colocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. This equipment should be installed to operate with a minimum distance of 15cm between the radiator and the enduser's body and arms.

EMERGENCY SUPPORT
NissanConnect® Services provide various services to support dealing with emergencies of the subscribed vehicle and the driver.
For example, in case of an illness or serious injury, you can seek support by pushing the in-vehicle Emergency Call (SOS) button and connecting to the NissanConnect® Services Response Center. The NissanConnect® Services Response Center can specify the location of the vehicle via GPS, and the information will be sent to the police or other agencies as needed.
For information about other NissanConnect® Services emergency support related services, contact the NissanConnect® Customer Support line at 1-855-426-6628 or refer to the NissanConnect® Services website www.nissanusa.com/connect (for U.S.) or www.nissan. ca/nissanconnect (English)/www.nissan. ca/nissanconnect/fr (French) (for Canada).

WARNING
. Please note that the Automatic Collision Notification service and Emergency Call function cannot

be used in the following conditions:
-- Emergency functions and services will not be available without a paid subscription to NissanConnect® Services.
-- The NissanConnect® Services network system is disabled.
-- The vehicle moves outside the service area where the TCU (Telematics Control Unit) is connected to the system.
-- The vehicle is outside the area where the cellular network service is receivable.
-- The vehicle is in a location with poor signal reception such as tunnels, underground parking garages, behind buildings or in mountainous areas.
-- The line is busy.
-- The TCU (Telematics Control Unit) or other systems of your vehicle are not working properly.
-- It may not be possible to make an emergency call depending on the severity of a
Instruments and controls 2-67

collision and/or emergency.
. Park the vehicle in a safe location and set the parking brake before operating the Emergency Call (SOS) button.
. Only use this service in case of an emergency. There may be a penalty for inappropriate use of the service.
. Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Individuals who use a pacemaker should contact the device manufacturer regarding any possible effects before using the system.
. The TCU (Telematics Control Unit) antenna is installed inside the upper central part of the instrument panel. An occupant should not get any closer to the antenna than specified by the pacemaker manufacturer. The radio waves from the TCU antenna may adversely affect the operation of the pacemaker while using the NissanConnect® Services.
2-68 Instruments and controls

WAC0510X
Making an emergency call
The Emergency Call (SOS) button is located near the map light.
1. Push the Emergency Call (SOS) button to make an emergency call.
2. When the line is connected, speak to the Response Specialist.
If you want to cancel the emergency call, push and hold the Emergency Call (SOS) button for a few seconds.
NOTE: . After the Emergency Call (SOS) but-
ton is pushed, it may take some time until the system initiates connection, depending on the technical

environment and whether the TCU (Telematics Control Unit) is being used by other services.
. An indicator light on the Emergency Call (SOS) button shows the readiness of the emergency support system. If the indicator light is not illuminated, pushing the Emergency Call (SOS) button does not connect your vehicle to the Response Specialist.
The indicator light blinks while connected to the NissanConnect® Services Response Center. . Even when the indicator light is illuminated, connection to the NissanConnect® Services Response Center may not be possible. If this occurs in an emergency situation, contact the authorities by other means.
. To avoid disconnecting the line, keep the engine running during an emergency call, if it is safe to do so.

STORAGE
CUP HOLDERS
CAUTION
. Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your passenger.
. Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard objects can injure you in an accident.
. Do not recline the rear seatback when you use the cup holders on the rear armrest. Doing so may cause the beverages to spill over, and if they are hot, they may scald the passengers.

WAC0622X
Front
To open the cup holder, push the lid . To close, lower the cup holder lid and push it down lightly. The cup holder is not designed to store personal items.

SIC3118
2nd row seat
Type A (if so equipped): To open the cup holder, push the lid . The flap will be folded down when inserting a large container. To close, lower the cup holder lid and push it down lightly. To clean the cup holder, pull up the inside tray and remove it. The cup holder is not designed to store personal items.

Instruments and controls 2-69

WAC0623X
Type B (if so equipped): The cup holder is located in the rear folddown armrest.

3rd row seat

2-70 Instruments and controls

SIC4419

Soft bottle holder

SIC4501

CAUTION
. Do not use bottle holder for any other objects that could be thrown about in the vehicle and possibly injure people during sudden braking or an accident.
. Do not use bottle holder for open liquid containers.

CAUTION
. Do not use for anything other than glasses.
. Do not leave glasses in the sunglasses holder while parking in direct sunlight. The heat may damage the glasses.

JVI0619X
SUNGLASSES HOLDER
To open the sunglasses holder, push and release. Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder.
WARNING
Keep the sunglasses holder closed while driving to avoid obstructing the driver's view and to help prevent an accident.

GLOVE BOX

SIC4393

WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.
To open the glove box, pull the handle . To close, push the lid in until the lock latches. To lock /unlock the glove box, use the mechanical key. For the mechanical key usage, see "Keys" (P.3-2).

Instruments and controls 2-71

CONSOLE BOX Front
To open the console box lid from the front seat, push up the knob and pull up the lid. To open the console box lid from the 2nd row seat, push the knob . To close, push the lid down until the lock latches.
2-72 Instruments and controls

JVI1509X

SIC4422
Rear (if so equipped)
To open the lid, push the knob up and pull up the lid. To close, push the lid down until the lock latches.

SIC4423
Pocket: To open the pocket, pull the knob . To close, push the lid until the lock latches.

SIC3505
COAT HOOKS
The coat hooks are equipped at the rear assist grips.
CAUTION
Do not place items which are more than 2 lb (1 kg) on the hook.

LUGGAGE HOOKS

SIC4446

WARNING
. Always make sure that the cargo is properly secured. Use the suitable ropes and hooks.
. Unsecured cargo can become dangerous in an accident or sudden stop.
. Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage area. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
Instruments and controls 2-73

more likely to be seriously injured or killed. . Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. . The child restraint top tether strap may be damaged by contact with items in the cargo area. Secure any items in the cargo area. Your child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the top tether strap is damaged. . Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
CAUTION
Do not apply a total load of more than 22 lb (10 kg) or 7 lb (3 kg) to the hook.
2-74 Instruments and controls

JVI1204X
CARGO FLOOR BOX
Push the handle to open the cargo floor board .

WAC0626X
ROOF RACK (if so equipped)
Do not apply any load directly to the roof side rails. Cross bars must be installed before applying load/cargo/luggage to the roof of the vehicle. Genuine NISSAN accessory cross bars are available through a NISSAN dealer. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for additional information.
The service load capacity for the roof side rails is 221 lb (100 kg), however do not exceed the accessory cross bars load capacity.
Be careful that your vehicle does not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or its Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR front and rear). The GVWR and GAWR are located on the F.M.V.S.S. or C.V. M.S.S. certification label (located on the driver's door pillar). For additional information regarding GVWR and GAWR, refer to "Vehicle loading information" (P.10-15).
WARNING
. Always install the cross bars onto the roof side rails before loading cargo of any kind. Loading cargo directly onto the roof side rails or the vehicle's roof may cause vehicle damage.
. Drive extra carefully when the vehicle is loaded at or near the cargo carrying capacity, especially if the significant portion of that load is carried on the roof rack.
. Heavy loading of the roof rack has the potential to affect the vehicle stability and handling during sudden or unusual handling maneuvers.
. Roof rack load should be evenly distributed.
. Do not exceed maximum roof rack load weight capacity.

. Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

WINDOWS
The sound with a feeling of oppression may occur with the rear windows open and front windows close. To reduce the sound, slightly open either a front window or the moonroof (if so equipped).
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING
The driver is always responsible for all the power window operation including passenger's operation. Be sure to observe the following warnings for safety.
. Never allow anyone to extend any portion of their body or objects out of the opening while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise they may be seriously damaged by coming into contact with objects outside the vehicle or when abruptly braking.
. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc. inside the vehicle before operating the power windows. Do not intentionally activate the auto-reverse function. If their hands or faces are caught in the windows, it could cause serious injury.
Instruments and controls 2-75

. Never allow children to operate the power window. Improper operation by children could lead to an accident. Depress the window lock button since children or other persons could be caught in the power window and this may cause serious damage.
. When operating the power windows, let children know it and make sure that their hands, arms, etc. are not placed near the power windows. Otherwise they may be caught in the power windows.
. Make sure that the ignition switch is in the OFF position and do not leave the Intelligent Key and children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.
. To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Addi-
2-76 Instruments and controls

tionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.

The power windows operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position, or for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. If the driver's or front passenger's door is opened during this period of time, power to the windows is canceled.

SIC4352
1. Driver side window 2. Front passenger side window 3. Rear left passenger side window 4. Rear right passenger side window 5. Window lock button
Main power window switch (driver's side)
To open or close the window, push down or pull up the switch and hold it. The
main switch (driver side switches) will open or close all the windows.

Locking rear passenger's windows
When the window lock button is pushed, the rear passenger's windows cannot be operated with the rear passenger's power window switch. The rear passenger's windows can only be operated with the main switch (driver side switches). To cancel the passenger's windows lock, push the window lock button again.

SIC4353
Example
Passenger side power window switch
The passenger's switch can control its corresponding window. When the window lock button on the driver's switch is pushed, the rear passenger's switch cannot be operated.

SIC4354
Automatic operation
To fully open or close the window, completely push down or pull up the switch and release it; it need not be held. The window will automatically open or close all the way. To stop the window, just push or lift the switch in the opposite direction.
A light push or pull on the switch will cause the window to open or close until the switch is released.

Instruments and controls 2-77

MOONROOF (if so equipped)

Auto reverse function
WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the window.
If the control unit detects something caught in the window as it is closing, the window will be immediately lowered. The auto reverse function can be activated when the window is closed by automatic operation when the ignition switch is in the ON position or for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position. Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window occurs.
2-78 Instruments and controls

If the windows do not close automatically
If the power window automatic function (closing only) does not operate properly, perform the following procedure to initialize the power window system.
1. Push the ignition switch to start the engine.
2. Close the door.
3. After starting the engine, open the window completely by operating the power window switch.
4. Pull the power window switch and hold it to close the window, and then hold the switch more than 3 seconds after the window is closed completely.
5. Release the power window switch. Operate the window by the automatic function to confirm the initialization is complete.
6. Perform steps 2 through 5 above for other windows.
If the power window automatic function does not operate properly after performing the procedure above, have your vehicle checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING
. In an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open moonroof. Always use seat belts and child restraints.
. Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the moonroof opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the moonroof is closing.
CAUTION
. Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand from the moonroof before opening.
. Do not place any heavy object on the moonroof or surrounding area.
POWER MOONROOF
The moonroof only operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position. The moonroof is operational for about 45 seconds, even if the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position. If the driver's door or the passenger's door is opened

during this period of about 45 seconds, power to the moonroof is canceled.

Sliding the moonroof
To fully open or close the moonroof, push the switch to the OPEN or CLOSE position and release it; it need not be held. The roof will automatically open or close all the way. To stop the roof, push the switch once more while it is opening or closing.
Auto reverse function

WARNING

WAC0653X
Sunshade
The sunshade will open automatically when the moonroof is opened. However, it must be closed manually.
Tilting the moonroof
To tilt up, first close the moonroof, then push the moonroof switch to the up position . To tilt down the moonroof, push the switch to the TILT DOWN position .

There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the moonroof.
If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof when it is closing, the moonroof will be immediately opened.
The auto reverse function can be activated when the moonroof is closed by automatic operation when the ignition switch is in the ON position or for about 45 seconds after the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position.
If the moonroof cannot be closed auto-
Instruments and controls 2-79

WELCOME LIGHT (if so equipped)

matically when the auto reverse function activates due to a malfunction, push and hold the switch to the CLOSE position.
Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the moonroof occurs.
If the moonroof does not operate
If the moonroof does not operate properly, perform the following procedure to initialize the moonroof operation system.
1. If the moonroof is open, close it fully by repeatedly pushing the moonroof switch to the CLOSE position.
2. Push and hold the switch to the CLOSE position.
3. Release the moonroof switch after the moonroof moves slightly up and down.
4. Push and hold the switch to the OPEN position to fully tilt the moonroof
down.
5. Check if the moonroof switch operates normally.
If the moonroof does not operate properly after performing the procedure above, have your moonroof checked and repaired. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
2-80 Instruments and controls

SIC3642
To activate or deactivate the welcome light function, perform the following procedure.
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
2. Open the driver's side door.
3. Within 20 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, push the door open request switch on the driver's side door handle for more than 5 seconds with the driver's door open.
4. A chime sounds when the setting is completed.
Once the welcome light function is active, the puddle light and the passenger

cabin illumination will illuminate when you approach the vehicle with the Intelligent Key (within approximately 3.3 ft (1 m) of the antenna built inside the door handles) and the following conditions are met.
. All doors are closed and locked.
. The ignition switch is in the LOCK or OFF position.
. The Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle.
. The puddle light operates within a set duration.
BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM
The welcome light function will be deactivated automatically to prevent battery discharge under the following conditions. To activate the welcome light function again, unlock any door.
. If the welcome light function does not operate within a set duration. Note that the duration is set to 9 days as the factory default setting.
. If the welcome light function is activated 15 consecutive times when you approach and leave the vehicle with the Intelligent Key without the doors being unlocked.

INTERIOR LIGHTS
CAUTION
. Turn off the lights when you leave the vehicle.
. Do not use the lights for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

JVI0760X

INTERIOR LIGHT SWITCH

ON switch
When the ON switch is pushed in, the map lights and rear personal lights will illuminate.

DOOR OFF switch

When the switch is not pushed in, the map lights and rear personal lights will illuminate for a period of time under the following conditions:

. when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

. when doors are unlocked by pushing

the UNLOCK

button on the In-

telligent Key or door handle request switch with the ignition switch in the OFF position.
. when any door is opened and then closed with the ignition switch in the OFF position.
. when any door is opened with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position.
-- The lights will remain on while the door is opened. When the door is closed, the lights will turn off.
When the "Auto Room Lamp" feature is set to be OFF (see "Vehicle settings" (P.224)), the lights will illuminate under the following condition:
. any door is opened with the ignition switch in any position
-- remain on while the door is opened. When the door is closed, the lights go off.
When the switch is pushed in, the map lights and rear personal lights will not illuminate under the above condition.

Instruments and controls 2-81

JVI0759X
CONSOLE LIGHT
The console light will turn on whenever the front parking lights or headlights are illuminated.

JVI0758X
MAP LIGHTS
Push the button as illustrated to turn the light on or off.

SIC3250
REAR PERSONAL LIGHTS
Push the button as illustrated to turn the light on or off.

2-82 Instruments and controls

VANITY MIRROR LIGHTS
SIC4448
The light on the vanity mirror will turn on when the cover on the vanity mirror is opened. When the cover is closed, the light will turn off. The lights will also turn off after a period of time when the lights remain illuminated to prevent the battery from becoming discharged.

CARGO LIGHT
SIC4418
The cargo light switch has three positions: ON , center and OFF . ON position When the switch is in the ON position , the cargo light will illuminate. Center position When the switch is in the center position
, the cargo light will illuminate when the liftgate is opened. OFF position When the switch is in the OFF position , the cargo light will not illuminate.

HomeLink® UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER (Type A) (if so equipped)
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand-held transmitters into one built-in device.
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:
. Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF) devices such as garage doors, gates, home and office lighting, entry door locks and security systems.
. Is powered by your vehicle's battery. No separate batteries are required. If the vehicle's battery is discharged or is disconnected, HomeLink® will retain all programming.
When the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is programmed, retain the original transmitter for future programming procedures (Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink® Universal Transceiver buttons should be erased for security purposes. For additional information, refer to "Programming HomeLink®" (P.2-84).
WARNING
. Do not use the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety
Instruments and controls 2-83

stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards. (These standards became effective for opener models manufactured after April 1, 1982). A garage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse, does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death.
. During the programming procedure your garage door or security gate will open and close (if the transmitter is within range). Make sure that people or objects are clear of the garage door, gate, etc. that you are programming.
. Your vehicle's engine should be turned off while programming the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver. Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death.
2-84 Instruments and controls

PROGRAMMING HomeLink®
The following steps show generic instructions how to program a HomeLink® button. If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink. com/nissan or call 1-800-355-3515.
NOTE:
It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink® for quicker programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency.
1. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1-3 in (26-76 mm) away from the HomeLink® surface, keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.

JVI0428X
2. Using both hands, simultaneously press and hold the desired HomeLink® button and handheld transmitter button. DO NOT release until the HomeLink® indicator light flashes slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. (The rapid flashing indicates successful programming.)
NOTE: Some devices to be programmed may require you to replace Step 2 with the cycling procedure noted in the "Programming HomeLink® for Canadian customers and gate openers" (P.2-85).

JVI0429X
3. Press the button for 2 seconds up to 3 times. . If the garage door responds, programing is completed. . If the garage door does not respond, continue with Steps 4-6 for a rolling code device. A second person may make the following steps easier. Use a ladder or other device. Do not stand on your vehicle to perform the next steps.
4. At the receiver located on the garage door opener motor in the garage, locate the "Learn" or "Set" button (the name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer but it is usually

located near where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the unit). If there is difficulty locating the button, reference the garage door opener's manual.
5. Press and release the "Learn" or "Set" button.
NOTE: Once the button is pressed, you have approximately 30 seconds to initiate the next step.
6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button for two seconds and release. Repeat the "press/hold/release" sequence up to 3 times to complete the programming process. HomeLink® should now activate your rolling code equipped device.
7. If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at: www. homelink.com/nissan or call 1-800355-3515.

PROGRAMMING HomeLink® FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATE OPENERS
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to "time-out" (or quit) after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to "time-out" in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator or garage door opener by using the "Programming HomeLink®" procedures, replace "Programming HomeLink®" Step 2 with the following:
NOTE:
When programming a garage door opener, etc., unplug the device during the "cycling" process to prevent possible damage to the garage door opener components.
Step 2: Using both hands, simultaneously press and hold the desired HomeLink® button and the hand-held transmitter button. During programming, your handheld transmitter may automatically stop transmitting. Continue to press and hold the desired HomeLink® button while you press and re-press ("cycle") your hand-
Instruments and controls 2-85

held transmitter every two seconds until the frequency signal has been learned. The HomeLink® indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds upon successful programming. DO NOT release until the HomeLink® indicator light flashes slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. The rapid flashing indicates successful programming.
Proceed with "Programming HomeLink®" step 3 to complete.
Remember to plug the device back in when programming is completed.
OPERATING THE HomeLink® UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, after it is programmed, can be used to activate the programmed device. To operate, simply press and release the appropriate programmed HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button. The amber indicator light will illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.
For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time.
2-86 Instruments and controls

PROGRAMMING TROUBLESHOOTING
If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn the hand-held transmitter information:
. replace the hand-held transmitter batteries with new batteries.
. position the hand-held transmitter with its battery area facing away from the HomeLink® surface.
. press and hold both the HomeLink® and hand-held transmitter buttons without interruption.
. position the hand-held transmitter 1-3 in (26-76 mm) away from the HomeLink® surface. Hold the transmitter in that position for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink® is not programmed within that time, try holding the transmitter in another position keeping the indicator light in view at all times.
If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.com/nissan or 1-800355-3515.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED INFORMATION
The following procedure clears the programmed information from both buttons. Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However, individual buttons can be reprogrammed, see "Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button" (P.2-86).
To clear all programming
1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink® buttons until the indicator light begins to flash in approximately 10 seconds. Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
HomeLink® is now in the programming mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with "Programming HomeLink®" - Step 1.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HomeLink® BUTTON
To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button, complete the following.
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. Do not release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the HomeLink® button, proceed with

"Programming HomeLink®" - Step 1.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com/ nissan or 1-800-355-3515.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed. The new device can be activated by pushing the HomeLink® button that was just programmed. This procedure will not affect any other programmed HomeLink® buttons.
IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN
If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the codes of any non-rolling code device that has been programmed into HomeLink®. Consult the Owner's Manual of each device or call the manufacturer or dealer of those devices for additional information.
When your vehicle is recovered, you will need to reprogram the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver with your new transmitter information.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

HomeLink® UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER (Type B) (if so equipped)
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand-held transmitters into one built-in device.
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:
. Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF) devices such as garage doors, gates, home and office lighting, entry door locks and security systems.
. Is powered by your vehicle's battery. No separate batteries are required. If the vehicle's battery is discharged or is disconnected, HomeLink® will retain all programming.
When the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is programmed, retain the original transmitter for future programming procedures (Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink® Universal Transceiver buttons should be erased for security purposes. For additional information, refer to "Programming HomeLink®" (P.2-88).
WARNING
. Do not use the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety
Instruments and controls 2-87

NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with Intelligent Rear View Mirror, you may have to complete additional programming to enable Two-Way Communication. The mirror can provide the status of your garage door (open/close).
PROGRAMMING HomeLink®
The following steps show generic instructions how to program a HomeLink® button. If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink. com/nissan or call 1-800-355-3515.
NOTE:
It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink® for quicker programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency.

2-88 Instruments and controls

WAC0378X
HomeLink® buttons (1-3) Indicator light (appears above each HomeLink® button) Status display (where the current condition of the HomeLink® is displayed)

WAC0381X
1. Press and release the HomeLink® button that you would like to program. The HomeLink® indicator light will flash in orange slowly and "TRAINING" is displayed on the lower right of the mirror (if not, refer to "Clearing the programmed information" (P.2-92).).
2. Position the hand-held transmitter (garage door opener remote) 1-3 inches (2-8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button that you would light to program.
NOTE: Some hand-held transmitter (garage door opener remotes) may actually train better at a distance of 6-

12 inches (15-20 cm). Keep this in mind if you have difficulty with the programming process.
3. While the HomeLink® indicator light is flashing in orange, press and hold the hand-held transmitter button. Continue pressing the hand-held transmitter button until the HomeLink® indicator light changes from orange to green and "TRAINED" is displayed on the lower right of the mirror. You may now release the hand-held transmitter button.
NOTE: Some devices to be programmed may require you to replace the Step 3 with the cycling procedure noted in "Programming HomeLink® for Canadian customers and gate openers" (P.2-91).
4. Wait until your garage door has stopped moving before completing the next steps.
5. Press the HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light.
. If the indicator light remains constant green, your device should operate when the HomeLink® button is pressed. At this point, if your device operates, programming is complete.

. If the indicator light rapidly flashes in green, firmly press, hold for two seconds and release the HomeLink® button up to three times to complete the programming process. Do not press the HomeLink® button rapidly. At this point if your device operates, programming is complete. If the device does not operate or operates but no door status indicator with TwoWay Communication*1, continue with the next step of the programming instructions.
6. At the garage door opener motor (security gate motor, etc.), locate the "Learn" or "Set" button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit (see the device's manual to identify this button.). The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.
NOTE: A ladder and/or second person may simplify the following steps. Do not stand on your vehicle to perform the next steps.
Instruments and controls 2-89

WAC0258X
Example
7. Firmly press and release the "Learn" or "Set" button until the indicator illuminates. Once the button is pressed, you have approximately 30 seconds to initiate the next step.
8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and release the HomeLink® button up to three times. Do not press the HomeLink® button rapidly. At this point programming is complete and your device should operate when the HomeLink® button is pressed and released.
9. If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to the
2-90 Instruments and controls

HomeLink® web site at: www. homelink.com/nissan or call 1-800355-3515.
*1: Programming Two-Way Communication
To check if your garage door opener is compatible with this feature, refer to the homelink.com/compatible/two-waycommunication website. If your garage door opener has this functionality, HomeLink® mirror garage door status indicators may appear after completion of programming.
NOTE:
It is possible for the HomeLink® to stop working with the garage door system shortly after initial programming if the Two-Way Communication programming is not completed. If this is the case, following the steps below will restore door operation.
1. In your vehicle, press and hold the trained HomeLink® button for 2 seconds, then release. Confirm that the garage door is moving. When the garage door stops, you will have one minute to complete the following steps:

NOTE: A ladder and/or second person may simplify the following steps. Do not stand on your vehicle to perform the next steps.
2. On your garage door opener in your garage, locate the "Learn" or "Set" button (usually near where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener). If there is difficulty locating this button, refer to the device's owner's manual.
3. Press and release the "Learn" or "Set" button.
4. A light on your garage door opener may flash, and your two-way HomeLink® indicators in your vehicle may flash, confirming completion of the process.
5. Pressing the trained HomeLink® button will now activate your garage door. The status indicators will show when the door is moving.
6. Your two-way enrollment is now complete.

USING THE GARAGE DOOR TWOWAY COMMUNICATION
HomeLink® has the function of communicating with garage door opener systems. If your garage door openers are compatible with HomeLink®, the HomeLink® can:
. receive and display "closing" or "opening" status from your garage door opener.
. recall and display the garage door being "closed" or "opened".
HomeLink® can receive the status from a garage door opener at a range up to 820 ft (250 m), but it varies depending on the environment. You may need to reduce vehicle speed to successfully receive the garage door opener communication.

WAC0379X
Using two-way communication
Press and hold the HomeLink® buttons (1 and 2) simultaneously for 2 seconds to recall and display the last recorded garage door status communicated to HomeLink®. HomeLink® will display the last recorded status for 3 seconds.
If two-way communication programming is successful, HomeLink® will display the status of your garage door opener with the status indicator , which changes depending on the status. The garage door opener status indicator shows the garage door opener status as follows:
Flashing in orange Closing

Flashing in orange Opening
Illuminating in green Closed
Illuminating in green Opened
The status indicator stops to flash after an open/close signal is received or no signal is received within 30 seconds from the garage door opener.
PROGRAMMING HomeLink® FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATE OPENERS
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to "time-out" (or quit) after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to "time-out" in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator or garage door opener by using the "Programming HomeLink®" procedures, replace "Programming HomeLink®" Step 3 with the following:
NOTE:
When programming a garage door opener, etc., unplug the device during the "cycling" process to prevent possible damage to the device components.
Step 3: While the HomeLink® indicator
Instruments and controls 2-91

light is flashing in orange, press and release ("cycling") the hand-held transmitter button every 2 seconds. Continue to press and release the hand-held transmitter button until the HomeLink® indicator light changes from orange to green. When the indicator light illuminates in green, hand-held transmitter button may be released.

Proceed with "Programming HomeLink®" step 4 to complete.

Remember to plug the device back in when programming is completed.

OPERATING THE HomeLink® UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver,

after it is programmed, can be used to

activate the programmed device. To op-

erate, firmly press the appropriate pro-

grammed HomeLink® button. The

indicator light will illuminate in green with

three parenthesis

on the mirror

while the signal is being transmitted.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLESHOOTING

If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn the hand-held transmitter information:

. replace the hand-held transmitter batteries with new batteries.

2-92 Instruments and controls

. position the hand-held transmitter with its battery area facing away from the HomeLink® button.
. press and hold the HomeLink® button and hand-held transmitter button in each step without interruption.
. position the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (2 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button. Hold the transmitter in that position for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink® is not programmed within that time, try holding the transmitter in another position for example, 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) away, keeping the HomeLink® button in view at all times.
If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.com/nissan or 1-800355-3515.
CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED INFORMATION
The following procedure clears the programmed information from three buttons. Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However, individual buttons can be reprogrammed, see "Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button" (P.2-92).

To clear all programming
1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink® buttons until the indicator light begins to flash in green and "CLEARED" is displayed on the mirror, in approximately 10 seconds. Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
HomeLink® is now in the programming mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with "Programming HomeLink®" - Step 1.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HomeLink® BUTTON
To reprogram a HomeLink® button, complete the following.
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. DO NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will illuminate in green, and after 20 seconds it will begin to flash in orange and "TRAINING" is displayed on the mirror.
3. Release the HomeLink® button and proceed with "Programming HomeLink®" -- Step 3.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com/ nissan or 1-800-355-3515.
The HomeLink® button has now been reprogrammed. The new device can be

activated by pressing the HomeLink® button that was just programmed. This procedure will not affect any other programmed HomeLink® buttons.
If a new device is not programmed to the HomeLink® button, it will revert to the previously stored programming.
IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN
If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the codes of any non-rolling code device that has been programmed into HomeLink®. Consult the Owner's Manual of each device or call the manufacturer or dealer of those devices for additional information.
When your vehicle is recovered, you will need to reprogram the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver with your new transmitter information.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Instruments and controls 2-93

MEMO 2-94 Instruments and controls

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys ......................................................................................................... 3-2 Intelligent Key ........................................................................... 3-2 Valet hand-off ........................................................................... 3-4
Doors ...................................................................................................... 3-4 Locking with mechanical key ...................................... 3-4 Opening and closing windows with the mechanical key ........................................................................ 3-5 Locking with inside lock knob ..................................... 3-5 Locking with power door lock switch................... 3-5 Automatic door locks ......................................................... 3-6 Child safety rear door lock ........................................... 3-6
Intelligent Key system .............................................................. 3-7 Intelligent Key operating range ................................. 3-9 Door locks/unlocks precaution .................................. 3-9 Intelligent Key operation .............................................. 3-10 Battery saver system ....................................................... 3-12 Warning signals .................................................................... 3-12 Troubleshooting guide ................................................... 3-13
Remote keyless entry system ......................................... 3-15 How to use remote keyless entry system ...... 3-16
Remote engine start (if so equipped) ....................... 3-19 Remote engine start operating range............... 3-19 Remote starting the engine ....................................... 3-19 Extending engine run time ......................................... 3-20

Canceling a remote engine start ........................ 3-20 Conditions the remote engine start will not work .................................................................................. 3-20 Hood .................................................................................................... 3-21 Liftgate .............................................................................................. 3-22 Operating manual liftgate ......................................... 3-22 Operating power liftgate (if so equipped) ...... 3-22 Auto closure ........................................................................ 3-25 Liftgate release lever ..................................................... 3-26 Fuel-filler door ............................................................................. 3-26 Opening the fuel-filler door ...................................... 3-26 Fuel-filler cap ....................................................................... 3-26 Tilt/telescopic steering ........................................................ 3-29 Electric operation ............................................................. 3-29 Sun visors ........................................................................................ 3-29 Mirrors ................................................................................................ 3-30 Inside mirror ......................................................................... 3-30 Outside mirrors .................................................................. 3-38 Vanity mirror ........................................................................ 3-40 Memory seat (if so equipped) ......................................... 3-40 Entry/exit function .......................................................... 3-40 Memory storage ................................................................ 3-41 Setting memory function........................................... 3-42 System operation ............................................................. 3-42

KEYS
A key number plate is supplied with your keys. Record the key number and keep it in a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key number. NISSAN does not record any key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate. A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from. If you still have a key, it can be duplicated without knowing the key number.
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped)

JVP0155X SPA2717

SPA2406
Type C (if so equipped)
1. Intelligent Key (2)
2. Mechanical key (inside Intelligent Key) (2)
3. Key number plate (1)
INTELLIGENT KEY
Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent Keys which are registered to your vehicle's Intelligent Key system components and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System components. As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. The new keys must be registered by a NISSAN dealer prior to use with the Intelligent Key system and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System of your vehicle. Since the registration process requires erasing all memory in the

Intelligent Key components when registering new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION
. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you when driving. The Intelligent Key is a precision device with a built-in transmitter. To avoid damaging it, please note the following.
-- The Intelligent Key is water resistant; however, wetting may damage the Intelligent Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry.
-- Do not bend, drop or strike it against another object.
-- If the outside temperature is below 14°F (-10°C), the battery of the Intelligent Key may not function properly.
-- Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in a place where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).

-- Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key.
-- Do not use a magnet key holder.
-- Do not place the Intelligent Key near an electric appliance such as a television set or personal computer.
-- Do not allow the Intelligent Key to come into contact with water or salt water, and do not wash it in a washing machine. This could affect the system function.
. If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key. This will prevent the Intelligent Key from unauthorized use to unlock the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, it is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer.

SPA2033
Mechanical key
To remove the mechanical key, release the lock knob at the back of the Intelligent Key. To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to the lock position. Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors and the glove box. See "Doors" (P.3-4) and "Storage" (P.2-69).

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

DOORS

CAUTION
Always carry the mechanical key installed in the Intelligent Key.
VALET HAND-OFF
When you have to leave a key with a valet, give them the Intelligent Key itself and keep the mechanical key with you to protect your belongings. To prevent the glove box from being opened during valet hand-off, follow the procedures below. 1. Remove the mechanical key from the
Intelligent Key. 2. Lock the glove box with the mechan-
ical key. 3. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet,
keeping the mechanical key in your pocket or bag for insertion into the Intelligent Key when you retrieve your vehicle. See "Storage" (P.2-69).
3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WARNING
. Always have the doors locked while driving. Along with the use of seat belts, this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle. This also helps keep children and others from unintentionally opening the doors, and will help keep out intruders.
. Before opening any door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic.
. To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.

SPA2457B
LOCKING WITH MECHANICAL KEY
The power door lock system allows you to lock or unlock all doors simultaneously using the mechanical key.
. Turning the driver's door key cylinder to the front of the vehicle will lock all doors.
. Turning the driver's door key cylinder once to the rear of the vehicle will unlock the driver's door. After returning the key to the neutral position , turning it to the rear again within 5 seconds will unlock all doors.
. You can switch the lock system to the mode that allows you to open all the doors when the key is turned once.

(See "Vehicle settings" (P.2-24).)
OPENING AND CLOSING WINDOWS WITH THE MECHANICAL KEY
The driver's door key operation also allows you to open and close all door windows.
To open the windows, turn the driver's door key cylinder to the rear of the vehicle for longer than 1 second. The door is unlocked and the window keeps opening while turning the key.
This function can also be performed by pushing and holding the door UNLOCK button of the Intelligent Key. (See "Remote keyless entry system" (P.3-15).)
To close the windows, turn the driver's door key cylinder to the front of the vehicle for longer than 1 second. The door is locked and the window keeps closing while turning the key.

SPA2744
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB
To lock the door individually, move the inside lock knob to the lock position . To unlock, move the inside lock knob to the unlock position . Be sure not to leave the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle.

JVP0319X
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
Operating the power door lock switch will lock or unlock all the doors. The switches are located on the driver's and front passenger's door armrests.
To lock the doors, push the power door lock switch to the lock position .
Be sure not to leave the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle.
To unlock the doors including the fuelfiller door, push the power door lock switch to the unlock position .

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

Lockout protection
When the power door lock switch (driver or front passenger) is moved to the lock position with any door open, all doors will lock and unlock automatically. With the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle and any door open, all doors will unlock automatically and a chime will sound after the door is closed.
These functions help to prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked inside the vehicle.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS
. All doors lock automatically when the vehicle speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).
. All doors unlock automatically when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position or when the shift lever is moved to the P (Park) position, if selected.
The automatic unlock function can be deactivated or activated. To deactivate or activate the automatic door unlock system, perform the following procedure:
1. Close all doors.
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
3. Within 20 seconds of performing Step 2, push and hold the power door lock
3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

switch to the

position (UNLOCK)

for more than 5 seconds.

4. When activated, the hazard indicator will flash twice. When deactivated, the hazard indicator will flash once.

5. The ignition switch must be placed in the OFF and ON position again between each setting change.

When the automatic door unlock system is deactivated, the doors do not unlock when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. To unlock the door manually, use the inside lock knob or the power door lock switch (driver's or front passenger's side).

SPA2745
CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
Child safety rear door locks help prevent doors from being opened accidentally, especially when small children are in the vehicle.
When the levers are in the lock position , the rear doors can be opened only
from the outside.
To disengage, move the levers to the unlock position .

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM

WARNING
. Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
. The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves when the buttons are pushed. The FAA advises that the radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and communication systems. Do not operate the Intelligent Key while on an airplane. Make sure the buttons are not operated unintentionally when the unit is stored during a flight.
The Intelligent Key system can operate all the door locks using the remote controller function or pushing the request switch on the vehicle without taking the key out from a pocket or purse. The operating environment and/or conditions may affect the Intelligent Key system operation.
Be sure to read the following before using the Intelligent Key system.

CAUTION
. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you when operating the vehicle.
. Never leave the Intelligent Key in the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
The Intelligent Key is always communicating with the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intelligent Key system transmits weak radio waves. Environmental conditions may interfere with the operation of the Intelligent Key system under the following operating conditions.
. When operating near a location where strong radio waves are transmitted, such as a TV tower, power station and broadcasting station.
. When in possession of wireless equipment, such as a cellular telephone, transceiver, and CB radio.
. When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or covered by metallic materials.
. When any type of radio wave remote control is used nearby.
. When the Intelligent Key is placed near an electric appliance such as a personal computer.

. When the vehicle is parked near a parking meter.
In such cases, correct the operating conditions before using the Intelligent Key function or use the mechanical key.
Although the life of the battery varies depending on the operating conditions, the battery's life is approximately 2 years. If the battery is discharged, replace it with a new one.
Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving radio waves, if the key is left near equipment which transmits strong radio waves, such as signals from a TV and personal computer, the battery life may become shorter.
For information regarding replacement of a battery, see "Intelligent Key battery replacement" (P.8-21).
As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. For information about the purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION
. Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which contains electrical components, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

affect the system function.
. Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
. Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply against another object.
. Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key.
. Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry.
. If the outside temperature is below 14°F (-10°C), the battery of the Intelligent Key may not function properly.
. Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).
. Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet.
. Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field, such as a TV, audio equipment and personal computers or wireless charger (if so equipped).

of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, it is recommended that you contact a NISSAN dealer.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code
3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the request switch .
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key system's operating range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not function properly.
The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm) from each request switch .
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the

SPA2074
door glass, handle or rear bumper the request switches may not function.
When the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone who does not carry the Intelligent Key to push the request switch to lock/unlock the doors.

SPA2326
DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS PRECAUTION
. Do not push the door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as illustrated. The close distance to the door handle will cause the Intelligent Key system to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle.
. After locking with the door handle request switch, verify the doors are securely locked by testing them.
. To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the key with you and then lock the doors.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

. Do not pull the door handle before pushing the door handle request switch. The door will be unlocked but will not open. Release the door handle once and pull it again to open the door.
. The Intelligent Key system (opening/ closing doors with the door handle request switch) can be set to remain inactive. (See "Vehicle settings" (P.224).)
. While the liftgate is in motion by using the power liftgate button on the Intelligent Key, the request switches on the door handles may be disabled. To unlock or lock the doors, use the UNLOCK or LOCK button on the Intelligent Key. See "How to use remote keyless entry system" (P.3-16).

SPA2408
INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION
You can lock or unlock the doors without taking the key out from your pocket or bag.

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

JVP0196X JVP0197X

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door handle request switch (driver's or front passenger's) or the liftgate request switch within the range of operation.
When you lock or unlock the doors or the liftgate, the hazard indicator will flash and the horn (or the outside chime) will sound as a confirmation. For details, see "Setting hazard indicator and horn mode" (P.3-17).
Welcome light and farewell light function
When you lock or unlock the doors including the liftgate, the parking lights, tail lights, side marker light and the license plate light will illuminate for a period of time. The welcome light and farewell light function can be disabled. For information about disabling the welcome light and farewell light function, it is recommended you see a NISSAN dealer.
Locking doors
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position, push the ignition switch to the OFF position and make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you.*1
2. Close all the doors.*2

3. Push the door handle request switch (driver's or front passenger's) or the liftgate request switch while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.*3
4. All the doors will lock.
5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the outside chime sounds twice.
*1: Doors will lock with the Intelligent Key while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.
*2: Doors will not lock with the Intelligent Key while any door is open.
*3: Doors will not lock by pushing the door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle.
However, when an Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle, doors can be locked with another registered Intelligent Key.
NOTE:
Request switches for all doors can be deactivated when the "Ext. Door Switch" is turned off in the Vehicle Settings of the vehicle information display. See "Vehicle settings" (P.2-24).
CAUTION
. After locking the doors using the request switch, make sure that the doors have been securely

locked by operating the door handles.
. When locking the doors using the request switch, make sure to have the Intelligent Key in your possession before operating the request switch to prevent the Intelligent Key from being left in the vehicle.
. The request switch is operational only when the Intelligent Key has been detected by the Intelligent Key system.
Lockout protection:
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection is equipped with the Intelligent Key system.
When the driver's side door is open, the doors are locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed; the lock will automatically unlock and the door buzzer sounds.
NOTE:
The doors may not lock when the Intelligent Key is in the same hand that is operating the request switch to lock the door. Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket or your other hand.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

CAUTION
The lockout protection may not function under the following conditions:
. When the Intelligent Key is placed on top of the instrument panel.
. When the Intelligent Key is placed inside the glove box or a storage bin.
. When the Intelligent Key is placed inside the door pockets.
. When the Intelligent Key is placed inside or near metallic materials.
Unlocking doors
1. Push the door handle request switch (driver's or front passenger's) or the liftgate request switch once while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.
When you approach the vehicle with the Intelligent Key, the puddle light and the passenger cabin illumination will illuminate and stay on for a short period of time (if so equipped). (See "Welcome light" (P.2-80).)
2. The hazard indicator flashes once and outside chime sounds once. The corresponding door will unlock.
3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3. Push the door handle request switch again within 60 seconds.
4. The hazard indicator flashes once and outside chime sounds once again. All the doors will unlock.
The liftgate can be unlocked and opened by pushing the liftgate opener switch. See "Liftgate" (P.3-22).
All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 minute after pushing the request switch while the doors are locked. If during this 1-minute time period, the request switch is pushed, all doors will be locked automatically after another 1 minute.
. Opening any door . Pushing the ignition switch
NOTE:
The unlocking operation can be changed in selective unlock in the Vehicle Settings of the vehicle information display. See "Vehicle settings" (P.2-24).
Power liftgate open (if so equipped)
1. Carry the Intelligent Key.
2. Push the power liftgate opener switch .
3. The liftgate will unlock and automatically open.

4. The hazard indicator flashes 4 times and the outside chime sounds.
BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM
When all the following conditions are met for a period of time, the battery saver system will cut off the power supply to prevent battery discharge.
. The ignition switch is in the ACC position, and
. All doors are closed, and . The shift lever is in the P (Park)
position.
WARNING SIGNALS
To help prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent Key listed on the following chart or to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen, chime or beep sounds inside and outside the vehicle and a warning displays in the vehicle information display.
When a chime or beep sounds or the warning displays, be sure to check the vehicle and Intelligent Key.
See "Troubleshooting guide" (P.3-13) and "Vehicle information display" (P.2-20).

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Symptom

Possible cause

Action to take

When pushing the ignition switch to stop the engine

The Shift to Park warning appears on

the display and the inside warning chime The shift lever is not in the P (Park) Shift the shift lever to the P (Park)

sounds continuously or for a few sec- position.

position.

onds.

When shifting the shift lever The inside warning chime sounds con- The ignition switch is in the ACC or Push the ignition switch to the OFF

to the P (Park) position.

tinuously.

ON position.

position.

When opening the driver's The inside warning chime sounds con- The ignition switch is in the ACC Push the ignition switch to the OFF

door to get out of the vehicle tinuously.

position.

The No Key Detected warning appears

on the display, the outside chime sounds The ignition switch is in the ACC or Push the ignition switch to the OFF

3 times and the inside warning chime ON position.

position.

sounds for a few seconds.

When closing the door after getting out of the vehicle

The Rear Door Alert warning message appears on the display, the horn sounds three times twice and Check Rear Seat The rear door alert is activated. for all articles warning appears on the display.

Open a rear door and check the rear seat for all articles to clear the warning message.

The Shift to Park warning appears on the display and the outside chime sounds continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or Move the shift lever to the P (Park)

OFF position and the shift lever is position and push the ignition switch

not in the P (Park) position.

to the OFF position.

When closing the door with the inside lock knob turned to LOCK

The outside chime sounds for a few seconds and all the doors unlock.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or cargo area.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the request

switch or the LOCK

but- The outside chime sounds for a few

ton on the Intelligent Key to seconds.

lock the door

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
A door is not closed securely.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you. Close the door securely.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

Symptom

When pushing the door handle request switch to lock the door

The outside chime sounds for a few seconds.

When pushing the ignition switch to start the engine
When pushing the ignition switch

The Key Battery Low indicator appears on the display.
The No Key Detected warning appears on the display and the inside warning chime sounds for a few seconds.
The Key System Error warning light in the meter illuminates in yellow.

Possible cause The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or cargo area. A door is not closed securely. The door handle request switch is pushed before the door is closed.
The battery charge is low.

Action to take
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
Close the door securely. Push the door handle request switch after the door is closed. Replace the battery with a new one. (See "Battery" (P.8-11).)

The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

It warns of a malfunction with the It is recommended that you contact a

Intelligent Key system.

NISSAN dealer.

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

WARNING
The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves when the buttons are pushed. The FAA advises that radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and communication systems. Do not operate the Intelligent Key while on an airplane. Make sure the buttons are not operated unintentionally when the unit is stored for a flight.

Intelligent Key will not operate when:
. the distance between the Intelligent Key and the vehicle is over 33 ft (10 m).
. the Intelligent Key battery runs down. After locking with the remote keyless entry function, pull the door handle to make sure the doors are securely locked.
The LOCK/UNLOCK operating range varies depending on the environment. To securely operate the lock and unlock buttons, approach the vehicle to about 3 ft (1 m) from the door.

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, fuelfiller door, activate the panic alarm and open the windows by pushing the buttons on the Intelligent Key from outside the vehicle.
Before locking the doors, make sure the Intelligent Key is not left in the vehicle.
The LOCK/UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key can operate at a distance of approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. (The effective distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle.)
As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be used with one vehicle. For information concerning the purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer.
The lock and unlock buttons on the

Type A (if so equipped)

JVP0156X

Type B (if so equipped)

SPA2718

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

SPA1926B
Type C (if so equipped) LOCK button
UNLOCK button
Power liftgate button
PANIC button Remote engine start button
HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
When you lock or unlock the doors or the liftgate, the hazard indicator will flash and the horn (or the outside chime) will sound as a confirmation. For details, see "Setting hazard indicator and horn mode" (P.3-17).

Locking doors

1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position, push the ignition switch to the OFF position and make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you.*

2. Close all the doors and the liftgate.

3. Push the LOCK Intelligent Key.

button on the

4. All the doors and the liftgate will lock.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once.

*: Doors will lock with the Intelligent Key while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

Unlocking doors

1. Push the UNLOCK

button on

the Intelligent Key once.

2. The hazard indicator flashes once. The driver's door will unlock.

The puddle light and the passenger cabin illumination will illuminate and stay on for a short period of time (if so equipped). (See "Welcome light" (P.280).)

3. Push the UNLOCK

button on the

Intelligent Key again within 60 sec-

onds.

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

4. The hazard indicator flashes once again. All the doors will unlock.

All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 minute after pushing the UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key while the doors are locked. If during this 1minute time period, the UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key is pushed, all doors will be locked automatically after another 1 minute.

. Opening any door . Pushing the ignition switch

NOTE:

The unlocking operation can be changed in selective unlock in the Vehicle Settings of the vehicle information display. See "Vehicle settings" (P.2-24).

Opening windows

To open the windows, push the door

UNLOCK

button on the Intelligent

Key for about 3 seconds after the door is

unlocked.

To stop opening, release the UNLOCK button.

Window cannot be closed using the Intelligent Key.

The door windows can be opened or closed by turning the mechanical key in a door lock. (See "Doors" (P.3-4).)

Opening/closing liftgate (if so equipped)

1. Push the power liftgate button for more than 1 second.

2. The liftgate will automatically open.

The hazard indicator flashes 4 times and the outside chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds.

To close the liftgate, push the power

liftgate button

for more than 1

second.

The liftgate will automatically close.

If the button

is pushed while the

liftgate is being opened or closed, the

liftgate will reverse.

Using panic alarm
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the alarm to call attention as follows:
1. Push the PANIC button on the Intelligent Key for more than 1 second.
2. The theft warning alarm and headlights will stay on for 25 seconds.
3. The panic alarm stops when: . It has run for 25 seconds, or . Any of the buttons on the Intelligent Key are pushed. (Note: Panic button or power liftgate button should be

pushed for more than 1 second.)

Remote engine start (if so equipped)
The remote engine start button is on the Intelligent Key if the vehicle has remote engine start function. This function allows the engine to start from outside the vehicle. See "Remote engine start" (P.3-19) for more details.

Setting hazard indicator and horn mode

This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and horn mode when you first receive the vehicle.

In hazard indicator and horn mode, when

the LOCK

button is pushed, the

hazard indicator flashes twice and the

horn chirps once. When the UNLOCK

button is pushed, the hazard indicator

flashes once.

If horns are not necessary, the system can be switched to the hazard indicator mode.

In hazard indicator mode, when the LOCK button is pushed, the hazard indica-
tor flashes twice. When the UNLOCK button is pushed, neither the hazard indicator nor the horn operates.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

Hazard indicator and horn mode:

Intelligent Key system (Using door handle request switch)

Remote keyless entry system

(Using or

button)

DOOR LOCK
HAZARD - twice OUTSIDE CHIME - twice
HAZARD - twice HORN - once

Hazard indicator mode:

Intelligent Key system (Using door handle request switch)

Remote keyless entry system

(Using or

button)

DOOR LOCK HAZARD - twice HAZARD - twice

DOOR UNLOCK HAZARD - once OUTSIDE CHIME - once HAZARD - once HORN - none
DOOR UNLOCK HAZARD - none
HAZARD - none

Switching procedure:

Push the LOCK

and UNLOCK

buttons on the Intelligent Key simulta-

neously for more than 2 seconds to

switch the mode from one to the other.

When pushing the buttons to set the hazard indicator mode, the hazard indicator flashes 3 times.

When pushing the buttons to set the hazard indicator and horn mode, the hazard indicator flashes once and the horn chirps once.

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

REMOTE ENGINE START (if so equipped)

WARNING
To avoid risk of injury or death, do not use the remote engine start function when the vehicle is in an enclosed area such as a garage.

JVP0445X
The remote engine start button is on the Intelligent Key if the vehicle has remote engine start function. This function allows the engine to start from outside the vehicle.
Some systems, such as the air conditioner system, will turn on during a remote engine start, if the system was on the last time the ignition switch was turned off.
Laws in some local communities may restrict the use of remote engine starters. For example, some laws require a person using remote engine start to have the vehicle in view. Check local regulations for any requirements.

Other conditions may affect the remote engine start function. See "Conditions the remote engine start will not work" (P.320).

Other conditions can affect the performance of the Intelligent Key transmitter. See "Intelligent Key system" (P.3-7) for additional information.

REMOTE ENGINE START OPERATING RANGE

The remote engine start function can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the vehicle.

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or other strong radio wave sources are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key operating range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not function properly.

The remote engine start operating range is approximately 197 ft (60 m) from the vehicle.

REMOTE STARTING THE ENGINE

To use the remote start function to start the engine, perform the following:

1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.

2. Push the "LOCK" doors.

button to lock all

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

3. Within 5 seconds push and hold the

remote engine start

button until

the turn signal lights flash and the tail

lights illuminate. If the vehicle is not

within view, push and hold the remote

engine start button for at least 2

seconds.

The following events will occur when the engine starts:

. The front parking lights will turn on and remain on as long as the engine is running.
. The doors will be locked and the air conditioner system may turn on.
. The engine will continue to run for about 10 minutes. Repeat the steps to extend the time for an additional 10 minutes. See "Extending engine run time" (P.3-20).
Depress and hold the brake pedal, then place the ignition switch in the ON position before driving. For further instructions, see "Driving the vehicle" (P.5-17).

EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME

The remote engine start function can be extended one time by performing the steps listed in "Remote starting the engine" (P.3-19). Run time will be calculated as follows:

. The first 10 minute run time will start when the remote engine start func-

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

tion is performed.

. The second 10 minutes will start immediately when the remote engine start function is performed. For example, if the engine has been running for 5 minutes, and 10 minutes are added, the engine will run for a total of 15 minutes.

. Extending engine run time will count towards the two remote engine start limit.

A maximum of two remote engine starts, or a single start with an extension, are allowed between ignition cycles.

The ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position and then back to the OFF position before the remote engine start procedure can be used again.

CANCELING A REMOTE ENGINE START

To cancel a remote engine start, perform one of the following:

. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle

and push and hold the remote engine

start

button until the front park-

ing lights turn off.

. Turn on the hazard indicator flashers.
. Cycle the ignition switch ON and then OFF.

. The extended engine run time has expired.
. The first 10 minute timer has expired.
. The engine hood has been opened.
. The shift lever is moved out of the P (Park) position.
. The theft alarm sounds due to illegal entry into the vehicle.
. The ignition switch is pushed without an Intelligent Key in the vehicle.
. The ignition switch is pushed with an Intelligent Key in the vehicle but the brake pedal is not depressed.
CONDITIONS THE REMOTE ENGINE START WILL NOT WORK
The remote engine start will not operate if any of the following conditions are present:
. The ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
. The hood is not securely closed.
. The hazard indicator flashers are on.
. The engine is still running. The engine must be completely stopped. Wait at least 6 seconds if the engine goes from running to off. This is not applicable when extending engine run time.
. The remote engine start button is not pushed and held for at least 2 seconds.

HOOD

. The remote engine start button is not pushed and held within 5 seconds of pushing the "LOCK" button.
. The brake pedal is depressed.
. The doors are not closed and locked.
. The liftgate is open.
. The Key System Error warning light remains on in the vehicle information display.
. An Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle.
. The theft alarm sounds due to illegal entry into the vehicle.
. Two remote engine starts, or a single remote engine start with an extension, have already been used.
. The shift lever is not in the P (Park) position.
The remote engine start may display a warning or indicator in the vehicle information display. For an explanation of the warning or indicator, see "Operational indicators" (P.2-30).

1. Pull the hood lock release handle located below the instrument panel; the hood will then spring up slightly.
2. Pull the lever up at the front of the hood with your fingertips and raise the hood.
3. When closing the hood, slowly close the hood down and make sure it locks into place.

WAD0267X
hood to fly open and result in an accident. . If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment, to avoid injury do not open the hood.

WARNING
. Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving. Failure to do so could cause the

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

LIFTGATE
WARNING
. Always be sure the liftgate has been closed securely to prevent it from opening while driving.
. Do not drive with the liftgate open. This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. See "Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)" (P.5-4).
. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.
. Always be sure that hands and feet are clear of the door frame to avoid injury while closing the liftgate.

. inserting the mechanical key into the driver's door key cylinder and turning it to the rear of the vehicle twice.
To close the liftgate, pull down until it securely locks.
OPERATING POWER LIFTGATE (if so equipped)
To operate the power liftgate, the shift lever must be in the P (Park) position.
The power liftgate will not operate if the battery voltage is low.

WAD0268X

OPERATING MANUAL LIFTGATE

To open the liftgate, unlock it and push the liftgate opener switch . Pull up the liftgate to open.

The liftgate can be unlocked by:

. pushing the unlock button Intelligent Key twice.

on the

. pushing the liftgate request switch with the Intelligent Key carried on you.

. pushing the door handle request switch twice with the Intelligent Key carried on you.

. pushing the power door lock switch to the unlock position.

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SPA2547
Power liftgate main switch
The power liftgate operation can be turned on or off by the power liftgate main switch on the instrument panel.
When the power liftgate main switch is pushed to the "OFF" position, the power operation is not available by the power liftgate switch on the liftgate and liftgate opener switch.
The liftgate can still be operated by the power liftgate switch on the instrument panel and the power liftgate button on the Intelligent Key.

SPA2548 Power liftgate switch -- Instrument panel

Intelligent Key

JVP0214X

Liftgate opener switch

WAD0269X

WAD0266X Power liftgate close and lock switches -- Liftgate
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

Power open

When the liftgate is fully closed, the liftgate will fully open automatically by:

. pushing the power liftgate switch on the instrument panel
. pushing the liftgate opener switch
. pushing the power liftgate button on the Intelligent Key for more than 1 second
The hazard flashes 4 times and the outside chime sounds when the liftgate starts opening.

NOTE:

The liftgate can be opened by the

power liftgate switch , the liftgate

opener switch or the power liftgate

button

even if the liftgate is

locked. The liftgate will individually un-

lock and open.

Power close

When the liftgate is fully opened, the liftgate will fully close automatically by:

. pushing the power liftgate switch on the instrument panel
. pushing the power liftgate button on the Intelligent Key for more than 1 second
. pushing the power liftgate close switch on the lower part of the liftgate

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

The hazard flashes 4 times and the outside chime sounds when the liftgate starts closing.
NOTE:
When the liftgate is closed, it remains unlocked. Manually lock the liftgate.
Power close and lock
When the liftgate is fully opened and the Intelligent Key is carried with you near the liftgate, the liftgate will fully close and lock automatically by pushing the power liftgate lock switch on the lower part of the liftgate.
The hazard flashes 4 times and the outside chime sounds when the liftgate starts closing.
Reverse function
The power liftgate will reverse immediately if one of the following actions is performed during power open or power close.
. pushing the power liftgate switch on the instrument panel
. pushing the power liftgate button on the Intelligent Key.
. pushing the power liftgate close switch on the lower part of the liftgate
The outside chime sounds when the liftgate starts to reverse.

Auto reverse function
The auto-reverse function enables the liftgate to automatically reverse when something is caught in the liftgate as it is opening or closing. When the control unit detects an obstacle, the liftgate will reverse and return to the full open or full close position.
If a second obstacle is detected, the liftgate motion will stop and the drive motor will disengage. The liftgate will enter the manual mode.
A pinch sensor is mounted on each side of the liftgate. If an obstacle is detected by the pinch sensor during power close, the liftgate will reverse and return to the full open position immediately.
NOTE:
If the pinch sensor is damaged or removed, the power close function will not operate.
WARNING
There is a small distance immediately before the closed position that cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers keep their hands, etc., clear from the liftgate opening before closing the liftgate.

Manual mode
If power operation is not available, the liftgate can be operated manually. Power operation may not be available if multiple obstacles have been detected in a single power cycle or if the battery voltage is low. When the power liftgate main switch is in the OFF position, the liftgate can be opened manually by pushing the liftgate opener switch. If the power liftgate opener switch is pushed during power open or close, the power operation will be canceled and the liftgate can be operated manually.

JVP0466X
Safe Mode
If the gas stays of the liftgate lose pressure, the power liftgate safe mode is activated. When the safe mode is activated, the liftgate intermittently closes. Then the liftgate will be pulled to the closed and latched position by a motor.
The power liftgate cannot be opened using the switches at any time in the safe mode.
Do not operate the liftgate again until it is checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

CAUTION
. If the power liftgate does not stay open or if the liftgate unexpectedly closes at any time, do not operate the liftgate. There may be a pressure loss in one or both of the liftgate gas stays. Have the liftgate inspected. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
. Do not activate the power liftgate if one or both of the liftgate gas stays are removed. Damage to the liftgate or power liftgate mechanisms may occur.
AUTO CLOSURE
If the liftgate is pulled down to a partly open position, the liftgate will pull itself to the closed position.
Do not apply excessive force when the auto closure is operating. Excessive force applied may cause the mechanism to malfunction.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

CAUTION
. The liftgate will automatically close from a partly open position. To avoid pinching, keep hands and fingers away from liftgate opening.
. Do not let children operate the liftgate.

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

SPA2751
LIFTGATE RELEASE LEVER
If the liftgate cannot be opened with the door lock switch due to a discharged battery, follow these steps. 1. Remove the cover inside of the
liftgate using a suitable tool. 2. Move the lever as illustrated to open
the liftgate. It is recommended you contact a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for repair.
3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WAD0273X
OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR
To open the fuel-filler door, push the upper right side of fuel-filler door to release.
FUEL-FILLER CAP
WARNING
. Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain conditions. You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mishandled. Always stop engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near

the vehicle when refueling.
. Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire.
. Use only an original equipment type fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a built-in safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emission control system. An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury. It could also cause the malfunction indicator light to come on.
. Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt to start your vehicle.
. Do not fill a portable fuel container in the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity can cause an explosion of flammable liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death when filling portable fuel containers:
-- Always place the container on the ground when filling.

-- Do not use electronic devices when filling.
-- Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container while you are filling it.
-- Use only approved portable fuel containers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

. If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush it away with water to avoid paint damage.

. Insert the cap straight into the

fuel-filler tube, then tighten until

the fuel-filler cap clicks. Failure to

tighten the fuel-filler cap properly

may cause the

malfunction

indicator light (MIL) to illuminate.

If the

light illuminates be-

cause the fuel-filler cap is loose

or missing, tighten or install the

cap and continue to drive the

vehicle. The light should turn

off after a few driving trips. If the

light does not turn off after a

few driving trips, have the vehicle

inspected. It is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

. The Loose Fuel Cap warning will

appear if the fuel-filler cap is not

properly tightened. It may take a

few driving trips for the message

to be displayed. Failure to tighten

the fuel-filler cap properly after

the Loose Fuel Cap warning ap-

pears may cause the

Mal-

function Indicator Light (MIL) to

illuminate.

Turn the cap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, turn the cap clockwise until a single click is heard.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

Fuel Cap warning after tightening the fuel-filler cap.

SPA2753

WAD0274X

To remove the fuel-filler cap:
1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise to remove.
2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder while refueling.
To install the fuel-filler cap:
1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuel-filler tube.
2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a single click is heard.

Loose Fuel Cap warning

The Loose Fuel Cap warning appears on the vehicle information display when the fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled. It may take a few driving trips for the warning to be displayed.

To turn off the warning, perform the following:

1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as soon as possible. (See "Fuel-filler cap" (P.3-26).)

2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.

3. Push the

switch on the

steering wheel to turn off the Loose

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING

SUN VISORS

WARNING
. Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.
. Do not adjust the steering wheel any closer to you than is necessary for proper steering operation and comfort. The driver's air bag inflates with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel. Always use the seat belts.

SPA2754

ELECTRIC OPERATION

Tilt or telescopic operation
Move the lever to adjust the steering wheel up or down, forward or rearward to the desired position.

Entry/Exit function operation (if so equipped):
The memory seat system will make the steering wheel move up automatically when the driver's door is opened with the ignition switch in the LOCK position. This lets the driver get into and out of the seat more easily.
For more information, see "Memory seat" (P.3-40).

SIC3451
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29

MIRRORS

CAUTION

. Do not store the main sun visor before storing the extension sun visor.
. Do not pull the extension sun visor forcedly downward.

1. To block out glare from the front, swing down the main sun visor .
2. To block glare from the side, remove the main sun visor from the center mount and swing it to the side .
3. Draw out the extension sun visor from the main sun visor to block from further glare.

SPA2447
INSIDE MIRROR
Adjust the height and the angle of the inside mirror to the desired position.

SPA2143
Manual anti-glare type (if so equipped)
The night position will reduce glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you at night. Use the day position when driving in daylight hours.

WARNING
Use the night position only when necessary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SPA2450-A
Automatic anti-glare type (if so equipped)
The inside mirror is designed so that it automatically changes reflection according to the intensity of the headlights of the following vehicle.
The anti-glare system will be automatically turned on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
When the anti-glare system is turned on, the indicator light will illuminate and excessive glare from the headlights of the vehicle behind you will be reduced.
Push the "*" switch to make the inside rearview mirror operate normally. The

indicator light will turn off. Push the "I" switch to turn the system on.
Do not allow any object to cover the sensors or apply glass cleaner on them. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the sensor, resulting in improper operation.
For the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver operation, see "HomeLink® Universal Transceiver (Type A)" (P.2-83).
Intelligent Rear View Mirror (if so equipped)
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the Intelligent Rear View Mirror could result in serious injury or death.
. The Intelligent Rear View Mirror is a convenience feature but it is not a substitute for proper vehicle operation. The system has areas where objects cannot be viewed. Check the blind spot of the Intelligent Rear View Mirror before vehicle operation. The driver is always responsible for safe driving.

. Do not disassemble or modify the Intelligent Rear View Mirror, the camera unit or wirings. If you do, it may result in accidents or fire. In case you notice smoke or smell coming from the Intelligent Rear View Mirror, stop using the system immediately. It is recommended that you see a NISSAN dealer for servicing.
. Do not operate the Intelligent Rear View Mirror while driving. Doing so can be a distraction and it could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.
. Do not gaze into the Intelligent Rear View Mirror display during driving. It may cause a distraction and it could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.
. Do not put a cigarette or flames to the Intelligent Rear View Mirror, the camera unit or wirings. It may cause a fire.
. Be sure to adjust the Intelligent Rear View Mirror before driving. Switch the system to the conventional rearview mirror mode and be properly seated on the driver's

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31

seat. Then adjust the mirror so as to see the rear window properly. Driving without adjusting the mirror may cause difficulty in watching the display at Intelligent Rear View Mirror mode (camera view mode) due to the reflection from the surface of the mirror.
. If the Intelligent Rear View Mirror malfunctions, immediately switch the system to the conventional rearview mirror mode.
. When strong light (for example, sunlight or high beams from following vehicles) enters the camera, a light beam or a glaring light may appear on the monitor screen of the Intelligent Rear View Mirror. In that case, switch the system to the conventional rearview mirror mode appropriately.
. If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the exterior glass surface covering the camera, the Intelligent Rear View Mirror may not display objects clearly. Use of the rear window wiper/washer may improve visibility, but if not, switch the Intelligent Rear View Mirror to the conventional rearview mirror mode until a time the glass cov-
3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

ering the camera can be cleaned.
WAD0190X MENU button Left button Right button Mode select lever HomeLink® buttons (1-3)
Components: Intelligent Rear View Mirror provides a clear rearview from a camera located on the rear of the vehicle. Intelligent Rear View Mirror has two modes: conventional rearview mirror mode and Intelligent Rear View Mirror mode (camera view mode). You can switch these two modes by the mode select lever . When the Intelligent Rear View Mirror mode is selected, the indicator is

displayed.
For the operation of the HomeLink® buttons , see "HomeLink® Universal Transceiver (Type B)" (P.2-87).

WAD0191X
How to change the mode: The mode can be switched when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
. Pull the mode select lever to switch to the Intelligent Rear View Mirror mode (camera view mode).
. Push the mode select lever to switch to the conventional rearview mirror mode.

WAD0192X
How to make settings of Intelligent Rear View Mirror:
You can choose display settings of the Intelligent Rear View Mirror such as brightness, camera angle, textual indication ON or OFF and language.
When the Intelligent Rear View Mirror mode is on, setting menu can be selected by pushing the MENU button . Each time the MENU button is pushed, the setting menu will change as follows:
MENU (initial screen) ?BRIGHTNESS ? DOWN/UP ? LEFT/RIGHT ? ROTATION ? INDICATION ? DIMMING MIRROR ? LANGUAGE ? MENU (initial screen)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33

NOTE: . To switch the image quality adjust-
ment items with the MENU button , push the button within 5 seconds after completing the adjustment of the previous item. If 5 seconds or more pass, the monitor will return to MENU (initial screen).
. When one of the HomeLink® buttons is pushed, the monitor will display the HomeLink® screen.

WAD0193X

BRIGHTNESS

The brightness of the display screen can be adjusted.

. Push the left button screen.

to dim the

. Push the right button to brighten the screen.

WAD0194X

DOWN/UP

The vertical camera angle of the display screen can be adjusted.

. Push the left button to down the camera angle.

. Push the right button camera angle.

to up the

3-34 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WAD0199X
LEFT/RIGHT
The horizontal camera angle of the display screen can be adjusted.
. Push the left button to move the camera angle to the left.
. Push the right button to move the camera angle to the right.

WAD0195X
ROTATION
The camera angle of the display screen can be rotated.
. Push the left button to rotate the camera angle to the left.
. Push the right button to rotate the camera angle to the right.

WAD0196X
INDICATION
The textual indication can be turned on or off on the Intelligent Rear View Mirror display screen.
. Push the right button to disable the textual indication on the display screen.
. Push the left button to enable the textual indication on the display screen.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-35

WAD0197X
DIMMING MIRROR
The mirror is designed so that it automatically changes reflection according to the intensity of the headlights of the following vehicle. You can enable or disable the automatic anti-glare mode.
. Push the left button to enable the automatic anti-glare mode.
. Push the right button to disable the automatic anti-glare mode.

WAD0198X
LANGUAGE
The language of the textual indication can be selected on the Intelligent Rear View Mirror display screen.
Select the language by using the or button. You can select English, French or Spanish. The language setting will be retained even if the engine is restarted.
Intelligent Rear View Mirror system precautions:
NOTE: . Long-term use of this system in
stopping engine may cause battery to be discharged.

. Do not attach an antenna of wireless device near the Intelligent Rear View Mirror. Electric wave from wireless device may cause disturbed image in Intelligent Rear View Mirror.
. Do not push buttons excessively or operating the lever roughly may cause a system failure or the Intelligent Rear View Mirror itself to drop.
. Never turn the body of Intelligent Rear View Mirror by 90° or more. It may damage the Intelligent Rear View Mirror.
. Do not apply strong shocks to the body of Intelligent Rear View Mirror. It may cause a system failure.
. Do not apply heavy load to the camera and camera-cover on the rear of the vehicle. It may cause the camera to be removed or may cause a system failure.
. If it is difficult to see the Intelligent Rear View Mirror display screen because of a strong external light, switch the mode to the conventional rearview mirror mode for better use.
. Close the sunshade (if so equipped) when the Intelligent Rear View Mirror display screen is unclear due to strong external light.

3-36 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

JVP0559X
Flicker image (example)
. When LED headlights are viewed on the Intelligent Rear View Mirror display, the images may flicker. This is normal.
. Due to diffused reflection from external environment, images on the screen may flicker. This is not a malfunction.
. A quick movement of a thing may not be able to display on the camera view screen. This is not a malfunction.
. Turn on the headlights at twilight or in a tunnel, etc.

. The Intelligent Rear View Mirror mode (camera view mode) display is different from the conventional rearview mirror. Objects in the display may differ from actual distance. Do not solely rely on the Intelligent Rear View Mirror. Always rely on your own operation to avoid accidents.
. If the brightness of the camera view display is adjusted to excessive bright level, it may cause an eyestrain in the driving. Adjust the brightness properly.
. Use the rear window wiper when it rains. If the camera view image is still unclear when the rear window wiper is in operation, check the deterioration of the rear window wiper blade.
. When using the rear window wiper, images on the screen may flicker. This is not a malfunction.
. Defog the rear window with defroster when rear window is fogged. Use the conventional rearview mirror mode until the rear window is fully defogged.
. The display of the Intelligent Rear View Mirror may become hot. This is not a malfunction.

. The color of an object in the distance or in the dark may be difficult to be recognized. This is not a malfunction.
System maintenance (Intelligent Rear
View Mirror):
. Always keep the mirror and camera area of the rear window clean.
. Clean the mirror and the camera lens with a dry soft cloth.
. When clean the camera area of the rear window, using a soft cloth dampend with water and a few neutral detergent. And after, the dry it up with dry soft cloth.
. If the image on the Intelligent Rear View Mirror display screen is still unclear even after cleaning the camera area of the rear window, an oil film may be adhering to the rear window glass. Clean the rear window glass with an oil film remover.
. Never use alcohol, benzine, thinner, or any similar material to clean the mirror or camera lens. It will cause a discoloration, deterioration or a system malfunction.
. Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) on the camera area of the rear window.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-37

OUTSIDE MIRRORS
WARNING
. Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear. Be careful when moving to the right. Using only this mirror could cause an accident. Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects.
. Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

Defrosting outside mirrors
The outside mirrors will be heated when the rear window defroster switch is operated. (See "Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch" (P.2-45).)
SPA2739
Adjusting outside mirrors
The outside mirror control switch is located on the driver's door armrest. The outside mirror will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. Move the switch right or left to select the right or left side mirror , then adjust using the control switch .

3-38 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SPA2738
Power foldable outside mirrors
CAUTION
. Do not touch the mirrors while they are moving. Your hand may be pinched, and the mirror may malfunction.
. Do not drive with the mirrors stored. You will be unable to see behind the vehicle.
. If the mirrors were folded or unfolded by hand, there is a chance that the mirror will move forward or backward during driv-

ing. If the mirrors were folded or unfolded by hand, be sure to adjust them again electrically before driving.
The outside mirror remote control operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.
To fold the outside mirrors, push the outside mirror folding switch to the "CLOSE" position . To unfold, push to the "OPEN" position .
If mirrors are manually operated or bumped, the mirror body can become loose at the pivot point. To correct electronic mirror operation, cycle the mirrors by pushing "CLOSE" until completely closed, then push "OPEN" until the mirrors are in the open position.
Reverse tilt-down feature (if so equipped)
When backing up the vehicle, the right and left outside mirrors will turn downward automatically to provide better rear visibility.
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
2. Move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position.

3. Choose either the right or left outside mirror by operating the outside mirror control switch.
4. The outside mirror surfaces move downward.
When one of the following conditions has occurred, the outside mirror surfaces will return to their original positions.
. The shift lever is moved to any position other than R (Reverse).
. The outside mirror control switch is set to the center position.
. The ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
Automatic anti-glare (if so equipped)
The outside rearview mirrors are designed so that its automatically change reflection according to the intensity of the headlights of the vehicle following you.
The anti-glare system will be automatically turned on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-39

MEMORY SEAT (if so equipped)

SIC4448
VANITY MIRROR
To use the front vanity mirror, pull down the sun visor and pull up the cover.

JVP0247X
SET/memory switches
The memory seat system has three features:
. Entry/exit function . Memory storage . Setting memory function
ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION
This system is designed so that the driver's seat and steering column will automatically move when the automatic transmission shift lever is in the P (Park) position. This allows the driver to get into and out of the driver's seat more easily.
The driver's seat will slide backward and the steering wheel will move up when the driver's door is opened with the ignition

3-40 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

switch in the LOCK position.
The driver's seat and steering wheel will return to the previous positions when the ignition switch is pushed to the ACC position.
The driver's seat will not return to the previous positions if the seat or steering adjusting switch is operated when the seat is at the exit position.
Cancel or activate entry/exit function
The shift lever must be in the P (Park) position with the ignition switch in the OFF position.
The entry/exit function can be activated or canceled by pressing and holding the SET switch for more than 10 seconds.
The entry/exit function can be canceled through "Vehicle settings" in the vehicle information display by performing the following:
. Switch the "Exit Seat Slide" ON to OFF. For additional information, refer to "Vehicle settings" (P.2-24).
. Switch the "Exit Steering Up" ON to OFF. For additional information, refer to "Vehicle settings" (P.2-24).

Initialize entry/exit function
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse opens, the entry/exit function will not work though this function was set on before. In such a case, after connecting the battery or replacing with a new fuse, open and close the driver's door more than two times after the ignition switch is turned from the ON position to the LOCK position. The entry/exit function will be activated.
MEMORY STORAGE
Two positions for the driver's seat, steering column and outside mirrors can be stored in the memory switch. Follow these procedures to use the memory system.
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
2. Adjust the driver's seat, steering column and outside mirrors to the desired positions by manually operating each adjusting switch. For additional information, see "Seats" (P.1-3) and "Tilt/telescopic steering" (P.3-29) and "Outside mirrors" (P.3-38).
3. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds, push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for at least 1 second.
The indicator light for the pushed memory switch will stay on for ap-

proximately 5 seconds after pushing the switch.
When the memory is stored in the memory switch (1 or 2), a buzzer will sound.
If memory is stored in the same memory switch, the previous memory will be deleted.

Linking Intelligent Key to a stored memory position

The Intelligent Key can be linked to a stored memory position with the following procedure.

1. Follow the steps for storing a memory position.

2. While the indicator light for the memory switch being set is illuminated for 5 seconds, push the button on the Intelligent Key. If the indicator light blinks, the Intelligent Key is linked to that memory setting.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF

position, and then push the

button

on the Intelligent Key. The driver's seat,

steering wheel and outside mirrors will

move to the memorized position.

Confirming memory storage
. Push the ignition switch to the ON position and push the SET switch. If the main memory has not been stored, the indicator light will come on for approximately 0.5 second. When the memory has stored in position, the indicator light will stay on for approximately 5 seconds.
. If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse opens, the memory will be canceled. In this case, reset the desired position using the previous procedure.
. If optional Intelligent Keys are added to your vehicle, the memory storage procedure to switch 1 or 2 and linking Intelligent Key procedure to a stored memory position should be performed again for each Intelligent Key. For additional Intelligent Key information, see "Keys" (P.3-2).
Selecting the memorized position
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
2. Use one of the following methods to move the driver's seat, the outside mirrors and the steering wheel.
. Push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for at least 1 second.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-41

The driver's seat, steering column and outside mirrors will move to the memorized position or to the exit position when the entry/exit function is set to active with the indicator light flashing, and then the light will stay on for approximately 5 seconds.

SETTING MEMORY FUNCTION

The status of the following settings can be linked to the Intelligent Key and the memorized settings can be available for each Intelligent Key.

. Air conditioner system . Navigation system (if so equipped)
. Audio system
To use the memory function, lock the doors with the Intelligent Key that is linked to the settings.

To enable the memorized settings:

1. Carry the Intelligent Key that is linked

to the settings, and unlock the doors

by pushing the driver's door handle

request switch or "UNLOCK"

but-

ton on the Intelligent Key.

2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position. "Connection with the key has been done" will be displayed on the screen and the memorized settings are available (only when a new Intelligent Key is used).

SYSTEM OPERATION
The memory seat system will not work or will stop operating under the following conditions:
. When the vehicle speed is above 0 MPH (0 km/h) or 4 MPH (7 km/h) for some limited functions such linking an Intelligent Key to the vehicle when the power source is turned on from off or during the Exit function.
. When any of the memory switches are pushed while the memory seat is operating.
. When the adjusting switch for the driver's seat and steering column is turned on while the memory seat is operating.
. When the seat has already been moved to the memorized position.
. When no seat position is stored in the memory switch.
. When the shift lever is moved from the P (Park) position to any other position.

3-42 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

4 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NissanConnect® Owner's Manual .................................... 4-3 Safety note ........................................................................................ 4-3 RearView Monitor (if so equipped) ................................. 4-4
RearView Monitor system operation ..................... 4-5 How to read the displayed lines ................................ 4-5 Difference between predictive and actual distances ...................................................................... 4-6 How to park with predictive course lines .......... 4-7 RearView Monitor settings ............................................. 4-9 RearView Monitor system limitations ................. 4-10 System maintenance ....................................................... 4-11 Intelligent Around View® Monitor (if so equipped) .................................................................................. 4-12 Intelligent Around View® Monitor system operation ................................................................ 4-13 Intelligent Around View® Monitor settings ...... 4-21 Intelligent Around View® Monitor system limitations .............................................................. 4-23 System maintenance ....................................................... 4-25 Camera aiding sonar function (models with Intelligent Around View® Monitor) ............................... 4-26 Sonar system operation ................................................ 4-26 Turning on and off the sonar function ............. 4-27 Sonar function settings ................................................. 4-28 Sonar system limitations .............................................. 4-30 System maintenance ....................................................... 4-30

Moving Object Detection (MOD) ................................... 4-31 MOD system operation ................................................ 4-32 Turning on and off the MOD system ............... 4-33 MOD function settings ................................................. 4-34 MOD system limitations .............................................. 4-34 System maintenance .................................................... 4-35
Ventilators ...................................................................................... 4-36 Center ventilators ............................................................ 4-36 Side ventilators .................................................................. 4-36 Rear ventilators .................................................................. 4-36
Heater and air conditioner ................................................ 4-37 Automatic air conditioner ......................................... 4-38 Rear automatic air conditioning system ....... 4-40 Operating tips ..................................................................... 4-43 Linking Intelligent Key (if so equipped) ........... 4-43 In-cabin microfilter .......................................................... 4-43 Servicing air conditioner ............................................. 4-43
Antenna ............................................................................................ 4-43 Window antenna ............................................................... 4-43 Satellite antenna ............................................................... 4-44
Car phone or CB radio ......................................................... 4-44 Rear Seat Infotainment (RSI) (if so equipped) ...... 4-45
Welcome .................................................................................. 4-45 Getting started ................................................................... 4-46 Control description ......................................................... 4-50

Remote control operation ........................................... 4-52 Remote control buttons................................................ 4-52 Wireless headphone operation ................................ 4-54 General operation............................................................... 4-55 Video operation .................................................................... 4-56 HDMI/MHL connection .................................................... 4-57 USB/SD card operation .................................................. 4-57 Slingplayer® ............................................................................. 4-64

Miracast® ................................................................................. 4-66 Using the mobile application on your mobile device ....................................................................... 4-67 SmartStream ........................................................................ 4-67 Settings .................................................................................... 4-69 Troubleshooting ................................................................ 4-76 Specifications ....................................................................... 4-78 Compliance information ............................................. 4-79

NISSANCONNECT® OWNER'S MANUAL SAFETY NOTE

For models with NissanConnect® and Services, refer to the NissanConnect® Owner's Manual regarding the following information.
. Audio system . Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone . NissanConnect® Services . SiriusXM TrafficTM . SiriusXM® Travel Link . SiriusXM® Radio . Navigation system . Voice Recognition System . Information and settings viewable on
NissanConnect® . Android AutoTM . Apple CarPlay®

WARNING
. Do not disassemble or modify this system. If you do, it may result in accidents, fire, or electric shock.
. Do not use this system if you notice any abnormality, such as a frozen screen or lack of sound. Continued use of the system may result in accident, fire or electric shock.
. In case you notice any foreign object in the system hardware, spill liquid on it, or notice smoke or smell coming from it, stop using the system immediately. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing. Ignoring such conditions may lead to accidents, fire, or electric shock.
. Park the vehicle in a safe location and apply the parking brake to view the images on the touch screen display.

CAUTION
Do not use the system when the engine is not running for extended periods of time to prevent battery discharge.
Do not attempt to operate the system in extreme temperature conditions [below -4°F (-20°C) and above 158°F (70°C)]. Operating this system under these conditions may result in system malfunctions.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3

REARVIEW MONITOR (if so equipped)

WAE0655X

1. Touch screen display 2. MENU button 3. CAMERA button

WARNING
. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RearView Monitor could result in serious injury or death.

4-4 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

. RearView Monitor is a convenience feature and is not a substitute for proper backing. Always turn and look out the windows, and check mirrors to be sure that it is safe to move before operating the vehicle. Always back up slowly.
. The system is designed as an aid to the driver in showing large stationary objects directly behind the vehicle, to help avoid damaging the vehicle.
. The distance guide line and the vehicle width line should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a level paved surface. The distance viewed on the monitor is for reference only and may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects.
CAUTION
Do not scratch the camera lens when cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the camera.
The RearView Monitor system automati-

cally shows a rear view of the vehicle when the shift lever is placed in the R (Reverse) position.
The radio can still be heard while the RearView Monitor is active.

WAE0645X
To display the rear view, the RearView Monitor system uses a camera located just above the vehicle's license plate.
REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate the RearView Monitor.

WAE0241X
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED LINES
Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width and distances to objects with reference to the bumper line are displayed on the monitor.
Distance guide lines - :
Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
. Red line : approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m) . Yellow line : approximately 3 ft (1 m) . Green line : approximately 7 ft (2 m) Vehicle width guide lines :
Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

Predictive course lines :
Indicate the predictive course when backing up. The predictive course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position and if the steering wheel is turned. The predictive course lines will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned and will not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the straight ahead position.
The vehicle width guide lines and the width of the predictive course lines are wider than the actual width and course.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTIVE AND ACTUAL DISTANCES
The displayed guide lines and their locations on the ground are for approximate reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or projecting objects will be actually located at distances different from those displayed in the monitor relative to the guide lines (refer to illustrations). When in doubt, turn around and view the objects as you are backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to view the positioning of objects behind the vehicle.

WAE0286X
Backing up on a steep uphill
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown closer than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is farther than it appears on the monitor.

4-6 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WAE0287X
Backing up on a steep downhill
When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown farther than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor.

position if the object projects over the actual backing up course.
HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTIVE COURSE LINES

WARNING

WAE0288X
Backing up near a projecting object
The predictive course lines do not touch the object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit the object if it projects over the actual backing up course.

. If the tires are replaced with different sized tires, the predictive course lines may be displayed incorrectly.

. On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may be a difference between the predictive course line and the actual course line.

. If the battery is disconnected or becomes discharged, the predictive course lines may be displayed incorrectly. If this occurs, please perform the following procedures:

JVH1216X
Backing up behind a projecting object
The position is shown farther than the position in the display. However, the position is actually at the same distance as the position . The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to the

-- Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock while the engine is running.
-- Drive the vehicle on a straight road for more than 5 minutes.
. When the steering wheel is turned with the ignition switch in the ON position, the predictive course lines may be displayed

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7

incorrectly.

WAE0289X
1. Visually check that the parking space is safe before parking your vehicle.
2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on the screen when the shift lever is moved to the R (Reverse) position.
4-8 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WAE0290X
3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the steering wheel so that the predictive course lines enter the parking space .
4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make the vehicle width guide lines parallel to the parking space while referring to the predictive course lines.

5. When the vehicle is parked in the space completely, place the shift lever in the P (Park) position and apply the parking brake.
REARVIEW MONITOR SETTINGS
The RearView Monitor settings can be changed using the following procedure.
1. Push the MENU button on the Display Commander.
2. Touch the "Settings" key on the touch screen display.
3. Touch the "Camera" key.

Available setting items:

Setting items

Predictive Course Lines

Display Settings

Brightness Contrast

Tint

Color

Black Level

Action Display the predictive course lines. Adjust display settings by touching the "+"/"-" key.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for RearView Monitor. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
. The system cannot completely eliminate blind spots and may not show every object.
. Underneath the bumper and the corner areas of the bumper cannot be viewed on the RearView Monitor because of its monitoring range limitation. The system will not show small objects below the bumper, and may not show objects close to the bumper or on the ground.
. Objects viewed in the RearView Monitor differ from actual distance because a wide-angle lens is used.
. Objects in the RearView Monitor will appear visually opposite compared to when viewed in the rearview and outside mirrors.

. Use the displayed lines as a reference. The lines are highly affected by the number of occupants, fuel level, vehicle position, road conditions and road grade.
. Make sure that the liftgate is securely closed when backing up.
. Do not put anything on the rearview camera. The rearview camera is installed above the license plate.
. When washing the vehicle with high-pressure water, be sure not to spray it around the camera. Otherwise, water may enter the camera unit causing water condensation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric shock.
. Do not strike the camera. It is a precision instrument. Otherwise, it may malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric shock.
The following are operating limitations and do not represent a system malfunction:
. When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not clearly display objects.

4-10 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

. When strong light directly shines on the camera, objects may not be displayed clearly.
. Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the screen. This is due to strong reflected light from the bumper.
. The screen may flicker under fluorescent light.
. The colors of objects on the RearView Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual color of objects.
. Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a dark environment.
. There may be a delay when switching between views.
. If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the camera, the RearView Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera.
. Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.

diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping it with a dry cloth.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

WAE0645X

CAUTION
. Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration.
. Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the camera , RearView Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11

INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW® MONITOR (if so equipped)

or death.
. The Intelligent Around View® Monitor is a convenience feature and is not a substitute for proper vehicle operation because it has areas where objects cannot be viewed. The four corners of the vehicle in particular, are areas where objects do not always appear in the bird's-eye, front, or rear views. Always check your surroundings to be sure that it is safe to move before operating the vehicle. Always operate the vehicle slowly. Always look out the windows and check mirrors to be sure that it is safe to move.
. The driver is always responsible for safety during parking and other maneuvers.

WAE0655X

1. Touch screen display 2. MENU button 3. CAMERA button

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for the proper use of the Intelligent Around View® Monitor system could result in serious injury

4-12 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CAUTION
Do not scratch the lens when cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the camera.
The Intelligent Around View® Monitor system is designed as an aid to the driver in situations such as slot parking or

parallel parking.
The monitor displays various views of the position of the vehicle in a split screen format. All views are not available at all times.
Available views:
. Front view An approximately 150-degree view of the front of the vehicle.
. Rear view An approximately 150-degree view of the rear of the vehicle.
. Bird's-eye view The surrounding view of the vehicle from above.
. Front-side view The view around and ahead of the front passenger's side wheel.
. Front-wide view An approximately 180-degree view of the front of the vehicle.
. Rear-wide view An approximately 180-degree view of the rear of the vehicle.

WAE0656X
To display the multiple views, the Intelligent Around View® Monitor system uses cameras located in the front grill, on the vehicle's outside mirrors and one just above the vehicle's license plate.

INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW® MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION
With the ignition switch in the ON position, move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position or push the CAMERA button to operate the Intelligent Around View® Monitor.
The screen displayed on the Intelligent Around View® Monitor will automatically return to the previous screen 3 minutes after the CAMERA button has been pushed with the shift lever in a position other than the R (Reverse) position.
Available views
WARNING
. The distance guide line and the vehicle width line should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a paved, level surface. The distance viewed on the monitor is for reference only and may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects.
. Use the displayed lines and the bird's-eye view as a reference. The lines and the bird's-eye view are greatly affected by the num-

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13

ber of occupants, fuel level, vehicle position, road condition and road grade.
. If the tires are replaced with different sized tires, the predictive course lines and the bird'seye view may be displayed incorrectly.
. When driving the vehicle up a hill, objects viewed in the monitor are farther than they appear. When driving the vehicle down a hill, objects viewed in the monitor are closer than they appear.
. Objects in the rear view will appear visually opposite compared to when viewed in the rear view and outside mirrors.
. Use the mirrors or actually look to properly judge distances to other objects.
. The distance between objects viewed in the rear view differs from actual distance because a wide-angle lens is used.
. On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may be a difference between the predictive course lines and the actual course line.

. The vehicle width and predictive course lines are wider than the actual width and course.
. The displayed lines on the rear view will appear slightly off to the right because the rearview camera is not installed in the rear center of the vehicle.

4-14 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Front view

SAA1840

Rear view

WAE0667X

Front and rear view:
Guiding lines that indicate the approximate vehicle width and distances to objects with reference to the vehicle body line , are displayed on the monitor.
Distance guide lines - :
Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
. Red line : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) . Yellow line : approx. 3 ft (1 m) . Green line : approx. 7 ft (2 m) . Green line (front view only): approx.
10 ft (3 m) Vehicle width guide lines :
Indicate the approximate vehicle width.
Predictive course lines :
Indicate the predictive course when operating the vehicle. The predictive course lines will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned. The predictive course lines in the rear view will not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the straight ahead position.
Center guide line (rear view only):
Indicates the center of the vehicle.
The front view will not be displayed when the vehicle speed is above 6 MPH (10 km/h).

NOTE:
When the monitor displays the front view and the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or less from the straight ahead position, both the right and left predictive course lines are displayed. When the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or more, a line is displayed only on the opposite side of the turn.

WAE0245X
Bird's-eye view:
The bird's-eye view shows the overhead view of the vehicle which helps confirm the vehicle position and the predictive course to a parking space.
The vehicle icon shows the position of the vehicle. Note that the distance between objects viewed in the bird's-eye view differs from the actual distance.
The areas that the cameras cannot cover are indicated in black.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the unviewable area is highlighted in yellow for a few seconds after the bird's-eye view is displayed.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15

Predictive course lines ( and ) indicate the predictive course when operating the vehicle. The predictive course lines ( and
) will be displayed on the monitor when the steering wheel is turned. The predictive course lines ( and ) will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned.

WARNING
. Objects in the bird's-eye view will appear farther than the actual distance.
. Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle, may be misaligned or not displayed at the seam of the views.
. Objects that are above the camera cannot be displayed.
. The view for the bird's-eye view may be misaligned when the camera position alters.
. A line on the ground may be misaligned and is not seen as being straight at the seam of the views. The misalignment will increase as the line proceeds away from the vehicle.

JVH1141X

Front-side view:

Guiding lines:

Guiding lines that indicate the width and the front end of the vehicle are displayed on the monitor.

The front-of-vehicle line front part of the vehicle.

shows the

The side-of-vehicle line shows the vehicle width including the outside mirror.

The extensions of both the front and side lines are shown with a green dotted line.

CAUTION
The turn signal light may look like the side-of-vehicle line. This is not a malfunction.

4-16 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Front-wide view

WAE0668X

Front-wide/rear-wide view:

The front-wide view/rear-wide view shows a wider area on the entire screen and allows checking of the blind corners on the right and left sides. The front-wide view/rear-wide view displays an approximately 180-degree area while the front view and the rear view display an approximately 150-degree area. The predictive course lines are not displayed on the front-wide view /rear-wide view.

Distance guide lines - :

Indicate distances from the vehicle body.

. Red line : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) . Yellow line : approx. 3 ft (1 m) . Green line : approx. 7 ft (2 m) . Green line (front-wide view only):
approx. 10 ft (3 m)

Vehicle width guide lines :

Indicate the approximate vehicle width.

Center guide line only):

(rear-wide view

Indicates the center of the vehicle.

Off-road mode (for 4WD models)
When the shift lever is out of the R (Reverse) position, selecting the 4L position using the 4WD shift switch affects the Intelligent Around View® Monitor display as follows:
. Selecting the 4L position will activate the Intelligent Around View® Monitor. The front view/front-side view split screen will be displayed.
. When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position with the 4L position selected, the front view/front-side view split screen will be displayed.
. When the vehicle is shifted to the 4L position with the bird's-eye view displayed, the passenger side of the display will change to the front-side view.
When in the off-road mode, the Intelligent Around View® Monitor will not return to the previous screen. The screen displayed on the Intelligent Around View® Monitor will automatically return to the previous screen 3 minutes after the vehicle was shifted out of the 4L position.

Rear-wide view

WAE0669X

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17

Difference between predicted and actual distances
The displayed guide lines and their locations on the ground are for approximate reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or projecting objects will be actually located at distances different from those displayed in the monitor relative to the guide lines (refer to illustrations). When in doubt, turn around and view the objects as you are backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to view the positioning of objects behind the vehicle.

WAE0286X

WAE0287X

Backing up on a steep uphill:
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown closer than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is farther than it appears on the monitor.

Backing up on a steep downhill:
When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown farther than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor.

4-18 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

How to park with predictive course lines

WARNING

WAE0288X
Backing up near a projecting object: The predictive course lines do not touch the object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit the object if it projects over the actual backing up course.

. If the tires are replaced with different sized tires, the predictive course lines may not be displayed correctly.

. On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may be a difference between the predictive course lines and the actual course line.

. If the battery is disconnected or becomes discharged, the predictive course lines may be displayed incorrectly. If this occurs, please perform the following procedures:

JVH1216X

-- Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock while the engine is running.

Backing up behind a projecting object: The position is shown farther than the

-- Drive the vehicle on a straight road for more than 5 minutes.

position in the display. However, the

position is actually at the same dis-

tance as the position . The vehicle may

hit the object when backing up to the

position if the object projects over the

actual backing up course.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19

5. When the vehicle is parked in the space completely, move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and apply the parking brake.

WAE0289X

WAE0290X

1. Visually check that the parking space is safe before parking your vehicle.
2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on the screen when the shift lever is moved to the R (Reverse) position.

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the steering wheel so that the predictive course lines enter the parking space .
4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make the vehicle width guide lines parallel to the parking space while referring to the predictive course lines.

4-20 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW® MONITOR SETTINGS
The Intelligent Around View® Monitor settings can be changed using the following procedures. 1. Push the MENU button on the Display
Commander. 2. Touch the "Settings" key on the touch
screen display. 3. Touch the "Camera" key.
WAE0657X
How to switch the display
The Intelligent Around View® Monitor can display two split views as well as a single view of the front-wide view or rear-wide view. Push the CAMERA button, change the shift lever position or touch the "Change View" key to switch between the available views.
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21

Available setting items:

Setting item

Display Settings Brightness

Contrast

Tint

Color

Black Level

Camera

Moving Object Detection

Unviewable Area Reminder

Predictive Course Lines Auto Show Sonar Image

Action Adjust display settings by touching the "+"/"-" key.
Turn the MOD system on/off. (See "Moving Object Detection (MOD)" (P.431).) When this item is turned on, the unviewable area is highlighted in yellow for several seconds after the bird's-eye view is displayed for the first time when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. When this item is turned on, the predictive course lines are displayed in the front, rear and bird's-eye view screen. The automatic sonar display can be turned on/off.

NOTE:
Do not adjust any of the Intelligent Around View® Monitor settings while the vehicle is moving. Make sure the parking brake is firmly applied.

4-22 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW® MONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the Intelligent Around View® Monitor. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
. Do not use the Intelligent Around View® Monitor with the outside mirrors in the stored position, and make sure that the liftgate is securely closed when operating the vehicle using the Intelligent Around View® Monitor.
. The apparent distance between objects viewed on the Intelligent Around View® Monitor differs from the actual distance.
. The cameras are installed on the front grille, the outside mirrors and above the rear license plate. Do not put anything on the vehicle that covers the cameras.
. When washing the vehicle with high pressure water, be sure not to spray it around the cameras.

Otherwise, water may enter the camera unit causing water condensation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric shock. . Do not strike the cameras. They are precision instruments. Doing so could cause a malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric shock.
WAE0658X
There are some areas where the system will not show objects and the system does not warn of moving objects. When in the front or rear view display, an object below the bumper or on the ground may not be viewed . When in the bird's-eye view, a tall object near the seam of the camera viewing areas will not appear in Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23

the monitor.
The following are operating limitations and do not represent a system malfunction:
. The screen displayed on the Intelligent Around View® Monitor will automatically return to the previous screen 3 minutes after the CAMERA button has been pushed while the shift lever is in a position other than the R (Reverse) position.
. There may be a delay when switching between views.
. When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not display objects clearly.
. When strong light is directly shines on the camera, objects may not be displayed clearly.
. The screen may flicker under fluorescent light.
. The colors of objects on the Intelligent Around View® Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual color of objects.
. Objects on the monitor may not be clear and the color of the object may differ in a dark environment.
. There may be differences in sharpness between each camera view of the bird's-eye view.

. When activating the Intelligent Around View® Monitor, the icons and the messages may not be displayed for a while.
. If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the camera, the Intelligent Around View® Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera.
. Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth that has been dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.

4-24 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WAE0670X
System temporarily unavailable
When the " " icon is displayed on the screen, there will be abnormal conditions in the Intelligent Around View® Monitor. This will not hinder normal driving operation but the system should be inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.

WAE0671X
When the " " icon is displayed on the screen, the camera image may be receiving temporary electronic disturbances from surrounding devices. This will not hinder normal driving operation but the system should be inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

WAE0656X

CAUTION
. Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration.
. Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the cameras , the Intelligent Around View® Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping with a

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25

CAMERA AIDING SONAR FUNCTION (models with Intelligent Around View® Monitor)

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the sonar function as outlined in this section could result in serious injury or death.
. The sonar is a convenience feature. It is not a substitute for proper parking.
. This function is designed as an aid to the driver in detecting large stationary objects to help avoid damaging the vehicle.
. The driver is always responsible for safety during parking and other maneuvers.
. Always look around and check that it is safe to move before parking.
. Read and understand the limitations of the sonar as contained in this section.
The sonar function helps to inform the driver of large stationary objects around the vehicle when parking by issuing an audible and visual alert.

1. Touch screen display 2. Sonar indicator 3. MENU button 4. CAMERA button

4-26 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WAE0659X
SONAR SYSTEM OPERATION
The system gives the tone for front objects when the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position and both front and rear objects when the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.
When the camera image is shown on the

touch screen display, the system shows the sonar indicator regardless of the shift lever position.
The system is deactivated at speeds above 6 MPH (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.
The colors of the sonar indicators and the distance guide lines in the front, frontwide, rear and rear-wide views indicate different distances to the object.
When the objects are detected, the indicator (green) appears and blinks and the tone sounds intermittently. When the vehicle moves closer to the object, the color of the indicator turns yellow and the rate of the blinking and the rate of the tone increase. When the vehicle is very close to the object, the indicator stops blinking and turns red, and the tone sounds continuously.
The intermittent tone will stop after 3 seconds when an object is detected by only the sonar and the distance does not change.
The tone will stop when the object is no longer near the vehicle.

WAE0660X
TURNING ON AND OFF THE SONAR FUNCTION
When the "P" key is touched, the indicator light on the key will turn off and the sonar will turn off temporarily. The Moving Object Detection (MOD), the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB), and the Intelligent Back-up Intervention (I-BI) systems will also be turned off at the same time. See "Moving Object Detection (MOD)" (P.4-31), "Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)" (P.5-116) and "Intelligent Back-up Intervention (I-BI)" (P.5-63).
When the "P" key is touched again, the indicator light will turn on and the sonar will turn back on.

The Moving Object Detection (MOD), the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB), and the Intelligent Back-up Intervention (I-BI) systems will also turn back on at the same time.
In the cases below, the sonar will be turned back on automatically:
. When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.
. When the CAMERA button is pushed and a screen other than the camera view is shown on the display.
. When vehicle speed decreases below approximately 5 MPH (8 km/h).
. When the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position and turned back to the ON position again.
To prevent the sonar system from activating altogether, use the sonar system settings menu. (See "Sonar function settings" (P.4-28).)
When both Sonar and the MOD system are deactivated from the settings menu, the "P" key will disappear from the Around View® Monitor screen. (See "Sonar function settings" (P.4-28) and "MOD function settings" (P.4-34).)

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27

SONAR FUNCTION SETTINGS
The camera aiding sonar function settings can be changed using the following procedures. 1. Push the MENU button on the Display
Commander. 2. Touch the "Settings" key on the touch
screen display. 3. Touch the "Parking Sonar" key.
4-28 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Available setting items: Setting item Parking Sonar
Auto Show Sonar Image Front Only Distance Volume

Action
When this item is turned on, the front and rear sonar is activated. When this item is turned off (indicator turns off), the front and rear sonar is deactivated. The amber markers are displayed at the corners of the vehicle icon. When the Intelligent Around View® Monitor is activated next time after placing the ignition switch in the ON position, a gray sonar icon will briefly flash on the touch screen display, indicating that the sonar system is off.
When the sonar detects an object while this item is turned on, the Intelligent Around View® Monitor will interrupt the current view in the display to show the surround area of the vehicle.
When this item is turned on, only the front sonar is activated. The amber markers are displayed at the rear corners of the vehicle icon.
Adjust the sensitivity level of the sonar.
Adjust the tone volume of the sonar.

NOTE: Do not adjust any of the Parking Sonar settings while the vehicle is moving. Make sure the parking brake is firmly applied.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29

SONAR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the sonar function. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
. Inclement weather or ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, a truck's compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill may affect the function of the system, including reduced performance or a false activation.
. The system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects.
. The system will not detect small objects below the bumper, and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the ground.
. The system may not detect the following objects:
-- Fluffy objects such as snow, cloth, cotton, grass or wool.
-- Thin objects such as rope, wire or chain.

-- Wedge-shaped objects. . If your vehicle sustains damage
to the bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of objects or false alarms.
CAUTION
Excessive noise (such as audio system volume or an open vehicle window) will interfere with the tone and it may not be heard.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
Keep the surface of the sonar (located on the front and rear bumper fascia) free from accumulations of snow, ice and dirt. Do not scratch the surface of the sonar when cleaning. If the sensors are covered, the accuracy of the sonar function will be diminished.

See "Front and rear sonar system" (P.5136) for more information on the sonar system and limitations.
System temporarily unavailable
When the amber markers are displayed at the corners of the vehicle icon and the function cannot be activated from the Parking sonar settings menu (the setting items are grayed out), the sonar system may be malfunctioning.

4-30 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (MOD)

1. Touch screen display 2. MENU button 3. CAMERA button

death.
. The MOD system is not a substitute for proper vehicle operation and is not designed to prevent contact with the objects surrounding the vehicle. When maneuvering, always use the outside mirror and rearview mirror and turn and check the surrounding to ensure it is safe to maneuver.
. The system is deactivated at speeds above 6 MPH (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.
. The MOD system is not designed to detect the surrounding stationary objects.

WARNING

WAE0655X

The Moving Object Detection (MOD) system can inform the driver of the moving objects surrounding the vehicle when driving out of garages, maneuvering into parking lots and in other such instances.
The MOD system detects moving objects by using image processing technology on the image shown on the display.

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the Moving Object Detection system could result in serious injury or
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31

MOD SYSTEM OPERATION
The MOD system will turn on automatically under the following conditions:
. When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.
. When the CAMERA button is pushed to activate the camera view on the display.
. When vehicle speed decreases below approximately 5 MPH (8 km/h) and the camera screen is displayed.
The MOD system operates in the following conditions when the camera view is displayed:
. When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position and the vehicle is stopped, the MOD system detects moving objects in the bird's-eye view. The MOD system will not operate if the outside mirrors are moving in or out, in the stowed position, or if either front door is opened.
. When the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position and the vehicle speed is below approximately 5 MPH (8 km/h), the MOD system detects moving objects in the front view or front-wide view.
. When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the vehicle speed is below approximately 5 MPH

(8 km/h), the MOD system detects moving objects in the rear view or rear-wide view.
The MOD system will not operate if the liftgate is open.
The MOD system does not detect moving objects in the front-side view. The MOD icon is not displayed on the screen when in this view.

4-32 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Bird's-eye view

WAE0661X

Front view / rear view

WAE0662X

Rear and front-side views

WAE0663X

WAE0664X Front-wide view / rear-wide view (example)

When the MOD system detects moving objects near the vehicle, a chime will be heard and a yellow frame will be displayed on the view where the objects are detected. While the MOD system continues to detect moving objects, the yellow frame continues to be displayed.
In the bird's-eye view, the yellow frame is displayed on each camera image (front, rear, right, left) depending on where moving objects are detected.
The yellow frame is displayed on each view in the front view, front-wide view, rear view and rear-wide view modes.
A green MOD icon is displayed in the view where the MOD system is operative. A white MOD icon is displayed in the view where the MOD system is not operative.
If the MOD system is turned off, the MOD icon is not displayed.

WAE0660X
TURNING ON AND OFF THE MOD SYSTEM
When the "P" key is touched, the indicator light on the key will turn off and the MOD system will turn off temporarily. The sonar, the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB), and the Intelligent Back-up Intervention (I-BI) systems will also be turned off at the same time. See "Camera aiding sonar function (models with Intelligent Around View® Monitor)" (P.4-26), "Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)" (P.5-116) and "Intelligent Back-up Intervention (IBI)" (P.5-63).
When the "P" key is touched again, the indicator light will turn on and the MOD

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33

system will turn back on.
The sonar, the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB), and the Intelligent Back-up Intervention (I-BI) systems will also turn back on at the same time.
To enable or disable the MOD system, use the camera settings menu. See "MOD function settings" (P.4-34).
MOD FUNCTION SETTINGS
The MOD function settings can be changed using the following procedures.
1. Push the MENU button on the Display Commander.
2. Touch the "Settings" key on the touch screen display.
3. Touch the "Camera" key.
4. Touch the "Camera" key.
Available setting items:
Moving Object Detection:
When this item is turned on, the MOD system is activated. When this item is turned off (indicator turns off), the MOD system is deactivated.

WAE0665X
When the MOD system is deactivated, the MOD icon will disappear. When the sonar is turned off on the settings menu as well, the "P" key will disappear.
MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for MOD. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.

. Do not use the MOD system when towing a trailer. The system may not function properly.
. Excessive noise (for example, audio system volume or open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.
. The MOD system performance will be limited according to environmental conditions and surrounding objects such as:
-- When there is low contrast between background and the moving objects.
-- When there is blinking source of light.
-- When strong light such as another vehicle's headlight or sunlight is present.
-- When camera orientation is not in its usual position, such as when mirror is folded.
-- When there is dirt, water drops or snow on the camera lens.
-- When the position of the moving objects in the display is not changed.

4-34 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

. The MOD system might detect flowing water droplets on the camera lens, white smoke from the muffler, moving shadows, etc.
. The MOD system may not function properly depending on the speed, direction, distance or shape of the moving objects.
. If your vehicle sustains damage to the parts where the camera is installed, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered and the MOD system may not detect objects properly.
. When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not display objects clearly. This is not a malfunction.

diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

WAE0656X

CAUTION
. Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration.
. Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the cameras , the MOD system may not operate properly. Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth dampened with a
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35

VENTILATORS

WAE0636X
CENTER VENTILATORS
Open/close the ventilators by moving the control to either direction.
Adjust the air flow direction of the ventilators by moving the center knob (up/ down, left/right) until the desired position is achieved.

WAE0638X
SIDE VENTILATORS
Open/close the ventilators by moving the control to either direction.
Adjust the air flow direction of the ventilators by moving the center knob (up/ down, left/right) until the desired position is achieved.

SAA3055
REAR VENTILATORS
Adjust the air flow direction of the ventilators by moving the center knob (up/ down, left/right) until the desired position is achieved.

4-36 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

WARNING
. The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
. Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the support of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should not be left alone either. On hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.
. Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up.
. Do not adjust the heating and air conditioning controls while driving so that full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

vents.
. When parking, set the heater and air conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help reduce odors inside the vehicle.

Start the engine and operate the heater and air conditioner system.
NOTE: . Odors from inside and outside the
vehicle can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor can enter the passenger compartment through the

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37

WAE0650X

1. Temperature control dial (driver's side)

14.

(air recirculation) button

2. AUTO (automatic) button 3. REAR ON·OFF button

15.

(outside air circulation) button

16. A/C (air conditioner) button

4. REAR CTRL (rear control) button 5. Display screen 6. SYNC (synchronize) button

AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER Automatic operation

7. Temperature control dial (passenger's side)

8. ON·OFF button

(air flow control) button

10.

(front defroster) button

11.

(rear window defroster) button

(See "Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch" (P.2-45).)

12.

(fan speed control) buttons

13.

Upper vent button

Cooling and/or dehumidified heating (AUTO):
This mode may be used all year round as the system automatically works to keep a constant temperature. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.
1. Push the AUTO button. (The indicator light on the button will illuminate.)

4-38 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

2. Turn the temperature control dial on the corresponding side to set the desired temperature. . You can individually set temperatures for the driver's side and front passenger's side when the indicator light on the SYNC button is not illuminated.
A visible mist may be seen coming from the ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction.
Heating (A/C OFF):
The air conditioner does not activate in this mode. Use this mode when you only need to heat.
1. Push the AUTO button. (The indicator light on the button will illuminate.)
2. Push the A/C button. (The indicator light on the button will turn off.)
3. Turn the temperature control dial on the corresponding side to set the desired temperature. . You can individually set temperatures for the driver's side and front passenger's side when the indicator light on the SYNC button is not illuminated.
. The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution

and fan speed are also controlled automatically.
NOTE: . Do not set the temperature lower
than the outside air temperature or the system may not work properly.
. Not recommended if windows fog up.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging:

1. Push the

button. (The indicator

light on the button will illuminate.)

2. Turn the temperature control dial on the corresponding side to set the desired temperature.

. To quickly remove ice from the outside of the windows, use the button to set the fan speed to maximum.

. As soon as possible after the windshield is cleared, push the AUTO button to return to the automatic mode.

Manual operation

Fan speed control:
Push the buttons to manually control the fan speed.

Air intake control:

. Push the

button to recirculate

interior air inside the vehicle. (The

indicator light on the button will

illuminate.)

. Push the

button to draw outside

air into the passenger compartment.

(The indicator light on the button will

illuminate.)

. To control the air intake automatically,

push and hold either the

button

or the button. The indicator light

will blink, and then the air intake will

switch to automatic control. When the

automatic control is set, the system

automatically alternates between the

outside air circulation and the air

recirculation modes. (The indicator

light of the active mode will illumi-

nate.)

Air flow control:

Pushing the

button manually con-

trols air flow and selects the air outlet:

-- Air flows mainly from center and side ventilators.
-- Air flows mainly from center and side ventilators and foot outlets.
-- Air flows mainly from the foot outlet and partly from the defroster.
-- Air flows mainly from the defroster and foot outlets.

Synchronize temperature settings:
Push the SYNC button to turn on the SYNC mode. (The indicator light on the button will illuminate.)
When the SYNC mode is active, the driver's side temperature control dial will control the driver's side, front passenger's side and rear temperatures.
When the passenger's side temperature setting or the rear temperature setting is changed, it will cancel the SYNC mode of the operated individual zone. (The indicator light on the SYNC button will turn off.)
Changing both the passenger's side temperature setting and the rear temperature setting will completely turn off the SYNC mode.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39

Turning the system on/off
Push the ON·OFF button.

WAE0641X

4-40

REAR AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
Push the REAR ON·OFF button on the front air conditioner control panel to turn on the rear automatic air conditioning system. (The indicator light on the button will illuminate.)
To control the rear automatic air conditioning system with the front air conditioner control panel, push the REAR CTRL button. (The indicator light on the button will illuminate.)
The rear automatic air conditioning system can also be adjusted by using the rear air conditioner control panel located on the rear of the center console. (See
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

"Rear air conditioner control panel operation" (P.4-42).)
Front air conditioner control panel operation
Automatic operation:
1. Push the REAR ON·OFF button to turn on the rear automatic air conditioning system. (The indicator light on the button will illuminate.) Push the REAR CTRL button to operate the rear automatic air conditioning system. (The indicator light on the button will illuminate.)
2. Push the AUTO button. (The AUTO indicator light will illuminate and "AUTO" will appear on the rear display.)
3. Turn the temperature control dial (driver's side) to set the desired temperature.

Cooling and dehumidified heating:

1. Push the REAR ON·OFF button to turn on the rear automatic air conditioning system. (The indicator light on the button will illuminate.) Push the REAR CTRL button to operate the rear automatic air conditioning system. (The indicator light on the button will illuminate.)

2. Turn the temperature control dial (driver's side) to set the desired temperature.

3. Switch the air flow mode to

pushing the button.

4. Push the A/C button. (The indicator light on the button will illuminate.)

NOTE:

When the front air conditioner is off, the rear automatic air conditioning system only operates the fan. When you would like to use the air conditioner, be sure to push the A/C button on the front air conditioner control panel to turn on the A/C indicator light.

Manual operation:

Perform the following when the indicator lights on the REAR ON·OFF button and the REAR CTRL button are illuminated.

. Temperature control Turn the temperature control dial

(driver's side) to set the desired tem-

perature.

. Fan speed control

Push the fan speed control

but-

tons to manually control the fan

speed.

. Air flow control

Push the button to change the air

flow mode.

: The air outlet is fixed at foot level.
: The air outlet is fixed at both the head and foot levels.
: The air outlet is fixed at the head level.

button

2. Fan speed control button

3. AUTO button

4. Display

5. MODE button

6. TEMP button

WAE0470X

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41

Rear air conditioner control panel operation

Rear control buttons:
When the indicator light on the REAR CTRL button on the front air conditioner control panel is turned off, the rear seat passengers can adjust the rear automatic air conditioning system using the control switches on the rear of the center console.

button:

Rear automatic air conditioning sys-

tem on/off.

button:

Rear fan speed control up/down

. AUTO button:

Rear automatic air conditioning sys-

tem on, AUTO mode on

. MODE button:

Rear air flow control change

. TEMP button:

Rear temperature control up/down

Turning the system on/off

Use the following methods to turn on/off the rear automatic air conditioning system.

. Operating the front air conditioner control panel:

Push the REAR ON·OFF button on the front air conditioner control panel.

. Operating the rear air conditioner control panel:

Push the

button on the rear air

conditioner control panel when the

indicator light on the REAR CTRL

button on the front air conditioner

control panel is not illuminated.

4-42 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WAE0642X WAE0643X

ANTENNA

OPERATING TIPS
When the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low, the air flow from the foot outlets may not operate. However, this is not a malfunction. After the coolant temperature warms up, the air flow from the foot outlets will operate normally.
The sensors and located on the instrument panel help maintain a constant temperature. Do not put anything on or around the sensors.
LINKING INTELLIGENT KEY (if so equipped)
The air conditioner system settings can be memorized for each Intelligent Key. For more details, see "Setting memory function" (P.3-42).
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
The air conditioner system is equipped with an in-cabin microfilter which collects dirt, pollen, dust, etc.
To make sure the air conditioner heats, defogs, and ventilates efficiently, replace the filter in accordance with the specified maintenance intervals listed in the "9. Maintenance and schedules" section. It is recommended to see a NISSAN dealer to replace the filter.
The filter should be replaced if the air

flow decreases significantly or if windows fog up easily when operating the heater or air conditioner.
SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind. This refrigerant will not harm the earth's ozone layer. However, special charging equipment and lubricant are required when servicing your NISSAN air conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your air conditioner system. (See "Capacities and recommended fluids/lubricants" (P.10-2) for air conditioner system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations.)
Your NISSAN dealer will be able to service your environmentally friendly air conditioner system.

WINDOW ANTENNA
The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear side glass.
CAUTION
. Do not place metalized film near the 3rd row seat window or attach any metal parts to it. This may cause poor reception or noise.
. When cleaning the inside of the rear side window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear side window antenna. Lightly wipe along the antenna with a dampened soft cloth.

WARNING
The system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air conditioner service should be done only by an experienced technician with the proper equipment.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

When installing a car phone or a CB radio in your vehicle, be sure to observe the following cautions, otherwise the new equipment may adversely affect the electronic control modules and electronic control system harness.

SAA3602
SATELLITE ANTENNA
There is a satellite antenna on the rear part of the vehicle roof.

WARNING
. A cellular phone should not be used for any purpose while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of cellular phones while driving.
. If you must make a call while your vehicle is in motion, the handsfree cellular phone operational mode (if so equipped) is highly recommended. Exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
. If a conversation in a moving vehicle requires you to take notes, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle before doing so.

CAUTION
. Keep the antenna as far away as possible from the electronic control modules.
. Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in (20 cm) away from the electronic control system harness. Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness.
. Adjust the antenna standingwave ratio as recommended by the manufacturer.
. Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body.
. For details, it is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer.

4-44 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

REAR SEAT INFOTAINMENT (RSI) (if so equipped)
WARNING
. It is unlawful in most jurisdictions for a person to drive a motor vehicle which is equipped with a television monitor or screen that is visible, directly or indirectly, to the driver while operating the vehicle. In the interest of safety, the unit should never be installed where it will be directly or indirectly visible, by the operator of the motor vehicle.
. For safety reasons when changing discs, it is recommended that the vehicle is not in motion, and that you do not allow children to unfasten safety belts to change discs or make any adjustments to the system. System adjustments can be accomplished using the remote control, while safety belts remain fastened.
. Enjoy your RSI system but remember that safety of all passengers remains the number one priority. Devices installed in the USB, HDMI, or headphone jack may protrude and create a potential eye impact hazard for un-

belted passengers during a vehicle accident. To reduce the risk of injury, use only SD cards (hidden on left side of driver side monitor) or low-profile USB storage devices.
CAUTION
. If your vehicle is equipped with a wireless rear seat audio system or any other wireless infrared device, make sure it is powered off when operating the RSI system. If both systems are powered on at the same time, the two systems may obstruct each other, possibly creating undesirable audio interference through the wireless headphones.
. Do not touch the inner pins of the jacks on the front panel. Electrostatic discharge may cause permanent damage to the device.
. The LCD display screen is not touchscreen. Do not put pressure or add suction cups on the screen.

. Caution children to avoid touching or scratching the screen, as it may become dirty or damaged.
. Be sure to run the vehicle engine while using the system. Using this system without running the engine can result in battery drain. To avoid the risk of battery drain, please remember to turn off the system when the vehicle is not in use.
WELCOME
This Rear Seat Infotainment (RSI) system, with built-in Wi-Fi, has some advanced features. Before operating this system, read this section thoroughly and retain it for future reference.
System features
. Twin 8-inch Color TFT-LCD Panels with 1024 x 600 Resolution
. Internal Wi-Fi Network . Bluetooth® 4.1 Audio Streaming . Miracast®/Smart View Capability . SmartStream Content Sharing . USB 2.0 Port, SDXC Card Input . HDMI 1.4 Input with MHL 2.0 Support . Exclusive Slingplayer® Application

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45

. 3.5mm Stereo Headphone Output . Front Panel Capacitive Touch Controls . Infrared Wireless Headphones . Full-Function Slimline Remote Control . Monitor Screen Sharing
WAE0712X
GETTING STARTED Turning the monitor on or off
1. Press the button on the top of the monitor or the remote control to turn the monitor on or off. When in use, the front panel controls will illuminate.
2. After the monitor has been turned on and is displaying a picture, the up/ down viewing angle can be adjusted to optimize the picture quality. Press the push-button latch located on the top of the monitor to pivot the screen.
4-46 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Power up tips
1. After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, there is a 12 second delay before the monitor (power) button is operable.
2. On some vehicles after the ignition is turned off, the system will continue to work for 10 minutes, or until the driver's door is opened.
3. Remember to turn the monitor off and pivot the screen to the locked (latched) position when not in use.
Audio options
Wireless headphones
Each monitor includes a built-in dual channel infrared transmitter for use with wireless headphones. The wireless headphones must be used within a line of sight from the transmitter as infrared signals, like visible light, travel only in a straight line.
How to use the wireless headphones
When placing the headphones on your head, make sure to observe the left and right orientation. The headphones must be oriented correctly (facing forward) to receive the audio signal. Press the (power) button on the headphones, then select channel "A" to listen to monitor A, or channel "B" to listen to monitor B.

Adjust the audio level using the volume control on each headphone.

Wired headphones

There is a 3.5mm stereo headphone output on each monitor which can be used with most standard stereo headphones (wired headphones sold separately).

Bluetooth® streaming audio

To listen to audio throughout the entire vehicle, the system includes the ability to stream audio over a Bluetooth® connection to the vehicle's stereo system.

When monitor A is selected as the source

to stream from, the audio output to the

wireless and wired headphones will be

disabled (only on monitor A). To use the

wireless or wired headphones with moni-

tor A, you must turn off the Bluetooth®

streaming feature. To enable/disable

Bluetooth® streaming, navigate to the

"SETTINGS" menu, or press

on the

remote control during content playback.

For additional information, see "Settings"

(P.4-69).

Media compatibility
For a list of compatible media formats for this system, see "Storage device formatting" (P.4-47).
. The metadata or file information of some audio and video files may not be correctly displayed.
. It is not possible to play content that is protected by DRM (Digital Rights Management).
. There may be a delay before playback begins when using USB flash drives or SD cards with complex folder hierarchies or many files.
. Some audio, video, and image files may be incompatible with this system due to file characteristics, file format, recording software used, directory structure, and/or the type of audio/ video encoding used.

music and images.
EX-FAT - USB and SDXC
Better choice for larger capacity storage devices with files that are more than 4GB. This format is better for larger files such as full-length movies.
NTFS - USB and SDXC
Best choice for very large capacity storage devices - with no limitations on file size. This format can be used for all file sizes.

Storage device formatting
This system is compatible with several types of formatting for USB flash drives and SD cards. Refer to the documentation that comes with your storage device for more details on how to format.
FAT32 - USB and SDHC
Good for smaller capacity storage devices, but individual files on the drive must be less than 4GB. This format is good for

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47

Supported Formats

Format

Extension

Supported Variations/Codecs

ASF

.wmv

H.263, H.264, MPEG-2 Part 2, WMV

AVI

.avi

H.263, H.264, MPEG-2 Part 2, Xvid, WMV

VIDEO

MP4

.mp4, .m4v

H.263, H.264, MPEG-2 Part 2, MPEG-4 Part 2

Matroska MPEG AAC

.mkv .mpg, .mpeg, .vob
.m4a, .aac

H.263, H.264, MPEG-2 Part 2, MPEG-4 Part 2, WMV H.264, MPEG-2 Part 2, MPEG-4 Part 2 -

ASF

.wma

WMA, WMA Lossless, WMA Voice, WMA Pro

FLAC

.flac

FLAC 1.2.1

AUDIO

Matroska

.mka

MPEG

.mp1, .mp2, .mp3

MPEG-1 Audio Layer 1, 2, 3, MPEG-2/2.5 Audio Layer 1, 2, 3

OGG

.ogg

WAV

.wav

BMP

.bmp

GIF

.gif

JPEG

.jpg, .jpeg

PHOTO

PNG

.png

TIFF

.tiff, .tif

WebP

.webp

Video Profiles Supported: ASF: WMV7, WMV8, WMV9; H.264: Baseline, Main, Extended, High; MPEG-2 Part 2: Simple, Main, High; MPEG-4 Part 2: Simple, Advanced Simple Profile, Xvid

4-48 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Monitor A (Driver's Side)

WAE0713X

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49

Monitor B (Passenger's Side)

WAE0714X

4-50 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CONTROL DESCRIPTION
1. SD Card Slot
Play videos, music, and images stored on most SD cards. The full-size SD card slot is accessible on the left side of the monitor when the screen is in the open position.
2. Screen latch
Press the push-button latch located on the top of the monitor to pivot the screen. Remember to turn the monitor off and pivot the screen to the locked (latched) position when not in use.
3. Power (Monitor A)
Press this button to turn the monitor on. Press again to turn the monitor off. Press and hold for 6 seconds to reset the system (Monitor A only).
Power (Monitor B)
Press this button to turn the monitor on. Press again to turn the monitor off.
4. Front panel controls
Capacitive-touch buttons provide user interface navigation, Select, Back, and Home functions.
5. Monitor screen display
Includes an 8-inch TFT Liquid Crystal Display with 1024 x 600 resolution.

6. HDMI port
Connect an external audio/video source using a full-size HDMI connector. Supports MHL 2.0 playback and charging.
7. USB 2.0 port
Play videos, music, and images stored on most USB devices. Provides up to 2 amps of output to charge most mobile devices.
8. Headphone output jack
Connect wired headphones using a 1/8 in (3.5 mm) stereo connector.
CAUTION
. Do not use any harsh solvents or chemicals when cleaning the monitor.
. Do not use any abrasive cleaners that may scratch the screen. Use only a lightly dampened lint free cloth to wipe the screen if it is dirty.
. The LCD display screen is not touchscreen. Do not put pressure or add suction cups on the screen.

. Caution children to avoid touching or scratching the screen, as it may become dirty or damaged.
. Place the monitor in the fully closed position when not in use.
WAE0715X Battery door in locked position
WAE0716X Battery door in unlocked position
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51

REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION
Before use
Before attempting to operate your remote control, turn the remote control face down and remove the battery insulator by pulling the clear plastic tab away from the remote control.
Replacing the battery
1. Turn the remote control face down. Use a coin to turn the battery cover counter-clockwise and remove it.
2. Replace the battery with a CR2032 or equivalent. Make sure that proper polarity is observed. The positive (+) side of the battery should face upwards.
3. Place the cover back into position and turn it clockwise until it locks into place.
The remote control will only operate this device. It is not a universal remote control and will not control other equipment.

with governmental regulations or environmental public institution rules that apply in your country/ area.
CAUTION
. Always ensure that the battery is inserted in the correct direction as shown in the battery compartment.
. When the battery fails to function, replace it immediately.
. Remove the battery if the remote control is not used for a month or longer.
. Storage in extreme cold can weaken the battery. Keep the remote control stored in a cool, dry place.

WARNING

Keep the battery out of the reach of children. In case the battery is accidentally swallowed, immediately consult a doctor. Also, when disposing of used batteries, please comply
4-52 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WAE0717X
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTONS
1. Power Press this button to turn the monitor on. Press again to turn the monitor off.
2. Monitor A Press this button to transmit the remote control codes and functions

to operate monitor A (Driver side).
3. Directional pad
Press these buttons to increase/decrease the volume or navigate up/ down when displaying a menu or file list.
4. Home
Press this button to return to the home screen.
5. Back
Press this button to go back to the previous screen.
6. Monitor B
Press this button to transmit the remote control codes and functions to operate monitor B (Passenger side).
7. Select
Press this button to make a selection when displaying a menu or file list.
8. Menu
Press this button to open the context menu (when available).
NOTE:
You must first select the desired monitor (press A or B) to control it. Example Press A, then press Power to turn monitor A on/off.

WAE0718X
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53

WIRELESS HEADPHONE OPERATION
Installing the batteries
Before attempting to operate the headphones, install the batteries as described below:
1. Remove the headphone battery cover by using a screwdriver.
2. Install two "AAA" batteries into the headphones. Make sure that proper polarity (+ or -) is observed.
3. Reinstall headphone battery cover.
Headphone operation
Press the power button on the headphones to turn on and off the headphones. The amber (Monitor A) or green (Monitor B) LED will illuminate when the headphone is turned on. Set the select switch to "A" or "B" for use with the "A" monitor or "B" monitor respectively. Use the volume thumb wheel to adjust the volume level for the headphone audio.
NOTE:
If the headphones are accidentally left on and system is powered off, a battery saver feature will automatically turn off the headphones after approximately 3 minutes.

WARNING
Keep the batteries out of the reach of children. In case the batteries are accidentally swallowed, immediately consult a doctor. Also, when disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public institution rules that apply in your country/ area.
CAUTION
. Always ensure that the batteries are inserted with the positive and negative terminals in the correct direction as shown in the battery compartment .
. Different types of batteries have different characteristics. Do not mix different types.
. Do not mix old and new batteries. Mixing old and new batteries will shorten battery life and/or cause chemical leaks from the old batteries.

. When batteries fail to function, replace them immediately.
. Remove the batteries if the headphones are not used for a month or longer.

4-54 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WAE0719X
GENERAL OPERATION
Navigating menus
When fully powered on, the Home screen can be accessed at any time by pressing the button on the remote control, or the button on the monitor.
The main menu is located on the farleft side of the screen and allows users to select a source, change settings, USB fast-charge certain devices, and mirror content playing from the opposite monitor.
To the right of the main menu is a preview menu , which gives a preview of the highlighted option in the main

menu. The preview menu options will change with each selection.

Press

to scroll through the

options in each menu. The current selec-

tion is highlighted in the center of the

menu when scrolling up and down. Press

or when an item is highlighted to

select the item. Press

move back one level in the menu.

Mirror

For additional information on how to mirror content playing from the opposite monitor, see "Mirroring content" (P.4-56) and "Using Miracast®" (P.4-67).
Fast-Charge (USB)
For additional information, see "FastCharge (USB)" (P.4-58).
Settings
For additional information, see "Settings" (P.4-69).

WAE0720X
Sources
The following sources can be accessed from the main menu: HDMI Play content from an external audio/ video source using a standard HDMI cable (sold separately).

USB

Play videos, music, and images stored on most USB devices. Provides up to 2 amps of output to charge most mobile devices. This system does not support wired USB data transfer or audio/video playback from mobile devices.

SD CARD

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55

Play videos, music, and images stored on most SD cards.
Slingplayer®
Stream content wirelessly from a Slingbox® (sold separately) to the RSI system. *Requires external internet connection.
Miracast®
Stream content wirelessly from a Miracast-enabled device to the RSI system.
NOTE: Miracast® works with Android OS mobile devices only. This feature is not supported on iOS devices.
SmartStream
Stream content wirelessly between mobile devices and to the RSI system. *Requires compatible UPnP application to be installed on the mobile device. For additional information, see "SmartStream" (P.4-67).
NOTE: SmartStream works on both Android and iOS devices using mobile app (VOXX-RSI).
NOTE:
The top left corner of the screen includes a graphic representation that shows the navigational path of the current menu. For example: Home > Source > HDMI.

WAE0721X

VIDEO OPERATION

Volume control

Volume level can be adjusted by pressing

any time video is playing, or

by selecting the volume icon in the play-

back controls menu.

NOTE:

For hearing protection, there is a maximum volume setting to limit the audio output of the front panel 3.5mm headphone output. Using the directional pad on the remote navigate to "SETTINGS" then "AUDIO" then "HEADPHONES" to adjust the maximum volume. Once set, the maximum volume is limited to this

4-56 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

setting.
Mirroring content
To mirror the content of the opposite monitor, using the directional pad on the remote, select "MIRROR" from the Home Screen. This will allow the identical content to play on both monitors.
Multicast
Multicast (Off/On) provides the ability to watch a video over the built-in Wi-Fi network using an application installed on a mobile device. When turned on, the video content will be "cast" over the network to allow users with multiple mobile devices to enjoy the same movie. *Requires application to be installed on the mobile device.
Bluetooth
Selecting "BLUETOOTH" allows the Bluetooth® feature to be turned off/on, audio source selection, and lip-sync adjustments. For additional information, see "Bluetooth® streaming" (P.4-74) and "LipSync adjustment" (P.4-75).

WAE0722X

HDMI/MHL CONNECTION

HDMI connection

Display content from an external source connected to the system using the HDMI port located on the front of monitor A. A standard HDMI cable is required (sold separately).

To access the HDMI source, using the directional pad on the remote, select "SOURCE" from the Home Screen and navigate to HDMI in the menu. When HDMI is highlighted, a preview of the HDMI input will be displayed in the preview screen.

Press

to return to the source menu.

NOTE:
HDMI connected devices are independent and must be controlled directly from the source device.
MHL connection
The system also allows mobile devices supporting Mobile High-Definition Link (MHL) to be connected. An MHL-to-HDMI cable is required (sold separately).
Mobile High-Definition Link (MHL) is an industry standard mobile audio/video interface that allows connection of smartphones, tablets, and other portable consumer electronics devices to the system. MHL transports high-quality uncompressed audio and video from a mobile source device to the system and at the same time provides power to recharge the device.
NOTE:
MHL connected devices are independent and must be controlled directly from the source device.

WAE0723X
USB/SD CARD OPERATION
USB operation
Insert a USB device into the USB port located on the front of monitor A. Using the directional pad on the remote, select "SOURCE" from the Home Screen and navigate to "USB" in the menu. When USB is highlighted, music, video and photo icons will appear in the preview menu to the right. The front panel USB port provides up to 2 amps of output to charge most mobile devices. Please note this system does not support USB data transfer or audio/video playback from mobile devices.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57

NOTE:
When inserting a USB storage device with a large library of content, there may be a delay before the content is accessible.

WAE0724X
Fast-Charge (USB)
Fast-Charge allows you to charge certain USB devices faster than normal. To enable, using the directional pad on the remote, select "FAST-CHARGE" when highlighted in the main menu. The USB icon will display a green lightning bolt when active.
NOTE:
Enabling the Fast-Charge mode disables the USB port from reading data or content from USB devices. When selecting USB as the source, the FastCharge feature is automatically disabled.

WAE0725X
SD card operation
Insert a full-size SD card into the SD card slot located on the left side monitor A. Using the directional pad on the remote, select "SOURCE" from the Home Screen and navigate to "SD CARD" in the menu. When SD Card is highlighted, music, video and photo icons will appear in the preview menu to the right.

4-58 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Basic navigation
USB and SD card are characterized by three different categories which are videos, music, and photos. Each media type will show a preview of the available content. After selecting a media type, navigate the content, and select the desired file or photo. When a media item is highlighted, the preview image is enlarged and surrounded by a white border. If available, the item's metadata (video title, filename, or photo name) will be displayed in the information bar at the bottom of the screen.

Context menu

Press on the remote while navigating

content to open the context menu. The

context menu provides options to adjust

the page view, sorting, and searching. The

options will vary, depending on the con-

tent. Press

to select or toggle the

highlighted item on the menu. Press

to exit the context menu.

WAE0726X
Page view -- music and videos
Using the directional pad on the remote, select "PAGE VIEW" to change between List or Grid. List provides an alphanumeric text listing of all content, whereas Grid provides an alphanumeric thumbnail graphic view of the content.

Page view -- photos
Using the directional pad on the remote, select "PAGE VIEW" to change between Grid, Overview, Slideshow, or Full Screen. Grid provides a large thumbnail graphic view, whereas Overview provides a small thumbnail graphic view of the content. Slideshow will play photos in sequence and Full Screen fills the entire screen.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59

WAE0727X

Search provides an easy way to find and

play content by name. Using the direc-

tional pad on the remote, select "SEARCH"

to display the on-screen keyboard. Use

the directional pad to navigate the key-

board and enter the first few characters

of the filename. Once the desired file is

displayed, press

to hide the key-

board. Press to begin playback.

Sorting -- videos
Using the directional pad on the remote, select "SORTING" to select between Title, Rating, Year, Filename, or Genre.
Sorting -- music
Using the directional pad on the remote, select "SORTING" to select between Artist, Album, Year, Filename, Song, or Genre.
Sorting -- photos
Using the directional pad on the remote, select "SORTING" to select between Date or Filename.

4-60 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

USB/SD card USB/SD card video playback controls

During video playback, press

to dis-

play the playback controls. Press

to navigate the controls. Press to

select the highlighted function or option.

The playback controls will disappear after

video progress bar indicator.

3. Volume

Select to display the volume level

indicator. Press

to in-

crease or decrease the volume.

4. Night Mode

Select to dim the screen and reduce eye strain during operation at night.

5. Previous

Select to go to the beginning of the chapter. Select again to go to the previous chapter.

6. Rewind

Select to rewind at 2x, 4x, 8x, and 16x

speeds. Select

to resume play-

back.

7. Stop

Select to stop video playback and return to the menu.

WAE0728X
approximately 5 seconds of no activity. 1. Context Menu
Press on the remote to open the context menu. The menu options will vary, depending on the source. 2. Progress Bar

8. Play/Pause

Select once to pause video playback. Select again to resume video playback.

9. Fast Forward

Select to fast forward at 2x, 4x, 8x, and

16x speeds. Select

to resume

playback.

Shows elapsed time, total time and

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61

10. Next
Select to go to the next chapter.
11. Repeat
Select once to repeat the entire video. Select again to repeat the currently playing chapter one time.

WAE0725X
Playing videos
Using the directional pad on the remote, select "VIDEOS" to navigate the content. When a media item is highlighted in Grid mode, the preview image is enlarged and surrounded by a white border. The video title will be displayed in the information bar at the bottom of the screen. Press to begin playback. When choosing a video that has previously been started, a "Resume" option is available.

Context menu

Press

on the remote to open the

context menu during playback. The con-

text menu provides options to adjust the

display settings, aspect settings, and

Bluetooth® settings. Press

to select

or toggle the highlighted item on the

menu. Press to exit the context menu.

Display settings
Brightness is adjustable between Low, Medium, High, and Default.
Contrast is adjustable between Low, Medium, High, and Default.
Sharpness is adjustable between Low, Medium, High, and Default.
Aspect is adjustable between Preserve, Crop, and Stretch.

4-62 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Forward, Play/Pause, Shuffle, Repeat, Volume Control, and Night mode.
Press to return to the Playlist screen. The audio will continue to play while navigating the playlist screen. The system will return to the Now Playing screen after approximately 15 seconds of no activity.

WAE0729X
Bluetooth® settings
Selecting "BLUETOOTH" allows the Bluetooth® feature to be turned off/on, audio source selection, and lip-sync adjustments. For additional information, see "Lip-Sync adjustment" (P.4-75).

WAE0730X

Playing music

Navigating through a music library is identical to navigating through the video library. The default sorting option for music is Artist. Selecting an artist will then sort by Album and will display all available albums by that artist. There is also an option to Play ALL albums from the selected artist.

Select an album to display all songs in the

album. Press

to navigate

the songs. Press to begin playback.

During playback, press

to select the

Now Playing screen. The Now Playing

screen includes the following controls:

Previous Song, Next Song, Rewind, Fast-

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-63

WAE0731X

Navigating photos

To view photos, using the directional pad on the remote navigate to "SOURCE" then "USB" or "SD CARD" then "PHOTOS" from the home screen. Storage device must be connected to display to read media. Use the directional pad to highlight the photo then press to view.

Highlight the vertical arrows on menu to access the page selector feature to quickly scan photos.

Press

to highlight additional options

including Sorting, Page View, Set As Back-

ground, and Search.

Sorting lets you arrange the photos by

filename or date.
Page View allows the user to view photos in Fullscreen, Grid, Overview, or Slideshow.
Set As Background sets the selected photo as the home screen background.
Search prompts the user to input a filename or date to find a photo.
SLINGPLAYER®
About Slingplayer®
A Slingbox® (sold separately) connects to your home network and sits between your cable or set-top box and your TV. When accessed remotely, your Slingbox® slings your content to the RSI system. To use Slingplayer®, an external internet connection is required. For additional information, see "Using Wi-Fi" (P.4-70) to enable Client Mode in the Wi-Fi Settings and allow the system to connect to a WiFi hotspot.

4-64 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WAE0732X
Using Slingplayer®
Using the directional pad on the remote, select "SOURCE" from the Home Screen and navigate to "SLINGPLAYER" in the menu. The first use of Slingplayer® will prompt you for login credentials. Use the remote control to navigate the on-screen keyboard and enter the e-mail address and password associated with your Slingplayer® account.

WAE0733X
Slingplayer® options
Once logged in, the main Slingplayer® menu page is displayed with 3 options: 1. Select "DIRECTORY" to watch live tele-
vision from a Slingbox®. 2. Select "SETTINGS" to change the set-
tings of the Slingplayer® application. 3. Select "HELP" to display information
on how to properly use the Slingplayer® application.

WAE0734X

Connect to a live video stream

Press

to access the navigational

menu that will display two sets of Menu

Control Bars. The upper Menu Control Bar

displays types of controls. Press

select the desired type of control. Press

to hide the menus and return to the

live stream.

Slingplayer® control options include:

. Main . DVR . Directional Pad . Number . Miscellaneous

WAE0735X

Accessing the program guide

Press to display the upper and lower

Menu Control Bar for Slingplayer®. By

default, the "Main" icon on the upper

Menu Control Bar is highlighted, showing

the "Main" menu options in the lower

Menu Control Bar. Press

navigate to the lower options and select

"GUIDE". This will launch the Program

Guide. Once the guide has loaded, use

the directional pad and press

select the desired channel or program.

Press

multiple times or to exit.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65

WAE0736X

Exiting Slingplayer®

There are two ways to exit the Sling-

player® application. Press

while on the main screen to return to the

main menu. When exiting the application,

you will be prompted to confirm: "Are you

sure you want to exit Slingplayer? There

will be no data usage once exited". Select

"Yes" to return to the Home Screen or

select "No" to return to the stream.

Connection quality
The quality of a mobile network connection, whether it's Wi-Fi or a mobile hotspot can vary, due to network conditions. Connection speed and bandwidth can fluctuate, creating conditions that aren't optimal for smooth streaming.
Slingbox® compatibility
The following legacy Slingbox® devices are not supported: Slingbox PRO, Slingbox AV, Slingbox TUNER, Slingbox Classic.
Visit www.slingbox.com for more information on Slingbox® or where to purchase.

MIRACAST®
About Miracast®
Miracast® is a dedicated wireless connection technology that allows content streaming between a mobile device and the RSI system. The connection is made without cables or a network connection. It provides the ability to "cast" (display) content, such as images or videos from the mobile device to the RSI system. There is no need for an external internet connection and the ability to connect is inside Miracast-certified devices.
NOTE: Miracast® works with Android OS mobile devices only. This feature is not supported on iOS devices.

4-66 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WAE0737X
Using Miracast®
Using the directional pad on the remote select "SOURCE" from the Home Screen and navigate to "MIRACAST" in the menu. "Ready to Connect" will be displayed. Enable Screen Mirroring on the mobile device and look for "RSI-Miracast" in the list of possible devices to connect to. Note that Miracast® may be labeled differently, depending on the mobile device and its operating system. If Miracast® is not available, look for Smart View or Screen Mirroring in the settings menu of your mobile device. Remember to end your Miracast® connection when finished to avoid draining the battery of your mobile

device.
This screen must be active to be able to connect your mobile device to the monitor.
Visit www.wi-fi.org for a current list of Miracast® certified devices.
USING THE MOBILE APPLICATION ON YOUR MOBILE DEVICE
Download the free "VOXX-RSI" mobile application on your mobile device from Apple iTunes or Google Play store. A full version of the RSI Owner's Manual is also included within the mobile application.
WARNING
THIS MOBILE APP IS NOT FOR DRIVER USE
To reduce risk of a crash which can result in death or serious injury, always drive carefully and in accordance with traffic laws. The driver should not use the mobile app while the vehicle is in motion. Mobile app may only be used by the driver after you have stopped your vehicle in an appropriate location permitted by law. The mobile app is specifically designed to be used by passengers other than the driver, provided it

does not interfere with driving, and does not distract the driver's attention to the road.
SMARTSTREAM
About SmartStream
SmartStream is a wireless connection technology that allows content streaming between a mobile device and the RSI system and between mobile devices. Content is streamed over the built-in WiFi network using an application installed on a mobile device. There is no need for an external internet connection.
Using SmartStream
Before using the SmartStream feature, a compatible UPnP application is required to be downloaded and installed on your mobile device. To stream content from a mobile device, you must first connect it to the RSI network.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67

to display the current password. For additional information, see "Using WiFi" (P.4-70).
NOTE:
Access Point must be selected to use the SmartStream feature. For additional information, see "Using Wi-Fi" (P.4-70).

WAE0738X
Connecting a mobile device to the RSI network:
1. Using the directional pad on the remote, select "SOURCE" from the Home Screen and then select "SMARTSTREAM" in the menu. A device connection screen will be displayed on the monitor.
2. Navigate to the "Wi-Fi" settings menu of the mobile device and establish a connection to the network named "Nissan RSE".
3. When prompted, enter the network password to join the Nissan RSE network. Select the Show Password check box in the Wi-Fi Settings menu
4-68 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WAE0739X
Streaming content from a mobile device:
1. Once connected, launch the application, and select SmartStream on the mobile device.
2. Choose the desired monitor to stream to by selecting Monitor A or Monitor B. Note: To stream content from a mobile device, the monitor must be set to SmartStream in the source menu.
3. Select the desired source content from the list of available devices. Content can be browsed from all devices that are connected to the RSI Wi-Fi network and have a compatible UPnP application installed.

4. After selecting a content source, navigate through the folders, and select the desired file to stream to the monitor. Once the file is selected, it will begin streaming to the monitor that was selected in step 2 above.

5. Playback controls are available from

the Now Playing screen in the UPnP

application and from the monitor.

Press

to display the playback

controls on the monitor.

NOTE: . Content protected with DRM (Digital
Rights Management) cannot be streamed using the SmartStream feature.

. A wired connection (HDMI or MHL) is required to stream protected content from a mobile device to the RSI system. For additional information, see "HDMI/MHL connection" (P.4-57).

Audio

Select the monitor to use for Bluetooth® audio streaming and set the maximum volume level when using wired headphones.

Advanced

Change the language of the GUI (Graphic User Interface), reset the RSI system, and update the software.

Customize

WAE0740X
SETTINGS
The following settings can be accessed from the main menu:

Change the background image of the home screen using content from an SD card or USB storage device.
Bluetooth
Control Bluetooth® audio streaming (On/ Off) and select from the available list of paired devices.

Wi-Fi

Change the SSID (network name), change the password of the network, and toggle between Client Mode or Access Point.

Read Back

A text-to-speech aid that enables the system to read text items displayed on the screen. This feature guides the user through operating the RSI system.

Display

Adjust Brightness, Contrast, and Sharpness settings.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69

complete. Select the Show Password check box to display the current password. Select "Save" to save the SSID and password.

WAE0741X
Using Wi-Fi
Access Point
Access Point is used when connecting other mobile devices to the RSI's built-in internal network. This mode allows the RSI system to connect to devices "inside" the vehicle, using an optional UPnP application installed on a mobile device.
To change the SSID, navigate the keyboard and enter the desired network name. Select "Enter" when complete. The default SSID name is Nissan RSE.
To change the network password, navigate the keyboard and enter the desired numeric password. Select "Enter" when
4-70 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WAE0742X

Client Mode

Client Mode is used when connecting the RSI system to an external network or to the internet using a mobile hotspot. This mode allows the RSI system to connect "outside" the vehicle.

Enable Client Mode by highlighting the

Status switch. The switch will turn green

when on. The RSI system will begin

searching for available wireless networks

and display them below. Navigate to the

desired network and press

to select

it. Enter the password (if necessary) to

complete the connection. The system will

automatically connect to the last con-

nected network until Client Mode is

disabled.

NOTE:

Client Mode will use data from the external Wi-Fi connection. Use with care as additional data is consumed when using mobile device data plans.

Using Read Back*

Enable the Read Back feature by high-

lighting the Status switch. The switch will

turn green when on. Highlight the Save

button and press

to enable Read

Back. When enabled, the RSI system will

read the text of menu items displayed on

the screen, providing audible guidance on

how to use the system. A blue bar will also

appear at the top of each screen indicat-

ing the Read Back feature is enabled.

Speech Volume

Speech Volume can be adjusted to match the media volume (spoken text volume is the same volume level as the content being played). To reduce the Speech Volume to be lower than the volume level content being played, set it to 75%, 50%, or 25% of the media volume.

Speech Rate

Speech Rate can be adjusted between Normal, Fast, or Slow. This setting controls how fast the spoken text is pronounced.

*Complies with FCC/Accessibility rule 21st Century Communications and Video Accessibility Act (CVAA).
WAE0743X
Display settings
Brightness Brightness is a measurement of the amount of light the monitor produces. For displaying movies, a brighter luminance rating is desirable. Select between Low, Medium, High, and Default (High). Contrast Contrast is a ratio of difference of the monitor's ability to produce bright whites and dark blacks. Select between Low, Medium, High, and Default (High). Sharpness Sharpness is edge contrast that is visible along edges of content. Decreasing the Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71

sharpness will create a softer image. Increasing the sharpness will affect the contrast only along/near edges of the image while leaving smooth areas of the image alone. Select between Low, Medium, High, and Default (Low).

WAE0744X

WAE0745X
4-72 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Audio settings
Headphones
For hearing protection, there is a maximum volume setting to limit the audio output of the front panel 3.5mm headphone output. Select the desired maximum volume from 0 ~ 100 and select Save to store the value.
Bluetooth Source
The RSI system can connect to the vehicle's audio system as a Bluetooth streaming audio player. When Bluetooth® is enabled and a connection is established to the vehicle's stereo system, choose the monitor to be used as the source to stream audio from. Select Monitor A to stream audio from the Driver side monitor or select Monitor B to stream audio from the Passenger side monitor. Select "OK" to confirm and store the desired monitor.
NOTE: . When monitor A is selected as the
source to stream from, the audio output to the wireless and wired headphones will be disabled (only on monitor A).
. To use the wireless or wired headphones with monitor A, you must turn off the Bluetooth® streaming feature. For additional information,

see "Bluetooth® streaming" (P.4-74).

Reset
A master reset will return the RSI system settings to the factory defaults. Any user options and customization will be lost and reset back to factory default settings. To reset the system, select "Yes" when the dialog confirmation box appears.
Update
Displays the current software version information. Select "Update" to begin a software update (reserved for future use).

WAE0746X
Advanced settings
Language
The system language used for the GUI (Graphic User Interface) can be changed to any of the following languages English, Spanish, French, Arabic, Simplified Chinese, Traditional Chinese, and Hebrew. To change the language, highlight and select the current language and a dropdown list will appear containing the available languages. Choose the desired language and select "Save" to display the confirmation dialog box. Select "Yes" to confirm and reboot the RSI system.

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73

NOTE: . Each monitor can have its own back-
ground image.
. The Local source stores the 10 most recent background images.
. To restore the default background image, perform a factory reset. For additional information, see "Advanced settings" (P.4-73).

WAE0747X
Customize settings
Background Customize the RSI system by changing the background image of the main menu screen on each monitor. Select a source to load the image from. Options include USB, SD card, or Local (internal memory). Select a source then navigate the content and select the new background image. Choose the desired image and display the confirmation dialog box. Select "Yes" to confirm. Press to view the new background image.
4-74 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WAE0748X
Bluetooth® streaming
To access "BLUETOOTH" from the home screen, use the directional pad on the remote and navigate to "SETTINGS" then "BLUETOOTH". Status button indicates if the Bluetooth® is enabled when green or disabled when red. Highlight and press
to enable or disable Bluetooth®.
Once enabled, the RSI will automatically search for available devices in pairing mode. Using the directional pad on the remote, select "Device name" then "Connect" to pair. Input the PIN from connecting device (if prompted). Device name will display "Connected" once paired properly. Select "OK" to confirm changes and

close the window. To unpair a Bluetooth® device, select Device name then Unpair.
If the device is not listed, select Refresh Symbol and the device will appear in Available device list. If device does not appear, double check that the device is in pairing mode (refer to the device's manual for instructions).
Bluetooth® equipped vehicles can stream audio from the display through vehicle's sound system once paired. For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner's Manual.

or B to stream Bluetooth® can also be

achieved by pressing

while video is

playing.

Press

then "BLUETOOTH", then "SE-

LECT". Highlight "MONITOR A", "OFF", or

"MONITOR B". Highlight "SAVE" and press

to set configuration and close the

window.

WAE0729X

Lip-Sync adjustment

Lip-Sync adjustments can be accessed by

pressing on the remote, then select-

ing "BLUETOOTH". Highlight the numerical

value and press . Use the directional

pad to synchronize video and audio play-

back due to small delay inherent in some

Bluetooth® devices. Press

to set

value. Highlight save and press

exit.

To select which Monitor will stream Bluetooth®, using the directional pad on the remote select "SETTINGS: then "AUDIO" then "BLUETOOTH" from the home screen. Highlight "MONITOR A" or "MONITOR B" and press . Selecting Monitor A

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75

TROUBLESHOOTING

Symptom Monitor does not power on Monitor front panel controls flash red System frozen - will not respond No picture
No sound or distorted sound
Monitor feels warm Cannot connect mobile device to the internal RSI Wi-Fi network Cannot connect RSI system to an external Wi-Fi network Cannot establish a Bluetooth® connection

Remedy
Verify the vehicle is in the ON or ACC position.
Verify the battery is installed correctly in the remote control.
Verify the in-line fuse protection is good. Refer to the RSI system installation instructions for vehiclespecific fuse location.
For further diagnosis, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
Soft reset the system by pressing and holding the power button on the top of the driver side monitor for 5 seconds.
Hard reset the system by turning the ignition off, then back on.
Check that the signal source is connected.
Check the menu source setting. Match your monitor mode with the source correctly.
Make sure that the external media device is connected properly, and all cables are securely inserted into the appropriate jacks.
Verify that the batteries in the headphones are fresh.
If you are using the wireless headphones, make sure you turn on the power and select the correct monitor (A or B).
Verify the volume is turned up on headphones and the system.
Verify nothing is blocking the path between the monitor IR sensor and headphones.
When placing the headphones on your head, make sure to observe the Left and Right orientation. The headphones must be oriented correctly (facing forward) to receive the audio signal.
When the monitor is in use for a long period of time, the surface will be warm. This is normal.
Check to make sure Wi-Fi is enabled on the mobile device.
Check to make sure RSI is set to Access Point mode.
Check to make sure the correct password is used. For additional information, see "Using Wi-Fi" (P.4-70).
Check to make sure RSI is set to Client Mode. Check to make sure the correct password is used. For additional information, see "Using Wi-Fi" (P.4-70). Check to make sure Bluetooth® is enabled on the RSI system. For additional information, see "Bluetooth® streaming" (P.4-74).

4-76 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Symptom

Remedy

Check to make sure mobile device supports Miracast®. Visit www.wi-fi.org for a current list of Miracast®

Cannot establish a Miracast® connection to certified devices.

the RSI system

Check to make sure Miracast® is enabled on the mobile device.

Select Miracast® source from the RSI main menu.

Audio/video files embedded with DRM are not compatible.

Cannot play certain files from USB or SD cards

Some USB storage devices and SD cards may not be compatible. Replace the external storage device (USB, SD).
Due to ongoing technological advancements, some USB flash drives and SD cards may be incompatible with this system.

Check to make sure RSI is set to Client Mode. For additional information, see "Using Wi-Fi" (P.4-70).

Cannot connect to external Singbox®

Check network upload speed from your home (or wherever the Singbox® is located). Confirm hotspot or Wi-Fi download speed/connection quality.

Check that your Singbox® is properly set up.

Cannot share content from a mobile device A compatible UPnP app is required to be installed on the mobile device.

to the RSI system

Audio/video files embedded with DRM cannot be streamed to the RSI system.

Cannot share content between mobile devices using the internal Wi-Fi network

Check to make sure Wi-Fi is enabled on the mobile device.
Check to make sure RSI is set to Access Point mode. For additional information, see "Using Wi-Fi" (P.470).

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77

SPECIFICATIONS
LCD Backlight Type Display Type
Frequency Response HDMI Support MHL Support Wireless Audio
Wi-Fi Network
Wi-Fi Modulation Bluetooth® Support Bluetooth® BR/EDR
Bluetooth® LE
USB Support SD Card Support

LED 8.0 inch (Diagonal) a-Si TFT Active Matrix, 1024 x 3 (RGB) x 600 resolution
3.5mm Audio Output: 200Hz ~ 16kHz +/- 6dB Version 1.4b, HDCP 2.1 Compliant
Version 2.0, 900mA Maximum Charging Output 2-Channel Stereo Headphone Operation, (Typical Infrared Reception/Range: 0.9m; 80°, 1.8m; 50°) 802.11b/g/n, TX/RX Frequency: 2412 MHz - 2484 MHz, Antenna 1: 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n HT20, 802.11n
HT40, MIMO Antenna 1+2: 802.11n HT20 802.11b: DSSS (DBPSK / DQPSK / CCK), 802.11g/n: OFDM (BPSK / QPSK / 16QAM / 64QAM)
Version 4.1 TX/RX Frequency: 2402 MHz - 2480 MHz, Channels: 79, Bluetooth BR (1Mbps): GFSK Modulation,
Bluetooth EDR (2Mbps): /4-DQPSK Modulation, Bluetooth EDR (3Mbps): 8-DPSK Modulation TX/RX Frequency: 2402 MHz - 2480 MHz, Channels: 40, Carrier Frequency of Each Channel:, (37 hopping
+ 3 Advertising channel), Type of Modulation: Bluetooth LE: GFSK Version 1.1, Version 2.0 High Speed, 10 watt (2 Amp) Maximum Charging Output
SD, SDHC, SDXC

4-78 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

COMPLIANCE INFORMATION
FCC Notice
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. The Bluetooth® antenna cannot be removed (or replaced) by user.
Alteration or modifications carried out without appropriate authorization may invalidate the user's right to operate the equipment.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to

radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
. Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/ TV technician for help.

WAE0752X
Bluetooth®
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Voxx Automotive Corporation is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
AAC
AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression technology standard used with MPEG-2 and MPEG-4. Several applications can be used to encode AAC files, but file formats and extensions differ depending on the

Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79

application which is used to encode.
FLAC
Copyright © 2000-2009 Josh Coalson
Copyright © 2011-2013 Xiph.Org Foundation
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DIS-

CLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
WMA/WMV
Windows Media is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a license from Microsoft Licensing, Inc.
SD/SDHC/SDXC
SD, SDHC and SDXC Logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SD3C LLC in the United States, other countries or both.

4-80 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WAE0753X
HDMI
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC in the United States and other countries.
MHL
MHL, the MHL Logo, and Mobile HighDefinition Link are trademarks or registered trademarks of MHL, LLC in the United States and other countries.

their respective owners.

WAE0754X
Dolby Digital
This product will down-mix Dolby Digital signals internally and the sound will be output in stereo. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
European Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Notice
In accordance with Directive 2012/19/EU of the European Parliament on waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE):

WAE0755X

The symbol above indicates that separate collection of electrical and electronic equipment is required. When this product has reached the end of its serviceable life, it cannot be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste. It must be collected and treated separately. It has been determined by the European Parliament that there are potential negative effects on the environment and human health as a result of the presence of hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment. It is the users` responsibility to utilize the available collection system to ensure WEEE is properly treated.
All other trademarks and their respective logos cited herein are the property of
Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4-81

MEMO 4-82 Monitor, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving ...................... 5-4 Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ................................ 5-4 Three-way catalyst ............................................................... 5-4 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ........... 5-5 Avoiding collision and rollover .................................... 5-8 On-pavement and off-road driving precautions .............................................................. 5-9 Off-road recovery .................................................................. 5-9 Rapid air pressure loss ...................................................... 5-9 About lowering of the rear of the vehicle ...... 5-10 Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ..................... 5-10 Driving safety precautions .......................................... 5-10
Push-button ignition switch ............................................. 5-13 Operating range for engine start function ...... 5-13 Push-button ignition switch positions .............. 5-14 Emergency engine shut off ........................................ 5-15 Intelligent Key battery discharge ........................... 5-15
Before starting the engine ................................................. 5-16 Starting the engine .................................................................. 5-16
Remote engine start (if so equipped)................. 5-17 Driving the vehicle .................................................................... 5-17
Engine protection mode ............................................... 5-17 Automatic transmission ................................................ 5-18 Parking brake ............................................................................... 5-22

Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) (if so equipped) ................................................................................. 5-23
System operation ............................................................. 5-23 How to enable/disable the TSR system ........ 5-25 System temporarily unavailable ........................... 5-26 System malfunction ....................................................... 5-26 System maintenance .................................................... 5-26 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) ..................................... 5-26 LDW system operation ................................................. 5-27 How to enable/disable the LDW system ....... 5-28 LDW system limitations ............................................... 5-29 System temporarily unavailable ........................... 5-30 System malfunction ....................................................... 5-30 System maintenance .................................................... 5-31 Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) ............................... 5-31 I-LI system operation .................................................... 5-33 How to enable/disable the I-LI system .......... 5-34 I-LI system limitations .................................................. 5-34 System temporarily unavailable ........................... 5-36 System malfunction ....................................................... 5-37 System maintenance .................................................... 5-37 Blind Spot Warning (BSW) .................................................. 5-38 BSW system operation ................................................. 5-39 How to enable/disable the BSW system ....... 5-40

BSW system limitations .................................................. 5-40 BSW driving situations .................................................... 5-41 System temporarily unavailable ............................. 5-44 System malfunction .......................................................... 5-44 System maintenance ....................................................... 5-45 Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI) ............... 5-46 I-BSI system operation ................................................... 5-47 How to enable/disable the I-BSI system ......... 5-48 I-BSI system limitations ................................................. 5-49 I-BSI driving situations .................................................... 5-51 System temporarily unavailable ............................. 5-54 System malfunction .......................................................... 5-55 System maintenance ....................................................... 5-55 Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped) .................................................................................. 5-57 RCTA system operation ................................................. 5-57 How to enable/disable the RCTA system ....... 5-59 RCTA system limitations ............................................... 5-60 System temporarily unavailable ............................. 5-62 System malfunction .......................................................... 5-62 System maintenance ....................................................... 5-62 Intelligent Back-up Intervention (I-BI) (if so equipped) .................................................................................. 5-63 I-BI system operation ...................................................... 5-65 How to enable/disable the I-BI system ............ 5-69 I-BI system precautions ................................................. 5-70 System temporarily unavailable ............................. 5-72 System malfunction .......................................................... 5-72 System maintenance ....................................................... 5-72

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)....................................... 5-74 How to select the cruise control mode ......... 5-76 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode ....................................................................... 5-76 Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode ....................................................................... 5-92
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with pedestrian detection system .......................................... 5-96
AEB with pedestrian detection system operation ............................................................. 5-97 Turning the AEB with pedestrian detection system ON/OFF ................................................................. 5-99 AEB with pedestrian detection system limitations............................................................ 5-99 System temporarily unavailable ....................... 5-103 System malfunction ................................................... 5-105 System maintenance ................................................ 5-105 Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW) ...................................................................... 5-106 I-FCW system operation ......................................... 5-108 Turning the I-FCW system ON/OFF ............... 5-109 I-FCW system limitations ........................................ 5-111 System temporarily unavailable ....................... 5-112 System malfunction ................................................... 5-113 System maintenance ................................................ 5-113 Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) ............................. 5-114 I-DA system operation ............................................. 5-115 How to enable/disable the I-DA system...... 5-115 I-DA system limitations ............................................ 5-116 System malfunction ................................................... 5-116

Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) .................................... 5-116 RAB system operation ................................................ 5-118 Turning the RAB system ON/OFF...................... 5-119 RAB system limitations .............................................. 5-119 System malfunction ...................................................... 5-121 System maintenance ................................................... 5-122
Break-in schedule ................................................................. 5-122 Fuel efficient driving tips ................................................. 5-123 Increasing fuel economy ................................................. 5-124 NISSAN all-mode 4WD® (if so equipped) ............. 5-124
NISSAN all-mode 4WD® system ........................... 5-125 4WD shift switch .............................................................. 5-129 4WD shift indicator ........................................................ 5-130 4WD warning light ......................................................... 5-130 Hill Start Assist system ...................................................... 5-132 Parking/parking on hills ................................................... 5-133 TOW mode .................................................................................. 5-134 SNOW mode ............................................................................... 5-135 Front and rear sonar system (if so equipped) .............................................................................. 5-136 System operation ........................................................... 5-137 Sonar function settings ............................................. 5-137 Turning on and off the sonar function ......... 5-139

Sonar limitations ........................................................... 5-140 System temporarily unavailable ....................... 5-141 System maintenance ................................................ 5-141 Power steering ........................................................................ 5-141 Brake system ........................................................................... 5-142 Braking precautions ................................................... 5-142 Parking brake break-in ............................................ 5-142 Brake assist ............................................................................... 5-143 Brake assist ....................................................................... 5-143 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ........................ 5-143 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system .............. 5-144 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch ......................................................................... 5-146 Cold weather driving ......................................................... 5-146 Freeing a frozen door lock ................................... 5-146 Antifreeze ............................................................................ 5-146 Battery................................................................................... 5-146 Draining of coolant water ..................................... 5-146 Tire equipment ............................................................... 5-147 Special winter equipment ..................................... 5-147 Driving on snow or ice ............................................. 5-147 Engine block heater (if so equipped) ........... 5-148

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING
WARNING
. Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the support of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should not be left alone either. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.
. Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)
WARNING
. Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can
5-4 Starting and driving

cause unconsciousness or death.
. If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, drive with all windows fully open, and have the vehicle inspected immediately.
. Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage.
. Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length of time.
. Keep the liftgate closed while driving, otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passenger compartment. If you must drive with the liftgate open, follow these precautions:
1) Open all the windows.
2) Set the air recirculation to off and the fan control to high to circulate the air.
. If electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass to a trailer through the seal on the liftgate or the body, follow the manufacturer's recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle.
. The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a quali-

fied mechanic whenever: -- The vehicle is raised for ser-
vice.
-- You suspect that exhaust fumes are entering into the passenger compartment.
-- You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system.
-- You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system, underbody, or rear of the vehicle.
THREE-WAY CATALYST
The three-way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.
WARNING
. The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are very hot. Keep people, animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust system components.
. Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as

dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.
CAUTION
. Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits from leaded gasoline seriously reduce the three-way catalyst's ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants.
. Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions in the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical systems can cause overrich fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do not keep driving if the engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of performance or other unusual operating conditions are detected. Have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
. Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the three-way catalyst.
. Do not race the engine while warming it up.

. Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Starting and driving 5-5

Additional information
. Since the spare tire is not equipped with the TPMS, the TPMS does not monitor the tire pressure of the spare tire.
. The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, a flat tire while driving).
. The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure.
. The "Tire Pressure Low Add Air" warning appears in the vehicle information display when the low tire pressure warning light is illuminated and low tire pressure is detected. The "Tire Pressure Low Add Air" warning turns off when the low tire pressure warning light turns off.
The "Tire Pressure Low Add Air" warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as
5-6 Starting and driving

long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated.
The "Tire Pressure Low Add Air" warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.
. Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle's operation and the outside temperature. Do not reduce the tire pressure after driving because the tire pressure rises after driving. Low outside temperature can lower the temperature of the air inside the tire which can cause a lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate. If the warning light illuminates in low ambient temperature, check the tire pressure for all four tires.
. You can also check the pressure of all tires (except the spare tire) on the vehicle information display. (See "10. Tire pressures" (P.2-38).)
For additional information, see "Low tire pressure warning light" (P.2-16) and "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) " (P.63).

WARNING
. If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates or Low Pressure information is displayed on the monitor screen while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If the light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire is flat and all tires are properly inflated, it is

recommended you consult a NISSAN dealer.
. Since the spare tire is not equipped with the TPMS, when a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for these services.
. Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.
. Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.
CAUTION
. The TPMS may not function properly when the wheels are equipped with tire chains or the wheels are buried in snow.

. Do not place metalized film or any metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors, and the TPMS will not function properly.
Some devices and transmitters may temporarily interfere with the operation of the TPMS and cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate. Some examples are:
. Facilities or electric devices using similar radio frequencies are near the vehicle.
. If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is being used in or near the vehicle.
. If a computer (or similar equipment) or a DC/AC converter is being used in or near the vehicle.
Low tire pressure warning light may illuminate in the following cases.
. If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel and tire without TPMS.
. If the TPMS has been replaced and the ID has not been registered.
. If the wheel is not originally specified by NISSAN.

FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Starting and driving 5-7

TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert
When adding air to an under-inflated tire, the TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert provides visual and audible signals outside the vehicle to help you inflate the tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure.
Vehicle set-up:
1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.
2. Apply the parking brake and place the shift lever in the P (Park) position.
3. Place the ignition switch in the ON position. Do not start the engine.
Operation:
1. Add air to the tire.
2. After a few seconds, the hazard indicators will start flashing.
3. When the designated pressure is reached, the horn beeps once and the hazard indicators stop flashing.
4. Perform the above steps for each tire.
. If the tire is over-inflated more than approximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn beeps and the hazard indicators flash 3 times. To correct the pressure, push the core of the valve stem on the tire briefly to release pressure. When the pressure reaches the designated pressure, the horn beeps once.
5-8 Starting and driving

. If the hazard indicator does not flash within approximately 15 seconds after starting to inflate the tire, it indicates that the TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert is not operating.
. The TPMS will not activate the Easy Fill Tire Alert under the following conditions:
-- If there is interference from an external device or transmitter
-- The air pressure from the inflation device such as those using a power socket is not sufficient to inflate the tire
-- If an electrical equipment is being used in or near the vehicle
-- There is a malfunction in the TPMS system
-- There is a malfunction in the horn or hazard indicators
. If the TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert does not operate due to TPMS interference, move the vehicle about 3 ft (1m) backward or forward and try again.
If the TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert is not working, use a tire pressure gauge.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLLOVER
WARNING
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident.
Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, high speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers, because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with any vehicle, a loss of control could result in a collision with other vehicles or objects, or cause the vehicle to rollover, particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-the-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the "Seat belts" (P.1-20), and also instruct your passengers to do so.
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted or improperly belted

person is significantly more likely to be injured or killed than a person properly wearing a seat belt.
ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVING PRECAUTIONS
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
They have higher ground clearance than passenger cars to make them capable of performing in a variety of on-pavement and off-road applications. This gives them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars. An advantage of higher ground clearance is a better view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. However, they are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional passenger cars any more than lowslung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers, particularly at high speeds. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover. Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted or improperly belted person is significantly more likely to be injured or killed than a person properly wearing a seat belt.

Be sure to read "Driving safety precautions" (P.5-10).
OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
While driving, the right side or left side wheels may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Do not apply the brakes.
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course.
4. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the vehicle to follow the road while the vehicle speed is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle back onto the road surface until vehicle speed is reduced.
6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the steering wheel until both tires return to the road surface. When all tires are on the road surface, steer the

vehicle to stay in the appropriate driving lane. . If you decide that it is not safe to
return the vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle, road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.
RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS
Rapid air pressure loss or a "blow-out" can occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss can also be caused by driving on under-inflated tires.
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway speeds.
Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintaining the correct air pressure and visually inspect the tires for wear and damage. See "Wheels and tires" (P.8-28).
If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or "blows-out" while driving maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.
Starting and driving 5-9

WARNING
The following actions can increase the chance of losing control of the vehicle if there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure. Losing control of the vehicle may cause a collision and result in personal injury.
. The vehicle generally moves or pulls in the direction of the flat tire.
. Do not rapidly apply the brakes.
. Do not rapidly release the accelerator pedal.
. Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course.
3. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location off the road and away from traffic if possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually stop the vehicle.
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and either contact a roadside emergency service to change the tire or see "Changing a flat tire" (P.6-4).
ABOUT LOWERING OF THE REAR OF THE VEHICLE
If the loaded vehicle is not moved for a long time, the vehicle rear body may be to lower. But it is normal. Once the engine starts, It will automatically adjust vehicle height.
DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND DRIVING
WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces coordination, delays reaction time and impairs judgement. Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others. Additionally, if you are injured in an accident, alcohol can increase the severity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However, you must choose not to drive under the influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Although the local laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol.
Remember, drinking and driving don't mix! And that is true for drugs, too (overthe-counter, prescription, and illegal drugs). Don't drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition.
DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Your NISSAN is designed for both normal and off-road use. However, avoid driving in deep water or mud as your NISSAN is mainly designed for leisure use, unlike a conventional off-road vehicle.
Remember that Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models are less capable than Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) models for rough road driving and extrication when stuck in deep snow, mud, or the like.
Please observe the following precautions:

5-10 Starting and driving

WARNING
. Drive carefully when off the road and avoid dangerous areas. Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should be seated with their seat belt fastened. This will keep you and your passengers in position when driving over rough terrain.
. Do not drive across steep slopes. Instead drive either straight up or straight down the slopes. Offroad vehicles can tip over sideways much more easily than they can forward or backward.
. Many hills are too steep for any vehicle. If you drive up them, you may stall. If you drive down them, you may not be able to control your speed. If you drive across them, you may roll over.
. Do not shift ranges while driving on downhill grades as this could cause loss of control of the vehicle.
. Stay alert when driving to the top of a hill. At the top there could be a drop-off or other hazard that could cause an accident.

. If your engine stalls or you cannot make it to the top of a steep hill, never attempt to turn around. Your vehicle could tip or roll over. Always back straight down in R (Reverse) range. Never back down in N (Neutral), using only the brake, as this could cause loss of control.
. Heavy braking going down a hill could cause your brakes to overheat and fade, resulting in loss of control and an accident. Apply brakes lightly and use a low range to control your speed.
. Unsecured cargo can be thrown around when driving over rough terrain. Properly secure all cargo so it will not be thrown forward and cause injury to you or your passengers.
. To avoid raising the center of gravity excessively, do not exceed the rated capacity of the roof rack (if so equipped) and evenly distribute the load. Secure heavy loads in the cargo area as far forward and as low as possible. Do not equip the vehicle with tires larger than specified in this manual. This could cause your vehicle to roll over.

. Do not grip the inside or spokes of the steering wheel when driving off-road. The steering wheel could move suddenly and injure your hands. Instead drive with your fingers and thumbs on the outside of the rim.
. Before operating the vehicle, ensure that the driver and all passengers have their seat belts fastened.
. Always drive with the floor mats in place as the floor may became hot.
. Lower your speed when encountering strong crosswinds. With a higher center of gravity, your NISSAN is more affected by strong side winds. Slower speeds ensure better vehicle control.
. Do not drive beyond the performance capability of the tires, even with 4WD engaged.
. For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not attempt to raise two wheels off the ground and shift the transmission to any drive or reverse position with the engine running. Doing so may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could
Starting and driving 5-11

result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.
. Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer (such as the dynamometers used by some states for emissions testing), or similar equipment even if the other two wheels are raised off the ground. Make sure you inform test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD before it is placed on a dynamometer. Using the wrong test equipment may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury (4WD models).
. When a wheel is off the ground due to an unlevel surface, do not spin the wheel excessively.
. Accelerating quickly, sharp steering maneuvers or sudden braking may cause loss of control.
. If at all possible, avoid sharp turning maneuvers, particularly at high speeds. Your vehicle has a higher center of gravity than a conventional passenger car. The vehicle is not designed for cor-
5-12 Starting and driving

nering at the same speeds as conventional passenger cars. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly could result in loss of control and/or a rollover accident.
. Always use tires of the same type, size, brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), and tread pattern on all four wheels. Install tire chains on the rear wheels when driving on slippery roads and drive carefully.
. Be sure to check the brakes immediately after driving in mud or water. See "Brake system" (P.5142) for wet brakes.
. Avoid parking your vehicle on steep hills. If you get out of the vehicle and it rolls forward, backward or sideways, you could be injured.
. Whenever you drive off-road through sand, mud or water as deep as the wheel hub, more frequent maintenance may be required. See the maintenance schedule shown in the "9. Maintenance and schedules" section.
. Spinning the rear wheels on slippery surfaces may cause the 4WD

warning light to flash. The 4WD system may also automatically switch from the 4WD mode to the 2WD mode. This could reduce traction. Be especially careful when towing a trailer (4WD models).

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

WARNING

Do not operate the push-button ignition switch while driving the vehicle except in an emergency. (The engine will stop when the ignition switch is pushed 3 consecutive times or the ignition switch is pushed and held for more than 2 seconds.) If the engine stops while the vehicle is being driven, this could lead to a crash and serious injury.
Before operating the push-button ignition switch, be sure to move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

SSD0436
OPERATING RANGE FOR ENGINE START FUNCTION
The operating range for starting the engine inside the vehicle is shown in the illustration.
. If the Intelligent Key is on the instrument panel, cargo area, inside the glove box or door pocket, or the corner of interior compartment, it may not be possible to start the engine.
. If the Intelligent Key is near the door or door glass outside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the engine.

SSD1021
When the ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch position will change as follows:
. Push center once to change to ACC. . Push center two times to change to
ON. . Push center three times to change to
OFF. (No position illuminates.) . Push center four times to return to
ACC. . Open or close any door to return to
LOCK during the OFF position. The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition switch position cannot be switched to LOCK until the shift lever is
Starting and driving 5-13

moved to the P (Park) position.
When the ignition switch cannot be pushed toward the LOCK position, proceed as follows:
1. Move the shift lever into the P (Park) position.
2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position. The ignition switch position indicator will not illuminate.
3. Open the door. The ignition switch will change to the LOCK position.
The shift lever can be moved from the P (Park) position if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the brake pedal is depressed.
If the battery of the vehicle is discharged, the push-button ignition switch cannot be turned from the LOCK position.
Some indicators and warnings for operation are displayed on the vehicle information display between the speedometer and tachometer. (See "Vehicle information display" (P.2-20).)

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS
LOCK (Normal parking position)
The ignition switch can only be locked in this position.
The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is pushed to the ACC position while carrying the Intelligent Key.
ACC (Accessories)
This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio, when the engine is not running.
ACC has a battery saver feature that will turn the ignition switch to the OFF position after a period of time under the following conditions:
. all doors are closed. . shift lever is in P (Park). . turn signal/hazard indicator lights are
not flashing. The battery saver feature will be cancelled if any of the following occur:
. any door is opened. . shift lever is moved out of P (Park). . ignition switch changes position.

ON (Normal operating position)
This position turns on the ignition system and electrical accessories.
ON has a battery saver feature that will turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, if the vehicle is not running, after some time under the following conditions:
. all doors are closed. . shift lever is in P (Park). . turn signal/hazard indicator lights are
not flashing. The battery saver feature will be cancelled if any of the following occur:
. any door is opened. . shift lever is moved out of P (Park). . ignition switch changes position.
OFF
The engine can be turned off in the position.
The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition switch cannot be switched to the LOCK position until the shift lever is moved to the P (Park) position.

5-14 Starting and driving

CAUTION
Do not leave the vehicle with the push-button ignition switch in ACC or ON positions when the engine is not running for an extended period. This can discharge the battery.
ACC (Accessories) delay timer function
When the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position, the ACC (Accessories) delay timer function is activated. This function keeps the power supply to the electrical accessories for up to 10 minutes. When the driver's door is opened, this function is canceled and the electrical power supply is stopped. The ACC (Accessories) delay time function can be enabled or disabled. (See "Vehicle settings" (P.2-24).)
EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving, perform the following procedure:
. Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch 3 consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or
. Push and hold the push-button ignition switch for more than 2 seconds.

JVS0404X
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY DISCHARGE
If the battery of the Intelligent Key is discharged, or environmental conditions interfere with the Intelligent Key operation, start the engine according to the following procedure:
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
2. Firmly apply the foot brake.
3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key as illustrated. (A chime will sound.)
4. Push the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal within 10 sec-

onds after the chime sounds. The engine will start. After step 3 is performed, when the ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch position will change to ACC. NOTE: . When the ignition switch is pushed to the ACC or ON position or the engine is started by the above procedures, the Key Battery Low message appears on the vehicle information display even if the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. This is not a malfunction. To turn off the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator, touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key again. . If the Key Battery Low message appears, replace the battery as soon as possible. (See "Battery" (P.8-11).)
Starting and driving 5-15

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

STARTING THE ENGINE

. Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear.
. Check fluid levels such as engine oil, coolant, brake fluid and window washer fluid as frequently as possible, or at least whenever you refuel.
. Check that all windows and lights are clean.
. Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition. Also check tires for proper inflation.
. Lock all doors. . Position seat and adjust head re-
straints/headrests. . Adjust inside and outside mirrors. . Fasten seat belts and ask all passen-
gers to do likewise. . Check the operation of warning lights
when the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position. (See "Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders" (P.2-11).)
5-16 Starting and driving

1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position. (P is recommended.)
The starter is designed not to operate unless the shift lever is in either of the above positions.
3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position. Firmly depress the brake pedal and push the ignition switch to start the engine.
To start the engine immediately, push and release the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal with the ignition switch in any position.
. If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold weather or when restarting, depress the accelerator pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the floor) and while holding, crank the engine. Release the accelerator pedal when the engine starts.
. If the engine is very hard to start because it is flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Push the ignition switch to the ON position to start cranking the engine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stop cranking by pushing the ignition switch to OFF. After cranking the engine, release the accelerator pedal. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator

pedal by depressing the brake pedal and pushing the push-button ignition switch to start the engine. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure.
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start, push the ignition switch to OFF and wait 10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the starter could be damaged.
4. Warm-up
Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting. Do not race the engine while warming it up. Drive at moderate speed for a short distance first, especially in cold weather. In cold weather, keep the engine running for a minimum of 2 - 3 minutes before shutting it off. Starting and stopping the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to start.
When racing the engine up to 4,000 rpm or more under the no load condition, the engine will enter the

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

fuel cut mode.
5. To stop the engine, shift the shift lever to the P (Park) position and push the ignition switch to the OFF position.
In preparation for the next engine start, the engine may have a slightly delayed shutoff after placing the ignition switch in the OFF position, depending on the driving conditions.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as: 1. Installation or extended use of elec-
tronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/ or only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health.
REMOTE ENGINE START (if so equipped)
Vehicles started with the remote engine start function require the ignition switch to be placed in the ON position before the shift lever can be moved from the P (Park) position. To place the ignition switch in

the ON position, perform the following steps:
1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is on you.
2. Firmly depress the brake pedal.
3. Push the ignition switch once to the ON position.
For additional information about the remote engine start function, see "Remote engine start" (P.3-19).

ENGINE PROTECTION MODE
The engine has an engine protection mode to reduce the chance of damage if the coolant temperature becomes too high (for example, when climbing steep grades in high temperature with heavy loads, such as when towing a trailer).
When the engine temperature reaches a certain level:
. The engine coolant temperature gauge will move toward the H position.
. Engine power may be reduced. . The air conditioning cooling function
may be automatically turned OFF for a short time (the blower will continue to operate).
Engine power and, under some conditions, vehicle speed will decrease. Vehicle speed can be controlled with the accelerator pedal, but the vehicle may not accelerate at the desired speed. The transmission will downshift or upshift as it reaches prescribed shift points. You can also shift manually.
As driving conditions change and engine coolant temperature is reduced, vehicle speed can be increased using the accelerator pedal, and air conditioning cooling function will automatically be turned back ON.
Starting and driving 5-17

If: 1. The engine coolant temperature is not
reduced. 2. The air conditioning cooling function
does not turn back ON. 3. The engine oil pressure warning light
illuminates or engine coolant temperature gauge does not return to the normal range from the H position, this may indicate a malfunction. Move the vehicle off the road to a safe area and allow the engine to cool. If after checking the oil and coolant, the remains on or engine coolant temperature does not return to the normal range, do not continue to drive. It is recommended you contact a NISSAN dealer. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may also come ON. You do not need to have your vehicle towed, unless it remains on, but have it inspected soon. It is recommended you contact a NISSAN dealer for this service. See "Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders" (P.2-11).
5-18 Starting and driving

WARNING
Overheating can result in reduced engine power and vehicle speed. The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic, which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially careful when driving. If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driving speed, pull to the side of the road in a safe area. Allow the engine to cool and return to normal operation. See "If your vehicle overheats" (P.614).
CAUTION
Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine almost immediately. Such damage is not covered by warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
7 speed automatic transmission
The automatic transmission in your vehicle is electronically controlled by a transmission control module to produce maximum efficiency and smooth operation.
Shown on the following pages are the recommended operating procedures for this transmission. Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment.
Starting the vehicle
After starting the engine, fully depress the foot brake pedal and push the shift lever button before shifting the shift lever to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D (Drive) or Manual shift mode position. Be sure the vehicle is fully stopped before attempting to shift the shift lever.
This automatic transmission model is designed so that the foot brake pedal must be depressed before shifting from P (Park) to any drive position while the ignition switch position is ON.
The shift lever cannot be moved out of the P (Park) position and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition switch is pushed to the LOCK, OFF or ACC position.

1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and push the shift lever button to shift into a driving gear.
2. Release the parking brake and foot brake, then gradually start the vehicle in motion.
WARNING
. Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or manual shift mode. Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident.
. Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up.
. Never shift to either the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position while the vehicle is moving forward and P (Park), D (Drive) position or manual shift mode while the vehicle is moving rearward. This could cause an accident or damage the transmission.

. Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control.
CAUTION
. Except in an emergency, do not shift to the N (Neutral) position while driving. Coasting with the transmission in the N (Neutral) position may cause serious damage to the transmission.
. To avoid possible damage to your vehicle; when stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake should be used for this purpose.

Shift lever
To move the shift lever,

WAF0755X

: Push the button while depressing the brake pedal,
: Push the button,
: Just move the shift lever.

Shifting
The shift lever position indicator light (next to the shift lever) will be illuminated for approximately 30 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off. The indicator light may also illuminate when the vehicle receives radio waves. This is not a malfunction.
After starting the engine, fully depress the

Starting and driving 5-19

brake pedal and shift the shift lever from P (Park) to R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D (Drive) or Manual shift mode position. Push the button to shift into P (Park) or R (Reverse). All other positions can be selected without pushing the button.
WARNING
Apply the parking brake if the shift lever is in any position while the engine is not running. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property damage.
CAUTION
Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped and the transmission is in the P (Park) position.
P (Park) position: Use this position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped. The brake pedal must be depressed and the shift lever button pushed in to move 5-20 Starting and driving

the shift lever from the N (Neutral) position or any drive position to the P (Park) position. Apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake first, then move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
CAUTION
Use this position only when the vehicle is completely stopped.
R (Reverse): Use this position to back up. Always be sure the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal must be depressed and the shift lever button pushed in to move the shift lever from the P (Park) position, the N (Neutral) position or any drive position to the R (Reverse) position.
N (Neutral): Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The engine can be started in this position. You may shift to the N (Neutral) position and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive):
Use this position for all normal forward driving.
Manual shift mode
When the shift lever is in the manual shift gate, the transmission is ready for the manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected manually by moving the shift lever up or down.
When shifting up, move the shift lever to the + (up) side. The transmission shifts to the higher range.
When shifting down, move the shift lever to the - (down) side. The transmission shifts to the lower range.
When canceling the manual shift mode, return the shift lever to the D (Drive) position. The transmission returns to the normal driving mode.
In the manual shift mode, the shift range is displayed on the position indicator in the meter.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:

? /

M7 (7th):
Use this position for all normal forward driving at highway speeds.

M6 (6th) and M5 (5th):
Use these positions when driving up long slopes, or for engine braking when driving down long slopes.

M4 (4th), M3 (3rd) and M2 (2nd):
Use these positions for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill grades.

M1 (1st):
Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or driving slowly through deep snow, or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades.

. Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time in lower than 7th gear. This reduces fuel economy.
. Moving the shift lever rapidly to the same side twice will shift the ranges in succession.
. In the manual shift mode, the transmission may not shift to the selected gear or may automatically

shift to the other gear. This helps maintain driving performance and reduces the chance of vehicle damage or loss of control.
. When the transmission does not shift to the selected gear, the Automatic Transmission (AT) position indicator light (in the vehicle information display) will blink and the buzzer will sound.
. In the manual shift mode, the transmission automatically shifts down to 1st gear before the vehicle comes to a stop. When accelerating again, it is necessary to shift up to the desired range.
Accelerator downshift -- In D (Drive) position --
For passing or hill climbing, fully depress the accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmission down into the lower gear, depending on the vehicle speed.
Fail-safe
When the fail-safe operation occurs, note that the transmission will be locked in any of the forward gears according to the condition.
If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions, such as excessive wheel

spinning and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe system may be activated. This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly. In this case, push the switch to the OFF position and wait for 3 seconds. Then push the ignition switch back to the ON position. The vehicle should return to its normal operating condition. If it does not return to its normal operating condition, have the transmission checked and repaired, if necessary. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Starting and driving 5-21

PARKING BRAKE

WAF0756X
Shift lock release
If the battery charge is low or discharged, the shift lever may not be moved from the P (Park) position even with the brake pedal depressed and the shift lever button pushed.
To move the shift lever, perform the following procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK position.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Remove the shift lock cover using a suitable tool.

4. Push down the shift lock as illustrated.
5. Push the shift lever button and move the shift lever to N (Neutral) position while holding down the shift lock.
The vehicle may be moved to the desired location.
If the lever cannot be moved out of P (Park), have the automatic transmission system checked as soon as possible. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING
. Be sure the parking brake is fully released before driving. Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident.
. Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle.
. Do not use the gear shift in place of the parking brake. When parking, be sure the parking brake is fully engaged.
. To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.

5-22 Starting and driving

TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION (TSR) (if so equipped)

WARNING

SPA2331
To apply: Fully depress the parking brake pedal . To release: 1. Firmly apply the foot brake . 2. Depress the parking brake pedal
and the parking brake will be released. 3. Before driving, be sure the brake
warning light goes out.

WAF0734X
The Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system provides the driver with information about the most recently detected speed limit. The system captures the road sign information with the multi-sensing front camera unit located on the windshield above the inside mirror and displays the detected signs in the vehicle information display. For vehicles equipped with navigation system, the speed limit displayed is based on a combination of navigation system data and live camera recognition.

The TSR system is only intended to be a support device to provide the driver with information. It is not a replacement for the driver's attention to traffic conditions or responsibility to drive safely. It cannot prevent accidents due to carelessness. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert and drive safely at all times.
SYSTEM OPERATION
The TSR system displays the following types of road sign:

Starting and driving 5-23

WAF0780X

Latest detected speed limit
5-24 Starting and driving

WAC0215X

Reduce speed limit caution (orange) No speed limit information No passing zone Reduce speed limit caution (with no speed limit information) (orange)
CAUTION
. The TSR system is intended as an aid to careful driving. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, and observe all road regulations that currently apply, including looking out for road signs.
. The TSR system may not function properly under all conditions. Below are some examples:
-- When the road sign is not clearly visible, for example, due to damage or weather conditions.
-- When rain, snow or dirt adheres to the windshield in front of the multi-sensing front camera unit.
-- When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not adjusted properly.

-- When strong light enters the camera unit. (For example, the light directly shines on the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)
-- When a sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.)
-- In areas not covered by the navigation system.
-- If there are deviations in relation to the navigation, for example due to changes in the road routing.
-- When overtaking buses or trucks with speed stickers.
. The TSR system may display a traffic sign, though there is no traffic sign in front of the vehicle. It may display a different speed limit from that for a passenger vehicle. (The maximum speed limit sign may show a higher or lower number than the actual maximum speed, for example, when detecting a speed limit sign for truck, advisory sign, different speed limit sign between daytime

and nighttime, or speed limit sign written in different unit near the border, etc.)

Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)
Vehicle information display

WAF0718X

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE TSR SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the TSR system:

1. Push the

button until "Set-

tings" appears in the vehicle informa-

tion display and then push the OK. Use

Starting and driving 5-25

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)

the button to select "Driver Assistance". Then push the OK.
2. Select "Speed Limit Sign" and push the OK to turn the system on or off.
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE
If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high temperature conditions (over approximately 104°F (40°C) and then started, the TSR system may be deactivated automatically. The "Unavailable High Cabin Temperature" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take:
When the interior temperature is reduced, the TSR system will resume operating automatically.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the TSR system malfunctions it will be turned off automatically and the TSR "Malfunction See Owner's Manual" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take
If the warning message appears, pull off the road at a safe location and stop the vehicle. Turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the warning message continues to appear, have the system
5-26 Starting and driving

checked by a NISSAN dealer.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The TSR system uses the same multisensing front camera unit that is used by the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system, located above the inside mirror. (See "System maintenance" (P.5-31).)

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the LDW system could result in serious injury or death.
. This system is only a warning device to inform the driver of a potential unintended lane departure. It will not steer the vehicle or prevent loss of control. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

WAF0734X
The LDW system will operate when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 37 MPH (60 km/h) and above, and the lane markings are clearly visible on the road.
The LDW system monitors the lane markers on the traveling lane using the camera unit located above the inside mirror.
The LDW system warns the driver that the vehicle is beginning to leave the driving lane with an indicator and a steering wheel vibration. (See "LDW system operation" (P.5-27).)

LDW indicator (on the vehicle information display)
Vehicle information display
Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)
Warning systems switch

WAF0730X
LDW SYSTEM OPERATION
The LDW system provides a lane departure warning function when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 37 MPH (60 km/h) and above and the lane markings are clear. When the vehicle approaches either the left or the right side

Starting and driving 5-27

of the traveling lane, the steering wheel will vibrate and the LDW indicator on the vehicle information display will blink to alert the driver.
The warning function will stop when the vehicle returns inside of the lane markers.

5-28 Starting and driving

Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)
Vehicle information display Warning systems switch Warning systems ON indicator light

WAF0731X

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE LDW SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the LDW system.

1. Push the

button until "Set-

tings" appears in the vehicle informa-

tion display and then push the

button. Use the OK to select "Driver Assistance". Then push the OK.
2. Select "Lane" and push the OK.
3. Select "Warning (LDW)" and push the OK.
The warning systems switch is used to turn on and off the LDW system when it is activated on the vehicle information display. When the warning systems switch is turned off, the warning systems ON indicator light on the switch is off.
The warning systems switch will turn on and off the LDW and BSW systems at the same time.
NOTE:
If you disable the LDW system, the system will remain disabled the next time you start the vehicle's engine.
LDW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the LDW system. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the LDW system could result in serious injury or death.

. The system will not operate at speeds below approximately 37 MPH (60 km/h) or if it cannot detect lane markers.
. Do not use the LDW system under the following conditions as it may not function properly:
-- During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
-- When driving on slippery roads, such as on ice or snow.
-- When driving on winding or uneven roads.
-- When there is a lane closure due to road repairs.
-- When driving in a makeshift or temporary lane.
-- When driving on roads where the lane width is too narrow.
-- When driving without normal tire conditions (for example, tire wear, low tire pressure, installation of spare tire, tire chains, non-standard wheels).
-- When the vehicle is equipped with non-original brake parts or suspension parts.

-- When towing a trailer or other vehicle.
. The system may not function properly under the following conditions:
-- On roads where there are multiple parallel lane markers; lane markers that are faded or not painted clearly; yellow painted lane markers; nonstandard lane markers; or lane markers covered with water, dirt, snow, etc.
-- On roads where discontinued lane markers are still detectable.
-- On roads where there are sharp curves.
-- On roads where there are sharply contrasting objects, such as shadows, snow, water, wheel ruts, seams or lines remaining after road repairs. (The LDW system could detect these items as lane markers.)
-- On roads where the traveling lane merges or separates.
Starting and driving 5-29

-- When the vehicle's traveling direction does not align with the lane marker.
-- When traveling close to the vehicle in front of you, which obstructs the lane camera unit detection range.
-- When rain, snow, dirt or object adheres to the windshield in front of the lane camera unit.
-- When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not adjusted properly.
-- When strong light enters the lane camera unit. (For example, the light directly shines on the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)
-- When a sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.)
5-30 Starting and driving

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE
Condition A:
If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high temperature conditions (over approximately 104°F (40°C)) and then started, the LDW system may be deactivated automatically, the LDW indicator will flash and the following message will appear in the vehicle information display.
. "Not Available: High Camera Temp" When the interior temperature is reduced, the LDW system will resume operating automatically and the LDW indicator will stop flashing.
Condition B:
The warning function of the LDW system is not designed to work under the following conditions:
. When you operate the lane change signal and change traveling lanes in the direction of the signal. (The LDW system will become operable again approximately 2 seconds after the lane change signal is turned off.)
. When the vehicle speed lowers to less than approximately 37 MPH (60 km/h).
Action to take:
After the above conditions have finished and the necessary operating conditions

are satisfied, the LDW system will resume.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the LDW system malfunctions, it will cancel automatically and "Malfunction" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display. If the warning message appears, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position and restart the engine. If the warning message continues to appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

INTELLIGENT LANE INTERVENTION (I-LI)

. Do not strike or damage the areas around the camera unit. Do not touch the camera lens or remove the screw located on the camera unit. If the camera unit is damaged due to an accident, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
SSD0453
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The lane camera unit for the LDW system is located above the inside mirror. To keep the proper operation of the LDW system and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following: . Always keep the windshield clean. . Do not attach a sticker (including
transparent material) or install an accessory near the camera unit. . Do not place reflective materials, such as white paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit's capability of detecting the lane markers.

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the I-LI system could result in serious injury or death. . The I-LI system will not steer the
vehicle or prevent loss of control. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times. . The I-LI system is primarily intended for use on well-developed freeways or highways. It may not detect the lane markers in certain road, weather, or driving conditions.
Starting and driving 5-31

The I-LI system monitors the lane markers on the traveling lane using the camera unit located above the inside mirror.
WAF0734X
The I-LI system must be turned on with the dynamic driver assistance switch on the steering wheel, every time the ignition is placed in the ON position. The I-LI system will operate when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 37 MPH (60 km/h) and above, and only when the lane markings are clearly visible on the road. The I-LI system warns the driver when the vehicle has left the center of the traveling lane with an indicator and steering wheel vibration. The system helps assist the driver to return the vehicle to the center of the traveling lane by applying the brakes to the left or right wheels individually (for a short period of time). 5-32 Starting and driving

on the vehicle information display will blink to alert the driver. Then, the I-LI system will automatically apply the brakes for a short period of time to help assist the driver to return the vehicle to the center of the traveling lane.
To turn on the I-LI system, push the dynamic driver assistance switch on the steering wheel after starting the engine. The I-LI ON indicator on the vehicle information display will illuminate. Push the dynamic driver assistance switch again to turn off the I-LI system. The I-LI ON indicator will turn off.

I-LI ON indicator (on the vehicle information display)
I-LI indicator (on the vehicle information display)
Vehicle information display
Dynamic driver assistance switch

WAF0735X
I-LI SYSTEM OPERATION
The I-LI system operates above approximately 37 MPH (60 km/h) and when the lane markings are clear. When the vehicle approaches either the left or the right side of the traveling lane, steering wheel will vibrate and the I-LI indicator (orange)

Starting and driving 5-33

the button to select "Driver Assistance." Then push the OK.
2. Select "Lane" and push the OK.
3. Select "Prevention (LDP)" and push the OK.
4. Push the dynamic driver assistance switch to turn the system on or off.
The dynamic driver assistance switch is used for the I-LI and I-BSI systems.
When the dynamic driver assistance switch is pushed, the I-BSI system will also turn on or off simultaneously. The I-LI system can be individually set to on or off on the vehicle information display.
If the system is set to off, the system will not turn on even if the dynamic driver assistance switch is pushed to on.
I-LI SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

Steering-wheel-mounted control (left side) Vehicle information display Dynamic driver assistance switch
5-34 Starting and driving

WAF0736X

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE I-LI SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the I-LI system.

1. Push the

button until "Settings"

appears in the vehicle information

display and then push the OK. Use

WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the I-LI system. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the I-LI system could result in serious injury or death.
. The I-LI system may activate if you change lanes without first

activating your turn signal or, for example, if a construction zone directs traffic to cross an existing lane marker. If this occurs you may need to apply corrective steering to complete your lane change.
. Because the I-LI may not activate under the road, weather, and lane marker conditions described in this section, it may not activate every time your vehicle begins to leave its lane and you will need to apply corrective steering.
. The I-LI system will not operate at speeds below approximately 37 MPH (60 km/h) or if it cannot detect lane markers.
. When the I-LI system is operating, avoid excessive or sudden steering maneuvers. Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle.
. Do not use the I-LI system under the following conditions as it may not function properly:
-- During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
-- When driving on slippery roads, such as on ice or snow.

-- When driving on winding or uneven roads.
-- When there is a lane closure due to road repairs.
-- When driving in a makeshift or temporary lane.
-- When driving on roads where the lane width is too narrow.
-- When driving without normal tire conditions (for example, tire wear, low tire pressure, installation of spare tire, tire chains, non-standard wheels).
-- When the vehicle is equipped with non-original brake parts or suspension parts.
-- When towing a trailer or other vehicle.
-- On roads where there are multiple parallel lane markers; lane markers that are faded or not painted clearly; yellow painted lane markers; nonstandard lane markers; or lane markers covered with water, dirt, snow, etc.
-- On roads where discontinued lane markers are still detectable.

-- On roads where there are sharp curves.
-- On roads where there are sharply contrasting objects, such as shadows, snow, water, wheel ruts, seams or lines remaining after road repairs. (The I-LI system could detect these items as lane markers.)
-- On roads where the traveling lane merges or separates.
-- When the vehicle's traveling direction does not align with the lane marker.
-- When traveling close to the vehicle in front of you, which obstructs the lane camera unit detection range.
-- When rain, snow or dirt adheres to the windshield in front of the lane camera unit.
-- When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not adjusted properly.
-- When strong light enters the lane camera unit. (For example, the light directly shines on
Starting and driving 5-35

the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)
-- When a sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.)
While the I-LI system is operating, you may hear a sound of brake operation. This is normal and indicates that the I-LI system is operating properly.
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE
Condition A:
The warning and assist functions of the ILI system are not designed to work under the following conditions:
. When you operate the lane change signal and change the traveling lanes in the direction of the signal. (The I-LI system will be deactivated for approximately 2 seconds after the lane change signal is turned off.)
. When the vehicle speed lowers to less than approximately 37 MPH (60 km/h).
Action to take:
After the above conditions have finished and the necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the warning and assist
5-36 Starting and driving

functions will resume.
Condition B:
The assist function of the I-LI system is not designed to work under the following conditions (warning is still functional):
. When the brake pedal is depressed. . When the steering wheel is turned as
far as necessary for the vehicle to change lanes. . When the vehicle is accelerated during the I-LI system operation. . When the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) approach warning occurs (if so equipped). . When the hazard warning flashers are operated. . When driving on a curve at high speed. Action to take:
After the above conditions have finished and the necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the I-LI system application of the brakes will resume.
Condition C:
If the following message appears in the vehicle information display, a chime will sound and the I-LI system will be turned off automatically.
. "Not Available: Poor Road Conditions":

-- When the VDC system (except TCS function) or ABS operates.
. "Currently unavailable/Currently not available":
-- When the VDC system is turned off.
-- When the SNOW mode switch is turned on.
-- When the 4WD shift switch is in the 4H or 4L position (for 4WD models).
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer exist, turn off the I-LI system. Push the dynamic driver assistance switch again to turn the I-LI system back on.
Temporary disabled status at high temperature:
If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high temperature conditions (over approximately 104°F (40°C)) and then the I-LI system is turned on, the I-LI system may be deactivated automatically and the following message will appear on the vehicle information display:
. "Not Available: High Camera Temp" When the interior temperature is reduced, the system will resume operating automatically.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the I-LI system malfunctions, it will cancel automatically. The I-LI indicator (orange) will illuminates and the "Malfunction" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
If the I-LI indicator (orange) illuminates, pull off the road to a safe location. Turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the I-LI indicator (orange) continues to illuminate, have the I-LI system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

SSD0453
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The lane camera unit for the I-LI system is located above the inside mirror. To keep the proper operation of the I-LI system and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following:
. Always keep the windshield clean. . Do not attach a sticker (including
transparent material) or install an accessory near the camera unit.
. Do not place reflective materials, such as white paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit's capability of detecting the lane markers.

BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW)

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the BSW system could result in serious injury or death.
. The BSW system is not a replacement for proper driving procedure and is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects. When changing lanes, always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction your vehicle will move to ensure it is safe to change lanes. Never rely solely on the BSW system.
The BSW system helps alert the driver of other vehicles in adjacent lanes when changing lanes.

WAF0721X
The BSW system uses radar sensors installed near the rear bumper to detect other vehicles in an adjacent lane.

SSD1030
Detection zone
The radar sensors can detect vehicles on either side of your vehicle within the detection zone shown as illustrated. This detection zone starts from the outside mirror of your vehicle and extends approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear bumper, and approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways.
When the turn signal is activated, the detection zone may extend more than approximately 10 ft (3.0 m).

5-38 Starting and driving

system chimes (twice) and the side indicator light flashes. The side indicator light continues to flash until the detected vehicle leaves the detection zone.
The side indicator light illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
The brightness of the side indicator light is adjusted automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light.

Side indicator light
BSW system warning light (on the vehicle information display)
Vehicle information display
Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)
Warning systems switch

WAF0722X
BSW SYSTEM OPERATION
The BSW system operates above approximately 20 MPH (32 km/h). If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the detection zone, the side indicator light illuminates. If the turn signal is then activated, the

Starting and driving 5-39

the button to select "Driver Assistance". Then push the OK.
2. Select "Blind Spot" and push the OK.
3. Select "Warning (BSW)" and push the OK.
The warning systems switch is used to turn on and off the BSW system when it is activated on the vehicle information display. When the warning systems switch is turned off, the warning systems ON indicator light on the switch is off.
The warning systems switch will turn on and off the LDW and BSW systems at the same time.
NOTE:
The system will retain current settings in the vehicle information display even if the engine is restarted.
BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side) Vehicle information display Warning systems switch Warning systems ON indicator light
5-40 Starting and driving

WAF0731X

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE BSW SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the BSW system.

1. Push the

button until "Set-

tings" appears in the vehicle informa-

tion display and then push the OK. Use

WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the BSW system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
. The BSW system cannot detect all vehicles under all conditions.

. The radar sensors may not be able to detect and activate BSW when certain objects are present such as:
-- Pedestrians, bicycles, animals.
-- Vehicles such as motorcycles, low height vehicles, or high ground clearance vehicles.
-- Oncoming vehicles.
-- Vehicles remaining in the detection zone when you accelerate from a stop.
-- A vehicle merging into an adjacent lane at a speed approximately the same as your vehicle.
-- A vehicle approaching rapidly from behind.
-- A vehicle which your vehicle overtakes rapidly.
-- A vehicle that passes through the detection zone quickly.
-- When overtaking several vehicles in a row, the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be detected if they are traveling close together.

. The radar sensor's detection zone is designed based on a standard lane width. When driving in a wider lane, the radar sensors may not detect vehicles in an adjacent lane. When driving in a narrow lane, the radar sensors may detect vehicles driving two lanes away.
. The radar sensors are designed to ignore most stationary objects, however objects such as guardrails, walls, foliage and parked vehicles may occasionally be detected. This is a normal operation condition.
. The following conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles:
-- Severe weather
-- Road spray
-- Ice/frost/dirt build-up on the vehicle
. Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. These conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles.

. When towing a trailer or other vehicle, turn the BSW system off to prevent the occurrence of an unexpected accident resulting from sudden system operation.
. Excessive noise (for example, audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.
BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS
Indicator on Indicator off Indicator flashing
Starting and driving 5-41

JVS0737X
Illustration 1 Approaching from behind
Another vehicle approaching from behind
Illustration 1: The side indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from behind in an adjacent lane.

JVS0738X
Illustration 2 Approaching from behind
Illustration 2: If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the side indicator light flashes.
NOTE: . The radar sensors may not detect
vehicles which are approaching rapidly from behind.

JVS0739X
Illustration 3 Overtaking another vehicle
Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 3: The side indicator light illuminates if you overtake a vehicle and that vehicle stays in the detection zone for approximately 3 seconds.
The radar sensors may not detect slower moving vehicles if they are passed quickly.

5-42 Starting and driving

the other vehicle is detected.

JVS0740X
Illustration 4 Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 4: If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the side indicator light flashes.
NOTE: . When overtaking several vehicles in
a row, the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be detected if they are traveling close together.
. The radar sensors may not detect slower moving vehicles if they are passed quickly.
. If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when

JVS0741X Illustration 5 Entering from the side
Entering from the side
Illustration 5: The side indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from either side.
Starting and driving 5-43

WAF0555X
Illustration 6 Entering from the side
Illustration 6: If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the side indicator light flashes.
NOTE: . The radar sensors may not detect a
vehicle which is traveling at about the same speed as your vehicle when it enters the detection zone.

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE
When radar blockage is detected, the BSW system will be turned off automatically, a chime will sound and the "Unavailable Side Radar Obstruction" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
The system is not available until the conditions no longer exist.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (IBSI) and the Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) systems will also stop working.
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
When the BSW system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, the BSW indicator illuminates and the "Malfunction" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (IBSI) (if so equipped) and Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) systems will also stop working.
Action to take:
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the message continues to appear, have the BSW system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

5-44 Starting and driving

WAF0721X
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The two radar sensors for the BSW system are located near the rear bumper. Always keep the area near the radar sensors clean.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.
Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the radar sensors.
Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or

apply additional paint near the radar sensors.
Do not strike or damage the area around the radar sensors.
See a NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair shop if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision.
Radio frequency statement
For USA:
FCC ID: OAYSRR3B
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION TO USERS
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Frequency bands: 24.05 24.25 Ghz The field strength of SRR3-B is below 250 millivolts/m measured at 3 metres with an average detector.
This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada's licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference. 2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Radiofrequency radiation exposure information: This equipment complies with radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body.
Starting and driving 5-45

INTELLIGENT BLIND SPOT INTERVENTION (I-BSI)
WARNING

driver to return the vehicle to the center of the traveling lane.

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the IBSI system could result in serious injury or death.
. The I-BSI system is not a replacement for proper driving procedures and is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects. When changing lanes, always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction your vehicle will move to ensure it is safe to change lanes. Never rely solely on the IBSI system.
. There is a limitation to the detection capability of the radar. Not every moving object or vehicle will be detected. Using the I-BSI system under some road, ground, lane marker, traffic or weather conditions could lead to improper system operation. Always rely on your own operation to avoid accidents.

WAF0769X
The I-BSI system uses radar sensors installed near the rear bumper to detect other vehicles in an adjacent lane. In addition to the radar sensors, the I-BSI system uses a camera installed behind the windshield to monitor the lane markers of your traveling lane.

The I-BSI system helps alert the driver of other vehicles in adjacent lanes when changing lanes, and helps assist the
5-46 Starting and driving

SSD1030
Detection zone
The radar sensors can detect vehicles on either side of your vehicle within the detection zone shown as illustrated.
This detection zone starts from the outside mirror of your vehicle and extends approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear bumper, and approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways.

Side indicator light
I-BSI ON indicator light (on the vehicle information display)
I-BSI indicator (on the vehicle information display)
Vehicle information display
Dynamic driver assistance switch

WAF0737X
I-BSI SYSTEM OPERATION
The I-BSI system operates above approximately 37 MPH (60 km/h). If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the detection zone, the side indicator light illuminates. If the turn signal is then activated, the
Starting and driving 5-47

system chimes (twice) and the side indicator light flashes. The side indicator light continues to flash until the detected vehicle leaves the detection zone.
If the I-BSI system is ON and your vehicle approaches a lane marker while another vehicle is in the detection zone, the system chimes (three times) and the side indicator light flashes. Then the I-BSI system slightly applies the brakes to help return the vehicle back to the center of the driving lane. The I-BSI system operates regardless of turn signal usage.
NOTE: . I-BSI warning and system applica-
tion will only be activated if the side indicator light is already illuminated when your vehicle approaches a lane marker. If another vehicle comes into the detection zone after your vehicle has crossed a lane marker, no I-BSI warning or system application will be activated. (See "IBSI driving situations" (P.5-51).) . The I-BSI system is typically activated earlier than the Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) system when your vehicle is approaching a lane marker.
5-48 Starting and driving

Steering-wheel-mounted control (left side)
Vehicle information display
Dynamic driver assistance switch

WAF0736X

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE I-BSI SYSTEM

1. Push the

button until "Set-

tings" appears in the vehicle informa-

tion display and then push the OK. Use

the button to select "Driver Assis-

tance." Then push the OK.

2. Select "Blind Spot" and push the OK.
3. Select "Intervention (BSI)" and push the OK.
4. Push the Dynamic driver assistance switch to turn the system on or off.
The dynamic driver assistance switch is used for the I-LI and I-BSI systems.
When the dynamic driver assistance switch is pushed, the I-LI system will also turn on or off simultaneously. The IBSI system can be individually set to on or off on the vehicle information display.
If the system is set to off, the system will not turn on even if the dynamic driver assistance switch is pushed to on.
I-BSI SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the I-BSI system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
. The I-BSI system cannot detect all vehicles under all conditions.
. The radar sensors may not be able to detect and activate I-BSI when certain objects are present

such as:
-- Pedestrians, bicycles, animals.
-- Vehicles such as motorcycles, low height vehicles, or high ground clearance vehicles.
-- Vehicles remaining in the detection zone when you accelerate from a stop.
-- Oncoming vehicles.
-- A vehicle merging into an adjacent lane at a speed approximately the same as your vehicle.
-- A vehicle approaching rapidly from behind.
-- A vehicle which your vehicle overtakes rapidly.
-- A vehicle that passes through the detection zone quickly.
. The radar sensor's detection zone is designed based on a standard lane width. When driving in a wider lane, the radar sensors may not detect vehicles in an adjacent lane. When driving in a narrow lane, the radar sensors may detect vehicles driving two lanes away.

. The radar sensors are designed to ignore most stationary objects, however objects such as guardrails, walls, foliage and parked vehicles may occasionally be detected. This is a normal operation condition.
. The following conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles:
-- Severe weather
-- Road spray
-- Ice/frost/dirt build-up on the vehicle
. Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. These conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles.
. The camera may not detect lane markers in the following situations and the I-BSI system may not operate properly.
-- On roads where there are multiple parallel lane markers; lane markers that are faded or not painted clearly; yellow painted lane markers; non-
Starting and driving 5-49

standard lane markers; lane markers covered with water, dirt, snow, etc.
-- On roads where discontinued lane markers are still detectable.
-- On roads where there are sharp curves.
-- On roads where there are sharply contrasting objects, such as shadows, snow, water, wheel ruts, seams or lines remaining after road repairs.
-- On roads where the traveling lane merges or separates.
-- When the vehicle's traveling direction does not align with the lane markers.
-- When traveling close to the vehicle in front of you, which obstructs the lane camera unit detection range.
-- When rain, snow or dirt adheres to the windshield in front of a lane camera unit.
-- When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens or if aiming is not adjusted
5-50 Starting and driving

properly.
-- When strong light enters a lane camera unit. (For example: light directly shines on the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)
-- When a sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example: when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.)
. Do not use the I-BSI system under the following conditions because the system may not function properly.
-- During bad weather. (For example: rain, fog, snow, etc.)
-- When driving on slippery roads, such as on ice or snow, etc.
-- When driving on winding or uneven roads.
-- When there is a lane closure due to road repairs.
-- When driving in a makeshift or temporary lane.
-- When driving on roads where the lane width is too narrow.

-- When driving with a tire that is not within normal tire conditions (for example, tire wear, low tire pressure, installation of spare tire, tire chains, nonstandard wheels).
-- When the vehicle is equipped with non-original steering parts or suspension parts.
-- When towing a trailer or other vehicle.
. Excessive noise (for example, audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.

I-BSI DRIVING SITUATIONS
Indicator on Indicator off Indicator flashing

JVS0737X
Illustration 1 - Approaching from behind
Another vehicle approaching from behind
Illustration 1: The side indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from behind in an adjacent lane.

JVS0738X
Illustration 2 - Approaching from behind
Illustration 2: If the driver activates the turn signal then the system chimes (twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

Starting and driving 5-51

JVS0760X
Illustration 3 - Approaching from behind
Illustration 3: If the I-BSI system is on and your vehicle approaches a lane marker while another vehicle is in the detection zone, the system chimes (three times) and the side indicator light flashes. Then the I-BSI system slightly applies the brakes to help return the vehicle back to the center of the driving lane.
NOTE: . The radar sensors may not detect
vehicles which are approaching rapidly from behind.

JVS0739X
Illustration 4 - Overtaking another vehicle
Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 4: The side indicator light illuminates if you overtake a vehicle and that vehicle stays in the detection zone for approximately 3 seconds.

JVS0740X
Illustration 5 - Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 5: If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

5-52 Starting and driving

JVS0761X
Illustration 6 - Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 6: If the I-BSI system is on and your vehicle approaches a lane marker while another vehicle is in the detection zone, the system chimes (three times) and the side indicator light flashes. The IBSI system activates to help return the vehicle back to the center of the driving lane.
NOTE: . When overtaking several vehicles in
a row, the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be detected if they are traveling close together.
. The radar sensors may not detect slower moving vehicles if they are passed quickly.

JVS0741X
Illustration 7 - Entering from the side
Entering from the side
Illustration 7: The side indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from either side.
NOTE:
The radar sensors may not detect a vehicle which is traveling at about the same speed as your vehicle when it enters the detection zone.

WAF0555X Illustration 8 - Entering from the side
Illustration 8: If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the side indicator light flashes and a chime will sound twice. NOTE: If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when another vehicle is detected.
Starting and driving 5-53

JVS0761X
Illustration 9 - Entering from the side
Illustration 9: If the I-BSI system is on and your vehicle approaches the lane marker while another vehicle is in the detection zone, the system chimes (three times) and the side indicator light flashes. The IBSI system activates to help return the vehicle back to the center of the driving lane.

JVS0742X
Illustration 10 - Entering from the side
Illustration 10: The I-BSI system will not operate if your vehicle is on a lane marker when another vehicle enters the detection zone. In this case only the BSW system operates.
NOTE: . The radar sensors may not detect a
vehicle which is traveling at about the same speed as your vehicle when it enters the detection zone.
. I-BSI will not operate or will stop operating and only a warning chime will sound under the following conditions.

-- When the brake pedal is depressed.
-- When the vehicle is accelerated during I-BSI system operation
-- When steering quickly -- When the ICC, I-FCW or AEB warn-
ings sound. -- When the hazard warning flashers
are operated. -- When driving on a curve at a high
speed.
-- When the BSW system is turned off.
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE
When any of the following messages appear on the vehicle information display, a chime will sound and the I-BSI system will be turned off automatically.
. "Not Available: Poor Road Conditions": When the VDC system (except traction control system function) or ABS operates.
. "Currently unavailable/Currently not available":
-- When the VDC system is turned off. -- When the SNOW mode is selected. -- When the 4WD shift switch is in the
4H or 4L position. (4WD models)

5-54 Starting and driving

. "Not Available: High Camera Temp":
If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high temperature conditions (over approximately 104°F (40°C)).
. "Unavailable Side Radar Obstruction": When side radar blockage is detected.
Turn off the I-BSI system and turn it on again when the above conditions no longer exist.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
When the I-BSI system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, the I-BSI indicator illuminates and a chime will sound, and the "Malfunction" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take:
Stop the vehicle in a safe location and push the park button to engage the P (Park) position. Turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the warning message continues to appear, It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WAF0769X
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The two radar sensors for the I-BSI system are located near the rear bumper. Always keep the area near the radar sensors clean.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.
Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the radar sensors.
Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or

apply additional paint near the radar sensors.
Do not strike or damage the area around the radar sensors.
It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision.
The lane camera unit for I-BSI system is located above the inside mirror. To keep the proper operation of I-BSI and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following:
. Always keep the windshield clean. . Do not attach a sticker (including
transparent material) or install an accessory near the camera unit. . Do not place reflective materials, such as white paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit's capability of detecting the lane markers. . Do not strike or damage the areas around the camera unit. Do not touch the camera lens or remove the screw located on the camera unit. It is recommended you contact a NISSAN dealer if the camera unit is damaged due to an accident.
Starting and driving 5-55

Radio frequency statement
For USA:
FCC ID: OAYSRR3B
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION TO USERS
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Frequency bands: 24.05 24.25 Ghz
The field strength of SRR3-B is below 250 millivolts/m measured at 3 metres with an average detector.

This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada's licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Radiofrequency radiation exposure information:
This equipment complies with radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body.

5-56 Starting and driving

REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (RCTA) (if so equipped)
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RCTA system could result in serious injury or death.
. The RCTA system is not a replacement for proper driving procedures and is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects. When backing out of a parking space, always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction your vehicle will move. Never rely solely on the RCTA system.
The RCTA system will assist you when backing out from a parking space. When the vehicle is in reverse, the system is designed to detect other vehicles approaching from the right or left of the vehicle. If the system detects cross traffic, it will alert you.

Side indicator light
Vehicle information display
Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)

WAF0742X
RCTA SYSTEM OPERATION
The RCTA system can help alert the driver of an approaching vehicle when the driver is backing out of a parking space. When the shift position is in R (Reverse) and the vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 MPH (8 km/h), the RCTA
Starting and driving 5-57

system is operational. If the radar detects an approaching vehicle from either side, the system chimes (once) and the side indicator light flashes on the side the vehicle is approaching from.
5-58 Starting and driving

The RCTA system uses radar sensors installed on both sides near the rear bumper to detect an approaching vehicle. The radar sensors can detect an approaching vehicle from up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) away.
JVS0173X
WAF0721X

the button to select "Driver Assistance". Then push the OK.
2. Use the button to select "Cross Traffic Alert" then press the OK.
3. Use the OK to enable or disable the system.
NOTE:
The system setting will be retained even if the engine is restarted.

Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)
Vehicle information display

WAF0718X

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE RCTA SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the RCTA system.

1. Push the

button until "Set-

tings" appears in the vehicle informa-

tion display and then push the OK. Use

Starting and driving 5-59

5-60 Starting and driving

RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

JVS0479X

WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the RCTA system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
. Always check surroundings and turn to check what is behind you before backing up. The radar sensors detect approaching (moving) vehicles. The radar sensors cannot detect every object such as:
-- Pedestrians, bicycles, motorcycles, animals or child-operated toy vehicles
-- A vehicle that is passing at speeds greater than approximately 19 MPH (30 km/h)
-- A vehicle that is passing at speeds lower than approximately 5 MPH (8 km/h)
. The radar sensors may not detect approaching vehicles in certain situations:

-- Illustration : When a vehicle parked next to you obstructs the beam of the radar sensor.
-- Illustration : When the vehicle is parked in an angled parking space.
-- Illustration : When the vehicle is parked on inclined ground.
-- Illustration : When an approaching vehicle turns into your vehicle's parking lot aisle.
-- Illustration : When the angle formed by your vehicle and approaching vehicle is small
. The following conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles:
-- Severe weather
-- Road spray
-- Ice/frost/dirt build-up on the vehicle
. Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. These conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles

. When towing a trailer or other vehicle, turn the RCTA system off to prevent the occurrence of an unexpected accident resulting from sudden system operation.
. Excessive noise (e.g. audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.

Illustration 1

JVS0172X

Illustration 2

JVS0173X

Starting and driving 5-61

NOTE:
In the case of several vehicles approaching in a row (Illustration 1) or in the opposite direction (Illustration 2), a chime may not be sounded by the RCTA system after the first vehicle passes the sensors.
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE
When radar blockage is detected, the system will be deactivated automatically. The "Unavailable Side Radar Obstruction" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
The systems are not available until the conditions no longer exist.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA and Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI) systems will also stop working.
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automati-
5-62 Starting and driving

cally.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
When the RCTA system malfunctions, it will turn off automatically. The "Malfunction" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA and I-BSI systems will also stop working.
Action to take:
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the message continues to appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WAF0721X
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The two radar sensors for the RCTA system are located near the rear bumper. Always keep the area near the radar sensors clean.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.
Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the radar sensors.
Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or

INTELLIGENT BACK-UP INTERVENTION (I-BI) (if so equipped)

apply additional paint near the radar sensors.
Do not strike or damage the area around the radar sensors. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision.
Radio frequency statement
For USA:
FCC ID: OAYSRR3B
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION TO USERS
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Frequency bands: 24.05 24.25 Ghz
The field strength of SRR3-B is below 250 millivolts/m measured at 3 metres with an average detector.
This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada's licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Radiofrequency radiation exposure information:
This equipment complies with radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body.

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the I-BI system could result in serious injury or death.
. The I-BI system is not a replacement for proper driving procedure, is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects and does not provide full brake power. When backing out of parking spaces, always use the inside and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction you will move. Never rely solely on the IBI system.
. There is a limitation to the detection capability of the radar or the sonar. Using the I-BI system under some road, ground, traffic or weather conditions could lead to improper system operation. Always rely on your own operation to avoid accidents.
The I-BI system can help alert the driver of an approaching vehicle or objects behind the vehicle when the driver is backing out of a parking space.
Starting and driving 5-63

WAF0723X
The I-BI system uses radar sensors installed on both sides near the rear bumper to detect an approaching vehicle and sonar sensors to detect objects in the rear.
5-64 Starting and driving

The radar sensors detect an approaching vehicle. The sonar sensors detect stationary objects behind the vehicle. Refer to the illustration for approximate zone coverage areas .
JVS0173X
JVS0698X

Side indicator light I-BI OFF indicator "P" key (on the touch screen display) Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)

WAF0738X

JVS0173X
I-BI SYSTEM OPERATION
When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 MPH (8 km/h), the I-BI system operates.
If the radar detects a vehicle approaching from the side or the sonar detects close stationary objects behind the vehicle, the system gives visual and audible warnings. If the driver does not apply the brakes, the system automatically applies the brake for a moment when the vehicle is moving backwards. After the automatic brake application, the driver must depress the brake pedal to maintain brake pressure. If the driver's foot is on the accelerator
Starting and driving 5-65

pedal, the system pushes the accelerator upward before applying the brake. If you continue to accelerate, the system will not engage the brake.

WAF0767X
Touch screen display
When the shift lever is placed in the R (Reverse) position, the indicator on the "P" key illuminates on the touch screen display.

Side indicator light

WAF0739X

5-66 Starting and driving

WAF0768X

If the radar detects an approaching vehicle from the side, the system chimes (once), the side indicator light on the side the vehicle is approaching from flashes and a yellow rectangular frame appears on the touch screen display.

Illustration 1

JVS0172X

. In the case of several vehicles approaching in a row (Illustration 1) or in the opposite direction (Illustration 2), a chime may not be issued to the I-BI system after the first vehicle passes the sensors.
. The sonar system chime indicating there is an object behind the vehicle has a higher priority than the I-BI chime (single beep) indicating an approaching vehicle. If the sonar system detects an object behind the vehicle and the I-BI system detects an approaching vehicle at the same time, the following indications are provided:
-- The sonar system chime sounds
-- The side indicator light on the side of the approaching vehicle flashes, and
-- A yellow rectangular frame appears in the touch screen display.

Illustration 2

JVS0173X

Starting and driving 5-67

object is very close to the bumper.

WAF0768X
If an approaching vehicle or close object behind the vehicle is detected when your vehicle is backing up, a red frame will appear in the touch screen display and the system will chime three times. Then, the brakes will be applied momentarily. After the automatic brake application, the driver must depress the brake pedal to maintain brake pressure.
If the driver's foot is on the accelerator pedal, the system moves the accelerator pedal upward before the braking is applied. However, if you continue to accelerate, the system will not engage the brakes.
The I-BI system does not operate if the
5-68 Starting and driving

WAF0767X

I-BI OFF indicator

WAF0781X

The I-BI system can be turned off temporarily by touching the "P" key on the touch screen display. The indicator on the "P" key turns off and the I-BI OFF indicator appears on the vehicle information display.
When the shift lever is placed in the R (Reverse) position again, the I-BI system is turned on.
NOTE: . When the "P" key is touched, the
indicator light on the key will turn off and the I-BI system will turn off temporarily. The Moving Object Detection (MOD), the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) and the sonar systems will also be turned off at the same time.
. When the sonar and MOD systems are turned off on the settings menu in the touch screen display, the "P" key will disappear.
To enable or disable the I-BI system, use the vehicle information display. See "How to enable/disable the I-BI system" (P.5-69).

Steering-wheel-mounted control (left side)
Vehicle information display

WAF0718X

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE I-BI SYSTEM

1. Push the

button until "Set-

tings" appears in the vehicle informa-

tion display and then push the OK. Use

the

to select "Driver Assistance".

Then push the OK.

Starting and driving 5-69

2. Select "Emergency Brake" and push the OK.
3. Select "Rear" and use the OK to turn the system on or off.
NOTE: . The I-BI system will be automatically
turned on when the engine is restarted.
. The I-BI system is integrated into the RAB system. There is not a separate selection for the I-BI system. When the RAB system is also turned off.

5-70 Starting and driving

I-BI SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the I-BI system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance

JVS0479X
with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death. . Always check your surroundings
and turn to check what is behind you before backing up.

. The radar sensors detect approaching (moving) vehicles. The radar sensors cannot detect every object such as:
-- Pedestrians, bicycles, animals or child operated toy vehicles
-- A vehicle that passing at speeds greater than approximately 15 MPH (24 km/h)
. The radar sensors may not detect approaching vehicles in certain situations:
-- Illustration a. When a vehicle parked next to you obstructs the beam of the radar sensor.
-- Illustration b. When the vehicle is parked in an angled parking space.
-- Illustration c. When the vehicle is parked on inclined ground.
-- Illustration d. When an approaching vehicle turns into your vehicle's parking lot aisle.
-- Illustration e. When the angle formed by your vehicle and approaching vehicle is small.
. The following conditions may reduce the ability of the radar sensors to detect other vehicles:

-- Severe weather
-- Road spray
-- Ice/frost/dirt build up on the vehicle
. Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. These conditions may reduce the ability of the radar sensors to detect other vehicles.
. The sonar sensors detect stationary objects behind the vehicle. The sonar sensor may not detect:
-- Small or moving objects
-- Wedge-shaped objects
-- Object close to the bumper (less than approximately 1 ft (30 cm))
-- Thin objects such as rope, wire and chain, etc.
. The brake engagement by the IBI system is not as effective on a slope as it is on flat ground. When on a steep slope the system may not function properly.
. Do not use the I-BI system under the following conditions because the system may not function

properly. -- When driving with a tire that is
not within normal tire conditions (for example, tire wear, low tire pressure, installation of spare tire, tire chains, nonstandard wheels). -- When the vehicle is equipped with non-original brake parts or suspension parts. . When towing a trailer or other vehicle, turn the I-BI system off to prevent the occurrence of an unexpected accident resulting from sudden system operation. (See "IBI system operation" (P.5-65).) . Excessive noise (for example, audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.
Starting and driving 5-71

WAF0772X
Vehicle information display
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE
When any of the following messages appear on the vehicle information display
, a chime will sound and the I-BI system will be turned off automatically.
. "Unavailable: High Accelerator Temperature": If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high temperature conditions (over approximately 104°F (40°C)).
. "Unavailable Side Radar Obstruction": When side radar blockage is detected.
5-72 Starting and driving

Turn off the I-BI system and turn it on again when the above conditions no longer exist.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the I-BI system malfunctions, it will turn off automatically, a chime will sound and "Malfunction" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display .
Action to take
Stop the vehicle in a safe location and place the shift lever in the P (Park) position. Turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the warning message continues to appear, have the system checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WAF0721X
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The two radar sensors for the I-BI system are located near the rear bumper. Always keep the area near the radar sensors clean.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.
Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the radar sensors.
Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or

apply additional paint near the radar sensors.
Do not strike or damage the area around the radar sensors.
It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision.
Radio frequency statement
For USA:
FCC ID: OAYSRR3B
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
CAUTION TO USERS
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

For Canada:
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Frequency bands: 24.05 24.25 Ghz
The field strength of SRR3-B is below 250 millivolts/m measured at 3 metres with an average detector.
This device contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada's licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Radiofrequency radiation exposure information:
This equipment complies with radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with

minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body.
Starting and driving 5-73

INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC)

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the ICC system could result in serious injury or death.
. ICC is not a collision avoidance or warning device. For highway use only and it is not intended for congested areas or city driving. Failure to apply the brakes could result in an accident.
. Always observe posted speed limits and do not set the speed over them.
. Always drive carefully and attentively when using either cruise control mode. Read and understand the Owner's Manual thoroughly before using the cruise control. To avoid serious injury or death, do not rely on the system to prevent accidents or to control the vehicle's speed in emergency situations. Do not use cruise control except in appropriate road and traffic conditions.
. In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, a warning chime will not sound to warn you
5-74 Starting and driving

if you are too close to the vehicle ahead. Pay special attention to the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you or a collision could occur.
The ICC system maintains a selected distance from the vehicle in front of you within the speed range of 0 to 90 MPH (0 to 144 km/h) up to the set speed. The set speed can be selected by the driver between 20 to 90 MPH (30 to 144 km/h).
The vehicle travels at a set speed when the road ahead is clear.
The ICC system can be set to one of two cruise control modes.
. Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode: For maintaining a selected distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you up to the preset speed.
. Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode: For cruising at a preset speed.

system display.
For the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, see "Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode" (P.5-76).
For the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, see "Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode" (P.5-92).

Displays and indicators
ICC switches
MAIN (ON·OFF) switch
Push the MAIN switch to choose the cruise control mode between the vehicleto-vehicle distance control mode and the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode.

WAF0745X
Once a control mode is activated, it cannot be changed to the other cruise control mode. To change the mode, push the MAIN switch once to turn the system off. Then push the MAIN switch
again to turn the system back on and select the desired cruise control mode.
Always confirm the setting in the ICC

Starting and driving 5-75

HOW TO SELECT THE CRUISE CONTROL MODE
Selecting vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
To choose the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode , quickly push and release the MAIN switch .
Selecting the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode
To choose the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode , push and hold the MAIN switch for longer than approximately 1.5 seconds. See "Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode" (P.5-
5-76 Starting and driving

WAF0746X
92).
VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE
In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the ICC system automatically maintains a selected distance from the vehicle traveling in front of you according to that vehicle's speed (up to the set speed), or at the set speed when the road ahead is clear.

WAF0724X
The system is intended to enhance the operation of the vehicle when following a vehicle traveling in the same lane and direction.
If the radar sensor detects a slower moving vehicle ahead, the system will reduce the vehicle speed so that your vehicle follows the vehicle in front at the selected distance.
The system automatically controls the throttle and applies the brakes (up to approximately 40% of vehicle braking power) if necessary.
The detection range of the sensor is approximately 650 ft (200 m) ahead.

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode operation
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is designed to maintain a selected distance and reduce the speed to match the slower vehicle ahead; the system will decelerate the vehicle as necessary and if the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill. However, the ICC system can only apply up to approximately 40% of the vehicle's total braking power. This system should only be used when traffic conditions allow vehicle speeds to remain fairly constant or when vehicle speeds change gradually. If a vehicle moves into the traveling lane ahead or if a vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decelerates, the distance between vehicles may become closer because the ICC system cannot decelerate the vehicle quickly enough. If this occurs, the ICC system will sound a warning chime and blink the system display to notify the driver to take necessary action.
The system will cancel and a warning chime will sound if the speed is below approximately 15 MPH (25 km/h) and a vehicle is not detected ahead. The system will also disengage when the vehicle goes above the maximum set speed.
See "Approach warning" (P.5-84).

The following items are controlled in the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode:
. When there are no vehicles traveling ahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode maintains the speed set by the driver. The set speed range is between approximately 20 and 90 MPH (30 and 144 km/h).
. When there is a vehicle traveling ahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode adjusts the speed to maintain the distance, selected by driver, from the vehicle ahead. The adjusting speed range is up to the set speed. If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill within the limitations of the system. The system will cancel once it judges a standstill with a warning chime.
. When the vehicle traveling ahead has moved out from its lane of travel, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode accelerates and maintains vehicle speed up to the set speed.
The ICC system does not control vehicle speed or warn you when you approach stationary and slow moving vehicles. You must pay attention to vehicle operation to maintain proper distance from vehicles ahead when approaching toll gates or traffic congestion.

SSD0254
When driving on the freeway at a set speed and approaching a slower traveling vehicle ahead, the ICC system will adjust the speed to maintain the distance, selected by the driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead changes lanes or exits the freeway, the ICC system will accelerate and maintain the speed up to the set speed. Pay attention to the driving operation to maintain control of the vehicle as it accelerates to the set speed.
The vehicle may not maintain the set speed on winding or hilly roads. If this occurs, you will have to manually control the vehicle speed.
Normally when controlling the distance to
Starting and driving 5-77

a vehicle ahead, this system automatically accelerates or decelerates your vehicle according to the speed of the vehicle ahead. Depress the accelerator to properly accelerate your vehicle when acceleration is required for a lane change. Depress the brake pedal when deceleration is required to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead due to its sudden braking or if a vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when using the ICC system.

. Long . Middle . Short 4. CANCEL switch:
Deactivates the system without erasing the set speed.
5. MAIN switch:
Master switch to activate the system

5-78 Starting and driving

WAF0747X
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode switches
The system is operated by a MAIN switch and four control switches, all mounted on the steering wheel. 1. RES+ switch:
Resumes set speed or increases speed incrementally. 2. SET- switch: Sets desired cruise speed, reduces speed incrementally. 3. DISTANCE switch: Changes the vehicle's following distance:

WAF0304X
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode display and indicators
The display is located between the speedometer and tachometer. 1. MAIN switch indicator:
Indicates that the MAIN switch is ON. 2. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:
Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in front of you. 3. Set distance indicator: Displays the selected distance between vehicles set with the DISTANCE switch.

4. Indicates your vehicle
5. This indicator indicates the ICC system status depending on a color. . Intelligent Cruise Control system ON indicator (gray): Indicates that the MAIN switch is ON. . Intelligent Cruise Control system set indicator (green): Indicates that cruising speed is set. . Intelligent Cruise Control system warning (yellow): Indicates that if there is a malfunction in the ICC system.
6. Set vehicle speed indicator:
Indicates the set vehicle speed.
For Canadian models, the speed is displayed in km/h.

WAF0748X
Operating vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
To turn on the cruise control, quickly push and release the MAIN switch on. The MAIN switch indicator, set distance indicator and set vehicle speed indicator come on and in a standby state for setting.

Starting and driving 5-79

WAF0749X
To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to the desired speed, push the SET- switch and release it. (Vehicle ahead detection indicator, set distance indicator and set vehicle speed indicator come on.) Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.
5-80 Starting and driving

WAF0307X
When the SET- switch is pushed under the following conditions, the system cannot be set and the ICC indicators will blink for approximately 2 seconds:
. When traveling below 20 MPH (30 km/h) and the vehicle ahead is not detected
. When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or manual shift mode
. When the parking brake is applied . When the brakes are operated by the
driver When the SET- switch is pushed under the following conditions, the system cannot be set.
A warning chime will sound and a mes-

sage will pop up.
. "Currently unavailable/Currently not available":
-- When the SNOW mode is pushed (SNOW mode switch) (To use the ICC system, turn off the SNOW mode switch, push the MAIN switch to turn off the ICC and reset the ICC switch by pushing the MAIN switch again.)
For details about the SNOW mode switch, see "SNOW mode" (P.5-135).
-- When the 4WD shift switch is in the 4H or 4L position. (To use the ICC system, place the 4WD shift switch in the AUTO position, push the MAIN switch to turn off the ICC system and reset the ICC switch by pushing the MAIN switch again (for 4WD models).
For details about the 4WD shift switch, see "NISSAN all-mode 4WD®" (P.5-124).
-- When the VDC system is off (To use the ICC system, turn on the VDC system. Push the MAIN switch to turn off the ICC system and reset the ICC switch by pushing the MAIN switch again.)
For details about the VDC system, see "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system" (P.5-144).

. "Not available: Poor Road Conditions":
-- When the VDC (including the traction control system) is operating
-- When a wheel is slipping (To use the ICC system, make sure the wheels are no longer slipping. Push the MAIN switch to turn off the ICC, and reset the ICC system by pushing the MAIN switch again.)

System set display with vehicle ahead
System set display without vehicle ahead
The driver sets the desired vehicle speed based on the road conditions. The ICC system maintains the set vehicle speed, similar to standard cruise control, as long as no vehicle is detected in the lane ahead.
The ICC system displays the set speed.
Vehicle detected ahead:
When a vehicle is detected in the lane ahead, the ICC system decelerates the vehicle by controlling the throttle and applying the brakes to match the speed of a slower vehicle ahead. The system then controls the vehicle speed based on

WAF0308X
the speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain the driver selected distance.
NOTE: . The stoplights of the vehicle come
on when braking is performed by the ICC system. . When the brake operates, a noise may be heard and/or vibration may be felt. This is not a malfunction.
When a vehicle ahead is detected, the vehicle ahead detection indicator comes on. The ICC system will also display the set speed and selected distance.
Vehicle ahead not detected: When a vehicle is no longer detected
Starting and driving 5-81

ahead, the ICC system gradually accelerates your vehicle to resume the previously set vehicle speed. The ICC system then maintains the set speed. When a vehicle is no longer detected the vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off. If a vehicle ahead appears during acceleration to the set vehicle speed or any time the ICC system is in operation, the system controls the distance to that vehicle. When a vehicle is no longer detected under approximately 15 MPH (25 km/h), the system will be canceled.
5-82 Starting and driving

WAF0309X
When passing another vehicle, the set speed indicator will flash when the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed. The vehicle detect indicator will turn off when the area ahead of the vehicle is open. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed.
Even though your vehicle speed is set in the ICC system, you can depress the accelerator pedal when it is necessary to accelerate your vehicle rapidly.

How to change set vehicle speed
To cancel the preset speed, use any of these methods:
. Push the CANCEL switch. The set vehicle speed indicator will go out.
. Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle speed indicator will go out.
. Turn the MAIN switch off. Both the MAIN switch indicator and set vehicle speed indicator will go out.
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following methods:
. Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the SET- switch.
. Push and hold the RES+ switch. The set vehicle speed will increase by approximately 5 MPH (5 km/h for Canada).
. Push, then quickly release the RES+ switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will increase by approximately 1 MPH (1 km/h for Canada).
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following methods:
. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the SET- switch and release it.
. Push and hold the SET- switch. The set vehicle speed will decrease by approximately 5 MPH (5 km/h for

Canada). . Push, then quickly release the SET-
switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease by approximately 1 MPH (1 km/h for Canada). To resume the preset speed, push and release the RES+ switch. The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 20 MPH (30 km/h).
WAF0750X
How to change set distance to vehicle ahead
The distance to the vehicle ahead can be selected at any time depending on the traffic conditions. Each time the DISTANCE switch is pushed, the set distance will change to long, middle, short and back to long again in that sequence.

Starting and driving 5-83

. The distance to the vehicle ahead will change according to the vehicle speed. The higher the vehicle speed, the longer the distance.
. If the engine is stopped, the set distance becomes "long". (Each time the engine is started, the initial setting becomes "long".)
5-84 Starting and driving

WAF0310X
Approach warning
If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle ahead due to rapid deceleration of that vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the system warns the driver with the chime and ICC system display. Decelerate by depressing the brake pedal to maintain a

safe vehicle distance if:
. The chime sounds. . The vehicle ahead detection and set
distance indicator blink.
The warning chime may not sound in some cases when there is a short distance between vehicles. Some examples are:
. When the vehicles are traveling at the same speed and the distance between vehicles is not changing
. When the vehicle ahead is traveling faster and the distance between vehicles is increasing
. When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle
The warning chime will not sound when:
. Your vehicle approaches other vehicles that are parked or moving slowly.
. The accelerator pedal is depressed, overriding the system.
NOTE:
The approach warning chime may sound and the system display may blink when the radar sensor detects objects on the side of the vehicle or on the side of the road. This may cause the ICC system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The radar sensor may detect these objects when the vehicle is driven on winding roads, narrow roads,

hilly roads or when entering or exiting a curve. In these cases you will have to manually control the proper distance ahead of your vehicle.
Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or driving position in the lane) or traffic or vehicle condition (for example, if a vehicle is being driven with some damage).
Acceleration when passing
When the ICC system is engaged above 44 MPH (70 km/h) and following a slower vehicle (below the vehicle set speed), and the turn signal is activated to the left, the ICC system will automatically start to accelerate the vehicle to help initiate passing on the left and will begin to reduce the distance to vehicle directly ahead. Only the left side turn signal operates this feature. As the driver steers the vehicle and moves into the passing lane, if no vehicle is detected ahead the ICC system will continue to accelerate to the vehicle set speed. If another vehicle is detected ahead, then the vehicle will accelerate up to the following speed of that vehicle. If the vehicle is not steered into the left lane to pass, the acceleration will stop after a short time and regain the set following distance. Acceleration can be stopped at any point by depressing

the brake pedal or the CANCEL switch on the steering wheel.
WARNING
In order to reduce the risk of a collision that may result in serious injury or death, please be aware of the following:
. This function is only activated with the left turn signal and will briefly accelerate the vehicle even if a lane change is not initiated. This can include non-passing situations such as left side exits.
. Ensure that when passing another vehicle, the adjacent lane is clear before initiating the pass. Sudden changes in traffic may occur while passing. Always manually steer or brake as needed. Never solely rely on the system.

Automatic cancellation
A chime sounds under the following conditions and the control is automatically canceled. . When the vehicle ahead is not de-
tected and your vehicle is traveling below the speed of 15 MPH (25 km/h) . When the system judges the vehicle is at standstill . When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or manual shift mode . When the parking brake is applied . When the SNOW mode switch is pushed on. . When the 4WD shift switch is in the 4H or 4L position (for 4WD models) . When the VDC system is turned off . When the VDC (including the traction control system) operates . When distance measurement becomes impaired due to adhesion of dirt or obstruction to the sensor . When a wheel slips . When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted
Starting and driving 5-85

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode limitations
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the ICC system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
. The system is primarily intended for use on straight, dry, open roads with light traffic. It is not advisable to use the system in city traffic or congested areas.
. This system will not adapt automatically to road conditions. This system should be used in evenly flowing traffic. Do not use the system on roads with sharp curves, or on icy roads, in heavy rain or in fog.
. As there is a performance limit to the distance control function, never rely solely on the ICC system. This system does not correct careless, inattentive or absentminded driving, or overcome poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed by depressing the
5-86 Starting and driving

brake pedal, depending on the distance to the vehicle ahead and the surrounding circumstances in order to maintain a safe distance between vehicles.
. If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill within the limitations of the system. The system will cancel once it judges that the vehicle has come to a standstill and sound a warning chime. To prevent the vehicle from moving, the driver must depress the brake pedal.
. Always pay attention to the operation of the vehicle and be ready to manually control the proper following distance. The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode of the ICC system may not be able to maintain the selected distance between vehicles (following distance) or selected vehicle speed under some circumstances.
. The system may not detect the vehicle in front of you in certain road or weather conditions. To avoid accidents, never use the ICC system under the following conditions:

-- On roads where the traffic is heavy or there are sharp curves
-- On slippery road surfaces such as on ice or snow, etc.
-- During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)
-- When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the system sensor
-- On steep downhill roads (the vehicle may go beyond the set vehicle speed and frequent braking may result in overheating the brakes)
-- On repeated uphill and downhill roads
-- When traffic conditions make it difficult to keep a proper distance between vehicles because of frequent acceleration or deceleration
. Do not use the ICC system if you are towing a trailer. The system may not detect a vehicle ahead.
. In some road or traffic conditions, a vehicle or object can unexpectedly come into the sensor detection zone and cause automatic braking. You may need to control

the distance from other vehicles using the accelerator pedal. Always stay alert and avoid using the ICC system when it is not recommended in this section.
The radar sensor will not detect the following objects:
. Stationary and slow moving vehicles . Pedestrians or objects in the roadway . Oncoming vehicles in the same lane . Motorcycles traveling offset in the
travel lane
The sensor generally detects the signals returned from the vehicle ahead. Therefore, if the sensor cannot detect the reflection from the vehicle ahead, the ICC system may not maintain the selected distance.
The following are some conditions in which the sensor cannot detect the signals:
. When the snow or road spray from traveling vehicles reduces the sensor's visibility
. When excessively heavy baggage is loaded in the rear seat or the luggage area of your vehicle
. When your vehicle is towing a trailer, etc.

The ICC system is designed to automatically check the sensor's operation within the limitation of the system. When the sensor is covered with dirt or is obstructed, the system will automatically be canceled. If the sensor is covered with ice, a transparent or translucent vinyl bag, etc., the ICC system may not detect them. In these instances, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode may not cancel and may not be able to maintain the selected following distance from the vehicle ahead. Be sure to check and clean the sensor regularly.

Starting and driving 5-87

The detection zone of the ICC sensor is limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the detection zone for the vehicle-to-vehicle distance detection mode to maintain the selected distance from the vehicle ahead.
A vehicle ahead may move outside of the detection zone due to its position within the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may not be detected in the same lane ahead if they are traveling offset from the centerline of the lane. A vehicle that is entering the lane ahead may not be detected until the vehicle has completely moved into the lane. If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime. The driver may have to manually control the
5-88 Starting and driving

SSD0252
proper distance away from vehicle traveling ahead.

When driving on some roads, such as winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads which are under construction, the ICC sensor may detect vehicles in a different lane, or may temporarily not detect a vehicle traveling ahead. This may cause the ICC system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle.
The detection of vehicles may also be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.) or vehicle condition. If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime unexpectedly. You will have to manually control the proper distance away from the vehicle travel-

ing ahead.

SSD0253
Starting and driving 5-89

ICC system warning (yellow) ICC switches MAIN (ON·OFF) switch
5-90 Starting and driving

WAF0751X
System temporarily unavailable
Condition A: Under the following conditions, the ICC system is automatically canceled. The chime will sound and the system will not be able to be set.

. When the VDC is turned off . When the VDC operates . When a tire slips . When the SNOW mode switch is
pushed on . When the 4WD shift switch is in the 4H
or 4L position (for 4WD models) . When the radar signal is temporarily
interrupted
Action to take:
When the conditions listed above are no longer present, turn the system off using the MAIN switch . Turn the ICC system back on to use the system.
Condition B:
Under the following conditions, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the ICC system is automatically canceled.
The chime will sound and the "Forward Driving Aids temporarily disabled Front Sensor blocked See Owner's Manual" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
. When the radar sensor area of the front bumper is covered with dirt or is obstructed
Action to take:
If the warning message appears, stop the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever

in the P (Park) position and turn the engine off. When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted, clean the sensor area of the front bumper and restart the engine. If the warning message continues to be displayed, have the ICC system checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
. When driving on roads with limited road structures or buildings (for example, long bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to long walls)
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer exist, the ICC system will resume automatically.

JVS0968X
Condition C:
When the ICC system is not operating properly, the chime sounds and the ICC system warning (yellow) will come on.
Action to take:
If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart the engine, resume driving and set the ICC system again.
If it is not possible to set the system or the indicator stays on, it may indicate that the ICC system is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still driveable under normal conditions, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Starting and driving 5-91

WAF0724X
System maintenance
The sensor for the ICC system is located below the front bumper.
To keep the ICC system operating properly, be sure to observe the following:
. Always keep the sensor area of the front bumper clean.
. Do not strike or damage the areas around the sensor.
. Do not cover or attach stickers or similar objects on the front bumper near the sensor area. This could cause failure or malfunction.
. Do not attach metallic objects near the sensor area (brush guard, etc.).
5-92 Starting and driving

This could cause failure or malfunction. . Do not alter, remove or paint the front bumper. It is recommended you contact a NISSAN dealer before customizing or restoring the front bumper. Radio frequency statement
Model: ARS4A
IC: 4135A-ARS4A
FCC ID: OAYARS4A
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licence exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
CONVENTIONAL (fixed speed) CRUISE CONTROL MODE
This mode allows driving at a speed between 25 to 90 MPH (40 to 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

WARNING
. In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, a warning chime does not sound to warn you if you are too close to the vehicle ahead, as neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected.
. Pay special attention to the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you or a collision could occur.
. Always confirm the setting in the ICC system display.
. Do not use the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode when driving under the following conditions.
-- when it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed
-- in heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed
-- on winding or hilly roads
-- on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.)

-- in very windy areas
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.

WAF0752X
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control switch
1. RES+ switch: Resumes set speed or increases speed incrementally.
2. SET- switch: Sets the desired cruise speed, reduces speed incrementally.
3. CANCEL switch: Deactivates the system without erasing the set speed.
4. MAIN switch: Master switch to activate the system.

WAF0312X
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode display and indicators
The indicators are displayed in the vehicle information display.
1. Cruise indicator:
This indicator indicates the condition of the ICC system depending on a color. . Cruise control ON indicator (gray):
Indicates that the ICC switch is ON. . Cruise control set indicator (green):
Indicates that the cruising speed is set.

Starting and driving 5-93

. Cruise control system warning (yellow):
Indicates that there is a malfunction in the ICC system.
2. Set vehicle speed indicator:
This indicator indicates the set vehicle speed.

turn the system completely off.
When the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position, the system is also automatically turned off.
To use the ICC system again, quickly push and release the MAIN switch (vehicle-tovehicle distance control mode) or push and hold it (conventional cruise control mode) again to turn it on.

5-94 Starting and driving

WAF0753X
Operating conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode
To turn on the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, push and hold the MAIN switch for longer than about 1.5 seconds.
When pushing the MAIN switch on, the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode display and the MAIN switch indicator are displayed on the vehicle information display. After you hold the MAIN switch on for longer than about 1.5 seconds, the ICC system display goes out. The MAIN switch indicator stays lit. You can now set your desired cruising speed. Pushing the MAIN switch again will

CAUTION
To avoid accidentally engaging cruise control, make sure to turn the MAIN switch off when not using the ICC system.

WAF0754X
To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to the desired speed, push the SET- switch and release it. (The color of the cruise indicator changes to green and set vehicle speed indicator comes on.) Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.
. To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed.
. The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, manually maintain vehicle speed.
To cancel the preset speed, use any of

the following methods:
1. Push the CANCEL switch. The set vehicle speed indicator will turn off.
2. Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle speed indicator will turn off.
3. Turn the MAIN switch off. Both the MAIN switch indicator and set vehicle speed indicator will turn off.
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following three methods:
1. Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the SET- switch.
2. Push and hold the RES+ set switch. When the vehicle attains the speed you desire, release the switch.
3. Push, then quickly release the RES+ switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will increase by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods:
1. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the SET- switch and release it.
2. Push and hold the SET- switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows down to the desired speed.

3. Push, then quickly release the SETswitch. Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
To resume the preset speed, push and release the RES+ switch. The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).
System temporarily unavailable
Under the following condition, a chime will sound and the system control is automatically canceled. . When the vehicle slows down more
than 8 MPH (13 km/h) below the set speed . When the shift lever is shifted to the N (Neutral) position . When the parking brake is applied . When the VDC (including the traction control system) operates. . When a wheel slips
Starting and driving 5-95

dealer for this service.
WAF0315X
Warning light
When the system is not operating properly, the chime sounds and the system warning (yellow) will come on. Action to take: If the warning comes on, park the vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart the engine, resume driving and then perform the setting again. If it is not possible to set or the indicator stays on, it may indicate that the system is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still driveable under normal conditions, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN 5-96 Starting and driving

AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING (AEB) WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the AEB with pedestrian detection system could result in serious injury or death.
. The AEB with pedestrian detection system is a supplemental aid to the driver. It is not a replacement for the driver's attention to traffic conditions or responsibility to drive safely. It cannot prevent accidents due to carelessness or dangerous driving techniques.
. The AEB with pedestrian detection system does not function in all driving, traffic, weather and road conditions.
The AEB with pedestrian detection system can assist the driver when there is a risk of a forward collision with
. a vehicle ahead in the travelling lane . a pedestrian ahead in the travelling
lane

WAF0773X
The AEB with pedestrian detection system uses a radar sensor located on the front of the vehicle to measure the distance to the vehicle ahead in the same lane.
For pedestrians, the AEB system uses a camera installed behind the windshield in addition to the radar sensor.

AEB emergency warning indicator
Vehicle ahead detection indicator (on the vehicle information display)
AEB system warning light (on the meter panel)
Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)

WAF0740X
AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM OPERATION
The AEB with pedestrian detection system will function when your vehicle is driven at speeds above approximately 3 MPH (5 km/h). For the pedestrian detection function, the
Starting and driving 5-97

AEB with pedestrian detection system operates at speeds between 6 37 MPH (10 60 km/h).
If a risk of a forward collision is detected, the AEB with pedestrian detection system will firstly provide the warning to the driver by flashing the vehicle ahead detection indicator (yellow) in the vehicle information display and providing an audible alert. In addition, the system applies partial braking.
If the driver applies the brakes quickly and forcefully after the warning, and the AEB with pedestrian detection system detects that there is still the possibility of a forward collision, the system will automatically increase the braking force.
If the driver does not take action, the AEB with pedestrian detection system issues the second visual (flashing) (red) and audible warning. Then the system applies partial braking.
If the risk of a collision becomes imminent, the AEB with pedestrian detection system applies harder braking automatically.
While the AEB with pedestrian detection system is operating, you may hear the sound of brake operation. This is normal and indicates that the AEB with pedestrian detection system is operating prop-
5-98 Starting and driving

erly.
NOTE:
The vehicle's stop lights come on when braking is performed by the AEB with pedestrian detection system.
Depending on vehicle speed and distance to the vehicle or pedestrian ahead, as well as driving and roadway conditions, the system may help the driver avoid a forward collision or may help mitigate the consequences of a collision should one be unavoidable.
If the driver is handling the steering wheel, accelerating or braking, the AEB with pedestrian detection system will function later or will not function.
The automatic braking will cease under the following conditions:
. When the steering wheel is turned as far as necessary to avoid a collision.
. When the accelerator pedal is depressed.
. When there is no longer a vehicle, pedestrian detected ahead.
If the AEB with pedestrian detection system has stopped the vehicle, the vehicle will remain at a standstill for approximately 2 seconds before the brakes are released.
When the brake pedal is depressed while

the brake is applied by the system, you may feel the pedal effort is changed and may hear a sound and vibration noise. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. In addition, the braking force can be increased by adding the pedal effort.

AEB system warning light (on the meter panel)
Vehicle information display
Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)

WAF0741X

TURNING THE AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM ON/OFF

Perform the following steps to turn the AEB with pedestrian detection system on or off.

1. Push the

button until "Set-

tings" appears in the vehicle informa-

tion display and then push the OK. Use

the

to select "Driver Assistance."

Then push the OK.

2. Select "Emergency Brake" and push the OK.

3. Select "Front" and use the OK to turn the system on or off.

When the AEB with pedestrian detection system is turned off, the AEB system warning light illuminates.

NOTE: . The AEB with pedestrian detection
system will be automatically turned ON when the engine is restarted.

. The Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW) system is integrated into the AEB system. There is not a separate selection for the IFCW system. When the I-FCW system is also turned off.

AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

serious injury or death.
. The AEB with pedestrian detection system cannot detect all vehicles or pedestrians under all conditions.
. The AEB with pedestrian detection system does not detect the following:
-- Pedestrians that are small (for example, children), in a sitting position, operating toys/skateboards, on scooters or in wheelchairs, or not in an upright standing or walking position.
-- Animals of any size.
-- Obstacles (for example, cargo or debris) on the roadway or roadside.
-- Oncoming or crossing vehicles.
-- Vehicles where the tires are difficult to see or the shape of the rear of the vehicle is unclear or obstructed.
-- Parked vehicles.
. The AEB with pedestrian detection system has some performance limitations.
5-100 Starting and driving

-- If a stationary vehicle is in the vehicle's path, the system will not function when the vehicle approaches the stationary vehicle at speeds over approximately 50 MPH (80 km/h).
-- Pedestrian detection will not function when the vehicle is driven at speeds over approximately 37 MPH (60 km/h) or below approximately 6 MPH (10 km/h).
. For pedestrians, the AEB with pedestrian detection system will not issue the first warning.
. The AEB with pedestrian detection system may not function properly or detect a vehicle or pedestrian ahead in the following conditions:
-- In poor visibility conditions (such as rain, snow, fog, dust storms, sand storms, smoke, and road spray from other vehicles).
-- If dirt, ice, snow, fog or other material is covering the radar sensor area or camera area of the windshield.

-- If strong light (for example, sunlight or high beams) enters the front camera or a sudden change in brightness occurs (for example, entering a tunnel or driving in lightning).
-- In dark or dimly lit conditions, such as at night or in tunnels, including cases where your vehicle's headlights are off or dim, or the tail lights of the vehicle ahead are off.
-- When the direction of the camera is misaligned.
-- When driving on a steep downhill slope, on roads with sharp curves, and/or bumpy or dirt roads.
-- If there is interference by other radar sources.
-- When your vehicle's position or movement is changed quickly or significantly (for example, lane change, turning vehicle, abrupt steering, sudden acceleration or deceleration).

-- When your vehicle or the vehicle or pedestrian ahead moves quickly or significantly such that the system cannot detect and react in time (for example, pedestrian moving quickly toward the vehicle at close range, vehicle cutting in, changing lanes, making a turn, steering abruptly, sudden acceleration or deceleration).
-- When the vehicle or pedestrian is offset from the vehicle's forward path.
-- If the speed difference between the two vehicles is small.
-- The pedestrian's profile is partially obscured or unidentifiable; for example, due to transporting luggage, pushing a stroller, wearing bulky or very loose-fitting clothing or accessories, or being in a unique posture (such as raising hands).
-- There is poor contrast of a person to the background, such as having clothing color or pattern which is similar to

the background.
-- For approximately 15 seconds after starting the engine
-- If the vehicle ahead has a unique or unusual shape, extremely low or high clearance heights, or unusual cargo loading or is narrow (for example, a motorcycle).
-- When the vehicle or pedestrian is located near a traffic sign, a reflective area (for example, water on road), or is in a shadow.
-- When multiple pedestrians are grouped together.
-- When the view of the pedestrian is obscured by a vehicle or other object.
-- While towing a trailer or other vehicle.
. The system performance may be degraded in the following conditions:
-- The vehicle is driven on a slippery road.
-- The vehicle is driven on a slope.

-- Excessively heavy baggage is loaded in the rear seat or the cargo area of your vehicle.
. The system is designed to automatically check the sensor (radar and camera)'s functionality, within certain limitations. The system may not detect some forms of obstruction of the sensor area such as ice, snow or stickers, for example. In these cases, the system may not be able to warn the driver properly. Be sure that you check, clean and clear sensor areas regularly.
. In some road and traffic conditions, the AEB with pedestrian detection system may unexpectedly apply partial braking. When acceleration is necessary, depress the accelerator pedal to override the system.
. The AEB with pedestrian detection system may operate when a pattern, object, shadow or lights are detected that are similar to the outline of vehicles or pedestrians, or if they are the same size and position as a vehicle or motorcycle's tail lights.
Starting and driving 5-101

. The system may keep operating when the vehicle ahead is turning right or left.
. The system may operate when your vehicle is approaching and passing a vehicle ahead.
. Depending on the road shape (curved road, entrance and exit of the curve, winding road, lane regulation, under construction, etc.), the system may operate temporarily for the oncoming vehicle in front of your vehicle.

5-102 Starting and driving

WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the AEB with pedestrian detection system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
. The AEB with pedestrian detection system may react to:
-- objects on the roadside (traffic sign, guardrail, pedestrian, vehicle, etc.)

WAF0785X
-- pedestrians when driving on the narrow alleys, etc.
-- pedestrians who temporarily protrude into or approaching the driving lane to avoid the obstacles on the road shoulder
-- objects above road (low bridge, traffic sign, etc.)
-- objects on the road surface (railroad track, grate, steel plate, etc.)
-- objects in the parking garage (beam, pillar, etc.)

-- pedestrians approaching the traveling lane
-- vehicles, pedestrians or objects in adjacent lanes or close to the vehicle
-- oncoming pedestrians
-- objects on the road (such as trees)
. Braking distances increase on slippery surfaces.
. Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the chime may not be heard.

When driving on some roads, such as winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads which are under construction or on a slope, the sensor may detect vehicles in a different lane, or may temporarily not detect a vehicle traveling ahead. This may cause the system to work inappropriately.
The detection of vehicles may also be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.) or vehicle condition. If this occurs, the system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime unexpectedly. You will have to manually control the proper distance away from the vehicle traveling ahead.

SSD0253
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE
Condition A
In the following conditions, the AEB system warning light (orange) will blink and the system will be turned off automatically. . The camera area of windshield is
misted or frozen. . Strong light is shining from the front. . The cabin temperature is over ap-
proximately 104°F (40°C) in direct sunlight.
Starting and driving 5-103

. The camera area of windshield glass is continuously covered with dirt, etc.
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer exist, the AEB with pedestrian detection system will resume automatically.
NOTE:
When the inside of the windshield on camera area is misted or frozen, it will take a period of time to remove it after air conditioner turns on. If dirt appears on this area, it is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer.
Condition B
When the radar sensor picks up interference from another radar source, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the AEB system is automatically turned off. The AEB system warning light (orange) will illuminate.
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer exist, the AEB system will resume automatically.

Condition C
Under the following conditions, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the AEB with pedestrian detection system is automatically turned off.
The AEB system warning light (orange) will illuminate and the "Forward Driving Aids temporarily disabled Front Sensor blocked See Owner's Manual" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
. When the sensor area of the front bumper is covered with dirt or is obstructed
Action to take:
If the AEB system warning light (orange) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever in the P (Park) position and turn the engine off. Clean the radar cover below the front bumper with a soft cloth, and restart the engine. If the AEB system warning light continues to illuminate, have the AEB with pedestrian detection system checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
. When driving on roads with limited road structures or buildings (for example, long bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to long walls)

Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer exist, the AEB with pedestrian detection system will resume automatically.
Condition D
When the accelerator pedal actuator detects that the internal motor temperature is high, the AEB with pedestrian detection system is automatically turned off. The AEB system warning light (orange) will illuminate.
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer exist, the AEB with pedestrian detection system will resume automatically.
Condition E
When VDC system is OFF, the AEB brake will not operate. In this case only visible and audible warning operates. The AEB system warning light (orange) will illuminate.
Action to take:
When VDC system is ON, the AEB with pedestrian detection system will resume automatically.

5-104 Starting and driving

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the AEB with pedestrian detection system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, a chime will sound, the AEB system warning light will (orange) will illuminate and the "Malfunction" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take:
If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe location. Turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the AEB with pedestrian detection system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WAF0773X
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The radar sensor is located on the front of the vehicle. The camera is located on the upper side of the windshield.
To keep the AEB with pedestrian detection system operating properly, be sure to observe the following:
. Always keep the sensor area on the front of the vehicle and windshield clean.
. Do not strike or damage the areas around the sensors (ex. bumper, windshield).
. Do not cover or attach stickers or similar objects on the front of the vehicle near the sensor area. This

could cause failure or malfunction. . Do not attach metallic objects near
the radar sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure or malfunction. . Do not place reflective materials, such as white paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit's detection capability. . Do not alter, remove or paint the front of the vehicle near the sensor area. Before customizing or restoring the sensor area, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. Radio frequency statement
Model: ARS4A
IC: 4135A-ARS4A
FCC ID: OAYARS4A
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licence exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and (2) This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Starting and driving 5-105

INTELLIGENT FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (I-FCW)

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the IFCW system could result in serious injury or death.
. The I-FCW system helps warn the driver before a collision but will not avoid a collision. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
The I-FCW system can help alert the driver when there is a sudden braking of a second vehicle traveling in front of the vehicle ahead in the same lane.

WAF0724X
The I-FCW system uses a radar sensor located on the front of the vehicle to measure the distance to a second vehicle ahead in the same lane.

5-106 Starting and driving

Vehicle ahead detection indicator (on the vehicle information display)
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system warning light (on the meter panel)

WAF0743X
Starting and driving 5-107

I-FCW SYSTEM OPERATION
The I-FCW system operates at speeds above approximately 3 MPH (5 km/h). If there is a potential risk of a forward collision, the I-FCW system will warn the driver by blinking the vehicle ahead detection indicator, and sounding an audible alert.
5-108 Starting and driving

JVS0294X

the

to select "Driver Assistance."

Then push the OK.

2. Select "Emergency Brake" and push the OK.

3. Select "Front" and use the OK to turn the system on or off.

When the I-FCW system is turned off, the AEB system warning light (orange) illuminates.

NOTE: . The I-FCW system will be automati-
cally turned on when the engine is restarted.

. The I-FCW system is integrated into the AEB system. There is not a separate selection for the I-FCW system. When the AEB system is turned off, the I-FCW system is also turned off.

AEB system warning light (on the meter panel)
Vehicle information display
Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)

WAF0741X

TURNING THE I-FCW SYSTEM ON/ OFF

Perform the following steps to turn the IFCW system on or off.

1. Push the

button until "Set-

tings" appears in the vehicle informa-

tion display and then push the OK. Use

Starting and driving 5-109

Illustration A

JVS0295X

5-110 Starting and driving

Illustration B

JVS0296X

Illustration C

JVS0297X

I-FCW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING

Illustration D

JVS0298X

-- Pedestrians, animals or obstacles in the roadway
-- Oncoming vehicles

Listed below are the system limitations for the I-FCW system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
. The I-FCW system cannot detect all vehicles under all conditions.
. The radar sensor does not detect the following objects:

-- Crossing vehicles
. (Illustration A) The I-FCW system does not function when a vehicle ahead is a narrow vehicle, such as a motorcycle.
. The radar sensor may not detect a vehicle ahead in the following conditions:
-- Snow or heavy rain

-- Dirt, ice, snow or other material covering the radar sensor
-- Interference by other radar sources
-- Snow or road spray from travelling vehicles.
-- Driving in a tunnel
-- Towing a trailer
. (Illustration B) When the vehicle ahead is being towed.
. (Illustration C) When the distance to the vehicle ahead is too close, the beam of the radar sensor is obstructed.
. (Illustration D) When driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves.
. The system is designed to automatically check the sensor's functionality, within certain limitations. The system may not detect some forms of obstruction of the sensor area such as ice, snow, stickers, for example. In these cases, the system may not be able to warn the driver properly. Be sure that you check, clean and clear the sensor area regularly.
Starting and driving 5-111

. Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the chime may not be heard.

5-112 Starting and driving

When driving on some roads, such as winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads which are under construction, the radar sensor may detect vehicles in a different lane, or may temporarily not detect a vehicle traveling ahead. This may cause the I-FCW system to work inappropriately.
The detection of vehicles may also be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.) or vehicle condition. If this occurs, the system may warn you by blinking the vehicle ahead detection indicator and sounding the chime unexpectedly. You will have to manually control the proper distance away from

SSD0253
the vehicle traveling ahead.
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE
Condition A
When the radar sensor picks up interference from another radar source, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the I-FCW system is automatically turned off. The AEB system warning light (orange) will illuminate.
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer exist, the I-FCW system will resume automatically.

Condition B
Under the following conditions, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the I-FCW system is automatically turned off.
The AEB system warning light (orange) will illuminate and the "Forward Driving Aids temporarily disabled Front Sensor blocked See Owner's Manual" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
. When the sensor area of the front of the vehicle is covered with dirt or is obstructed
Action to take:
If the warning light (orange) flashes, stop the vehicle in a safe place, push the park button to engage the P (Park) position and turn the engine off. Clean the radar cover on the front of the vehicle with a soft cloth, and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the I-FCW system checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
. When driving on roads with limited road structures or buildings (for example, long bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to long walls)
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer exist, the I-FCW system will resume auto-

matically.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the I-FCW system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, a chime will sound, the AEB system warning light (orange) will illuminate and the "Malfunction" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take:
If the warning light (orange) illuminates, stop the vehicle in a safe location. Turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the I-FCW system checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WAF0724X
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The radar sensor is located on the front of the vehicle.
To keep the system operating properly, be sure to observe the following:
. Always keep the sensor area on the front of the vehicle clean.
. Do not strike or damage the areas around the sensor.
. Do not cover or attach stickers or similar objects on the front bumper near the sensor area. This could cause failure or malfunction.
. Do not attach metallic objects near the sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure or malfuncStarting and driving 5-113

INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS (I-DA)

tion. . Do not alter, remove or paint the front
bumper. It is recommended you contact a NISSAN dealer before customizing or restoring the front bumper.
Radio frequency statement
Model: ARS4A
IC: 4135A-ARS4A
FCC ID: OAYARS4A
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licence exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the IDA system could result in serious injury or death.
. The IDA system is only a warning to inform the driver of a potential lack of driver attention or drowsiness. It will not steer the vehicle or prevent loss of control.
. The IDA system does not detect and provide an alert of the driver's lack of attention or fatigue in every situation.
. It is the driver's responsibility to: -- Stay alert.
-- Drive safely.
-- Keep the vehicle in the traveling lane.
-- Be in control of the vehicle at all times.
-- Avoid driving when tired.
-- Avoid distractions (texting, etc).

The IDA system helps alert the driver if the system detects a lack of attention or driving fatigue.
The system monitors driving style and steering behavior over a period of time, and it detects changes from the normal pattern. If the system detects that driver attention is decreasing over a period of time, the system uses audible and visual warnings to suggest that the driver take a break.

5-114 Starting and driving

WAF0641X
Example
I-DA SYSTEM OPERATION
If the system detects driver fatigue or that driver attention is decreasing, the message "Take a Break?" appears in the vehicle information display and a chime sounds when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 37 MPH (60 km/h).
The system continuously monitors driver attention and can provide multiple warnings per trip.
The system resets and starts reassessing driving style and steering behavior when the ignition switch is cycled from the ON to the OFF position and back to the ON position.

Steering-wheel-mounted control (left side)
Vehicle information display

WAF0718X

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE I-DA SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the IDA system.

1. Push the

button until "Set-

tings" appears in the vehicle informa-

tion display and push the OK. Use the

Starting and driving 5-115

REAR AUTOMATIC BRAKING (RAB)

to select "Driver Assistance." Then push the OK.
2. Select "Driver Attention Alert" and push the OK to turn the system on or off.
NOTE:
The setting will be retained even if the engine is restarted.
I-DA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the IDA system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
. The I-DA system may not operate properly and may not provide an alert in the following conditions:
-- Poor road conditions such as an uneven road surface or pot holes.
-- Strong side wind.
-- If you have adopted a sporty driving style with higher cornering speeds or higher rates of acceleration.

-- Frequent lane changes or changes to vehicle speed.
. The IDA system will not provide an alert in the following conditions:
-- Vehicle speeds lower than 37 MPH (60 km/h).
-- Short lapses of attention.
-- Instantaneous distractions such as dropping an object.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the IDA system malfunctions, the "Driver Attention Alert Malfunction" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display and the function will be stopped automatically.
Action to take
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the vehicle in P (Park) position, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the warning message continues to appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RAB system could result in serious injury or death.
. The RAB system is a supplemental aid to the driver. It is not a replacement for proper driving procedures. Always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction you will move before and while backing up. Never rely solely on the RAB system. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
. There is a limitation to the RAB system capability. The RAB system is not effective in all situations.
The RAB system can assist the driver when the vehicle is backing up and approaching objects directly behind the vehicle.

5-116 Starting and driving

WAF0760X
The RAB system detects obstacles behind the vehicle using the sonar sensors located on the rear bumper.
NOTE:
You can temporarily cancel the sonar function in the vehicle, but the RAB system will continue to operate. (See "Front and rear sonar system" (P.5-136).)

RAB system warning light (on the meter panel)
Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)
Vehicle information display
Touch screen display (if so equipped)
"P" key (on the touch screen display) (example)

WAF0744X
Starting and driving 5-117

RAB SYSTEM OPERATION
When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the vehicle speed is less than approximately 9 MPH (15 km/h), the RAB system operates.
If a risk of a collision with an obstacle is detected when your vehicle is backing up, the RAB system warning indicator will flash in the vehicle information display, a red frame will appear in the touch screen display (models with the Intelligent Around View® Monitor system), and the system will chime three times. The system will then automatically apply the brakes. After the automatic brake application, the driver must depress the brake pedal to maintain brake pressure.
NOTE: . The stop lights of the vehicle come
on when braking is performed by the RAB system.
. When the brakes operate, a noise may be heard. This is not a malfunction.
. When the "P" key is touched, the indicator light on the key will turn off and the the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system will turn off temporarily. The Moving Object Detection (MOD) (if so equipped), the Intelligent Back-up Intervention (I-BI) (if so equipped) and the sonar systems
5-118 Starting and driving

will also be turned off at the same time.
. When the sonar and MOD systems is turned off on the settings menu in the touch screen display, the "P" key will disappear.
To enable or disable the RAB system, use the vehicle information display. See "Turning the RAB system ON/OFF" (P.5119).

Then push the OK.
2. Select "Emergency Brake" and push the OK.
3. Select "Rear" and use the OK to turn the system on or off.
When the RAB system is turned off, the RAB system warning light illuminates.
NOTE: . The RAB system will be automati-
cally turned on when the engine is restarted. . The I-BI (if so equipped) system is integrated into the RAB system. There is not a separate selection for the I-BI system. When the RAB system is also turned off.
RAB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

RAB system warning light
Vehicle information display
Steering-wheel-mounted control (left side)

WAF0761X

TURNING THE RAB SYSTEM ON/OFF

Perform the following steps to turn the RAB system ON or OFF.

1. Push the

button until "Set-

tings" appears in the vehicle informa-

tion display and then push the OK. Use

the

to select "Driver Assistance."

WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the RAB system. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RAB system could result in serious injury or death.
. When the vehicle approaches an obstacle while the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed, the
Starting and driving 5-119

function may not operate or the start of the operation may be delayed. The RAB system may not operate or may not perform sufficiently due to vehicle conditions, driving conditions, the traffic environment, the weather, road surface conditions, etc. Do not wait for the system to operate. Operate the brake pedal by yourself as soon as necessary.
. If it is necessary to override RAB operation, strongly press the accelerator pedal.
. Always check your surroundings and turn to check what is behind you before and while backing up. The RAB system detects stationary objects behind the vehicle. The RAB system does not detect the following objects:
-- Moving objects
-- Low objects
-- Narrow objects
-- Wedge-shaped objects
-- Complex-shaped objects
-- Multiple object in close
-- Objects close to the bumper (less than approximately 1 ft
5-120 Starting and driving

[30 cm])
-- Objects that suddenly appear
-- Thin objects such as rope, wire, chain, etc.
. The RAB system may not operate for pedestrians or animals.
. The RAB system may not operate for the following obstacles:
-- Obstacles located high off the ground
-- Obstacles in a position offset from your vehicle
-- Obstacles, such as spongy materials or snow, that have soft outer surfaces and can easily absorb a sound wave
. The RAB system may not operate in the following conditions:
-- There is rain, snow, ice, dirt, etc., attached to the sonar sensors.
-- A loud sound is heard in the area around the vehicle.
-- The surface of the obstacle is diagonal to the rear of the vehicle.

-- The sonar sensors or the area around them are extremely hot or cold.
. The RAB system may unintentionally operate in the following conditions:
-- There is overgrown grass in the area around the vehicle.
-- There is a structure (e.g., a wall, toll gate equipment, a narrow tunnel, a parking lot gate) near the side of the vehicle.
-- There are bumps, protrusions, or manhole covers on the road surface.
-- The vehicle is driving through a draped flag or a curtain.
-- The vehicle is driving on a steep hill.
-- There is an accumulation of snow or ice behind the vehicle.
-- An ultrasonic wave source, such as another vehicle's sonar, is near the vehicle.
. Once the automatic brake control operates, it does not operate again if the vehicle approaches

the same obstacle.
. The automatic brake control can only operate for a short period of time. Therefore, the driver must depress the brake pedal.
. In the following situations, the RAB system may not operate properly or may not function sufficiently:
-- The vehicle is driven in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
-- The vehicle is driven on a steep hill.
-- The vehicle's posture is changed (e.g., when driving over a bump).
-- The vehicle is driven on a slippery road.
-- The vehicle is turned sharply by turning the steering wheel fully.
-- Snow chains are used.
-- Wheels or tires other than NISSAN recommended are used.
-- The brakes are cold at low ambient temperatures or immediately after driving has started.

-- The braking force becomes poor due to wet brakes after driving through a puddle or washing the vehicle.
. Turn the RAB system off in the following conditions to prevent the occurrence of an unexpected accident resulting from sudden system operation:
-- The vehicle is towed.
-- The vehicle is carried on a flatbed truck.
-- The vehicle is on the chassis dynamometer.
-- The vehicle drives on an uneven road surface.
-- Suspension parts other than those designated as genuine parts are used. (If the vehicle height or the vehicle body inclination is changed, the system may not detect an obstacle correctly.)
. When towing a trailer or other vehicle, turn the RAB system off to prevent the occurrence of an unexpected accident resulting from sudden system operation. (See "RAB system operation" (P.5118).)

. Excessive noise (e.g., audio system volume, an open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the RAB system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, the RAB system warning light will illuminate, and the "System fault See Owner's Manual" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take
If the warning light illuminates, park the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off, and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the RAB system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. NOTE: If the RAB system cannot be operated temporarily, the RAB system warning light blinks.
Starting and driving 5-121

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE

WAF0760X
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The sonar sensors are located on the rear bumper. Observe the following items to ensure proper operation of the system:
. Always keep the sonar sensors clean. . If the sonar sensors are dirty, wipe
them off with a soft cloth while being careful to not damage them. . The sonar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the sonar sensors. Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the sonar sensors.
5-122 Starting and driving

. Do not subject the area around the sonar sensors to strong impact. Also, do not remove or disassemble the sonar sensors. If the sonar sensors and peripheral areas are deformed in an accident, etc., have the sonar sensors checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
. Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint on the sonar sensors and their surrounding areas. This may cause a malfunction or improper operation.
. When washing the vehicle using a high-pressure washer, do not apply direct washer pressure on the sonar sensors. This may cause a malfunction of the sonar sensors.

CAUTION
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine performance and ensure the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle.
Failure to follow these recommendations may result in shortened engine life and reduced engine performance.
. Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed, either fast or slow. Do not run the engine over 4,000 rpm.
. Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.
. Avoid quick starts. . Avoid hard braking as much as possi-
ble. . Do not tow a trailer for the first 500
miles (805 km).

FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS

Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient Driving Tips to help you achieve the most fuel economy from your vehicle.
1. Use smooth accelerator and brake pedal application.
. Avoid rapid starts and stops. . Use smooth, gentle accelerator and
brake application whenever possible.
. Maintain constant speed while commuting and coast whenever possible.
2. Maintain constant speed.
. Look ahead to try and anticipate and minimize stops.
. Synchronizing your speed with traffic lights allows you to reduce your number of stops.
. Maintaining a steady speed can minimize red light stops and improve fuel efficiency.
3. Use air conditioning (A/C) at higher vehicle speeds.
. Below 40 MPH (64 km/h), it is more efficient to open windows to cool the vehicle due to reduced engine load.
. Above 40 MPH (64 km/h), it is more efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle due to increased aerodynamic drag.

. Recirculating the cool air in the cabin when the A/C is on reduces cooling load.
4. Drive at economical speeds and distances.
. Observing the speed limit and not exceeding 60 MPH (97 km/h) (where legally allowed) can improve fuel efficiency due to reduced aerodynamic drag.
. Maintaining a safe following distance behind other vehicles reduces unnecessary braking.
. Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate changes in speed permits reduced braking and smooth acceleration changes.
. Select a gear range suitable to road conditions.
5. Use cruise control.
. Using cruise control during highway driving helps maintain a steady speed.
. Cruise control is particularly effective in providing fuel savings when driving on flat terrains.
6. Plan for the shortest route.
. Utilize a map or navigation system to determine the best route to save time.

7. Avoid idling. . Shutting off your engine when safe for stops exceeding 30-60 seconds saves fuel and reduces emissions.
8. Buy an automated pass for toll roads. . Automated passes permit drivers to use special lanes to maintain cruising speed through the toll and avoid stopping and starting.
9. Winter warm up. . Limit idling time to minimize impact to fuel economy. . Vehicles typically need no more than 30 seconds of idling at startup to effectively circulate the engine oil before driving. . Your vehicle will reach its ideal operating temperature more quickly while driving versus idling.
10. Keeping your vehicle cool. . Park your vehicle in a covered parking area or in the shade whenever possible. . When entering a hot vehicle, opening the windows will help to reduce the inside temperature faster, resulting in reduced demand on your A/C system.
Starting and driving 5-123

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

NISSAN ALL-MODE 4WD® (if so equipped)

. Keep your engine tuned up.
. Follow the recommended scheduled maintenance.
. Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy.
. Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Improper alignment increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy.
. Use the recommended viscosity engine oil. (See "Engine oil and oil filter recommendation" (P.10-6).)

WARNING
. Do not attempt to raise two wheels off the ground and shift the transmission to any drive or reverse position with the engine running. Doing so may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.
. Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer or similar equipment even if the other two wheels are raised off the ground. Make sure you inform test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD before it is placed on a dynamometer. Using the wrong test equipment may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.

5-124 Starting and driving

CAUTION
. Do not drive the vehicle in the 4HI or 4LO position on dry hard surface roads. Driving on dry, hard surfaces in 4HI or 4LO may cause unnecessary noise, tire wear and increased fuel consumption.
If the Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) warning light turns on when driving on dry hard surface roads:
-- in the 4HI position, shift the 4WD shift switch to AUTO.
-- in the 4LO position, stop the vehicle and shift the transmission lever to the N (Neutral) position with the brake pedal depressed and shift the 4WD shift switch to AUTO. If the 4WD warning light is still on after the above operation, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
. The transfer case may be damaged if you continue driving with the 4WD warning light blinking.

See "On-pavement and off-road driving precautions" (P.5-9) for other precautions for off-road driving.

NISSAN ALL-MODE 4WD® SYSTEM
The all mode 4WD system provides 3 positions (AUTO, 4HI and 4LO), so you can select the desired drive mode according to the driving conditions.
4WD shift procedure:

Starting and driving 5-125

SSD1100
*1: The 4LO and 4HI indicator may flash alternately. Stop the vehicle and be sure to turn the 4WD shift switch after the transmission shift lever has been shifted to the N (Neutral) position. If the indicator keeps flashing after the 4WD shift procedure, drive slowly without abrupt maneuvers for a while. Then the indicator will illuminate or turn off. · Avoid making a turn or abrupt starts while shifting to the 4LO position. Otherwise the gears may grind, damaging the drive system. *2: While changing in and out of the 4LO position, the engine must be running. Otherwise, the shift will not take place and the 4LO indicator will not be on or flashing.
5-126 Starting and driving

*3: Make sure that the 4LO indicator turns on when shifting the 4WD shift switch to the 4L position. The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator light will also turn on when 4L is selected. (See "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system" (P.5-144).)
Starting and driving 5-127

The 4WD shift switch is used to select the 4WD mode depending on the driving conditions. There are 3 types of drive modes available, AUTO, 4HI and 4LO.
The 4WD shift switch electronically controls the transfer case operation. Rotate the switch to move between each mode, AUTO, 4H and 4L.
You must depress the 4WD shift switch to select 4L, and the vehicle MUST be stationary and the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position when changing into or out of 4L.
WARNING
. When parking, apply the parking brake before stopping the engine and make sure that the 4WD shift indicator is on and the ATP warning light turns off. Otherwise, the vehicle could unexpectedly move even if the automatic transmission is in the P (Park) position.
. The 4LO and 4HI indicators must stop blinking and the 4LO or 4HI indicator must remain illuminated or turn off before shifting the transmission into gear. If the shift lever is shifted from the N (Neutral) position to any other
5-128 Starting and driving

gear while the 4LO and 4HI indicators are blinking alternately, the vehicle may move unexpectedly.
CAUTION
. Never shift the 4WD shift switch between 4L and 4H while driving.
. The 4HI position provides greater traction. Avoid excessive speed, as it will cause increased fuel consumption and higher oil temperatures, and could damage drivetrain component. Speeds over 62 MPH (100 km/h) in 4HI is not recommended.
. The 4LO position provides maximum traction. Avoid raising vehicle speed excessively, as the maximum speed is approximately 31 MPH (50 km/h).
. When driving straight, shift the 4WD shift switch to the AUTO or 4H position. Do not move the 4WD shift switch when making a turn or reversing.
. Do not shift the 4WD shift switch (between AUTO and 4H) while driving on steep downhill grades.

Use the engine brake and low automatic transmission gears for engine braking.
. Do not operate the 4WD shift switch (between AUTO and 4H) with the rear wheels spinning.
. Do not drive on dry hard surface roads in the 4HI or 4LO position. Driving on dry hard surfaces in 4HI or 4LO may cause unnecessary noise and tire wear. NISSAN recommends driving in the AUTO position under these conditions.
. The 4WD transfer case may not be shifted between 4HI and 4LO at low ambient temperatures and the 4LO and 4HI indicators may blink even when the 4WD shift switch is shifted. After driving for a while you can change the 4WD shift switch between 4H and 4L.
When driving on rough roads,
. Drive carefully according to the road surface conditions.
When the vehicle is stuck,
. Place stones or wooden blocks under the tires to free the vehicle.
. Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4L.

. If it is difficult to free the vehicle, repeat forward and backward movement to increase the movement.
. If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud, tire chains may be effective.
CAUTION
. Do not spin the tires excessively. Tires will sink deep into the mud, making it difficult to free the vehicle.
. Avoid shifting gears with the engine running at high speeds as this may cause malfunction.

SSD1048
4WD SHIFT SWITCH
. Shift the 4WD shift switch to either the AUTO, 4H or 4L position, depending on driving conditions.
. With the switch set to the AUTO position, distribution of torque to the front and rear wheels changes automatically, depending on road conditions encountered [ratio; 0 : 100 (2WD) ? 50 : 50 (4WD)]. This results in improved driving stability.
. If the 4WD shift switch is operated while making a turn, accelerating or decelerating or if the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position while in the AUTO, 4H or 4L, you may feel a

jolt. This is not abnormal. . When the vehicle is stopped after
making a turn, you may feel a slight jolt after the shift lever is shifted to N (Neutral) or P (Park) position. This occurs because the transfer clutch is released and not because of a malfunction.
CAUTION
. When driving straight, shift the 4WD shift switch to the AUTO or 4H position. Do not move the 4WD shift switch when making a turn or reversing.
. Do not shift the 4WD shift switch while driving on steep downhill grades. Use the engine brake and low automatic transmission gears for engine braking.
. Do not operate the 4WD shift switch with the rear wheels spinning.
. Before placing the 4WD shift switch in the 4H position from AUTO, ensure the vehicle speed is less than 62 MPH (100 km/h). Failure to do so can damage the 4WD system.
Starting and driving 5-129

. Never shift the 4WD shift switch between 4L and 4H while driving.
. Engine idling speed is high while warming up the engine. Be especially careful when starting or driving on slippery surfaces with the 4WD shift switch in AUTO.
5-130 Starting and driving

SSD1058
4WD shift indicator
4WD SHIFT INDICATOR
The 4WD shift indicator is displayed in the vehicle information display.
The indicator should turn off within 1 second after placing the ignition switch in the ON position.
While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indicator will illuminate the position selected by the 4WD shift switch. (See the 4WD shift procedure list shown in the "NISSAN all-mode 4WD® system" (P.5-125).)
. The 4WD shift indicator may blink while shifting from one drive mode to the other. When the shifting is completed, the 4WD shift indicator

will come on. If the indicator does not come on immediately, make sure the area around the vehicle is safe, and drive the vehicle straight, accelerate or decelerate or move the vehicle in reverse, then shift the 4WD shift switch.
. If the 4WD warning light comes on, the 4WD shift indicator turns off.
4WD WARNING LIGHT

Warning light Illuminates
Blinks rapidly
Blinks slowly

Comes on or blinks when:
There is a malfunction in the
4WD system
The transfer case oil temperature is abnormally high
The difference in wheel rota-
tion is large

The 4WD warning light is located in the meter.
The 4WD warning light comes on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. It turns off soon after the engine is started.
If any malfunction occurs in the 4WD system when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the 4WD warning light

will either remain illuminated or blink.
If the 4WD warning light comes on, the 4WD shift indicator turns off.
High-temperature transfer case oil makes the 4WD warning light blink rapidly (about twice per second). If the warning light blinks rapidly during operation, stop the vehicle in a safe place immediately. Then if the light turns off after a while, you can continue driving.
A large difference between the diameters of front and rear wheels will make the 4WD warning light blink slowly (about once per two seconds). Change the 4WD shift switch to AUTO and do not drive fast.
CAUTION
. If the 4WD warning light comes on or blinks slowly during operation or rapidly after stopping the vehicle for a while, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
. Shifting between 4HI and 4LO is not recommended when the 4WD warning light turns on.
. When the 4WD warning light comes on, the 2WD mode may

be engaged even if the 4WD shift switch is in AUTO or 4H. Be especially careful when driving. If corresponding parts are malfunctioning, the 4WD mode will not be engaged even if the 4WD shift switch is shifted.
. Do not drive the vehicle in the 4HI or 4LO position on dry hard surface roads. Driving on dry, hard surfaces in 4HI or 4LO may cause unnecessary noise, tire wear and increased fuel consumption.
If the 4WD warning light turns on when driving on dry hard surface roads:
-- in the AUTO or 4HI position, shift the 4WD shift switch to AUTO.
-- in the 4LO position, stop the vehicle and shift the transmission shift lever to the N (Neutral) position and shift the 4WD shift switch to AUTO.
. If the 4WD warning light is still on after the above operation, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

. The transfer case may be damaged if you continue driving with the warning light blinking.
Starting and driving 5-131

HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM

WARNING
. Never rely solely on the hill start assist system to prevent the vehicle from moving backward on a hill. Always drive carefully and attentively. Depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Be especially careful when stopped on a hill on frozen or muddy roads. Failure to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards may result in a loss of control of the vehicle and possible serious injury or death.
. The hill start assist system is not designed to hold the vehicle at a standstill on a hill. Depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll backwards and may result in a collision or serious personal injury.
. The hill start assist system may not prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards on a hill under all load or road conditions. Always be prepared to depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards. Failure to do
5-132 Starting and driving

so may result in a collision or serious personal injury.
The hill start assist system automatically keeps the brakes applied to help prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards in the time it takes the driver to release the brake pedal and apply the accelerator when the vehicle is stopped on a hill.
The hill start assist system will operate automatically under the following conditions:
. The transmission is shifted to a forward or reverse gear.
. The vehicle is stopped completely on a hill by applying the brake.
The maximum holding time is 2 seconds. After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to roll back and the hill start assist system will stop operating completely.
The hill start assist system will not operate when the transmission is shifted to the N (Neutral) or P (Park) position or on a flat and level road.
When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning light illuminates in the meter, the hill start assist system will not operate. (See "Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders" (P.2-11).)

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
WARNING
. Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.
. Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended.
. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.

SD1006MA
. To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.
. Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be applied and the transmission be

placed in the P (Park) position. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in an accident.
. Make sure the automatic transmission shift lever has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal.
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into the street when parked on a sloping drive way, it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated. . HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB:
Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb. . HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB:
Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb. . HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
CURB:
Starting and driving 5-133

TOW MODE
Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the center of the road if it moves. 4. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position.

OFF position.

5-134 Starting and driving

SIC4474
The TOW MODE should be used when pulling a heavy trailer or hauling a heavy load. Driving the vehicle in the TOW MODE with no trailer/load or light trailer/light load will not cause any damage. However, fuel economy may be reduced, and the transmission/engine driving characteristics may feel unusual.
Push the TOW MODE switch to activate TOW MODE. The indicator light on the TOW MODE switch illuminates when the TOW MODE is selected. Push the TOW MODE switch again to turn the TOW MODE OFF.
TOW MODE is automatically canceled when the ignition switch is placed in the

SNOW MODE

NOTE:
When the SNOW mode is activated, the I-LI, I-BSI, and ICC systems will be turned off automatically.

SIC4454
For driving or starting the vehicle on snowy roads or slippery areas, turn the SNOW mode on.
To turn the SNOW mode on, push the SNOW mode switch. The SNOW mode indicator on the vehicle information display will illuminate. When the SNOW mode is activated, engine output is controlled to avoid wheel spin.
To turn the SNOW mode off, push the switch and the indicator on the vehicle information display will turn off. Turn the SNOW mode off for normal driving and fuel economy.

Starting and driving 5-135

FRONT AND REAR SONAR SYSTEM (if so equipped)

The sonar system sounds a tone to inform the driver of obstacles near the bumper. When the sonar system is turned on, the sonar view will automatically appear in the touch screen display when the camera is activated.
WARNING
. The sonar system is a convenience but it is not a substitute for proper parking.
. The driver is always responsible for safety during parking and
5-136 Starting and driving

SSD0622
other maneuvers. Always look around and check that it is safe to do so before parking.
. Read and understand the limitations of the sonar system as contained in this section. The colors of the sonar indicator indicates different distances to the object.
. Inclement weather or ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, a truck's compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill may affect the function of the system; this may include reduced perfor-

mance or a false activation.
. The sonar system is designed as an aid to the driver in detecting large stationary objects to help avoid damaging the vehicle.
. The sonar system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects. Always move slowly. The system will not detect small objects below the bumper, and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the ground.
. The sonar system may not detect the following objects: fluffy objects such as snow, cloth, cotton, glass-wool, etc.; thin objects such as rope, wire and chain, etc.; or wedge-shaped objects.
. The front and rear sonar sensors detect the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle by detecting the sound wave reflected from the surface of an obstacle. When there is a sound such as horn, or an ultrasonic source (such as sonar of other vehicles) around the vehicle, the sonar sensors may not detect objects properly.

If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
CAUTION
. Excessive noise (such as audio system volume or an open vehicle window) will interfere with the tone and it may not be heard.
. Keep the sonar sensors (located on the bumper fascia) free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt. Do not clean the sonar sensors with sharp objects. If the sensors are covered, the accuracy of the sonar function will be diminished.
SYSTEM OPERATION
The system informs with a visual and audible signal of front obstacles when the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position and both front and rear obstacles when the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.

WAF0775X
Sonar Operation Table
The system is deactivated at speeds above 6 MPH (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.
The intermittent tone will stop after 3 seconds when an obstacle is detected by only the corner sensor and the distance does not change. The tone will stop when the obstacle get away from the vehicle.
When the object is detected, the indicator (green) appears and blinks and the tone sounds intermittently. When the vehicle moves closer to the object, the color of the indicator turns yellow and the rate of the blinking increases. When the vehicle is very close to the object, the indicator

stops blinking and turns red, and the tone sounds continuously.
SONAR FUNCTION SETTINGS
The camera aiding sonar function settings can be changed using the following procedures. 1. Push the MENU button on the Display
Commander. 2. Touch the "Settings" key on the touch
screen display. 3. Touch the "Parking Sonar" key.
Starting and driving 5-137

Available setting items: Setting item Parking Sonar
Auto Show Sonar Image Front Only Distance Volume

Action
When this item is turned on, the front and rear sonar is activated. When this item is turned off (indicator turns off), the front and rear sonar is deactivated. The amber markers are displayed at the corners of the vehicle icon. When the Intelligent Around View® Monitor (if so equipped) or the RearView Monitor (if so equipped) is activated next time after placing the ignition switch in the ON position, a gray sonar icon will briefly flash on the touch screen display, indicating that the sonar system is off.
When the sonar detects an object while this item is turned on, the Intelligent Around View® Monitor or the RearView Monitor will interrupt the current view in the display to show the surround area of the vehicle.
When this item is turned on, only the front sonar is activated. The amber markers are displayed at the rear corners of the vehicle icon.
Adjust the sensitivity level of the sonar.
Adjust the tone volume of the sonar.

NOTE: Do not adjust any of the Parking Sonar settings while the vehicle is moving. Make sure the parking brake is firmly applied.

5-138 Starting and driving

WAF0783X
Example
TURNING ON AND OFF THE SONAR FUNCTION
When the "P" key is touched, the indicator light on the key will turn off and the sonar will turn off temporarily. The Moving Object Detection (MOD) (if so equipped), the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB), and the Intelligent Back-up Intervention (I-BI) (if so equipped) systems will also be turned off at the same time. See "Moving Object Detection (MOD)" (P.4-31), "Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)" (P.5-116) and "Intelligent Back-up Intervention (IBI)" (P.5-63).
When the "P" key is touched again, the indicator light will turn on and the

sonar will turn back on.
In the cases below, the sonar will be turned back on automatically:
. When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.
. When the CAMERA button is pushed and a screen other than the camera view is shown on the display.
. When vehicle speed decreases below approximately 5 MPH (8 km/h).
. When the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position and turned back to the ON position again.
To prevent the sonar system from activating altogether, use the sonar system settings menu. See "Sonar function settings" (P.4-28).
When both Sonar and the MOD system are deactivated from the settings menu, the "P" key will disappear from the display. (See "Sonar function settings" (P.4-28) and "MOD function settings" (P.434).)

WAF0776X Example
When the corner of the vehicle moves closer to an object, the corner sonar indicator appears. When the center of the vehicle moves close to an object, the center sonar (if so equipped) indicator appears.
Starting and driving 5-139

WAF0777X Example
The system indicators will appear when the vehicle moves closer to an object.
SONAR LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the sonar system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
. Read and understand the limitations of the sonar system as contained in this section. Inclement weather may affect the
5-140 Starting and driving

function of the sonar system; this may include reduced performance or a false activation.
. The sonar system is deactivated at speeds above 6 MPH (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.
. Inclement weather or ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, a truck's compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill may affect the function of the sonar system; this may include reduced performance or a false activation.
. The sonar system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects. Always move slowly. The system will not detect small objects below the bumper or on the ground.
. The sonar system may not detect the following objects: fluffy objects such as snow, cloth, cotton, glass-wool, etc.; thin objects such as rope, wire and chain, etc.; or wedge-shaped objects; complexshaped objects or multiple objects in close.
. The sonar system may not detect objects at speed above 3 MPH (5 km/h) and may not detect certain angular or moving objects.

. The sonar system may not operate in the following conditions:
-- When rain, snow, ice, dirt, etc. adheres to the sonar sensor.
-- When a loud sound is heard in the area around the vehicle.
-- When the surface of the obstacle is diagonal to the front or rear of the vehicle.
-- When a sonar sensor or the area around the sensor is extremely hot or cold.
. The sonar system may unintentionally operate in the following conditions:
-- When there is overgrown grass in the area around the vehicle.
-- When there are bumps, protrusions or manhole covers on the road surface.
-- When the vehicle drives through a draped flag or a curtain.
-- When there is an accumulation of snow or ice behind the vehicle.

POWER STEERING

-- When driving on a steep hill.
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE
When sonar blockage is detected, the system will be deactivated automatically.
The system is not available until the conditions no longer exist.
The sonar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the sonar sensors.
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The sonar sensors are located on the front and rear bumpers. (See "Exterior front" (P.0-3) and "Exterior rear" (P.0-4).)
. Always keep the area near the sonar sensors clean.
. If the sonar sensors are dirty, wipe them off with a soft cloth while being careful to not damage them.
. The sonar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such

as splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the sonar sensors. Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the sonar sensors.
. Do not subject the area around the sonar sensors to strong impact. Also, do not remove or disassemble the sonar sensors. If the sonar sensors and peripheral areas are deformed in an accident, etc., have the sonar sensors checked by a NISSAN dealer.
. Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint on the sonar sensors and their surrounding areas. This may cause a malfunction or improper operation.
. When washing the vehicle using a high-pressure washer, do not apply direct washer pressure on the sonar sensors. This may cause a malfunction of the sonar sensors.

WARNING
If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. Steering will be harder to operate. The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering. If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you will still have control of the vehicle. However, much greater steering effort is needed, especially in sharp turns and at low speeds.
Starting and driving 5-141

BRAKE SYSTEM

BRAKING PRECAUTIONS
The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still have braking ability at two wheels.
You may feel a small click and hear a sound when the brake pedal is fully depressed slowly. This is not a malfunction and indicates that the brake assist mechanism is operating properly.
Hydraulically-assisted brakes
The hydraulically-assisted brake system is designed to use a hydraulic pump driven electrically, to assist braking. If the engine stops, you can stop the vehicle by depressing the foot brake pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the foot brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle. The stopping distance will be longer.
Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven through water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking.
To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly tapping the brake pedal to heat-up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes
5-142 Starting and driving

function correctly.
PARKING BRAKE BREAK-IN
Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drums/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the best braking performance.
This procedure is described in the vehicle service manual. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Using the brakes
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This will cause overheating of the brakes, wearing out the brake and pads faster and reduce gas mileage.
To help save the brakes and to prevent the brakes from overheating, reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control.
WARNING
. While driving on a slippery surface, be careful when braking, accelerating or downshifting.

Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident.
. If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the brakes will not work. Braking will be harder.

BRAKE ASSIST

BRAKE ASSIST
When the force applied to the brake pedal exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is activated generating greater braking force than a conventional brake booster even with light pedal force.
WARNING
The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist braking operation and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
WARNING
. The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a sophisticated device, but it cannot prevent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces. Remember that stopping distances on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal sur-

faces even with ABS. Stopping distances may also be longer on rough, gravel or snow covered roads, or if you are using tire chains. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the driver is responsible for safety.
. Tire type and condition may also affect braking effectiveness.
-- When replacing tires, install the specified size of tires on all four wheels.
-- When installing a spare tire, make sure that it is the proper size and type as specified on the Tire and Loading Information label. See "Tire and loading information label" (P.1013).
-- For detailed information, see "Wheels and tires" (P.8-28).
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard braking or when braking on slippery surfaces. The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By preventing each wheel from locking, the

system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slippery surfaces.
Using the system
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. Depress the brake pedal with firm steady pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will operate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles.
WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may result in increased stopping distances.
Self-test feature
The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a "clunk" noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunction, it switches the ABS off and
Starting and driving 5-143

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM

illuminates the ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The brake system then operates normally, but without anti-lock assistance. If the ABS warning light illuminates during the self-test or while driving, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Normal operation
The ABS operates at speeds above 3 to 6 MPH (5 to 10 km/h). The speed varies according to road conditions. When the ABS senses that one or more wheels are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This action is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from the actuator when it is operating. This is normal and indicates that the ABS is operating properly. However, the pulsation may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while driving.
5-144 Starting and driving

The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion. Under certain driving conditions, the VDC system helps to perform the following functions.
. Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on the same axle.
. Controls brake pressure and engine output to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle speed (traction control function).
. Controls brake pressure at individual wheels and engine output to help the driver maintain control of the vehicle in the following conditions:
-- understeer (vehicle tends to not follow the steered path despite increased steering input)
-- oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to certain road or driving conditions).
The VDC system can help the driver to maintain control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss of vehicle control in all driving situations.
When the VDC system operates, the VDC warning light in the instrument panel flashes so note the following:

. The road may be slippery or the system may determine some action is required to help keep the vehicle on the steered path.

. You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working properly.

. Adjust your speed and driving to the road conditions.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the

VDC warning light

illuminates in the

instrument panel. The VDC system auto-

matically turns off.

The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the

VDC system. The VDC off indicator

illuminates to indicate the VDC system is

off. When the VDC switch is used to turn

off the system, the VDC system still

operates to prevent one drive wheel from

slipping by transferring power to a non

slipping drive wheel. The VDC warning

light

flashes if this occurs. All other

VDC functions are off, and the VDC

warning light will not flash. The VDC

system is automatically reset to on when

the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position then back to the ON position.

When the 4L position is selected with the 4WD shift switch, the VDC system is disabled and the VDC off indicator light

illuminates (for 4WD models).
See "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning light" (P.2-19) and "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator light" (P.2-19).
The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a "clunk" noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction.
WARNING
. The VDC system is designed to help improve driving stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully.
. Do not modify the vehicle's suspension. If suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are not NISSAN recommended for your vehicle or

are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate properly. This could adversely affect vehicle handling performance, and the VDC warning light
may illuminate.
. If brake related parts such as brake pads, rotors and calipers are not NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate properly and the VDC warning light may illuminate.
. If engine control related parts are not NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC warning light may illuminate.
. When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked corners, the VDC system may not operate properly and the VDC warning light may illuminate. Do not drive on these types of roads.
. When driving on an unstable surface such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or ramp, the VDC warning light may illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Restart the engine after driving onto a stable surface.

. If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN recommended ones are used, the VDC system may not operate properly and the VDC warning light may illuminate.
. The VDC system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road.
Starting and driving 5-145

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

SIC4455

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) OFF SWITCH

The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ON for most driving conditions.

When the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system, push the VDC OFF switch.

The VDC off indicator light

will

illuminate.

5-146 Starting and driving

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine to turn ON the system.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply deicer through the key hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key hole or use the Intelligent Key system.
ANTIFREEZE
In the winter when it is anticipated that the outside temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check antifreeze to assure proper winter protection. For additional information, see "Engine cooling system" (P.8-4).
BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should be checked regularly. For additional information, see "Battery" (P.8-11).
DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
If the vehicle is to be left outside without antifreeze, drain the cooling system, including the engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. For details, see "Engine cooling system" (P.8-4).

TIRE EQUIPMENT
SUMMER tires have a tread designed to provide superior performance on dry pavement. However, the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels. It is recommended you consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size, speed rating and availability information.
For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires.
Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.
Tire chains may be used. For details, see "Tire chains" (P.8-35).

For four-wheel drive
If you install snow tires, they must also be the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels.
SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter:
. A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades.
. A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support.
. A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.
. Extra window washer fluid to refill the reservoir tank.
DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
WARNING
. Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain), very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on. The vehicle will have much less traction or "grip" under these conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded.

. Whatever the condition, drive with caution. Accelerate and slow down with care. If accelerating or downshifting too fast, the drive wheels will lose even more traction.
. Allow more stopping distance under these conditions. Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement.
. Allow greater following distances on slippery roads.
. Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try not to brake while on the ice, and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers.
. Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads.
. Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle.
Starting and driving 5-147

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so equipped)
Engine block heaters are used to assist in cold temperature starting.
The engine block heater should be used when the outside temperature is 20°F (-7°C) or lower.
To use the engine block heater
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block heater cord.
3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord.
4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.
5. The engine block heater must be plugged in for at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on outside temperatures, to properly warm the engine coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the engine block heater on.
6. Before starting the engine, unplug and properly store the cord to keep it away from moving parts.

WARNING
. Do not use your engine block heater with an ungrounded electrical system or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be seriously injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection.
. Disconnect and properly store the engine block heater cord before starting the engine. Damage to the cord could result in an electrical shock and can cause serious injury.
. Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3pronged extension cord rated for at least 10A. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the proper extension cord or a grounded outlet can result in a fire or electrical shock and cause serious personal injury.

5-148 Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch ......................................... 6-2 Roadside assistance program ........................................... 6-2 Emergency engine shut off .................................................. 6-3 Flat tire .................................................................................................. 6-3
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .......... 6-3 Changing a flat tire .............................................................. 6-4 Jump starting ............................................................................... 6-12 Push starting ................................................................................. 6-14

If your vehicle overheats .................................................... 6-14 Towing your vehicle ............................................................... 6-16
Towing recommended by NISSAN ..................... 6-17 Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) ...... 6-19 Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) manual shifting (4WD models) ............................................................................... 6-20 When 4WD warning light illuminates ............... 6-20 Operating procedure ..................................................... 6-21

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE PROGRAM

. Turn signals do not work when the hazard warning flasher lights are on.
The flasher can be actuated with the ignition switch in any position.
When an impact that could activate the supplemental air bags is detected, the hazard warning flasher lights blink automatically. If the hazard warning flasher switch is pushed twice, the hazard warning flashers will turn off.

In the event of a roadside emergency, Roadside Assistance Service is available to you. Please refer to your Warranty Information Booklet (U.S.) or Warranty & Roadside Assistance Information Booklet (Canada) for details.

SIC2574
Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights will flash.
WARNING

WARNING
Do not turn the hazard warning flasher switch to off until you can make sure that it is safe to do so. Also, the hazard flasher warning may not blink automatically depending on the force of impact.

. If stopping for an emergency, be sure to move the vehicle well off the road.
. Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic.
6-2 In case of emergency

Some state laws may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving.

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

FLAT TIRE

To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving, perform the following procedure:
. Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch 3 consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or
. Push and hold the push-button ignition switch for more than 2 seconds.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit and the "Tire Pressure Low Add Air" warning appears in the vehicle information display, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning light. This system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). For more details, see "Low tire pressure warning light" (P.2-16) and "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" (P.5-5).

permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If the light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible.
. Since the spare tire is not equipped with the TPMS, when a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for these services.
. Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN
In case of emergency 6-3

could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.
. Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions below.
Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and away from traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
4. Turn off the engine.
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic, and to signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance.
6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING
. Make sure the parking brake is securely applied and the automatic transmission is in the P (Park) position.
. Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is hazardous.
. Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assistance.

MCE0001A
Blocking wheels
Place suitable blocks at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked up.
WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and result in personal injury.

6-4 In case of emergency

tached to the jacking tool. If rubber sound suppressor remains on jack when vehicle is being jacked up, the vehicle will be unstable and may fall off jack stand causing serious injury of death.
3. Remove the cargo floor cover. 4. Remove the jacking tools.

JVE0219X
Getting the spare tire and tools
1. Open the liftgate. 2. Raise the cargo floor board using the
handle .
WAG0136X
WARNING
When removing jacking tools, be sure the rubber sound suppressor
, used to control jack stand from rattling against metal, is not at-

In case of emergency 6-5

7. Locate the oval opening above the middle of the rear bumper.
8. Place the T-shaped end of the jack rod through the opening and direct it towards the spare wheel winch assembly, located directly above the spare wheel.

JVE0423X
5. Securely screw to connect the Tshaped end of the jack rod and the extension bar as illustrated.
6. Fit the square end of the jack rod into the square hole of the wheel nut wrench to form a handle .
6-6 In case of emergency

SCE0916
CAUTION
Do not insert the jack rod straight as it is designed to be inserted at an angle as shown.
9. Seat the T-shaped end of the jack rod into the T-shaped opening of the spare wheel winch. Apply pressure to keep the jack rod engaged in the spare wheel winch and turn the jack rod counterclockwise to lower the spare wheel.

center of the wheel and then lift it up into the storage area.

SCE0377
10. Once the spare wheel is completely lowered, remove the jack rod and reach under the vehicle to remove the hanging plate.
11. Carefully slide the spare wheel from under the rear of the vehicle.
After preparing the spare tire, to remove the rod, pull out the rod while moving the rod to the right and left with the screw of the extension facing the side.
CAUTION
When storing the wheel, make sure that the hanging plate is in the

WAG0102X
CAUTION
When storing the wheel, be sure to mount the wheel horizontally. Securing the wheel that is in a tilted position as illustrated may cause
In case of emergency 6-7

looseness and dropping of the wheel while driving. Lower the wheel on the ground again, and make sure that the hanging plate is properly set. Hang the wheel again and make sure that the wheel is held horizontally, then store the wheel.
Jacking up the vehicle and removing the damaged tire
WARNING
. Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.
. Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting only your vehicle during a tire change.
. Use the correct jack-up points. Never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support.

. Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary.
. Never use blocks on or under the jack.
. Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack, as it may cause the vehicle to move.
. Do not allow passengers to stay in the vehicle while it is on the jack.

Carefully read the caution label attached to the jack body and the following instructions.

SCE0875
1. Place the jack directly under the jackup points as illustrated. The jack should be used on level firm ground.

6-8 In case of emergency

2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground.

SCE0876

NCE130
3. Install the assembled jack rod into the jack as shown.
4. Carefully raise the vehicle until the clearance between the tire and ground is achieved.
5. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever and rod with both hands and turn the jack lever.
NOTE:
Before jacking up the vehicle, make sure the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. If the vehicle is lifted up with the engine running, the autoleveling suspension will become disabled after 120 seconds. To reset the auto-leveling suspension, cycle the
In case of emergency 6-9

ignition switch ON/OFF one time. 6-10 In case of emergency

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground. Then, with the wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence as illustrated. Lower the vehicle completely.

SCE0910
Installing the spare tire
The full-size temporary use only spare tire (if so equipped) is designed for emergency use. (See specific instructions under the heading "Wheels and tires" (P.8-28).)
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface between the wheel and hub.
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the sequence illustrated ( , , , , , ) until they are tight.

WARNING
. Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off. This could cause an accident.
. Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts to become loose.
. Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).
. As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque: 98 ft-lb (133 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specification at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to speci-

fications at each lubrication interval.
. Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.
COLD pressure:
After the vehicle has been parked for three hours or more or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire and Loading Information label affixed to the driver side center pillar.
After adjusting tire pressure to the COLD tire pressure, the display of the tire pressure information may show higher pressure than the COLD tire pressure after the vehicle has been driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km). This is because the tire pressurizes as the tire temperature rises. This does not indicate a system malfunction.
Stowing the damaged tire and tools
1. Securely store the damaged tire, jack and tools in the storage area.
2. Close the cargo floor cover.
3. Replace the cargo floor board.
4. Close the liftgate.

WARNING
. Always make sure that the spare tire and jacking equipment are properly secured after use. Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop.
. The full-size temporary use only spare tire (if so equipped) is designed for emergency use. (See specific instructions under the heading "Wheels and tires" (P.828).)

In case of emergency 6-11

JUMP STARTING

To start your engine with a booster battery, the instructions and precautions below must be followed.
WARNING
. If done incorrectly, jump starting can lead to a battery explosion, resulting in severe injury or death. It could also damage your vehicle.
. Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery.
. Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulphuric acid solution which can cause severe burns. If the fluid should come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with water.
. Keep the battery out of the reach of children.
. The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle.
6-12 In case of emergency

. Whenever working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protectors (for example, goggles or industrial safety spectacles) and remove rings, metal bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery when jump starting.
. Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery. It could explode and cause serious injury.
. Your vehicle has an automatic engine cooling fan. It could come on at any time. Keep hands and other objects away from it.

CAUTION

. Always connect positive (+) to positive (+) and negative (-) to body ground (as illustrated) -- not to the battery.
. Make sure the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that clamps do not contact any other metal.

WARNING
Always follow the instructions below. Failure to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause personal injury.
1. Remove the engine compartment cover, if necessary. See "Engine compartment check locations" (P.8-3).
2. If the booster battery is in another vehicle , position the two vehicles ( and ) to bring their batteries into close proximity to each other.

WAG0119X
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.
3. Apply parking brake. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position. Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (light, heater, air conditioner, etc.).
4. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so equipped). Cover the battery with a firmly wrung out moist cloth to reduce explosion hazard.
5. Connect jumper cables in the sequence as illustrated ( ? ? ? ).

6. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and let it run for a few minutes.
7. Keep the engine speed of the booster vehicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the engine of the vehicle being jump started .
CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not start right away, place the ignition switch in the OFF position and wait 10 seconds before trying again.

In case of emergency 6-13

PUSH STARTING

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

8. After starting your engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then the positive cable ( ? ? ? ).
9. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover the vent holes as it may be contaminated with corrosive acid.
10. Put the battery cover on.
6-14 In case of emergency

Do not attempt to start the engine by pushing.
CAUTION
. Automatic transmission models cannot be push-started or towstarted. Attempting to do so may cause transmission damage.
. Three way catalyst equipped models should not be started by pushing since the three way catalyst may be damaged.
. Never try to start the vehicle by towing it; when the engine starts, the forward surge could cause the vehicle to collide with the tow vehicle.

CAUTION
. Do not continue to drive if your vehicle overheats. Doing so could cause engine damage or a vehicle fire.
. To avoid the danger of being scalded, never remove the radiator cap or coolant reservoir cap while the engine is still hot. When the radiator cap or coolant reservoir cap is removed, pressurized hot water will spurt out, possibly causing serious injury.
. Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal noise, etc., take the following steps:
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the parking brake and move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
Do not stop the engine.
2. Turn off the heater and air conditioner. Open all the windows, move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan

control to high speed.
3. If engine overheating is caused by climbing a long hill on a hot day, run the engine at a fast idle (approximately 1,500 rpm) until the temperature gauge indication returns to normal.
4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood. (If steam or coolant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not open the hood further until no steam or coolant can be seen.
5. Open the engine hood.
WARNING

WARNING
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jewelry or clothing to come into contact with, or get caught in, engine belts or the engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan can start at any time.
7. After the engine cools down, check the coolant level in the reservoir tank with the engine running. Add coolant to the reservoir tank if necessary. Have your vehicle repaired. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

If steam or water is coming from the engine, stand clear to prevent getting burned.

6. Visually check drive belts for damage or looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water. If coolant is leaking or the cooling fan does not run, stop the engine.

In case of emergency 6-15

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in Canada) and local regulations for towing must be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are available from a NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing. To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends that you have a service operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions.

. Always attach safety chains before towing.
For information about towing your vehicle behind a recreational vehicle (RV), see "Flat towing" (P.10-35).

WARNING

. Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed.
. Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION
. When towing, make sure that the transmission, axles, steering system and powertrain are in working condition. If any of these conditions apply, dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be used.
6-16 In case of emergency

SCE0925

Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN
Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed with the driving (rear) wheels off the ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.
CAUTION
. Never tow automatic transmission models with the rear wheels on the ground or four wheels on the ground (forward or back-

ward), as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the front wheels raised, always use towing dollies under the rear wheels.
. When towing rear wheel drive models with the front wheels on the ground or on towing dollies: Place the ignition in the ACC or ON position, and secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or similar device.

In case of emergency 6-17

SCE0907

Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) models

NISSAN recommends that towing dollies

CAUTION

be used when towing your vehicle or the

vehicle be placed on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

Never tow 4WD models with any of the wheels on the ground as this

may cause serious and expensive

damage to the powertrain.

6-18 In case of emergency

Front

WAG0120X

Rear

WAG0105X

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck vehicle)
WARNING
. Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. . Do not spin your tires at high
speed. This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged.
Pulling a stuck vehicle
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use a tow strap or other device designed specifically for vehicle recovery. Always follow the manufacturer's instructions for the recovery device. Attach the tow strap to the towing hook.
CAUTION
. Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle or the towing hooks. Otherwise, the vehicle body will be damaged.
. Use the towing hook only to free a vehicle stuck in sand, snow,

mud, etc. Never tow the vehicle for a long distance using only the towing hook.
. The towing hook is under tremendous force when used to free a stuck vehicle. Never pull the hook at an angle.
. Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle.
. Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake or cooling systems.
. Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use in vehicle towing or recovery.
Rocking a stuck vehicle
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use the following procedure:
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system.
2. Make sure the area in front and behind the vehicle is clear of obstructions.
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear an area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and backward. . Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and D (Drive). . Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion. . Release the accelerator pedal before shifting between R and D. . Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH (55 km/h).
5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few tries, contact a professional towing service to remove the vehicle.
In case of emergency 6-19

FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) MANUAL SHIFTING (4WD models)
This section describes the procedure for manually shifting the vehicle into the 4WD mode (4L position) in case of an emergency.
WHEN 4WD WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATES
If the 4WD warning light illuminates while driving, there may be a malfunction in the 4WD system. Stop the vehicle and have the vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended you contact a NISSAN dealer for this service. (See "NISSAN allmode 4WD®" (P.5-124).) When the vehicle is stuck on an uneven road (desert, mud, etc.) and the 4WD warning light is illuminated, be sure to place the 4WD shift switch in the 4L position. If only the rear wheels are spinning, this means that the transfer has not switched to the 4L position electrically. If this situation occurs, contact a dealer or road assistance service for help. If an immediate service is not available, perform the following procedure to switch to the 4L position manually and free the vehicle.
6-20 In case of emergency

CAUTION
Only perform this procedure in an emergency.
If the vehicle is driven for a long period of time over a long distance with a component detached, foreign material such as water, sand, etc. may enter from the opening and this may cause a malfunction in the drivetrain system. After freeing a vehicle that has become stuck, it is recommended you contact a NISSAN dealer for inspection and repair.
WARNING
. Ensure your safety before performing the operations. The vehicle may move unexpectedly.
. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position, apply the parking brake and let the vehicle cool down.
. Do not perform the following procedure immediately after driving the vehicle. Parts such as exhaust components, the trans-

mission, etc. are very hot and may cause a burn injury.
. Make sure that the parts that will be operated as well as related parts cool down before performing the operation.
. Burrs or projecting portions of metal components may cause unexpected injury to your fingers or arms. Pay special attention in regard to your safety while removing and installing these parts. Wear work gloves and protective arm covers.
CAUTION
While removing and installing the parts, prevent the removed parts from getting dirty with water, dirt or sand. Protect the parts using a cover such as a clean cloth, etc.

OPERATING PROCEDURE
Place the ignition switch in the OFF position and apply the parking brake. Let the vehicle cool down before performing the following procedure.

SCE0959 4WD shift motor assembly
1. Check that the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
CAUTION
The following procedure includes the removal of the electrical system components. Therefore, make sure that the ignition switch is in the OFF position before proceeding.

SCE0960
4WD shift motor harness connector
2. Unlock the upper lock of the harness connector of the 4WD shift motor assembly, then remove the harness connector.
3. Cover the connector to prevent it from getting dirty, and then fasten the connector to the vehicle using a suitable rope so that the connector does not contact the exhaust muffler, etc.

In case of emergency 6-21

CAUTION
The connector must be fastened securely. Not doing so may result in damage to the connector due to interference with other parts.

6-22 In case of emergency

SCE0961
4. Remove the 4 bolts that secure the 4WD shift motor using the wrench that is equipped in the vehicle.
5. Remove the 4WD shift motor assembly.
CAUTION
Be careful not to allow the assembly to contact water, dirt or sand.

SCE0962
6. Completely insert the wrench into the internal gear of the transfer.
7. Fully turn the wrench clockwise as far as it will go. This shifts the transfer to the 4L position.
8. Install the 4WD shift motor assembly. Securely tighten the 4 bolts using the wrench.
CAUTION

. Do not connect the harness connector of the 4WD shift motor after the above procedure has been performed.

. The 4 bolts are tightened to temporarily install the 4WD shift motor so that water, dirt or sand does not enter inside the system. Therefore, they should only be tightened to the proper tightening torque. It is recommended you contact a NISSAN dealer for inspection and repair.
9. With the 4WD system in the 4L position, free the stuck vehicle. (See "Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle)" (P.6-19) for details.)
CAUTION
After manually shifting the vehicle to the 4L position, it is recommended you contact a NISSAN dealer for inspection and repair as soon as possible.

In case of emergency 6-23

MEMO 6-24 In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior ........................................................................... 7-2 Washing ......................................................................................... 7-2 Waxing ............................................................................................ 7-2 Removing spots ...................................................................... 7-3 Underbody ................................................................................... 7-3 Glass ................................................................................................. 7-3 Wheels ............................................................................................. 7-3 Chrome parts ............................................................................ 7-4 Tire dressing .............................................................................. 7-4

Cleaning interior ........................................................................... 7-5 Air fresheners ......................................................................... 7-6 Floor mats ................................................................................. 7-6 Seat belts ................................................................................... 7-7
Corrosion protection ................................................................ 7-8 Most common factors contributing to vehicle corrosion .................................................................. 7-8 Environmental factors influence the rate of corrosion .............................................................................. 7-8 To protect your vehicle from corrosion ............ 7-8

CLEANING EXTERIOR
In order to maintain the appearance of your vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it.
To protect the paint surface, wash your vehicle as soon as you can:
. after a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain
. after driving on coastal roads . when contaminants such as soot, bird
droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface . when dust or mud builds up on the surface Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover.
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the body cover.
WASHING
Wash dirt off the vehicle with a wet sponge and plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.
7-2 Appearance and care

CAUTION
. Do not use car washes that use acid in the detergent. Some car washes, especially brushless ones, use some acid for cleaning. The acid may react with some plastic vehicle components, causing them to crack. This could affect their appearance, and also could cause them not to function properly. Always check with your car wash to confirm that acid is not used.
. Do not wash the vehicle with strong household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents.
. Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or while the vehicle body is hot, as the surface may become water-spotted.
. Avoid using tight-napped or rough cloths, such as washing mitts. Care must be taken when removing caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so the paint surface is not scratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of clean water.
Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors, hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas must be regularly cleaned. Make sure that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open. Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt.
Avoid leaving water spots on the paint surface by using a damp chamois to dry the vehicle.
WAXING
Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is recommended to remove built-up wax residue and to avoid a weathered appearance before reapplying wax.
A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the proper product.
. Wax your vehicle only after a thorough washing. Follow the instructions supplied with the wax.
. Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish.
Machine compound or aggressive polish-

ing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.
REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible from the paint surface to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special cleaning products are available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory stores.
UNDERBODY
In areas where road salt is used in winter, the underbody must be cleaned regularly. This will prevent dirt and salt from building up and causing the acceleration of corrosion on the underbody and suspension. Before the winter period and again in the spring, the underseal must be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.
GLASS
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of the windows, do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorinebased disinfectant cleaners. They could damage the electrical conductors, radio antenna elements or rear window defroster elements.
WHEELS
Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance.
. Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed.
. Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.
. NISSAN recommends that the road wheels be waxed to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter.

Aluminum alloy wheels
Wash regularly with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution, especially during winter months in areas where road salt is used. Salt could discolor the wheels if not removed.
CAUTION
Follow the directions below to avoid staining or discoloring the wheels:
. Do not use a cleaner that uses strong acid or alkali contents to clean the wheels.
. Do not apply wheel cleaners to the wheels when they are hot. The wheel temperature should be the same as ambient temperature.
. Rinse the wheel to completely remove the cleaner within 15 minutes after the cleaner is applied.

CAUTION

Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels.

Appearance and care 7-3

Bright wheels (if so equipped)
The bright wheels use a different coating process than typical aluminum alloy wheel and they are not plated wheels. These wheels are clear-coated and require the following special cleaning. They should be regularly washed with a soft sponge soaked in a lot of water. After washing with water, wipe clean with a dry, soft cloth and dry completely. When there is chemical or tire wax, or dirt such as an antifreeze agent on the surface, wash them with water as soon as possible.
CAUTION
. The surfaces of the wheels use a different coating process than typical aluminum alloy wheels. Do not use aluminum alloy wheel cleaners or abrasive cleaners to clean the wheels. Using such cleaners could damage the wheel surfaces.
. Do not use an automatic car wash if the vehicle is equipped with bright wheels. The wheel coating may be damaged.
. Do not use a brush to wash the wheels if the vehicle is equipped
7-4 Appearance and care

with bright wheels. The wheel coating may be damaged.
CHROME PARTS
Clean chrome parts regularly with a nonabrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.
TIRE DRESSING
NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may react with the coating and form a compound. This compound may come off the tire while driving and stain the vehicle paint.
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the following precautions:
. Use a water-based tire dressing. The coating on the tire dissolves more easily with an oil-based tire dressing.
. Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help prevent it from entering the tire tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to remove).
. Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry towel. Make sure the tire dressing is completely removed from the tire tread/grooves.

. Allow the tire dressing to dry as recommended by tire dressing manufacturer.

CLEANING INTERIOR
Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry soft cloth.
Regular care and cleaning is required in order to maintain the appearance of the leather.
Before using any fabric protector, read the manufacturer's recommendations. Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material.
Use a cloth dampened only with water, to clean the meter and gauge lens.
WARNING
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot steam cleaners) on the seat. This can damage the seat or occupant classification sensors. This can also affect the operation of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.

CAUTION
. Never use benzine, thinner, or any similar material.
. For cleaning, use a soft cloth, dampened with water. Never use a rough cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any kind of solvent or paper towel with a chemical cleaning agent. They will scratch or cause discoloration to the lens.
. Do not spray any liquid such as water on the meter lens. Spraying liquid may cause the system to malfunction.
. Small dirt particles can be abrasive and damaging to the leather surfaces and should be removed promptly. Do not use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents or ammonia-based cleaners as they may damage the leather's natural finish.
. Only use fabric protectors approved by NISSAN.
. Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or gauge lens covers. It may damage the lens cover.

. Do not spill on or make contact with interior surfaces while handling air fresheners, aroma agents, cosmetics, sunscreen, etc. They may cause permanent discoloration, stain, crack, paint peeling, etc. depending on the ingredients. If they contact the interior surface, wipe them off immediately using a soft cloth.
. Do not use the chlorine-based cleaning liquid such as chlorine dioxide and hypochlorous acid, which may cause the paint peeling, corrosion, etc. If it is unavoidable to clean or sterilize interior surfaces, use less than 75% ethanol. Wipe the interior parts with a dry cloth dampened with ethanol. Wipe off ethanol completely. If you leave it uncleaned, it may cause paint peeling, discoloration, etc. Since ethanol is flammable, be careful of fire.
Appearance and care 7-5

AIR FRESHENERS
Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener, take the following precautions:
. Hanging-type air fresheners can cause permanent discoloration when they contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place the air freshener in a location that allows it to hang free and not contact an interior surface.
. Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on the vents. These products can cause immediate damage and discoloration when spilled on interior surfaces.
Carefully read and follow the manufacturer's instructions before using air fresheners.
FLOOR MATS
WARNING
To avoid potential pedal interference that may result in a collision, injury or death:
. NEVER place a floor mat on top of another floor mat in the driver front position or install them upside down or backwards.
7-6 Appearance and care

. Use only genuine NISSAN floor mats or equivalent floor mats that are specifically designed for use in your vehicle model and model year.
. Properly position the mats in the floorwell using the floor mat positioning hooks. See "Floor mat installation" (P.7-6).
. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with pedal operation.
. Periodically check the floor mats to make sure they are properly installed.
. After cleaning the vehicle interior, check the floor mats to make sure they are properly installed.
The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior. Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn.

JVA0034X
Front (example)
Floor mat installation
Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat positioning hook(s). The number and shape of the floor mat positioning hooks for each seating position varies depending on the vehicle.
When installing genuine NISSAN floor mats, follow the installation instructions provided with the floor mat and the following:
1. Position the floor mat in the floorwell so that the mat grommet holes are aligned with the hook(s).
2. Secure the grommet holes into the hook(s) and ensure that the floor mat

is properly positioned.
3. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with pedal operation. With the ignition in the OFF position and the shift lever in the P (Park) position, fully apply and release all pedals. The floor mat must not interfere with pedal operation or prevent the pedal from returning to its normal position. It is recommended you see a NISSAN dealer for details about installing the floor mats in your vehicle.

the seat belts, since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing.

SAI0052 Bracket positions
The illustration shows the location of the floor mat positioning hooks.
SEAT BELTS
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely before using them. See "Seat belts" (P.1-20).
WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, or chemical solvents to clean

Appearance and care 7-7

CORROSION PROTECTION

MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION
. The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas.
. Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic accidents.
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLUENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION
Moisture
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the vehicle body underside can accelerate corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle, and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion.
Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity, especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing where atmospheric pollution exists, or where road salt is used.

Temperature
A temperature increase will accelerate the rate of corrosion to those parts which are not well ventilated.
Air pollution
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use will accelerate the corrosion process. Road salt will also accelerate the disintegration of paint surfaces.
TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM CORROSION
. Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the vehicle clean.
. Always check for minor damage to the paint and repair it as soon as possible.
. Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation.
. Check the underbody for accumulation of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water as soon as possible.
CAUTION

cleaner.
. Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.
Chemicals used for road surface deicing are extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders.
In winter, the underbody must be cleaned periodically.
For additional protection against rust and corrosion, which may be required in some areas, it is recommended you consult a NISSAN dealer.

7-8 Appearance and care

. NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum

8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions ...................................................... 8-2 Engine compartment check locations ........................ 8-3
VK56VD engine ....................................................................... 8-3 Engine cooling system ............................................................. 8-4
Checking engine coolant level .................................... 8-5 Changing engine coolant ................................................ 8-5 Engine oil ............................................................................................. 8-6 Checking engine oil level ................................................. 8-6 Changing engine oil and filter ..................................... 8-6 Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) ............................. 8-8 Power steering fluid ................................................................... 8-8 Brake fluid .......................................................................................... 8-9 Window washer fluid .............................................................. 8-10 Battery ................................................................................................ 8-11 Jump starting ......................................................................... 8-13 Variable voltage control system ................................... 8-13 Drive belts ........................................................................................ 8-13 Spark plugs ..................................................................................... 8-14 Replacing spark plugs ..................................................... 8-14 Air cleaner ....................................................................................... 8-15

Windshield wiper blades ..................................................... 8-16 Cleaning ................................................................................... 8-16 Replacing ................................................................................ 8-16
Rear window wiper blades ............................................... 8-17 Brakes ................................................................................................ 8-17
Self-adjusting brakes ..................................................... 8-17 Brake pad wear warning ............................................ 8-17 Brake booster ...................................................................... 8-17 Fuses ................................................................................................... 8-18 Engine compartment .................................................... 8-18 Passenger compartment ........................................... 8-20 Intelligent Key battery replacement .......................... 8-21 Lights .................................................................................................. 8-24 Headlights .............................................................................. 8-25 Exterior and interior lights ........................................ 8-26 Wheels and tires ........................................................................ 8-28 Tire pressure ........................................................................ 8-28 Tire labeling .......................................................................... 8-32 Types of tires ....................................................................... 8-34 Tire chains .............................................................................. 8-35 Changing wheels and tires ...................................... 8-36

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle. The following are general precautions which should be closely observed.
WARNING
. Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. Move the shift lever to P (Park).
. Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position when performing any parts replacement or repairs.
. Never connect or disconnect the battery or any transistorized component while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
. Never leave the engine or automatic transmission related component harnesses disconnected while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
. If you must work with the engine running, keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools away from moving fans, belts and any other
8-2 Do-it-yourself

moving parts.
. It is advisable to secure or remove any loose clothing and remove any jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. before working on your vehicle.
. Always wear eye protection whenever you work on your vehicle.
. If you must run the engine in an enclosed space such as a garage, be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases to escape.
. Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by a jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.
. Keep smoking materials, flame and sparks away from fuel tank and the battery.
. Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic engine cooling fan. It may come on at any time without warning, even if the ignition key is in the OFF position and the engine is not running. To avoid injury, always disconnect the negative battery cable before working near the fan.

. Because the fuel lines are under high pressure even when the engine is off, it is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for service of the fuel filter or fuel lines.
CAUTION
. Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot. Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down.
. Avoid direct contact with used engine oil and coolant. Improperly disposed engine oil, coolant, and/or other vehicle fluids can damage the environment. Always conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid.
This "8. Do-it-yourself" section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.
A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is also available. (See "Owner's Manual/Service Manual order information" (P.10-40).)
You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions, and

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS
could affect your warranty coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, it is recommended you have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

VK56VD ENGINE
1. Window washer fluid reservoir 2. Fuse/fusible link holder 3. Engine oil dipstick 4. Power steering fluid reservoir 5. Engine oil filler cap 6. Brake fluid reservoir

7. Fuse/fusible link holder 8. Battery 9. Radiator filler cap 10. Engine coolant reservoir 11. Drive belts 12. Air cleaner

JVC0965X

Do-it-yourself 8-3

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/ Coolant (blue) and 50% water to provide year-round anti-freeze and coolant protection. The antifreeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional engine cooling system additives are not necessary.
WARNING
. Never remove the radiator or coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Wait until the engine and radiator cool down. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. See precautions in "If your vehicle overheats" (P.6-14).
. The radiator is equipped with a pressure type radiator cap. To prevent engine damage, use only a genuine NISSAN radiator cap.
8-4 Do-it-yourself

CAUTION
. Never use any cooling system additives such as radiator sealer. Additives may clog the cooling system and cause damage to the engine, transmission and/or cooling system.
. When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/ Coolant (blue) or equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/ Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted to provide antifreeze protection to -34°F (-37°C). If additional freeze protection is needed due to weather where you operate your vehicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) concentrate following the directions on the container. If an equivalent coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, follow the coolant manufacturer's instructions to maintain minimum antifreeze protection to -34°F (-37°C). The use of other types of coolant solutions other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent may damage the engine cooling system.
. The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) (or equivalent coolant), including Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use of non-distilled water will reduce the life expectancy of the factoryfill coolant. Refer to the "9. Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual for more details.

mended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
It is recommended that major cooling system repairs be performed by a NISSAN dealer. The service procedures can be found in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual.
Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheating.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly. Check your local regulations.

JVM0733X
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the reservoir when the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below MIN , open the reservoir tank cap and add coolant up to the MAX
level. If the reservoir tank is empty, check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir tank up to the MAX level .
Tighten the cap securely after adding engine coolant.
If the cooling system requires coolant frequently, have it checked. It is recom-

WARNING
. To avoid the danger of being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot.
. Never remove the radiator cap or coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator.
. Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.
. Keep coolant out of reach of children and pets.

Do-it-yourself 8-5

ENGINE OIL

JVM0728X
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake.
2. Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature.
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 15 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Reinsert it all the way.
5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level. It should be within the range . If the oil level is below , remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the open-
8-6 Do-it-yourself

ing. Do not overfill . 6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick. It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions.
CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly. Operating the engine with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND FILTER
Vehicle set-up
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake.
2. Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature.
3. Turn the engine off and wait more than 15 minutes.
4. Raise and support the vehicle using a suitable floor jack and safety jack stands. . Place the safety jack stands under the vehicle jack-up points. . A suitable adapter should be attached to the jack stand saddle.
5. Remove the engine undercover. . Remove the bolts that hold the undercover in place.
CAUTION
Make sure the correct lifting and support points are used to avoid vehicle damage.

SDI2528
Engine oil and filter
1. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug.
2. Remove the oil filler cap. 3. Remove the drain plug with a
wrench and completely drain the oil.
CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot.
. Waste oil must be disposed of properly.

. Check your local regulations. 4. (Perform steps 4 to 7 only when the
engine oil filter change is needed.) Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench. Remove the oil filter by turning it by hand. 5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface with a clean rag.
CAUTION
Be sure to remove any old rubber gasket remaining on the mounting surface of the engine. Failure to do so could lead to engine damage.
6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil.
7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten additionally more than 2/3 turn. Oil filter tightening torque: 11 to 15 ft-lb (15 to 21 N·m)
8. Clean and re-install the drain plug with a new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench. Drain plug tightening torque: 22 to 29 ft-lb (29 to 39 N·m)

Do not use excessive force. 9. Refill engine with recommended oil
and install the oil filler cap securely.
CAUTION
The dipstick must be inserted in place to prevent oil spillage from the dipstick hole while filling the engine with oil.
See "Capacities and recommended fluids/lubricants" (P.10-2) for drain and refill capacity. The drain and refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. Always use the dipstick to determine the proper amount of oil in the engine. 10. Start the engine and check for leakage around the drain plug and the oil filter. Correct as required. 11. Turn the engine off and wait more than 15 minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.
Do-it-yourself 8-7

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID (ATF) POWER STEERING FLUID

After the operation
1. Install the engine undercover into position using the bolts.
2. Lower the vehicle carefully to the ground.
3. Dispose of waste oil and filter properly.
WARNING
. Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer.
. Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.
. Keep used engine oil out of reach of children.

When checking or replacement is required, we recommend a NISSAN dealer for servicing.
CAUTION
. It is recommended that you use only Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. Do not mix with other fluids.
. Using automatic transmission fluid (ATF) other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF may cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission. Damage caused by use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.

SDI1765A
Check the fluid level in the reservoir.
The fluid level should be checked using the HOT range ( : HOT MAX., : HOT MIN.) at fluid temperatures of 122 to 176°F (50 to 80°C) or using the COLD range ( : COLD MAX., : COLD MIN.) at fluid temperatures of 32 to 86°F (0 to 30°C).
If the fluid is below the MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Remove the cap and fill through the opening.

8-8 Do-it-yourself

CAUTION
. Do not overfill. . Use Genuine NISSAN PSF or
equivalent.

BRAKE FLUID
For further brake fluid specification information, see "Capacities and recommended fluids/lubricants" (P.10-2).
WARNING
. Use only new fluid from a sealed container. Old, inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake system. The use of improper fluids can damage the brake system and affect the vehicle's stopping ability.
. Be sure to clean the filler cap before removing.
. Brake fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children.

. Do not spill the fluid on painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, wash the surface with water.

CAUTION
. Do not add brake fluid with the ignition switch in the ON position or the engine running. Doing so could make the brake fluid overfill when the ignition switch is turned off.

Do-it-yourself 8-9

WINDOW WASHER FLUID
NOTE:
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position after adding brake fluid up to the MAX line in the reservoir, the brake fluid decreases below the MAX line . This is normal.
If fluid must be added frequently, the system should be checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

SDI2513
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid is below the MIN line or the brake warning light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line
.
To add brake fluid:
1. Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position.
2. Depress and release the foot brake pedal more than 40 times.
3. Open the reservoir filler cap and add brake fluid up to the MAX line . (See "Capacities and recommended fluids/ lubricants" (P.10-2) for the recommended types of brake fluid.)
8-10 Do-it-yourself

SDI2517
WARNING
Antifreeze is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children and pets.
Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodically. Add window washer fluid when the low window washer fluid warning illuminates. To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift the cap off the reservoir tank and pour the window washer fluid into the tank opening.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the mixture ratio.
Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving conditions require an increased amount of window washer fluid.
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent.
CAUTION
. Do not substitute engine antifreeze coolant for window washer solution. This may result in damage to the paint.
. Do not fill the window washer reservoir tank with washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the window washer reservoir tank.
. Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer's recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the window washer reservoir tank. Do

not use the window washer reservoir tank to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water.

BATTERY
. Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Clean the battery with a solution of baking soda and water.
. Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened.
. If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal cable to prevent discharging it.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as: 1. Installation or extended use of elec-
tronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/ or only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health.
WARNING
. Do not expose the battery to flames or electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas generated by the battery is explosive. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, Do-it-yourself 8-11

eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention.
. Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in the battery is low. Low battery fluid can cause a higher load on the battery which can generate heat, reduce battery life, and in some cases lead to an explosion.
. When working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry.
. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
. Keep the battery out of the reach of children.

DI0137MA
Check the fluid level in each cell (Remove the battery cover if it is necessary). It should be between the UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL lines.
If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled water to bring the level to the indicator in each filler opening. Do not overfill.

SDI1480C
1. Remove the cell plugs .
2. Add distilled water up to the UPPER LEVEL line.
If the side of the battery is not clear, check the distilled water level by looking directly above the cell; the condition indicates OK and the conditions needs more to be added.
3. Tighten cell plugs .
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level.

8-12 Do-it-yourself

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM DRIVE BELTS

JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, see "Jump starting" (P.6-12). If the engine does not start by jump starting, the battery may have to be replaced. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

CAUTION
. Do not ground accessories directly to the battery terminal. Doing so will bypass the variable voltage control system and the vehicle battery may not charge completely.
. Use electrical accessories with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.
The variable voltage control system measures the amount of electrical discharge from the battery and controls voltage generated by the generator.

1. Power steering fluid pump 2. Water pump 3. Alternator 4. Crankshaft pulley 5. Air conditioner compressor

SDI2533

WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position before servicing drive belts. The engine could rotate unexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect each belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is in poor condition or
Do-it-yourself 8-13

SPARK PLUGS

loose, have it replaced or adjusted. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
2. Have the belts checked regularly for condition and tension in accordance with the maintenance schedule shown in the "9. Maintenance and schedules" section.

WARNING
Be sure the engine and the ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely.
CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to remove the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs.

SDI2020
REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
If replacement is required, it is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Iridium-tipped spark plugs
It is not necessary to replace the iridiumtipped spark plugs as frequently as the conventional type spark plugs since they will last much longer. Follow the maintenance schedule shown in the "9. Maintenance and schedules" section, but do not reuse them by cleaning or regapping.
Always replace spark plugs with recommended or equivalent ones.

8-14 Do-it-yourself

AIR CLEANER

SDI2515
To remove the filter, release the lock pins and pull the unit upward .
The filter element should not be cleaned and reused. Replace it according to the maintenance schedule shown in the "9. Maintenance and schedules" section. When replacing the filter, wipe the inside of the air cleaner housing and the cover with a damp cloth.
WARNING
. Operating the engine with the air cleaner removed can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it

stops flame if the engine backfires. If it isn't there, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner removed, and be careful when working on the engine with the air cleaner removed.
. Never pour fuel into the throttle body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed. Doing so could result in serious injury.

Do-it-yourself 8-15

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

CLEANING
If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water.
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blade with clear water. If your windshield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper, replace the blades.
Worn windshield wiper blades can damage the windshield and impair driver vision.
When a washer nozzle is clogged
It is recommended you see a NISSAN dealer if a washer nozzle is clogged or any malfunction occurs. Do not attempt to clean the nozzle using a needle or a pin. Doing so may damage the nozzle.

REPLACING
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
1. Pull the wiper arm.
2. Push the release tab , and then move the wiper blade down the wiper arm while pushing the release tab to remove.
3. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm until a click sounds.
4. Rotate the wiper blade so the dimple is in the groove.

SDI2048
CAUTION
. After wiper blade replacement, return the wiper arm to its original position;
otherwise it may be damaged when the hood is opened. . Make sure the wiper blades contact the glass; otherwise the arm may be damaged from wind pressure.

8-16 Do-it-yourself

REAR WINDOW WIPER BLADES

BRAKES

It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer if checking or replacement is required.

If the brakes do not operate properly, have the brakes checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes.
The disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the brake pedal is applied.
WARNING
Have your brake system checked if the brake pedal height does not return to normal. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING
The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it will make a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion. This scraping sound will first occur only when the brake pedal is depressed. After more wear of the brake pad, the sound will always be heard even if the brake pedal is not depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear warning sound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions, occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system.
Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed. For additional information, see the maintenance schedule shown in the "9. Maintenance and schedules" section.
BRAKE BOOSTER
Check the brake booster function as follows:
1. With the engine off, depress and release the foot brake pedal more than 20 times. When the foot brake pedal movement (distance of travel) remains the same from one pedal application to the next, continue on to the next step.
2. While depressing the foot brake pedal, start the engine.
3. With the foot brake pedal depressed, stop the engine. Keep the pedal depressed for about 30 seconds.
4. Run the engine for 1 minute without depressing the foot brake pedal, then turn it off. Depress the foot brake pedal several times. The pedal travel distance will decrease gradually with
Do-it-yourself 8-17

FUSES
each depression as the hydraulic pressure decreases. If the brakes do not operate properly, have the brakes checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for repair.
8-18 Do-it-yourself

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

WARNING
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or electronic control units or cause a fire.

SDI2518

If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF or LOCK position and the headlights are off.
2. Open the engine hood and remove the cover on the battery.
3. Remove the fuse/fusible link holder cover , or .
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

SDI2532

Type A (if so equipped)

SDI1753

5. If the fuse is open , replace it with a new fuse . Spare fuses are stored in the passenger compartment fuse box.
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Fusible links
If any electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links. If any of these fusible links are melted, replace only with genuine NISSAN parts.

Type B (if so equipped)

SDI1754

Do-it-yourself 8-19

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
WARNING
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or electronic control units or cause a fire.

JVM0200X
headlights are off. 2. Open the fuse box lid. 3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller
.

SDI1754
4. If the fuse is open, replace it with a new fuse.
5. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Spare fuses are stored in the fuse box.

If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse. 1. Be sure the ignition switch is pushed
to the OFF or LOCK position and the
8-20 Do-it-yourself

INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT

SDI2704
Extended storage fuse switch (if so equipped)
To reduce battery drain, the extended storage fuse switch comes from the factory switched off. Prior to delivery of your vehicle, the switch is pushed in (switched on) and should always remain on.
If the extended storage fuse switch is not pushed in (switched on), the "Shipping Mode On, Push Storage Fuse" warning may appear on the vehicle information display (if so equipped). See "Vehicle information display" (P.2-20).
If any electrical equipment does not operate, remove the extended storage

fuse switch and check for an open fuse.
NOTE:
If the extended storage fuse switch malfunctions or if the fuse is open, it is not necessary to replace the switch. In this case, remove the extended storage fuse switch and replace it with a new fuse of the same rating.
How to remove the extended storage fuse switch:
1. To remove the extended storage fuse switch, be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position.
2. Be sure the headlights are off. (See "Headlight switch" (P.2-47), "Intelligent Auto Headlight system (Type A)" (P.247), or "Autolight system (Type B)" (P.248).)
3. Remove the fuse box cover.
4. Pinch the locking tabs found on each side of the storage fuse switch.
5. Pull the storage fuse switch straight out from the fuse box .

CAUTION
Be careful not to allow children to swallow the battery and removed parts.
Do-it-yourself 8-21

SDI2451
Replace the battery as follows: 1. Release the lock knob at the back of
the Intelligent Key and remove the mechanical key. 2. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of the corner and twist it to separate the upper part from the lower part.
8-22 Do-it-yourself

Use a cloth to protect the casing.
3. Replace the battery with a new one.
Recommended battery: CR2025 or equivalent.
. Do not touch the internal circuit and electric terminals as it could cause a malfunction.
. Hold the battery by the edges. Holding the battery across the contact points will seriously deplete the storage capacity.
. Make sure that the + side faces the bottom of the case.

SDI2452
4. Align the tips of the upper and lower parts , and then push them together until it is securely closed .
5. Push the buttons two or three times to check its operation.
If you need any assistance for replacement, it is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Do-it-yourself 8-23

LIGHTS 8-24 Do-it-yourself

WAI0249X

1. Front parking light/Daytime running light 2. Headlight (low-beam) 3. Front side marker light 4. Front map light 5. Front turn signal light 6. Front fog light (if so equipped) 7. Headlight (high beam) 8. Puddle light (if so equipped) 9. Side turn signal light (if so equipped) 10. Tail/Stop light 11. Cargo light 12. High-mounted stop light 13. Rear personal light 14. Rear turn signal light 15. Stop light 16. Back-up light 17. License plate light 18. Rear side marker light

HEADLIGHTS
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If large drops of water collect inside the lens, it is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Replacing
If LED headlight replacement is required, it is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Do-it-yourself 8-25

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Headlight

Wattage (W)

Bulb No.

High/Low beams*

LED

Front turn signal light

LED

Fog light (if so equipped)

LED

Front parking light*/Daytime running light*

LED

Front side marker light*

LED

Side turn signal light* (if so equipped)

LED

Rear combination light

tail* back-up stop side marker* turn signal License plate light* Puddle light* (if so equipped) Map light* Rear personal light Cargo light Vanity mirror light
Footwell light* (if so equipped) Glove box light* High-mounted stop light*

LED

W5W

LED

1.8

1.4

LED

*: It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for replacement.
NOTE: Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest information about parts.

8-26 Do-it-yourself

Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C, D, E or F. When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/or cover.

Rear personal light

SDI2031

Vanity mirror light

SDI2032

SDI1679

Cargo light

SDI1729

Do-it-yourself 8-27

WHEELS AND TIRES

If you have a flat tire, see "Flat tire" (P.63).
TIRE PRESSURE Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit and the "Tire Pressure Low Add Air" warning appears in the vehicle information display, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, a flat tire while driving). For more details, see "Low tire pressure warning light" (P.2-16), "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" (P.5-5) and "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) " (P.63).
8-28 Do-it-yourself

Tire inflation pressure
Check the pressure of the tires (including the spare) often and always prior to long distance trips. The recommended tire pressure specifications are shown on the Tire and Loading Information label under the "Cold Tire Pressure" heading. The Tire and Loading Information label is affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire pressures should be checked regularly because:
. Most tires naturally lose air over time.
. Tires can lose air suddenly when driven over potholes or other objects or if the vehicle strikes a curb while parking.
The tire pressures should be checked when the tires are cold. The tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds.
TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert provides visual and audible signals

outside the vehicle for inflating the tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure. (See "TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert" (P.5-8).)
Incorrect tire pressure, including under inflation, may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling.
WARNING
. Improperly inflated tires can fail suddenly and cause an accident.
. The Gross Vehicle Weight rating (GVWR) is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The vehicle weight capacity is indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not load your vehicle beyond this capacity. Overloading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life, unsafe operating conditions due to premature tire failure, or unfavorable

handling characteristics and could also lead to a serious accident. Loading beyond the specified capacity may also result in failure of other vehicle components.
. Before taking a long trip, or whenever you heavily load your vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressures are at the specified level.
. For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Do-it-yourself 8-29

Tire and Loading Information label Seating capacity: The maximum number of occupants that can be seated in the vehicle. Vehicle load limit: See "Ve-
8-30 Do-it-yourself

SDI2496
hicle loading information" (P.10-15). Original size: The size of the tires originally installed on the vehicle at the factory.

Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to this pressure when the tires are cold. Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The recommended cold tire inflation is set by the manufacturer to provide the best balance of tire wear, vehicle handling, driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the vehicle's GVWR.
Tire size -- see "Tire labeling" (P.8-32).
Spare tire size or compact spare tire size (if so equipped)

SDI1949
Checking the tire pressure
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the tire.
2. Press the pressure gauge squarely onto the valve stem. Do not press too hard or force the valve stem sideways, or air will escape. If the hissing sound of air escaping from the tire is heard while checking the pressure, reposition the gauge to eliminate this leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.
4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem and compare it to the specification shown on the Tire and Loading Information label.
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too much air is added, press the core of the valve stem briefly with the tip of the gauge stem to release pressure. Recheck the pressure and add or release air as needed.
6. Install the valve stem cap.
7. Check the pressure of all other tires, including the spare.
8. Check the pressure when driving the vehicle at speeds of 100 MPH (160 km/h) or higher where it is legal to do so.
WARNING
. Driving at high speeds, 100 MPH (160 km/h) or higher sustained where it is legal to do so, can cause tires to have excessive heat

build up, which may result in a tire failure causing loss of control, crash, injuries or even death. Some high-speed rated tires require inflation pressure adjustment for high-speed operation. When speed limits and road conditions allow vehicle driving at high speeds, make sure tires are rated to support high speed operation, tires are in optimal conditions and pressure is adjusted to correct cold inflation pressure for high speed operation. . Tires require adjustment to the inflation pressure when driving the vehicle at speeds of 100 MPH (160 km/h) or higher where it is legal to do so. See recommended tire inflation chart for correct operating pressure. . After vehicle high speed operation has ended, readjust the tire pressure to the recommended cold inflation pressure. (See "Checking the tire pressure" (P.831).)
Do-it-yourself 8-31

Size

Cold Tire Inflation Pres-
sure

Front Original Tire: 35 psi, 240 265/70R18 116H kPa

Front Original Tire: 35 psi, 240 P275/60R20 114H kPa

Front Original Tire: 35 psi, 240 P275/50R22 111H kPa

Rear Original Tire: 35 psi, 240 265/70R18 116H kPa

Rear Original Tire: P275/60R20 114H
Rear Original Tire: P275/50R22 111H
Spare Tire: 265/70R18 116H
Spare Tire: 265/70R18 116M

35 psi, 240 kPa
35 psi, 240 kPa
35 psi, 240 kPa
51 psi, 350 kPa

Recommended tire inflation pressures at speeds of 100 MPH (160 km/h) or higher where it is legal to do so.

Size

Cold Tire Inflation Pres-
sure

Front Original Tire: 36 psi, 250 P275/60R20 114H kPa

Front Original Tire: 41 psi, 280 P275/50R22 111H kPa

Rear Original Tire: 36 psi, 250 P275/60R20 114H kPa

Rear Original Tire: 41 psi, 280 P275/50R22 111H kPa

SDI1575
Example
TIRE LABELING
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides the tire identification number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall.

8-32 Do-it-yourself

SDI1606
Example
Tire size (example: P215/60R16 94H)
1. P: The "P" indicates the tire is designed for passenger vehicles. (Not all tires have this information.)
2. Three-digit number (215): This number gives the width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge.
3. Two-digit number (60): This number, known as the aspect ratio, gives the tire's ratio of

height to width.
4. R: The "R" stands for radial.
5. Two-digit number (16): This number is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.
6. Two- or three-digit number (94): This number is the tire's load index. It is a measurement of how much weight each tire can support. You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by law.
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not drive the vehicle faster than the tire speed rating.

JVM0694X Example
TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX XXXX) 1. DOT: Abbreviation for the "Department of Transportation". The symbol can be placed above, below or to the left or right of the Tire Identification Number. 2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer's identification mark
Do-it-yourself 8-33

3. Two-digit code: Tire size
4. Three-digit code: Tire type code (Optional)
5. Four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 3103 means the 31st week of 2003. If these numbers are missing, then look on the other sidewall of the tire.
Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire.
Tire manufacturers also must indicate the materials in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
Maximum permissible inflation pressure
This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceed the
8-34 Do-it-yourself

maximum permissible inflation pressure.
Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory installed tire.
Term of "tubeless" or "tube type"
Indicates whether the tire requires an inner tube ("tube type") or not ("tubeless").
The word "radial"
The word "radial" is shown, if the tire has radial structure.
Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

Other tire-related terminology:
In addition to the many terms that are defined throughout this section, Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.
TYPES OF TIRES
WARNING
. When changing or replacing tires, be sure all four tires are of the same type (Example: Summer, All Season or Snow) and construction. A NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type, size, speed rating and availability.

. Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tires, and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.
. Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.
. For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
All season tires
NISSAN specifies all season tires on some models to provide good performance all year, including snowy and icy road conditions. All Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S (Mud and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than All Season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.

Summer tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating M&S on the tire sidewall.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels.
Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires. If you do not, it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Generally, snow tires will have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.
If you install snow tires, they must be the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels.
For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded

tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be poorer than that of nonstudded snow tires.
TIRE CHAINS
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are the proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturer's suggestions. Use only SAE Class S chains. Class "S" chains are used on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles that can use Class "S" chains are designed to meet the SAE standard minimum clearances between the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body component required to accommodate the use of a winter traction device (tire chains or cables). The minimum clearances are determined using the factory equipped tire size. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In
Do-it-yourself 8-35

addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/ or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected. Tire chains must be installed only on the rear wheels and not on the front wheels. Never install tire chains on the full-size temporary use only spare tire (if so equipped). Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with tire chains in such conditions can cause damage to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to some overstress.
8-36 Do-it-yourself

SDI1662
CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
Tire rotation NISSAN recommends rotating the tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). (See "Flat tire" (P.6-3) for tire replacing procedures.)
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque: 98 ft-lb (133 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to the specification at

all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to the specification at each tire rotation interval.
WARNING
. After rotating the tires, check and adjust the tire pressure.
. Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).
. Do not include the full-size temporary use only spare tire (if so equipped) in the tire rotation.
. For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

SDI1663
1. Wear indicator 2. Wear indicator location
mark
Tire wear and damage
WARNING
. Tires should be periodically inspected for wear, cracking, bulging or objects caught in the tread. If excessive wear, cracks, bulging or deep cuts are found, the tire(s) should

be replaced.
. The original tires have builtin tread wear indicators. When wear indicators are visible, the tire(s) should be replaced.
. Tires degrade with age and use. Have tires, including the spare, over 6 years old checked by a qualified technician, because some tire damage may not be obvious. Replace the tires as necessary to prevent tire failure and possible personal injury.
. Improper service of the spare tire may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary to repair the spare tire, it is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
. For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety

Information" (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
Replacing wheels and tires
When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread design, speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped. (See "Specifications" (P.10-8) for recommended types and sizes of tires and wheels.)
WARNING
. The use of tires other than those recommended or the mixed use of tires of different brands, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride, braking, handling, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper height. Some of these effects may lead to accidents and could result in serious personal injury.
. For Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models, if your vehicle was originally equipped with 4 tires that were
Do-it-yourself 8-37

the same size and you are only replacing 2 of the 4 tires, install the new tires on the rear axle. Placing new tires on the front axle may cause loss of vehicle control in some driving conditions and cause an accident and personal injury.
. If the wheels are changed for any reason, always replace with wheels which have the same offset dimension. Wheels of a different off-set could cause premature tire wear, degrade vehicle handling characteristics and/or interference with the brake discs/drums. Such interference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and/or early brake pad/shoe wear. See "Wheels and tires" (P.10-9) for wheel off-set dimensions.
. Since the spare tire is not equipped with the TPMS, when a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as
8-38 Do-it-yourself

possible. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for these services.
. Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.
. The TPMS sensor may be damaged if it is not handled correctly. Be careful when handling the TPMS sensor.
. When replacing the TPMS sensor, the ID registration may be required. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for ID registration.
. Do not use a valve stem cap that is not specified by NISSAN. The valve stem cap may become stuck.
. Be sure that the valve stem caps are correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve may be clogged up with dirt and cause a malfunction or loss of pressure.
. Do not install a damaged or deformed wheel or tire even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail without warning.

. The use of retread tire is not recommended.
. For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) models
CAUTION
. Always use tires of the same type, size, brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), and tread pattern on all four wheels. Failure to do so may result in a circumference difference between tires on the front and rear axles which will cause excessive tire wear and may damage the transmission, transfer case and differential gears.
. ONLY use spare tires specified for the 4WD model.
If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommended that all four tires be replaced with tires of the same size, brand,

construction and tread pattern. The tire pressure and wheel alignment should also be checked and corrected as necessary. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Wheel balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, they should be balanced as required.
Wheel balance service should be performed with the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle could lead to mechanical damage.
For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the NISSAN Warranty Information Booklet.
Care of wheels
See "Cleaning exterior" (P.7-2) for details about care of the wheels.

Spare tire
Since the spare tire is not equipped with the TPMS, when a spare tire is mounted (TEMPORARY USE ONLY or conventional), the TPMS will not function.
Spare tire (FULL-SIZE TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire) (Applies ONLY to vehicles equipped with P275/50R22 or P275/60R20 tires):
Observe the following precautions if the full-size temporary use only spare tire must be used, otherwise your vehicle could be damaged or involved in an accident.
WARNING
. The full-size temporary use only spare tire should be used for emergency use. It should be replaced with the standard tire at the first opportunity to avoid possible tire or differential damage.
. Drive carefully while the spare tire is installed. Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking while driving. The vehicle driving performance may be affected when driving on wet or snow covered roads.

. When the spare tire is installed, the following systems may not work correctly.
-- Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
-- Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) System
. Periodically check spare tire inflation pressure. Always keep the spare tire inflated to the pressure specification shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. For Tire and Loading Information label location, see "Tire and Loading Information label" in the index of this manual.
. With the spare tire installed do not drive your vehicle at speeds faster than 70 MPH (112 km/h).
. When driving on roads covered with snow or ice, the spare tire should be used on the front wheels and original tire used on the rear wheels (drive wheels). Use tire chains only on the two rear original tires.
. Do not use the spare tire on other vehicles.
. Do not use more than one spare tire at the same time.
Do-it-yourself 8-39

CAUTION
Do not use tire chains on the spare tire. Tire chains will not fit properly and may cause damage to the vehicle.
8-40 Do-it-yourself

9 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance requirement ..................................................... 9-2 General maintenance ......................................................... 9-2 Scheduled maintenance .................................................. 9-2 Where to go for service .................................................... 9-2
General maintenance ................................................................ 9-2 Explanation of maintenance items ......................... 9-2

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ...... 9-5 Emission control system maintenance ............. 9-5 Chassis and body maintenance .............................. 9-6
Maintenance schedules .......................................................... 9-7 Additional maintenance items for severe operating conditions ........................................................ 9-7
Standard maintenance ........................................................... 9-8

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENT

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

Some day-to-day and regular maintenance is essential to maintain your vehicle in good mechanical condition, as well as its emission and engine performance. It is the owner's responsibility to make sure that the scheduled maintenance, as well as general maintenance, is performed. As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives the proper maintenance. You are a vital link in the maintenance chain.
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal day-to-day operation. They are essential for proper vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to perform these procedures regularly as prescribed. Performing general maintenance checks requires minimal mechanical skill and only a few general automotive tools. These checks or inspections can be done by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, a NISSAN dealer.
9-2 Maintenance and schedules

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
The maintenance items listed in this section are required to be serviced at regular intervals. However, under severe driving conditions, additional or more frequent maintenance will be required.
WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE
If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction, have the systems checked and serviced. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips and training programs. They are completely qualified to work on NISSAN vehicles before work begins.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, it is recommended that you ask your NISSAN dealer where the nearest NISSAN Certified Collision Center is located, or go to http:// collision.nissanusa.com.
You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer's service department can perform the service needed to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle.

During the normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle, general maintenance should be performed regularly as prescribed in this section. If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to check for the cause and have it checked promptly. In addition, it is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are required.
When performing any checks or maintenance work, closely observe "Maintenance precautions" (P.8-2) of this manual.
EXPLANATION OF MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Additional information on the following items with "*" is found in the "8. Do-ityourself" section of this manual.
Outside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified.
Doors and engine hood: Check that all doors and the engine hood, operate properly. Also ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links if necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released.
When driving in areas using road salt or

other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlight aim.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing, and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary.
Tire rotation*: Rotate tires at the specified interval shown in the maintenance schedule.
Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) transmitter components: Replace the TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.
Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving on a straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment.

If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be needed.
For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the NISSAN Warranty Information Booklet.
Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage. Have a damaged windshield repaired by a qualified repair facility. It is recommended that you have a damaged windshield repaired by a NISSAN dealer, or a NISSAN Certified Collision Center. To locate a collision center in your area, refer to http://collision.nissanusa.com.
Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.
Inside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when performing scheduled maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc.
Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.

Automatic transmission P (Park) mechanism: On a fairly steep hill, check that your vehicle is held securely with the shift lever in the P (Park) position without applying any brakes.
Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down further than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to stop, have your vehicle checked immediately. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.
Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied.
Parking brake: Check the parking brake operation regularly. The vehicle should be securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake applied. If the parking brake needs adjusted, it is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Seats: Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure they operate smoothly and that all latches lock securely in every position. Check that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and that the locks (if so equipped) hold securely in all latched positions.
Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat
Maintenance and schedules 9-3

belt system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjuster and retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and are installed securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.
Steering wheel: Check for changes in the steering conditions, such as excessive free play, hard steering or strange noises.
Warning lights and chimes: Make sure that all warning lights and chimes are operating properly.
Windshield defroster: Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner.
Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak.
Under the hood and vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (for example, each time you check the engine oil or refuel).
Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe condition require frequent checks of the battery fluid level.
9-4 Maintenance and schedules

NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as: 1. Installation or extended use of elec-
tronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/ or only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health.
Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake fluid level is between the MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir.
Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level when the engine is cold.
Engine drive belts*: Make sure that no belt is frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
Engine oil level*: Check the level after parking the vehicle on a level spot and turning off the engine. Wait more than 15 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.
Exhaust system: Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust system in-

spected. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. (See "Precautions when starting and driving" (P.54) for exhaust gas (carbon monoxide).)
Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident, check for the cause and have it corrected immediately.
Power steering fluid level* and lines: Check the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc.
Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose connections.
Underbody: The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these substances, otherwise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around the exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, being careful to clean those areas where mud and dirt may accumulate. For additional informa-

tion, see "Cleaning exterior" (P.7-2).
Windshield washer fluid*: Check that there is adequate fluid in the reservoir.

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
The following descriptions are provided to give you a better understanding of the scheduled maintenance items that should be regularly checked or replaced. The maintenance schedule indicates at which mileage/time intervals each item requires service.
In addition to scheduled maintenance, your vehicle requires that some items be checked during normal day-to-day operation. Refer to "General maintenance" (P.9-2).
Items marked with "*" are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. You are not required to perform maintenance on these items in order to maintain the warranties which come with your vehicle. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.
When applicable, additional information can be found in the "8. Do-it yourself" section of this manual.
NOTE:
NISSAN does not advocate the use of non-OEM approved aftermarket flushing systems and strongly advises against performing these services on a NISSAN product. Many of the aftermarket flushing systems use non-OEM approved chemicals or solvents, the use of which has not been validated by NISSAN.

For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids, grease, and refrigerant, refer to "Capacities and recommended fluids/ lubricants" (P.10-2) of this manual.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Drive belts*:
Check engine drive belts for wear, fraying or cracking and for proper tension. Replace any damaged drive belts.
Engine air filter:
Replace at specified intervals. When driving for prolonged periods in dusty conditions, check/replace the filter more frequently.
Engine coolant*:
Replace coolant at the specified interval. When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with the proper mixture. (Refer to "Engine cooling system" (P.8-4) to determine the proper mixture for your area.)
NOTE:
Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the recommended service interval of the coolant.
Engine oil and oil filter:
Maintenance and schedules 9-5

Replace engine oil and oil filter at the specified intervals. For recommended oil grade and viscosity refer to "Capacities and recommended fluids/lubricants" (P.10-2). Engine valve clearance*: Inspect only if valve noise increases. Adjust valve clearance if necessary. Evaporative Emissions Control Vapor Lines*: Check vapor lines for leaks or looseness. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary. Fuel filter: Periodic maintenance is not required. (intank type filter) Fuel lines*: Check the fuel hoses, piping and connections for leaks, looseness, or deterioration. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary. Spark plugs: Replace at specified intervals. Install new plugs of the type as originally equipped.
9-6 Maintenance and schedules

CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
Brake lines and cables:
Visually inspect for proper installation. Check for chafing, cracks, deterioration, and signs of leaking. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.
Brake pads and rotors:
Check for wear, deterioration and fluid leaks. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.
Exhaust system:
Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks, cracks, deterioration, and damage. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.
Propeller shaft(s):
Check for damage, looseness, and grease leakage.
In-cabin microfilter:
Replace at specified intervals. When driving for prolonged periods in dusty conditions, replace the filter more frequently.
Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts:
Check for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil or grease. Under severe driving conditions, inspect more frequently.
Tire rotation:
Rotate tires at the specified interval. When

rotating tires, check for damage and uneven wear. Replace if necessary.
Transmission fluid/oil, differential oil:
Visually inspect for signs of leakage at specified intervals.
Off-road maintenance:
Check the following items frequently whenever you drive off-road through deep sand, mud or water:
. Brake pads and rotors . Brake linings and drums . Brake lines and hoses . Differential, transmission and transfer
case oil . Steering linkage . Propeller shaft(s) and front drive
shafts . Engine air filter . Clutch housing drain (4WD models
only)

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

To help ensure smooth, safe and economical driving, NISSAN provides two maintenance schedules that may be used, depending upon the conditions in which you usually drive. These schedules contain both distance and time intervals, up to 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96 months. For most people, the odometer reading will indicate when service is needed. However, if you drive very little, your vehicle should be serviced at the regular time intervals shown in the schedule.
After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96 months, continue maintenance at the same mileage/time intervals.
ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS FOR SEVERE OPERATING CONDITIONS
Additional maintenance items for severe operating conditions; should be performed on vehicles that are driven under especially demanding conditions. Additional maintenance items should be performed if you primarily operate your vehicle under the following conditions:
. Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8 km).
. Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing.

. Operating in hot weather in stop-andgo "rush hour" traffic.
. Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police, taxi or door-to-door delivery use.
. Driving in dusty conditions.
. Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread roads.
. Towing a trailer, or using a camper or car-top carrier.
If your vehicle is mainly operated under the severe conditions, follow the severe maintenance intervals shown in the maintenance schedule.
NOTE:
For vehicles operated in Canada, both standard and severe maintenance items should be performed at every interval.

Maintenance and schedules 9-7

STANDARD MAINTENANCE

The following shows the maintenance schedule. Choose the maintenance schedule needed based on your vehicle driving conditions. After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96 months, continue maintenance at the same mileage/time interval.

5,000 Miles/6 Months/8,000 Km
Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval. Severe maintenance: . Inspect brake pads and rotors . Inspect exhaust system . Inspect propeller shaft (4WD models) . Inspect drive shaft boots (4WD models) . Inspect steering gear and linkage . Inspect axle and suspension parts . Replace engine oil and oil filter

7,500 Miles/6 Months/12,000 Km
Standard maintenance: . Replace engine oil and filter . Perform tire rotation Severe maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

10,000 Miles/12 Months/16,000 Km
Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval. Severe maintenance: . Inspect brake pads and rotors . Inspect exhaust system . Inspect propeller shaft (4WD models) . Inspect drive shaft boots (4WD models) . Inspect steering gear and linkage . Inspect axle and suspension parts . Replace engine oil and oil filter . Replace brake fluid

9-8 Maintenance and schedules

15,000 Miles/12 Months/24,000 Km
Standard maintenance: . Inspect brake lines and cables . Inspect brake pads and rotors . Inspect propeller shaft (4WD models) . Inspect drive shaft boots (4WD models) . Inspect transfer fluid . Inspect differential gear oil . Replace engine oil and oil filter . Replace in-cabin microfilter . Perform tire rotation . Lubricate propeller shaft grease (4WD
models)
Severe maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

15,000 Miles/18 Months/24,000
Km
Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval. Severe maintenance: . Inspect brake pads and rotors . Inspect exhaust system . Inspect propeller shaft (4WD models) . Inspect drive shaft boots (4WD models) . Inspect steering gear and linkage . Inspect axle and suspension parts . Replace engine oil and oil filter

20,000 Miles/24 Months/32,000
Km
Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval. Severe maintenance: . Inspect brake pads and rotors . Inspect exhaust system . Inspect propeller shaft (4WD models) . Inspect drive shaft boots (4WD models) . Inspect steering gear and linkage . Inspect axle and suspension parts . Replace engine oil and oil filter . Replace brake fluid . Replace transfer fluid . Replace differential gear oil

Maintenance and schedules 9-9

22,500 Miles/18 Months/36,000
Km
Standard maintenance: . Inspect Intelligent Key battery . Replace engine oil and oil filter . Perform tire rotation Severe maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

25,000 Miles/30 Months/40,000
Km
Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval. Severe maintenance: . Inspect brake pads and rotors . Inspect exhaust system . Inspect propeller shaft (4WD models) . Inspect drive shaft boots (4WD models) . Inspect steering gear and linkage . Inspect axle and suspension parts . Replace engine oil and oil filter

30,000 Miles/24 Months/48,000
Km
Standard maintenance: . Inspect brake lines and cables . Inspect brake pads and rotors . Inspect EVAP vapor lines . Inspect fuel lines . Inspect exhaust system . Inspect propeller shaft (4WD models) . Inspect drive shaft boots (4WD models) . Inspect steering gear and linkage . Inspect axle and suspension parts

9-10 Maintenance and schedules

. Inspect transfer fluid . Inspect differential gear oil . Replace air cleaner filter (1) . Replace brake fluid . Replace engine oil and oil filter . Replace in-cabin microfilter . Perform tire rotation . Lubricate propeller shaft grease (4WD
models) Severe maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval. (1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.

30,000 Miles/36 Months/48,000
Km
Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval. Severe maintenance: . Inspect brake pads and rotors . Inspect exhaust system . Inspect propeller shaft (4WD models) . Inspect drive shaft boots (4WD models) . Inspect steering gear and linkage . Inspect axle and suspension parts . Replace engine oil and oil filter . Replace brake fluid

35,000 Miles/42 Months/56,000
Km
Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval. Severe maintenance: . Inspect brake pads and rotors . Inspect exhaust system . Inspect propeller shaft (4WD models) . Inspect drive shaft boots (4WD models) . Inspect steering gear and linkage . Inspect axle and suspension parts . Replace engine oil and oil filter

Maintenance and schedules 9-11

37,500 Miles/30 Months/60,000
Km
Standard maintenance: . Replace engine oil and oil filter . Perform tire rotation Severe maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

40,000 Miles/48 Months/64,000
Km
Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval. Severe maintenance: . Inspect brake pads and rotors . Inspect exhaust system . Inspect propeller shaft (4WD models) . Inspect drive shaft boots (4WD models) . Inspect steering gear and linkage . Inspect axle and suspension parts . Replace engine oil and oil filter . Replace brake fluid . Replace transfer fluid . Replace differential gear oil

45,000 Miles/36 Months/72,000
Km
Standard maintenance: . Inspect brake lines and cables . Inspect brake pads and rotors . Inspect propeller shaft (4WD models) . Inspect drive shaft boots (4WD models) . Inspect transfer fluid . Inspect differential gear oil . Replace engine oil and oil filter . Replace in-cabin microfilter . Replace Intelligent Key battery . Perform tire rotation . Lubricate propeller shaft grease (4WD
models) Severe maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

9-12 Maintenance and schedules

45,000 Miles/54 Months/72,000
Km
Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval. Severe maintenance: . Inspect brake pads and rotors . Inspect exhaust system . Inspect propeller shaft (4WD models) . Inspect drive shaft boots (4WD models) . Inspect steering gear and linkage . Inspect axle and suspension parts . Replace engine oil and oil filter

50,000 Miles/60 Months/80,000
Km
Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval. Severe maintenance: . Inspect brake pads and rotors . Inspect exhaust system . Inspect propeller shaft (4WD models) . Inspect drive shaft boots (4WD models) . Inspect steering gear and linkage . Inspect axle and suspension parts . Replace engine oil and oil filter . Replace brake fluid

52,500 Miles/42 Months/84,000
Km
Standard maintenance: . Replace engine oil and oil filter . Perform tire rotation Severe maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

Maintenance and schedules 9-13

55,000 Miles/66 Months/88,000
Km
Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval. Severe maintenance: . Inspect brake pads and rotors . Inspect exhaust system . Inspect propeller shaft (4WD models) . Inspect drive shaft boots (4WD models) . Inspect steering gear and linkage . Inspect axle and suspension parts . Replace engine oil and oil filter

60,000 Miles/48 Months/96,000
Km
Standard maintenance: . Inspect brake lines and cables . Inspect brake pads and rotors . Inspect drive belts (1) . Inspect EVAP vapor lines . Inspect fuel lines . Inspect exhaust system . Inspect propeller shaft (4WD models) . Inspect drive shaft boots (4WD models) . Inspect steering gear and linkage . Inspect axle and suspension parts . Inspect transfer fluid . Inspect differential gear oil

. Replace air cleaner filter (2) . Replace brake fluid . Replace engine oil and oil filter . Replace in-cabin microfilter . Perform tire rotation . Lubricate propeller shaft grease (4WD
models) Severe maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval. (1) Replace the drive belts if found damaged. (2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.

9-14 Maintenance and schedules

60,000 Miles/72 Months/96,000
Km
Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval. Severe maintenance: . Inspect brake pads and rotors . Inspect exhaust system . Inspect propeller shaft (4WD models) . Inspect drive shaft boots (4WD models) . Inspect steering gear and linkage . Inspect axle and suspension parts . Replace engine oil and oil filter . Replace brake fluid . Replace transfer fluid . Replace differential gear oil

65,000 Miles/78 Months/104,000
Km
Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval. Severe maintenance: . Inspect brake pads and rotors . Inspect exhaust system . Inspect propeller shaft (4WD models) . Inspect drive shaft boots (4WD models) . Inspect steering gear and linkage . Inspect axle and suspension parts . Replace engine oil and oil filter

67,500 Miles/54 Months/108,000
Km
Standard maintenance: . Replace engine oil and oil filter . Replace Intelligent Key battery . Perform tire rotation Severe maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

Maintenance and schedules 9-15

70,000 Miles/84 Months/112,000
Km
Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval. Severe maintenance: . Inspect brake pads and rotors . Inspect exhaust system . Inspect propeller shaft (4WD models) . Inspect drive shaft boots (4WD models) . Inspect steering gear and linkage . Inspect axle and suspension parts . Replace engine oil and oil filter . Replace brake fluid

75,000 Miles/60 Months/120,000
Km
Standard maintenance: . Inspect brake lines and cables . Inspect brake pads and rotors . Inspect drive belts (1) . Inspect propeller shaft (4WD models) . Inspect drive shaft boots (4WD models) . Inspect transfer fluid . Inspect differential gear oil . Replace engine oil and oil filter . Replace in-cabin microfilter . Perform tire rotation . Lubricate propeller shaft grease (4WD
models) Severe maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval. (1) Replace the drive belts if found damaged.

75,000 Miles/90 Months/120,000
Km
Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval. Severe maintenance: . Inspect brake pads and rotors . Inspect exhaust system . Inspect propeller shaft (4WD models) . Inspect drive shaft boots (4WD models) . Inspect steering gear and linkage . Inspect axle and suspension parts . Replace engine oil and oil filter

9-16 Maintenance and schedules

80,000 Miles/96 Months/128,000
Km
Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval. Severe maintenance: . Inspect brake pads and rotors . Inspect exhaust system . Inspect propeller shaft (4WD models) . Inspect drive shaft boots (4WD models) . Inspect steering gear and linkage . Inspect axle and suspension parts . Replace engine oil and oil filter . Replace brake fluid . Replace transfer fluid . Replace differential gear oil

82,500 Miles/66 Months/132,000
Km
Standard maintenance: . Replace engine oil and oil filter . Perform tire rotation Severe maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

85,000 Miles/102 Months/136,000
Km
Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval. Severe maintenance: . Inspect brake pads and rotors . Inspect exhaust system . Inspect propeller shaft (4WD models) . Inspect drive shaft boots (4WD models) . Inspect steering gear and linkage . Inspect axle and suspension parts . Replace engine oil and oil filter

Maintenance and schedules 9-17

90,000 Miles/72 Months/144,000
Km
Standard maintenance: . Inspect brake lines and cables . Inspect brake pads and rotors . Inspect drive belts (1) . Inspect EVAP vapor lines . Inspect fuel lines . Inspect exhaust system . Inspect propeller shaft (4WD models) . Inspect drive shaft boots (4WD models) . Inspect steering gear and linkage . Inspect axle and suspension parts . Inspect transfer fluid . Inspect differential gear oil

. Replace air cleaner filter (2) . Replace brake fluid . Replace engine oil and oil filter . Replace in-cabin microfilter . Replace Intelligent Key battery . Perform tire rotation . Lubricate propeller shaft grease (4WD
models) Severe maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval. (1) Replace the drive belts if found damaged. (2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.

90,000 Miles/108 Months/144,000
Km
Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval. Severe maintenance: . Inspect brake pads and rotors . Inspect exhaust system . Inspect propeller shaft (4WD models) . Inspect drive shaft boots (4WD models) . Inspect steering gear and linkage . Inspect axle and suspension parts . Replace engine oil and oil filter . Replace brake fluid

9-18 Maintenance and schedules

95,000 Miles/114 Months/152,000
Km
Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval. Severe maintenance: . Inspect brake pads and rotors . Inspect exhaust system . Inspect propeller shaft (4WD models) . Inspect drive shaft boots (4WD models) . Inspect steering gear and linkage . Inspect axle and suspension parts . Replace engine oil and oil filter

97,500 Miles/78 Months/156,000
Km
Standard maintenance: . Replace engine oil and oil filter . Perform tire rotation Severe maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

100,000 Miles/120 Months/160,000
Km
Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval. Severe maintenance: . Inspect brake pads and rotors . Inspect exhaust system . Inspect propeller shaft (4WD models) . Inspect drive shaft boots (4WD models) . Inspect steering gear and linkage . Inspect axle and suspension parts . Replace engine oil and oil filter . Replace brake fluid . Replace transfer fluid . Replace differential gear oil

Maintenance and schedules 9-19

105,000 Miles/84 Months/168,000
Km
Standard maintenance: . Inspect brake lines and cables . Inspect brake pads and rotors . Inspect drive belts (1) . Inspect propeller shaft (4WD models) . Inspect drive shaft boots (4WD models) . Inspect transfer fluid . Inspect differential gear oil . Replace engine coolant (2) . Replace engine oil and oil filter . Replace in-cabin microfilter . Replace spark plugs (3) . Perform tire rotation . Lubricate propeller shaft grease (4WD
models)

Severe maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval. (1) Replace the drive belts if found damaged. (2) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 60 months. (3) Replace spark plug when the plug gap exceeds 0.053 in (1.35 mm) even if within specified replacement mileage.

105,000 Miles/126 Months/168,000
Km
Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval. Severe maintenance: . Inspect brake pads and rotors . Inspect exhaust system . Inspect propeller shaft (4WD models) . Inspect drive shaft boots (4WD models) . Inspect steering gear and linkage . Inspect axle and suspension parts . Replace engine oil and oil filter

9-20 Maintenance and schedules

110,000 Miles/132 Months/176,000
Km
Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval. Severe maintenance: . Inspect brake pads and rotors . Inspect exhaust system . Inspect propeller shaft (4WD models) . Inspect drive shaft boots (4WD models) . Inspect steering gear and linkage . Inspect axle and suspension parts . Replace engine oil and oil filter . Replace brake fluid

112,500 Miles/90 Months/180,000
Km
Standard maintenance: . Replace engine oil and oil filter . Replace Intelligent Key battery . Perform tire rotation Severe maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval.

115,000 Miles/138 Months/184,000
Km
Standard maintenance: Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval. Severe maintenance: . Inspect brake pads and rotors . Inspect exhaust system . Inspect propeller shaft (4WD models) . Inspect drive shaft boots (4WD models) . Inspect steering gear and linkage . Inspect axle and suspension parts . Replace engine oil and oil filter

Maintenance and schedules 9-21

120,000 Miles/96 Months/192,000
Km
Standard maintenance: . Inspect brake lines and cables . Inspect brake pads and rotors . Inspect drive belts (1) . Inspect EVAP vapor lines . Inspect fuel lines . Inspect exhaust system . Inspect propeller shaft (4WD models) . Inspect drive shaft boots (4WD models) . Inspect steering gear and linkage . Inspect axle and suspension parts . Inspect transfer fluid . Inspect differential gear oil

9-22 Maintenance and schedules

10 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fluids/lubricants .................................... 10-2
Fuel information .................................................................. 10-4 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation ........ 10-6 Air conditioning system refrigerant and oil recommendations ....................................................... 10-7 Specifications ................................................................................ 10-8 Engine .......................................................................................... 10-8 Wheels and tires .................................................................. 10-9 Dimensions .......................................................................... 10-10 When traveling or registering in another country ..................................................................... 10-11 Vehicle identification .......................................................... 10-11 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate .............................................................................. 10-11 Vehicle identification number (chassis number) ............................................................. 10-11 Engine serial number ................................................... 10-12 F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ............. 10-12 Emission control information label .................. 10-12 Tire and loading information label ................... 10-13 Air conditioner specification label ..................... 10-13 Installing front license plate ......................................... 10-15

Vehicle loading information ......................................... 10-15 Terms ..................................................................................... 10-15 Vehicle load capacity ................................................ 10-17 Securing the load ......................................................... 10-18 Loading tips ...................................................................... 10-18 Measurement of weights ....................................... 10-19
Towing a trailer ...................................................................... 10-19 Maximum load limits ................................................. 10-19 Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)/ maximum Gross Axle Weight (GAW) .............. 10-21 Towing load/specification..................................... 10-23 Towing safety ................................................................ 10-24 Flat towing ......................................................................... 10-35
Uniform tire quality grading ........................................ 10-36 Treadwear .......................................................................... 10-36 Traction AA, A, B and C ........................................... 10-36 Temperature A, B and C ......................................... 10-36
Emission control system warranty ......................... 10-37 Reporting safety defects ................................................ 10-37 Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test ....................................................................................... 10-38 Event Data Recorders (EDR) ......................................... 10-39 Owner's Manual/Service Manual order information ................................................................. 10-40

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/LUBRICANTS

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure instructed in the "8. Do-it-yourself" section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Fluid type

Fuel
Engine oil*1
Drain and refill *1: For additional information, see "Changing engine oil and filter" (P.8-6).

With oil filter change Without oil filter change

Engine coolant with reservoir Automatic transmission fluid (ATF)

Transfer fluid
Front differential gear oil Rear differential gear oil Power steering fluid (PSF) Brake fluid
Multi-purpose grease Air conditioning system refrigerant
Air conditioning system oil

Metric Measure
98.4 L
6.5 L

Capacity (approximate)

US Measure

Imperial Measure

26 gal

21-5/8 gal

6-7/8 qt

5-3/4 qt

6.2 L

6-1/2 qt

5-1/2 qt

15.1 L --

16 qt --

13-1/4 qt --

Refill to the proper oil level according to the instructions in the "8. Do-it-yourself" section.

Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
See "Fuel information" (P.10-4).
Genuine "NISSAN Motor Oil 0W-20 SN" (or equivalent) is recommended.
If the above motor oil (or engine oil) is not available, a synthetic 0W-20 GF-5 SN motor oil (or engine oil) may be used. Damage caused by the use of motor oil (or engine oil) other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN's New Vehicle Limited Warranty. For additional information, see "Engine oil and oil filter recommendation" (P.10-6)
Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent
Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF or equivalent NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF (or
equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN automatic transmissions. Do not mix with other fluids. Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF may damage the automatic transmission. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under the NISSAN's New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Genuine NISSAN Transfer Fluid for ATX90A transfer Using transfer fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Transfer Fluid
may damage the transfer, which is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or equivalent conventional (non-synthetic) oil
Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super-S GL-5 synthetic 75W-90 or equivalent
Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent DEXRONTM VI type ATF may also be used.
Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*2 or equivalent DOT 3 *2: Available in mainland U.S.A through a NISSAN dealer.
NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)
HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) For additional information, see "Vehicle identification" (P.10-11) for
air conditioner specification label.
NISSAN A/C System Oil VC100YF (PAG) or equivalent

10-2 Technical and consumer information

Window washer fluid

Fluid type

Metric Measure
--

Capacity (approximate)

US Measure

Imperial Measure

Recommended Fluids/Lubricants Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner &
Antifreeze or equivalent

Technical and consumer information 10-3

FUEL INFORMATION
VK56VD engine
NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 96).
If unleaded premium gasoline is not available, you may use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI number (Research octane number 91), but you may notice a decrease in performance.
CAUTION
. Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect warranty coverage.
. Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst.
. Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can adversely
10-4 Technical and consumer information

affect the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle. Damage caused by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.
. Do not use fuel that contains the octane booster methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using fuel containing MMT may adversely affect vehicle performance and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel dispensers are labeled to indicate MMT content, so you may have to consult your gasoline retailer for more details. Note that Federal and California laws prohibit the use of MMT in reformulated gasoline.
. U.S. government regulations require ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.

Gasoline specifications
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifications where it is available. Many of the automobile manufacturers developed this specification to improve emission system and vehicle performance. Ask your service station manager if the gasoline meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifications.
Reformulated gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN supports efforts towards cleaner air and suggests that you use reformulated gasoline when available.
Gasoline containing oxygenates
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol with or without advertising their presence. NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, ask your service station manager.
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline,

please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and/or fuel system damage.
. The fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline.
. If an oxygenate-blend, excepting a methanol blend, is used, it should contain no more than 10% oxygenate. (MTBE may, however, be added up to 15%.)
. E-15 fuel contains more than 10% oxygenate. E-15 fuel will adversely affect the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle and should not be used. Damage caused by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.
. If a methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 5% methanol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It should also contain a suitable amount of appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors, such methanol blends may cause fuel system damage and/or vehicle performance problems. At this time,

sufficient data is not available to ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in NISSAN vehicles.
If any undesirable driveability problems such as engine stalling or hard hot starting are experienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.
Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage.
E-15 fuel
E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15% fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline. E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed to run on E-15 fuel. Do not use E15 in your vehicle. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified with small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.
E-85 fuel
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to

be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.
Fuel containing MMT
MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting additive. NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel may adversely affect vehicle performance, including the emissions control system. Note that while some fuel pumps label MMT content, not all do, so you may have to consult your gasoline retailer for more details.
Aftermarket fuel additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of any aftermarket fuel additives (Example: fuel injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvent or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine.

Technical and consumer information 10-5

Octane rating tips
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than recommended above can cause persistent, heavy spark knock. (Spark knock is a metallic rapping noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine damage. If you detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating, or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads, it is recommended you have a NISSAN dealer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN is not responsible.
Incorrect ignition timing will result in knocking, after-run or overheating. This in turn may cause excessive fuel consumption or damage to the engine. If any of the above symptoms are encountered, have your vehicle checked. It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.
However, now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is no cause for concern, because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load.

API certification mark
API service symbol
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATION
Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality, and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance, see "Capacities and recommended fluids/ lubricants" (P.10-2). NISSAN recommends the use of an energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel economy.
Select only engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) certification or International Lubricant Standar-

10-6 Technical and consumer information

JVT0342X
dization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE viscosity standard. These oils have the API certification mark on the front of the container. Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage.
Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives. The use of an oil additive is not necessary when the proper oil type is used and maintenance intervals are followed.
Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used.

Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature. Because of this, it is important that the engine oil viscosity be selected based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be operated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage.
Selecting the correct oil filter
Your new vehicle is equipped with a highquality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When replacing, use the genuine oil filter or its equivalent for the reason described in change intervals.
Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters. Oil and filter other than the specified quality, or oil and filter change intervals longer than recommended could reduce engine life. Damage to engines caused by improper maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the new NISSAN vehicle limited warranties.
Your engine was filled with a high quality engine oil when it was built. You do not

have to change the oil before the first recommended change interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle.
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND OIL RECOMMENDATIONS
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) and NISSAN A/C System Oil VC100YF (PAG) or the exact equivalents.
CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or oil will cause severe damage to the air conditioning system and will require the replacement of all air conditioner system components.

and safe operation (SAE J2845). A NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioner system refrigerant. Only new and SAEJ2842 certified evaporator(s) shall be used as replacement parts.
A damaged or leaking air conditioning evaporator shall never be repaired or replaced with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle. To replace a damaged or leaking evaporator, use only new and SAE J2842 certified evaporator (s). It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air conditioner system.

The refrigerant HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) in your NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth's ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the earth's atmosphere, certain government regulations require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioner system service. Air conditioner system should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians to ensure proper

Technical and consumer information

10-7

SPECIFICATIONS

ENGINE
Model Type Cylinder arrangement Bore × Stroke Displacement Firing order Idle speed Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.) Spark plug Spark plug gap (Normal) Camshaft operation

in (mm) cu in (cm3)
rpm degree/rpm Standard in (mm)

VK56VD Gasoline, 4-cycle 8-cylinder, V-slanted at 90° 3.858 × 3.622 (98 × 92) 338.78 (5,552) 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2
See the emission control information label on the underside of the hood.
DILKAR7B11 0.043 (1.1) Timing chain

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

10-8 Technical and consumer information

STI0397B

WHEELS AND TIRES Road wheel
Type
Conventional
Spare
Tire
Type
Conventional
Spare

Size 18 × 8J 20 × 8J 22 × 8J 18 × 8J
Size 265/70R18 116H P275/60R20 114H P275/50R22 111H 265/70R18 116H 265/70R18 116M

Offset in (mm) 1.18 (30)
Pressure PSI (kPa) [Cold] 35 (240) 51 (350)

Technical and consumer information 10-9

DIMENSIONS
Overall length Overall width Overall height Front tread Rear tread Wheelbase

in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm)

208.9 (5,305) 79.9 (2,030) 75.8 (1,925) 67.5 (1,715) 67.9 (1,725) 121.1 (3,075)

10-10 Technical and consumer information

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

If you plan to travel in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicle's engine.
Using fuel with too low an octane rating may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available.
When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province or district, it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety standards vary according to the country, state, province or district; therefore, vehicle specifications may differ.
When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district and registered, its modifications, transportation, and registration are the responsibility of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result.

STI0431
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) PLATE
The vehicle identification number plate is attached as shown. This number is the identification for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration.

STI0708
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (chassis number)
The number is stamped as shown.

Technical and consumer information 10-11

STI0709
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

STI0448
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION LABEL
The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as shown. This label contains valuable vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

STI0738
EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION LABEL
The emission control information label is attached as shown.

10-12 Technical and consumer information

STI0494
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION LABEL
The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and Loading Information label affixed to the pillar as illustrated.

STI0739
AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION LABEL
The air conditioner specification label is attached as shown.

Technical and consumer information 10-13

Air conditioner specification label symbols:

Symbol Name

Reference

Caution

ISO 7000 0434

Air Conditioning System (MAC)

ISO 2575 D01

MAC System Lubricant Type (PAGPOE)

Requires Registered Technician to Service MAC System

Flammable Refrigerant

Graphic

10-14 Technical and consumer information

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

To install the front license plate bracket to your vehicle, it is recommended you contact a NISSAN dealer.

WARNING
. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside the vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
. Do not allow people to ride in any area of vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
TERMS
It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle:
. Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle) - vehicle weight including: standard and optional equipment, fluids, emergency tools, and spare tire assembly. This weight does not include

passengers and cargo.
. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo.
. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) - maximum total combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. This information is located on the F.M.V.S. S./C.M.V.S.S. label.
. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle. This information is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label.
. GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) - The maximum total weight rating of the vehicle, passengers, cargo, and trailer.
. Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit, Total load capacity - maximum total weight limit specified of the load (passengers and cargo) for the vehicle. This is the maximum combined weight

Technical and consumer information 10-15

of occupants and cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the trailer tongue weight must be included as part of the cargo load. This information is located on the Tire and Loading Information label. . Cargo capacity - permissible weight of cargo, the weight of total occupants weight subtracted from the load limit.
10-16 Technical and consumer information

STI0445

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Do not exceed the load limit of your vehicle shown as "The combined weight of occupants and cargo" on the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not exceed the number of occupants shown as "Seating Capacity" on the Tire and Loading Information label.
To get "the combined weight of occupants and cargo", add the weight of all occupants, then add the total luggage weight. Examples are shown in the illustration.
Steps for determining correct load limit
1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs" on your vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers

from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs) or (640 - 340 (5 x 70) = 300 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Before driving a loaded vehicle,

confirm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle. (See "Measurement of weights" (P.10-19).)
Also check tires for proper inflation pressures. See the Tire and Loading Information label.

Technical and consumer information 10-17

SIC4446
SECURING THE LOAD
There are tie down hooks located in the cargo area as shown. The tie down hooks can be used to secure cargo with ropes or other types of straps. Do not apply a total load of more than 22 lb (10 kg) to a single hook or 7 lb (3 kg) to a single hook when securing cargo.
WARNING
. Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
. The child restraint top tether strap may be damaged by contact with items in the cargo area. Secure any items in the cargo area. Your child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the top tether strap is damaged.
. Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your vehicle can break, tire damage could occur, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury.
LOADING TIPS . The GVW must not exceed GVWR
or GAWR as specified on the F.M. V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. . Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the GVWR.

10-18 Technical and consumer information

WARNING
. Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
. Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your vehicle can break, tire damage could occur, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury.
. Overloading not only can shorten the life of your vehicle and the tire, but can cause unsafe vehicle handling and long braking distance. This may cause a premature tire failure, which could result in a serious

TOWING A TRAILER

accident and personal injury. Failures caused by overloading are not covered by the vehicle's warranty.
MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS
Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh the front and the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads. Individual axle loads should not exceed either of the gross axle weight ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads should not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are given on the vehicle certification label. If weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to bring all weights below the ratings.

WARNING
Overloading or improper loading of a trailer and its cargo can adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and performance and may lead to accidents.
CAUTION
. Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load for the first 500 miles (800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.
. For the first 500 miles (800 km) that you tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 MPH (80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

available on the website at
www.nissanusa.com. This guide includes information on trailer towing capability and the special equipment required for proper towing.
MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS
Maximum trailer loads
Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the value specified in the "Towing load/specification" (P.10-23). The total trailer load equals trailer weight plus its cargo weight.
. When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake system MUST be used.
The maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) should not exceed the value specified in the following "Towing Load/Specification" chart.

Your new vehicle was designed to be used primarily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember that towing a trailer places additional loads on your vehicle's engine, drivetrain, steering, braking and other systems.
A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is
Technical and consumer information

10-19

towing. For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outside temperatures on graded roads can affect engine performance and cause overheating. The transmission high fluid temperature and engine protection mode, which helps reduce the chance of transmission and engine damage, could activate and automatically decrease engine power. Vehicle speed may decrease under high load. Plan your trip carefully to account for trailer and vehicle load, weather and road conditions.

STI0541
The GCWR equals the combined weight of the towing vehicle (including passengers and cargo) plus the total trailer load. Towing loads greater than these or using improper towing equipment could adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and performance.
The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not only related to the maximum trailer loads, but also the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appropriate for level highway driving may have to be reduced on very steep grades or for low traction situations (for example, on slippery boat ramps).
Temperature conditions can also affect

10-20 Technical and consumer information

CAUTION
Vehicle damage resulting from improper towing procedures is not covered by NISSAN warranties.

STI0542
Tongue load
When using a weight carrying or a weight distributing hitch, keep the tongue load between 10 to 15% of the total trailer load or use the trailer tongue load specified by the trailer manufacturer. The tongue load must be within the maximum tongue load limits shown in the following "Towing Load/Specification" chart. If the tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for proper tongue load.

options required to achieve the rating. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment, such as the trailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle's maximum towing capacity and trailer tongue load.

The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, Front GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.

TI1012M
MAXIMUM GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT (GVW)/MAXIMUM GROSS AXLE WEIGHT (GAW)
The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The GVW equals the combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. In addition, front or rear GAW must not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
Towing capacities are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any

All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured using platform type scales commonly found at truck stops, highway weigh stations, building supply centers or salvage yards.
To determine the available payload capacity for tongue/king pin load, use the following procedure.
1. Locate the GVWR on the F.M.V.S.S./C. M.V.S.S. certification label.
2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of the passengers and cargo that are normally in the vehicle when towing a trailer.
3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the GVWR. The remaining amount is the available maximum tongue/king pin load.
To determine the available towing capacity, use the following procedure.

Technical and consumer information 10-21

1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the "Towing Load/Specification" chart found later in this section.
2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the GCWR. The remaining amount is the available maximum towing capacity.
To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weigh your trailer on a scale with all equipment and cargo, that are normally in the trailer when it is towed. Make sure the Gross trailer weight is not more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown on the trailer and is not more than the calculated available maximum towing capacity.
Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight on the F.M.V.S. S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to be moved or removed to meet the specified ratings.
Example:
. Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed on a scale - including passengers, cargo and hitch - 5,822 lb. (2,641 kg).

. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) from F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label - 7,300 lb. (3,311 kg).
. Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) from "Towing Load/Specification" chart - 14,520 lb. (6,586 kg).
. Maximum Trailer towing capacity from "Towing Load/Specification" chart - 8,500 lb. (3,856 kg).

7,300 lb. (3,311 kg) - 5,822 lb. (2,641 kg)
= 1,478 lb. (670 kg)

GVWR GVW
Available for tongue weight

14,520 lb. (6,586 kg) - 5,822 lb. (2,641 kg)
= 8,698 lb. (3,945 kg)

GCWR GVW
Capacity available for towing

1,478 lb. (670 kg) / 8,698 lb. (3,945 kg)

Available tongue weight
Available capacity
= 11 % tongue weight

The available towing capacity may be less than the maximum towing capacity due to the passenger and cargo load in the vehicle.
Remember to keep trailer tongue weight between 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or within the trailer tongue load specifica-

10-22 Technical and consumer information

tion recommended by the trailer manufacturer. If the tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange the cargo to obtain the proper tongue load. Do not exceed the maximum tongue weight specification shown in the "Towing load/specification" chart even if the calculated available tongue weight is greater than 15%. If the calculated tongue weight is less than 10%, reduce the total trailer weight to match the available tongue weight.
Always verify that available capacities are within the required ratings.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION
WARNING
The towing capacities provided in this manual are for general reference only. The safe towing capacity of your vehicle is affected by dealer and factory installed options and passenger and cargo loads. You must weigh the vehicle and trailer as described in this manual to determine the actual vehicle towing capacity. Do not exceed the published maximum towing capacity, or the GCWR or the GVWR shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. Doing so can result in an accident causing serious personal injury or property damage.

Towing Load/Specification Chart

Axle Type
Maximum Towing Capacity*1, *2 Maximum Tongue Load Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating

Two-Wheel Drive (2WD)

Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)

8,500 lb (3,856 kg)

850 lb (385 kg)

14,520 lb (6,586 kg) 14,760 lb (6,695 kg)

Canada
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)
8,500 lb (3,856 kg) 850 lb (385 kg)
14,770 lb (6,700 kg)

1: The towing capacity values are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle's maximum towing capacity.
2: Use of a weight-distributing hitch system is recommended when towing over 5,000 lb (2,267 kg).

Technical and consumer information 10-23

TOWING SAFETY
Trailer hitch
Your vehicle is equipped with a trailer tow package. The trailer tow package includes a receiver-type frame mounted hitch. This hitch is rated for the maximum towing capacity of this vehicle when the proper towing equipment is used. Choose a proper ball mount and hitch ball that is rated for the trailer to be towed. Genuine NISSAN ball mounts and hitch balls are available from a NISSAN dealer.

and upper clips.

WAJ0218X
To access the trailer hitch , remove the trailer hitch cover located on the lower part of the rear bumper. To remove the trailer hitch cover: 1. Remove the 2 clips. 2. Pull the bottom of the cover straight
backward to remove the inner side
10-24 Technical and consumer information

WAJ0219X
To install the trailer hitch cover: 1. Insert the upper clips to the recesses
, and then push in the cover to its original position. 2. Install the 2 clips .
WARNING
Trailer hitch components have specific weight ratings. Your vehicle may be capable of towing a trailer heavier than the weight rating of the hitch components. Never exceed the weight rating of the hitch components. Doing so can cause serious

personal injury or property damage. Weight carrying hitches

Hitch ball
Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight rating for your trailer:

A weight carrying or "dead weight" ball mount is one that is designed to carry the whole amount of tongue weight and gross weight directly on the ball mount and on the receiver.

. The required hitch ball size is stamped on most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls also have the size printed on top of the ball.
. Choose the proper class hitch ball based on the trailer weight.
. The diameter of the threaded shank of the hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount hole diameter. The hitch ball shank should be no more than 1/16 smaller than the hole in the ball mount.
. The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be long enough to be properly secured to the ball mount. There should be at least 2 threads showing beyond the lock washer and nut.
Ball mount
The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount and the ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver. Choose a proper class ball mount based on the trailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount should be chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with the ground.

Weight distribution hitch
This type of hitch is also called a "loadleveling" or "equalizing" hitch. A set of bars attach to the ball mount and to the trailer to distribute the tongue weight (hitch weight) of your trailer. Many vehicles cannot carry the full tongue weight of a given trailer, and need some of the tongue weight transferred through the frame and pushing down on the front wheels. This gives stability to the tow vehicle.
A weight-distributing hitch system (Class IV) is recommended if you plan to tow trailers with a maximum weight over 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg). Check with the trailer and towing equipment manufacturers to determine if they recommend the use of a weight-distributing hitch system.
NOTE:
A weight-distributing hitch system may affect the operation of trailer surge brakes. If you are considering use of a weight-distributing hitch system with a surge brake-equipped trailer, check

Technical and consumer information 10-25

with the surge brake, hitch or trailer manufacturer to determine if and how this can be done.
Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installing and using the weight-distributing hitch system.
General set-up instructions are as follows:
1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level surface. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the doors closed, allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes so that it can level.
2. Measure the height of a reference point on the front and rear bumpers at the center of the vehicle.
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust the hitch equalizers so that the front bumper height is within 0 - .5 inches (0 - 13 mm) of the reference height measured in step 2. The rear bumper should be no higher than the reference height measured in step 2.
WARNING
Properly adjust the weight distributing hitch so the rear of the bumper is no higher than the measured reference height when the trailer is attached. If the rear bumper is higher

than the measured reference height when loaded, the vehicle may handle unpredictably which could cause a loss of vehicle control and cause serious personal injury or property damage.
Sway control device
Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts and buffeting caused by other vehicles can affect trailer handling. Sway control devices may be used to help control these affects. If you choose to use one, contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to make sure the sway control device will work with the vehicle, hitch, trailer and the trailer's brake system. Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installing and using the sway control device.
Class I hitch
Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (907 kg).

10-26 Technical and consumer information

Class II hitch
Class II trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 3,500 lb (1,588 kg).
Class III hitch
Class III trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 5,000 lb (2,267 kg).
Class IV hitch
Class IV trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 10,000 lb (4,545 kg). A weight distributing hitch should be used to tow trailers that weigh over 5,000 lb (2,267 kg).
Your vehicle may be equipped with Class IV trailer hitch equipment that has a 10,000 lb (4,545 kg) maximum weight rating, but your vehicle is only capable of towing the maximum trailer weights shown in the "Towing Load/Specification" chart earlier in this section.
CAUTION
. Do not use axle-mounted hitches.

. Do not modify the vehicle exhaust system, brake system, etc.
. Do not attach any additional hitches to your vehicle because a hitch is already mounted to your vehicle frame.
Tire pressures
. When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicle tires to the recommended cold tire pressure indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label.
. Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in accordance with the trailer and tire manufacturers' specifications.
Safety chains
Always use a suitable chain between your vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains should be crossed and should be attached to the hitch, not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to leave enough slack in the chains to permit turning corners.

STI0745
Trailer lights (if so equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a towing package, which also includes the 7-pin trailer harness connector located under the trailer hitch cover on the rear bumper.
CAUTION
. When splicing into the vehicle electrical system, a commercially available power-type module/ converter must be used to provide power for all trailer lighting. This unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct power source for all

trailer lights while using the vehicle tail light, stoplight and turn signal circuits as a signal source. The module/converter must draw no more than 15 milliamps from the stop and tail lamp circuits. Using a module/converter that exceeds these power requirements may damage the vehicle's electrical system. See a reputable trailer retailer to obtain the proper equipment and to have it installed.
. Do not connect electrical devices that draw more than 40 amps to the vehicle. The fusible link may melt.
Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or local regulations. For assistance in hooking up trailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or reputable trailer retailer.
Trailer brakes
When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs. (1,587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake system MUST be used. However, most states require a separate braking system on trailers with a loaded weight above a specific amount. Make sure the trailer meets the local regulations and the regulations where you plan to tow.

Technical and consumer information 10-27

Several types of braking systems are available.
Surge Brakes - The surge brake actuator is mounted on the trailer tongue with a hydraulic line running to each trailer wheel. Surge brakes are activated by the trailer pushing against the hitch ball when the tow vehicle is braking. Hydraulic surge brakes are common on rental trailers and some boat trailers. In this type of system, there is no hydraulic or electric connection for brake operation between the tow vehicle and the trailer.
Electric Trailer Brakes - Electric braking systems are activated by an electronic signal sent from a trailer brake controller (special brake sensing module).
Have a professional supplier of towing equipment make sure the trailer brakes are properly installed and demonstrate proper brake function testing.
WARNING
Never connect a trailer brake system directly to the vehicle brake system.

WAJ0207X
Gain Gain + Manual control lever Boost
Trailer Brake Controller Unit (TBCU) (if so equipped)
The Trailer Brake Controller Unit (TBCU), located on the lower instrument panel, is a device that assists the vehicle in having effective and smooth braking while towing a trailer.

Operating modes: . Automatic mode:
This is the normal operation of the

10-28 Technical and consumer information

TBCU depending on the gain and boost settings adjusted by the customer. This mode will activate when vehicle brake pedal is pressed.
. Manual mode:
This mode is initiated by adjusting the manual control lever from resting position. This mode will provide output power to trailer brakes without applying the vehicle brake pedal.
To determine the output operation of the system:
. Gain + and Gain - :
Used to increase or decrease the braking force supplied to the trailer brakes.To adjust the gain, press Gain + or Gain - to the desired point (0-10). For example: gain setting 6.0 is a typical starting point for heavy loads.
. Boost:
Used to adjust the feel of the automatic brake event that occurs when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. To set up boost, press Boost button once to display for current boost setting (display for 3 seconds). Keep pressing to increase boost level until the desired level (0-3) is achieved.
. Manual Control Lever:
Provides brake output power to trailer brakes without applying the vehicle

brake pedal. The amount of brake output supplied corresponds to the amount of pinch pressure applied to the manual control lever.
Technical and consumer information 10-29

Prodigy® P2 initial screen at start up (15 seconds*)
Power to Prodigy® P2 with trailer connected and boost feature not engaged Power to Prodigy® P2 with trailer connected and boost feature not engaged Power to Prodigy® P2, trailer not connected

Boost off Boost level 1 Boost level 2 Boost level 3

Gain feature is adjustable from

by increments of

*If sustained for longer, check trailer connections or visit a dealer for service.

10-30 Technical and consumer information

This graphic shows the suggested boost levels for different trailer sizes relative to the vehicle size.
WARNING
Do not exceed Gross Combined Weight Rating (GVWR). See "Towing load/specification" (P.10-23).
WAJ0208X
Technical and consumer information 10-31

Pre-towing tips
. Be certain your vehicle maintains a level position when a loaded or unloaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it has an abnormal noseup or nose-down condition; check for improper tongue load, overload, worn suspension or other possible causes of either condition.
. Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving.
. Keep the cargo load as low as possible in the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity low.
. Load the trailer so approximately 60% of the trailer load is in the front half and 40% is in the back half. Also make sure the load is balanced side to side.
. Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, vehicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, and trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a trailer to the vehicle.
. Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to all federal, state or local regulations. If not, install any mirrors required for towing before driving the vehicle.
. Determine the overall height of the vehicle and trailer so the required clearance is known.

Trailer towing tips
In order to gain skill and an understanding of the vehicle's behavior, you should practice turning, stopping and backing up in an area which is free from traffic. Steering stability, and braking performance will be somewhat different than under normal driving conditions.
. Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving.
. Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or lock to prevent the coupler from inadvertently becoming unlatched.
. Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.
. Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.
. Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed. Some states or provinces have specific speed limits for vehicles that are towing trailers. Obey the local speed limits.
. When backing up, hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. Move your hand in the direction in which you want the trailer to go. Make small corrections and back up slowly. If possible, have someone guide you when you are backing up.
Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not recommended; however, if

10-32 Technical and consumer information

you must do so:
CAUTION
If you move the shift lever to the P (Park) position before blocking the wheels and applying the parking brake, transmission damage could occur.
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal. 2. Have someone place blocks on the
downhill side of the vehicle and trailer wheels. 3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowly release the brake pedal until the blocks absorb the vehicle load. 4. Apply the parking brake. 5. Shift the transmission into P (Park). 6. Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) models: Make sure that the 4WD shift switch is engaged in the AUTO, 4HI or 4LO position and the Automatic Transmission (AT) park warning light is turned off. 7. Turn off the engine. To drive away: 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Start the engine.
3. Shift the transmission into gear.
4. Release the parking brake.
5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are clear from the blocks.
6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.
. While going downhill, the weight of the trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may decrease overall stability. Therefore, to maintain adequate control, reduce your speed and shift to a lower gear. Avoid long or repeated use of the brakes when descending a hill, as this reduces their effectiveness and could cause overheating. Shifting to a lower gear instead provides "engine braking" and reduces the need to brake as frequently.
. If the engine coolant temperature rises to a high temperature, see "If your vehicle overheats" (P.6-14).
. Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal circumstances.
. Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle's first 500 miles (800 km).
. Have your vehicle serviced more often than at intervals specified in the recommended maintenance schedule shown in the "9. Maintenance and

schedules" section.
. When making a turn, your trailer wheels will be closer to the inside of the turn than your vehicle wheels. To compensate for this, make a larger than normal turning radius during the turn.
. Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly causing vehicle sway. When being passed by larger vehicles, be prepared for possible changes in crosswinds that could affect vehicle handling.
Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:
1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to allow the vehicle to coast and steer as straight ahead as the road conditions allow. This combination will help stabilize the vehicle.
. Do not correct trailer sway by steering or applying the brakes.
2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply the brakes and pull to the side of the road in a safe area.
3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is balanced as described earlier in this section.
. Be careful when passing other vehicles. Passing while towing a trailer

requires considerably more distance than normal passing. Remember the length of the trailer must also pass the other vehicle before you can safely change lanes.
. Use the Tow mode or downshift the transmission to a lower gear for engine braking when driving down steep or long hills. This will help slow the vehicle without applying the brakes.
. Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced braking efficiency.
. Increase your following distance to allow for greater stopping distances while towing a trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
. NISSAN recommends that the cruise control not be used while towing a trailer.
. While towing a trailer, do not use the following systems (if so equipped):
-- the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system
(See "How to enable/disable the LDW system" (P.5-28).)
-- the Intelligent Lane Intervention (ILI) system
(See "How to enable/disable the I-LI system" (P.5-34).)

Technical and consumer information 10-33

-- the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system (See "How to enable/disable the IBSI system" (P.5-48).)
-- the Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI) system (See "How to enable/disable the IBSI system" (P.5-48).)
-- the Intelligent Back-up Intervention (I-BI) system (See "I-BI system operation" (P.565).)
-- the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system (See "Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)" (P.5-74).)
-- the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system (See "RAB system operation" (P.5118).)
-- the Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system (See "How to enable/disable the RCTA system" (P.5-59).)
. Some states or provinces have specific regulations and speed limits for vehicles that are towing trailers. Obey the local speed limits.
. Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness connections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50 miles (80 km) of

travel and at every break.
. When launching a boat, do not allow the water level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or rear bumper.
. Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights (if so equipped) before backing the trailer into the water or the trailer lights may burn out.
When towing a trailer, the transmission fluid should be changed more frequently. For additional information, see the "9. Maintenance and schedules" section.
TOW mode
Using TOW mode is recommended when pulling a heavy trailer or hauling a heavy load. Push the TOW MODE switch to activate tow mode. The TOW MODE indicator light in the meter illuminates when TOW mode is selected. Push the TOW MODE switch again to turn TOW mode off. TOW mode is automatically cancelled when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
TOW mode includes the following features:
. Grade logic -- Adjusts transmission shifts when pulling a trailer or hauling a load up a grade.

10-34 Technical and consumer information

. Downhill Speed Control (DSC) -- automatically downshifts when driving down a grade with a trailer or heavy load to help control vehicle speed.
Driving the vehicle in the TOW mode with no trailer/load or light trailer/light load will not cause any damage. However, fuel economy may be reduced and the transmission/engine driving characteristics may feel unusual.
When towing a trailer, the transmission fluid should be changed more frequently. For additional information, see the "9. Maintenance and schedules" section.
Trailer Sway Control
To minimize trailer sway, your vehicle may apply braking to individual wheels based on input from your vehicle sensors and vehicle speed. Trailer Sway Control is a function of the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system and is active when the VDC function is enabled.
CAUTION
If the VDC OFF switch is on (meaning VDC system OFF), the Trailer Sway Control is also disabled.

When Trailer Sway Control is in operation, the VDC warning light blinks. When vehicle control is regained, VDC warning light will turn OFF. For additional information about the VDC system, see "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system" (P.5-144).
If Trailer Sway Control activates: 1. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal to allow the vehicle to coast and steer as straight ahead as the road conditions allow. This combination will help stabilize the vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not try to correct trailer sway by steering or applying the brakes.
2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply the brakes and pull to the side of the road in a safe area.
3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is balanced.
NOTE: Trailer Sway Control cannot reduce trailer sway in all situations.

FLAT TOWING
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is sometimes called flat towing. This method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor home.
CAUTION
. Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage.
. Whenever flat towing your vehicle, always tow forward, never backward.
. DO NOT tow any automatic transmission vehicle with all four wheels on the ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of transmission lubrication.
. DO NOT tow a Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) vehicle with any of the wheels on the ground. Doing so may cause serious and expensive damage to the powertrain.
. For emergency towing procedures refer to "Towing recommended by NISSAN" (P.6-17).

Automatic Transmission
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) models:
Do not tow a 4WD vehicle with any of the wheels on the ground.
Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models:
To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle's drive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product.

Technical and consumer information 10-35

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

DOT (Department Of Transportation) Quality Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

TRACTION AA, A, B AND C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

TREADWEAR
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
TEMPERATURE A, B AND C
The temperature grades A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which

10-36 Technical and consumer information

all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY
Your NISSAN is covered by the following emission warranties.
For USA:
. Emission Defects Warranty . Emissions Performance Warranty Details of these warranties may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet that comes with your NISSAN. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet, or it has become lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to:
. NISSAN Division Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 685003 Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For Canada:
Emission Control System Warranty
Details of these warranties may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty and Roadside Assistance Information that comes with your NISSAN. If you did not receive a Warranty and Roadside Assistance Information, or it has become lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to:
. Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario,

L4W 4Z5

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
For USA
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying NISSAN.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-4249153); go to http://www.safercar. gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
Technical and consumer information 10-37

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/ MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

You may notify NISSAN by contacting our Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1 (1-800-647-7261).
For Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada in addition to notifying NISSAN.
If Transport Canada receives complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may request that NISSAN conduct a recall campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

Additional information concerning motor vehicle safety may be obtained from Transport Canada's Road Safety Information Centre at 1-800-333-0371 or online at www. tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English speakers) or www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere (French speakers).
To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns please contact our Consumer Information Centre toll free at 1-800-387-0122.

You may contact Transport Canada's Defect Investigations and Recalls Division toll free at 1-800-3330510. You may also report safety defects online at:

https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/ 7/ PCDB-BDPP/Index.aspx.

10-38 Technical and consumer information

WARNING
A vehicle equipped with Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) should never be tested using a two wheel dynamometer (such as the dynamometers used by some states for emissions testing), or similar equipment. Make sure you inform test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD before it is placed on a dynamometer. Using the wrong test equipment may result in transmission damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.
Due to legal requirements in some states and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be required to be in what is called the "ready condition" for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission control system.
The vehicle is set to the "ready condition" when it is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually, the "ready condition" can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle.
If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected,

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)

the vehicle may be reset to a "not ready condition". Before taking the I/M test, check the vehicle's inspection/maintenance test readiness condition. Place the ignition switch in the ON position without starting the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds, the I/M test condition is "not ready". If the MIL does not blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is "ready".
It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer to set "ready condition" or to prepare the vehicle for testing.

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
. How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
. Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only be accessed with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee or as otherwise required or permitted by law.

. How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
. How fast the vehicle was traveling.
. Sounds are not recorded.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement,

Technical and consumer information 10-39

OWNER'S MANUAL/SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION
Genuine NISSAN Service Manual for this model year and prior can be purchased. A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle. This manual is the same one used by the factory-trained technicians working at NISSAN dealers. Genuine NISSAN Owner's Manual can also be purchased. For USA: For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:
www.nissan-techinfo.com
For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Owner's Manuals, contact:
1-800-247-5321
For Canada: To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Service Manual or Owner's Manual for this model year and prior, contact a NISSAN dealer. For the phone number and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area, call the NISSAN Satisfaction Center at 1-800387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representative will assist you.
10-40 Technical and consumer information

11 Index

A
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) .................... 5-143 Advanced Air Bag System.................................... 1-61 Air bag system
Advanced Air Bag System............................. 1-61 Driver and front passenger supplemental knee air bag system ....... 1-69 Front passenger air bag and status light................................................................. 1-63 Front-seat mounted side-impact supplemental air bag system..................... 1-71 Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag system................................................................ 1-71 Air bag warning labels ............................................ 1-73 Air bag warning light................................. 1-74, 2-14 Air cleaner housing filter ....................................... 8-15 Air conditioner Air conditioner operation............................... 4-37 Air conditioner service...................................... 4-43 Air conditioner specification label....... 10-13 Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant recommendations............. 4-43 Air conditioning system refrigerant and oil recommendations............................. 10-7 Automatic air conditioner ............................. 4-38 In-cabin microfilter.............................................. 4-43 Alarm, How to stop alarm (see vehicle security system)............................................................ 2-41 Alcohol, drugs and driving ................................... 5-10 Alert Rear Door Alert....................................................... 2-61 All-mode 4WD.............................................................. 5-124 Android Auto....................................................................... 4-3

Antenna............................................................................... 4-43 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) .................... 5-143 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light................................................................... 2-15 Appearance care
Exterior appearance care ................................. 7-2 Interior appearance care................................... 7-5 Apple CarPlay®................................................................... 4-3 Armrest................................................................................ 1-11 Audible reminders....................................................... 2-20 Auto closure .................................................................... 3-25 Autolight system.......................................................... 2-48 Automatic Air conditioner ........................................................ 4-38 Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) ........ 8-8 Door locks...................................................................... 3-6 Drive positioner...................................................... 3-40 Driving with automatic transmission.................................. 5-18 Seat positioner ....................................................... 3-40 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system warning light................................................ 2-15 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with pedestrian detection system............................. 5-96 Average speed............................................................... 2-37 Avoiding collision and rollover.............................. 5-8
B
Back door (See liftgate).......................................... 3-22 Battery.................................................................................. 8-11
Battery saver system.......................... 2-52, 2-80 Intelligent Key.......................................................... 8-21 Variable voltage control system .............. 8-13 Before starting the engine................................... 5-16 Belts (See drive belts)............................................... 8-13

Blind Spot Warning (BSW)..................................... 5-38 Booster seats.................................................................. 1-51 Brake
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ............ 5-143 Brake booster.......................................................... 8-17 Brake fluid ..................................................................... 8-9 Brake system ....................................................... 5-142 Parking brake operation................................. 5-22 Warning light............................................................ 2-12 Break-in schedule .................................................... 5-122 Brightness control Instrument panel.................................................. 2-53 Bulb check/instrument panel............................ 2-12 Bulb replacement........................................................ 8-24
C
Cabin air filter................................................................. 4-43 Camera aiding sonar function.......................... 4-26 Capacities and recommended fluids/lubricants...................... 10-2 Car phone or CB radio............................................ 4-44 Cargo floor box............................................................. 2-74 Cargo light ........................................................................ 2-83 Catalytic converter, Three way catalyst ....... 5-4 Charger
Wireless charger.................................................... 2-65 Child restraints.............................................................. 1-32
Booster seats........................................................... 1-51 LATCH system......................................................... 1-35 Precautions on child restraints................. 1-33 Top tether strap.................................................... 1-37 Child safety....................................................................... 1-30 Child safety rear door lock ...................................... 3-6 Chimes Audible reminders................................................ 2-20

Seat belt warning light and chime......... 2-14 Circuit breaker, Fusible link ................................. 8-19 Cleaning exterior and interior................... 7-2, 7-5 Climate control.............................................................. 4-37 Clock...................................................................................... 2-39 Coat hooks ....................................................................... 2-73 Cockpit..................................................................................... 2-4 Cold weather driving............................................. 5-146 Console box..................................................................... 2-72 Console light ................................................................... 2-82 Coolant
Capacities and recommended fluids/lubricants............... 10-2 Changing engine coolant ................................. 8-5 Checking engine coolant level...................... 8-5 Corrosion protection.................................................... 7-8 Cruise control Fixed speed cruise control (on ICC system)................................................................ 5-92 Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) ................. 5-74 Cruise indicator............................................................. 2-33 Cup holders...................................................................... 2-69 Current fuel consumption.................................... 2-37
D
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system....... 2-52 Digital video disc DVD.............................................. 4-45 Dimensions.................................................................... 10-10 Drive belts.......................................................................... 8-13 Drive positioner............................................................. 3-40 Driver and front passenger supplemental knee air bag..................................................................... 1-69 Driving
Cold weather driving..................................... 5-146 Driving with automatic transmission.................................. 5-18
11-2

On-pavement and off-road driving .......... 5-9 Precautions when starting and driving.................................................................... 5-4 Safety precautions .............................................. 5-10
E
Economy, Fuel............................................................. 5-124 Elapsed time.................................................................... 2-37 Elapsed time and trip odometer..................... 2-37 Emergency Call (SOS) button ............................ 2-67 Emission control information label............ 10-12 Emission control system warranty ............ 10-37 Engine
Before starting the engine............................ 5-16 Break-in schedule ............................................ 5-122 Capacities and recommended fluids/lubricants............... 10-2 Changing engine coolant ................................. 8-5 Changing engine oil and filter ...................... 8-6 Checking engine coolant level...................... 8-5 Checking engine oil level................................... 8-6 Coolant temperature gauge .......................... 2-8 Emergency engine shut off.......................... 5-15 Engine block heater ....................................... 5-148 Engine compartment check locations......................................................... 8-3 Engine cooling system........................................ 8-4 Engine oil........................................................................ 8-6 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation ..................................... 10-6 Engine oil viscosity.............................................. 10-7 Engine serial number .................................... 10-12 Engine specifications......................................... 10-8 Engine start operation indicator.............. 2-30 If your vehicle overheats................................ 6-14 Oil pressure gauge................................................. 2-9

Protection mode................................................... 5-17 Starting the engine............................................. 5-16 Entry/exit function, memory seat.................. 3-40 Event Data Recorders (EDR)............................. 10-39 Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ......................... 5-4 Explanation of scheduled maintenance items........................................................ 9-5 Extended storage switch ...................................... 8-21
F
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ...... 10-12 Filter
Air cleaner housing filter ................................ 8-15 Changing engine oil and filter ...................... 8-6 Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch).................................................................... 6-2 Flat tire..................................................................................... 6-3 Flat towing..................................................................... 10-35 Flexible seating.............................................................. 1-12 Floor mat cleaning......................................................... 7-6 Fluid Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) ........ 8-8 Brake fluid ..................................................................... 8-9 Capacities and recommended fluids/lubricants............... 10-2 Engine coolant........................................................... 8-4 Engine oil........................................................................ 8-6 Power steering fluid .............................................. 8-8 Window washer fluid ......................................... 8-10 Fog light switch............................................................ 2-54 Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) NISSAN all-mode 4WD®................................ 5-124 Front and rear sonar system.......................... 5-136 Front passenger air bag and status light........................................................................ 1-63 Front power seat adjustment............................... 1-4

Front seat Front seat adjustment ......................... 1-4, 1-11
Front-seat active head restraint..................... 1-19 Fuel
Capacities and recommended fluids/lubricants............... 10-2 Fuel economy...................................................... 5-124 Fuel information.................................................... 10-4 Fuel octane rating ............................................... 10-4 Fuel-filler cap............................................................ 3-26 Fuel-filler door......................................................... 3-26 Gauge................................................................................ 2-9 Loose Fuel Cap warning................................. 3-28 Fuel efficient driving tips.................................... 5-123 Fuses...................................................................................... 8-18 Fusible links...................................................................... 8-19
G
Garage door opener HomeLink® Universal Transceiver......................... 2-83, 2-87
Gas cap................................................................................ 3-26 Gauge........................................................................................ 2-6
Engine coolant temperature gauge......... 2-8 Engine oil pressure gauge ............................... 2-9 Fuel gauge .................................................................... 2-9 Odometer....................................................................... 2-7 Speedometer .............................................................. 2-7 Tachometer.................................................................. 2-8 Trip computer ......................................................... 2-37 General maintenance................................................... 9-2 Glove box ........................................................................... 2-71

H
Hazard warning flasher switch ............................ 6-2 Head restraints/headrests................................... 1-15 Headlights
Bulb replacement................................................. 8-25 Headlight switch ................................................... 2-47 Heated seats ................................................................... 2-55 Heated steering wheel............................................ 2-54 Heater Automatic air conditioner ............................. 4-38 Engine block heater ....................................... 5-148 Heater and air conditioner operation....................................... 4-37 High beam assist......................................................... 2-50 Hill start assist system ......................................... 5-132 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver..... 2-83, 2-87 Hood release ................................................................... 3-21 Hook Coat hooks ................................................................ 2-73 Luggage hook......................................................... 2-73 Horn........................................................................................ 2-55
I
Ignition switch (Push-button)............................ 5-13 Immobilizer system.................................................... 2-41 In-cabin microfilter..................................................... 4-43 Indicator
Lights.............................................................................. 2-15 Vehicle information display.......................... 2-20 Inside mirror .................................................................... 3-30 Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test............. 10-38 Instrument brightness control ......................... 2-53 Instrument panel............................................................. 2-5 Intelligent Around View® Monitor................... 4-12 Intelligent Auto Headlight system ................. 2-47

Intelligent Back-up Intervention (I-BI)......... 5-63 Intelligent Blind Spot Intervention (I-BSI) ...................................................... 5-46 Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) ........................ 5-74 Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA)................. 5-114 Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW).......................................................... 5-106 Intelligent Key..................................................................... 3-2 Intelligent Key system ................................................. 3-7
Battery replacement.......................................... 8-21 Key operating range............................................. 3-9 Key operation.......................................................... 3-10 Warning signals...................................................... 3-12 Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) .................. 5-31 Intelligent Rear View Mirror................................. 3-31 Interior light replacement..................................... 8-26 Interior light switch.................................................... 2-81 Interior lights................................................................... 2-81 ISOFIX child restraint ................................................ 1-35
J
Jump starting ................................................................. 6-12
K
Keyless entry (See remote keyless entry system).................................................................. 3-15 Keys ............................................................................................ 3-2
For Intelligent Key system................................ 3-7
L
Labels Air bag warning labels ..................................... 1-73 Air conditioner specification label....... 10-13 Emission control information label .... 10-12
11-3

Engine serial number .................................... 10-12 F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label .............................................. 10-12 Tire and Loading information label................................ 8-30, 10-13 Vehicle identification number (VIN) .... 10-11 Lane Departure Warning (LDW)........................ 5-26 LATCH system................................................................ 1-35 License plate, Installing front license plate.................................................................. 10-15 Liftgate................................................................................. 3-22 Light Air bag warning light......................................... 1-74 Bulb replacement................................................. 8-24 Cargo light ................................................................. 2-83 Fog light switch..................................................... 2-54 Headlight switch ................................................... 2-47 Headlights bulb replacement ..................... 8-25 Indicator lights........................................................ 2-15 Interior light switch............................................. 2-81 Interior lights............................................................ 2-81 Map lights................................................................... 2-82 Replacement ............................................................ 8-24 Vanity mirror lights............................................. 2-83 Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders................................................ 2-12 Lights, Exterior and interior light replacement........................................................ 8-26 Linking Intelligent Key (air conditioner)..... 4-43 Loading information (See vehicle loading information) .............................................. 10-15 Lock Automatic door locks........................................... 3-6 Door locks...................................................................... 3-4 Liftgate lock .............................................................. 3-22 Power door lock....................................................... 3-4 Locking with mechanical key................................ 3-4
11-4

Loose Fuel Cap warning........................................ 3-26 Low tire pressure warning light ...................... 2-16 Low tire pressure warning system (See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)).................................................................. 5-5 Luggage hooks ............................................................. 2-73
M
Maintenance........................................................................ 9-2 Battery........................................................................... 8-11 General maintenance........................................... 9-2 Inside the vehicle..................................................... 9-3 Maintenance precautions................................. 8-2 Maintenance requirements............................. 9-2 Maintenance schedules...................................... 9-7 Outside the vehicle ................................................ 9-2 Seat belt maintenance..................................... 1-29
Maintenance schedules.............................................. 9-7 Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).................... 2-18 Map lights.......................................................................... 2-82 Master warning light.................................. 2-14, 2-18 Mechanical key (Intelligent Key system)....... 3-3 Memory seat ................................................................... 3-40 Memory storage, memory seat........................ 3-41 Meter
Trip computer ......................................................... 2-37 Meters and gauges........................................................ 2-6
Instrument brightness control .................. 2-53 Mirror
Inside mirror ............................................................. 3-30 Intelligent Rear View Mirror.......................... 3-31 Outside mirrors...................................................... 3-38 Vanity mirror ............................................................ 3-40 Monitor Intelligent Around View® Monitor............ 4-12 Monitor, RearView Monitor...................................... 4-4

Moonroof............................................................................ 2-78 Moving Object Detection (MOD) ...................... 4-31
N
New vehicle break-in............................................. 5-122 NISSAN all-mode 4WD®........................................ 5-124 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ............ 2-41 NissanConnect® Owner's Manual....................... 4-3
O
Odometer............................................................................... 2-7 Off-road recovery............................................................ 5-9 Oil
Capacities and recommended fluids/lubricants............... 10-2 Changing engine oil and filter ...................... 8-6 Checking engine oil level................................... 8-6 Engine oil........................................................................ 8-6 Engine oil pressure gauge ............................... 2-9 Engine oil viscosity.............................................. 10-7 Operation, operational indicators.................. 2-30 Other lights....................................................................... 2-19 Outside air temperature........................................ 2-39 Outside mirrors............................................................. 3-38 Overheat, If your vehicle overheats.............. 6-14 Owner's Manual/Service Manual order information..................................................... 10-40
P
Panic alarm....................................................................... 3-17 Parking
Brake break-in .................................................... 5-142 Parking brake operation................................. 5-22 Parking on hills................................................... 5-133

Phone Car phone or CB radio..................................... 4-44
Pocket................................................................................... 2-73 Power
Front seat adjustment ........................................ 1-4 Moonroof..................................................................... 2-78 Power door lock....................................................... 3-4 Power outlet............................................................. 2-62 Power steering ................................................... 5-141 Power steering fluid .............................................. 8-8 Power windows ..................................................... 2-75 Precautions Braking precautions....................................... 5-142 Child restraints....................................................... 1-33 Driving safety........................................................... 5-10 Maintenance................................................................ 8-2 On-pavement and off-road driving .......... 5-9 Seat belt usage...................................................... 1-20 Supplemental restraint system................. 1-54 When starting and driving................................ 5-4 Push starting................................................................... 6-14 Push-button ignition switch............................... 5-13
R
RAB system ................................................................... 5-116 Radio
Car phone or CB radio..................................... 4-44 Rain-sensing auto wiper system .................... 2-44 Rapid air pressure loss................................................ 5-9 Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test........................................................................... 10-38 Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)....................... 5-116 Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system warning light................................................................... 2-18 Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)......................... 5-57 Rear Door Alert.............................................................. 2-61

Rear door lock, Child safety rear door lock ................................................................................ 3-6 Rear personal lights .................................................. 2-82 Rear Seat Infotainment (RSI) system........... 4-45 Rear view monitor settings..................................... 4-9 Rear window wiper and washer switch .... 2-45 Rear window wiper blades .................................. 8-17 RearView Monitor............................................................ 4-4 RearView Monitor system operation............... 4-5 Recorders, Event data .......................................... 10-39 Registering your vehicle in another country ........................................................ 10-11 Remote engine start................................................. 3-19 Remote keyless entry system ........................... 3-15 Reporting safety defects.................................... 10-37 Roadside assistance program .............................. 6-2 Rollover.................................................................................... 5-8 Roof
Moonroof..................................................................... 2-79 Roof rack..................................................................... 2-74
S
Safety Child seat belts....................................................... 1-30 Towing safety...................................................... 10-24
Seat adjustment Front power seat adjustment....................... 1-4 Front seats..................................................... 1-4, 1-11
Seat belt(s) Child safety................................................................ 1-30 Infants............................................................................ 1-31 Injured persons ...................................................... 1-22 Larger children ....................................................... 1-31 Precautions on seat belt usage................ 1-20 Pregnant women.................................................. 1-22 Seat belt cleaning ................................................... 7-7

Seat belt extenders............................................. 1-29 Seat belt maintenance..................................... 1-29 Seat belt warning light and chime......... 2-14 Seat belts.................................................................... 1-20 Seat belts with pretensioners.................... 1-72 Small children.......................................................... 1-31 Three-point type................................................... 1-22 Seat(s) Climate controlled seats................................. 2-57 Driver-side memory............................................ 3-40 Heated seats ............................................................ 2-55 Seats.................................................................................. 1-3 Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), Engine start................. 2-41 Security system, Vehicle security system............................................................. 2-39 Servicing air conditioner........................................ 4-43 Setting memory function, memory seat................................................................... 3-42 Shift lever, Shift lock release............................... 5-22 Shift lock release Transmission............................................................ 5-22 Shifting, Automatic transmission ................... 5-18 SNOW mode.................................................................. 5-135 SNOW mode switch................................................... 2-59 Sonar Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)............... 5-116 SOS button (See Emergency Call (SOS) button)................................................................... 2-67 Spare tire............................................................. 8-39, 10-9 Spark plugs....................................................................... 8-14 Speedometer ...................................................................... 2-7 Standard maintenance............................................... 9-8 Starting Before starting the engine............................ 5-16 Jump starting .......................................................... 6-12
11-5

Precautions when starting and driving.................................................................... 5-4 Push starting............................................................ 6-14 Starting the engine............................................. 5-16 Status light, Front passenger air bag......... 1-63 Steering Heated steering wheel..................................... 2-54 Power steering ................................................... 5-141 Power steering fluid .............................................. 8-8 Tilt/telescopic steering .................................... 3-29 Storage ................................................................................ 2-69 Sun visors .......................................................................... 3-29 Sunglasses holder....................................................... 2-71 Supplemental air bag warning labels......... 1-73 Supplemental air bag warning light.................................................... 1-74, 2-14 Supplemental restraint system........................ 1-54 Precautions on supplemental restraint system .................................................... 1-54 Switch Autolight switch .................................................... 2-48 Emergency Call (SOS) button ..................... 2-67 Fog light switch..................................................... 2-54 Hazard warning flasher switch .................... 6-2 Headlight switch ................................................... 2-47 Ignition switch ........................................................ 5-18 Intelligent Auto Headlight switch............ 2-47 Power door lock switch ..................................... 3-5 SNOW mode switch............................................ 2-59 Turn signal switch ............................................... 2-53 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch ................................................................. 2-60
T
Tachometer.......................................................................... 2-8
11-6

Temperature gauge, Engine coolant temperature gauge ....................................................... 2-8 Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), Engine start ............................................... 2-41 Three-way catalyst......................................................... 5-4 Tilt/telescopic steering ........................................... 3-29 Tire
Pressure, Low tire pressure warning light............................................................ 2-16 Tires Flat tire............................................................................. 6-3 Tire and Loading information label................................ 8-30, 10-13 Tire chains.................................................................. 8-35 Tire dressing................................................................ 7-4 Tire pressure ............................................................ 8-28 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ................................................ 5-5, 6-3 Tire rotation.............................................................. 8-36 Types of tires ........................................................... 8-34 Uniform tire quality grading.................... 10-36 Wheel/tire size ........................................................ 10-9 Wheels and tires.................................................... 8-28 Top Tether strap child restraints........................ 1-37 TOW mode ..................................................................... 5-134 TOW mode switch....................................................... 2-59 Towing Flat towing............................................................. 10-35 Tow truck towing................................................. 6-16 Towing a trailer.................................................. 10-19 Towing safety...................................................... 10-24 TPMS, Tire Pressure Monitoring System............................................. 5-5, 6-3 TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert......................... 5-8 Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)........................... 5-23 Trailer Brake Controller Unit (TBCU) ............ 2-60

Trailer towing .............................................................. 10-19 Transceiver
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver......................... 2-83, 2-87 Transmission Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) ........ 8-8 Driving with automatic transmission.................................. 5-18 Transmission shift lever lock release..... 5-22 Transmitter (See remote keyless entry system).................................................................. 3-15 Traveling or registering your vehicle in another country ........................................................ 10-11 Trip computer ................................................................ 2-37 Trip odometer................................................................ 2-37 Turn signal switch ...................................................... 2-53
U
Underbody cleaning...................................................... 7-3 Uniform tire quality grading............................ 10-36 USB (Universal Serial Bus) charging connector................................................... 2-64
V
Vanity mirror ................................................................... 3-40 Vanity mirror lights.................................................... 2-83 Variable voltage control system ..................... 8-13 Vehicle
Dimensions............................................................ 10-10 Identification number (VIN)....................... 10-11 Loading information ...................................... 10-15 Recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle).......... 6-19 Security system...................................................... 2-39 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch ................................................................. 2-60

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system........................................................ 5-144 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning light............................................................ 2-19 Vehicle information display................................. 2-20 How to use the vehicle information display............................................. 2-21 Settings......................................................................... 2-22 Vehicle speed.................................................................. 2-37 Ventilators......................................................................... 4-36 Voltmeter ........................................................................... 2-10
W
Warning Blind Spot Warning ............................................. 5-38 Hazard warning flasher switch .................... 6-2 Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW).................................................. 5-106 Lane Departure Warning (LDW)................. 5-26 Lights.............................................................................. 2-12 Loose Fuel Cap warning................................. 2-31 Rear Door Alert....................................................... 2-61 Tire Pressure Low Add Air warning....... 2-31 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ................................................ 5-5, 6-3 Vehicle information display.......................... 2-20 Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders................................................ 2-11
Warning labels, Air bag warning labels...... 1-73 Warning light
4WD warning light........................................... 5-130 Air bag warning light.......................... 1-74, 2-14 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light............................................................ 2-15 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system warning light......................................... 2-15

Brake warning light ............................................ 2-12 Low tire pressure warning light ............... 2-16 Seat belt warning light and chime......... 2-14 Warranty, Emission control system warranty....................................................... 10-37 Washer switch Rear window wiper and washer switch......................................................... 2-45 Windshield wiper and washer switch......................................................... 2-42 Washing................................................................................... 7-2 Waxing...................................................................................... 7-2 Welcome light................................................................. 2-80 Wheel/tire size ............................................................... 10-9 Wheels and tires........................................................... 8-28 Care of wheels........................................................... 7-3 Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels................ 7-3 Cleaning bright wheels....................................... 7-4 Window washer fluid ................................................ 8-10 Window(s) Cleaning.......................................................................... 7-3 Power windows ..................................................... 2-75 Windshield wiper and washer switch.......... 2-42 Wiper Rain-sensing auto wiper system ............. 2-44 Rear window wiper and washer switch......................................................... 2-45 Windshield wiper and washer switch......................................................... 2-42 Wiper blades ............................................................. 8-16 Wireless charger........................................................... 2-65

11-7

GAS STATION INFORMATION

FUEL INFORMATION
VK56VD engine
NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 96).
If unleaded premium gasoline is not available, you may use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI number (Research octane number 91), but you may notice a decrease in performance.
CAUTION
. Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control systems, and may also affect warranty coverage.
. Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three way catalyst.
. Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or E-85 fuel in a

vehicle not specifically designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can adversely affect the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle. Damage caused by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.
. Do not use fuel that contains the octane booster methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using fuel containing MMT may adversely affect vehicle performance and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel dispensers are labeled to indicate MMT content, so you may have to consult your gasoline retailer for more details. Note that Federal and California laws prohibit the use of MMT in reformulated gasoline.
. U.S. government regulations require ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:
See "Capacities and recommended fluids/ lubricants" (P.10-2) for engine oil and oil filter recommendation.
COLD TIRE PRESSURES:
The label is typically located on the driver side center pillar or on the driver's door. For additional information, see "Wheels and tires" (P.8-28).
NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCEDURES RECOMMENDATION:
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicle use, follow the recommendations outlined in the "Break-in schedule" (P.5122). Follow these recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle.

To view the digital NissanConnect manual, go to www.nissanquickguide.com/armada/2022/browse or snap this QR code with an appropriate QR code reader.
Printing : July 2021 Publication No.: OM22E0 0Y62U1
Printed in the U.S.A.

Y62-D

Acrobat Distiller 21.0 (Windows)